elizabeth square, phase 1 silver spring, maryland

PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS

ELIZABETH SQUARE, PHASE 1 SILVER SPRING, MARYLAND

ELIZABETH HOUSE III (EH3) AND SOUTH COUNTY REGIONAL RECREATION AND

AQUATICS CENTER (SCRRAC)

JUNE 20, 2019 ISSUE FOR CONSTRUCTION

VOLUME 5

Prepared By KGD Architecture 1101 15th Street NW Suite 200 Washington, DC 20005 Prepared For Housing Opportunities Commission of Montgomery County 10400 Detrick Avenue Kensington, MD 20895

Elizabeth Square, Phase 1 KGD Architecture

Silver Spring, Maryland Issue for Construction

June 20, 2019

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0111 - 1 of 10

SECTION 00 0111

VOLUME 1

DIVISION 00

00 0111

00 3132

DIVISION 01

01 1000

01 1100

01 2200

01 2300

01 2600

01 2900

01 3100

01 3200

01 3202

01 3300

01 3523

01 4000

01 4200

01 4500

01 5000

01 5204

01 6000

01 6116

01 7300

01 7329

01 7700

01 7801

01 7802

01 8113.12

01 8113.13

01 8113.14

01 8316

01 9113

01 9113.14

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SUBSURFACE SOILS INVESTIGATION REPORT

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SUMMARY OF WORK

GROUNDBREAKING AND GRAND OPENING REQUIREMENTS

UNIT PRICES

ALTERNATES

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

CSI 13.2A Request for Interpretation

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

CSI 12.1A Submittal Transmittal

CSI 1.5A Subcontractors and Major Material Suppliers List

CONTRACTOR’S SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

REFERENCES

CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PRODUCT EMISSIONS REQUIREMENTS

EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

CUTTING AND PATCHING

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

CSI 14.1A Punch List

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS – EH3 ENERGY STAR

SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS – EH3 & HC LEED

EH3 LEED Scorecard, June 20, 2019

SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS – SCRRAC LEED

SCRRAC LEED Scorecard, June 20, 2019

EXTERIOR ENCLOSURE PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS – EH3

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS - SCRRAC



June 20, 2019


DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 4119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

DIVISION 03 CONCRETE

03 1500 WATERSTOPS

03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

Concrete Placement Card

03 3053 HYDROPHOBIC CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3816 UNBONDED POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE

DIVISION 04 MASONRY

04 2000 UNIT MASONRY

04 7200 CAST STONE MASONRY

DIVISION 05 METALS

05 1200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

05 3100 STEEL DECK

05 4000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS

05 5116 METAL FLOOR PLATE STAIRS

05 5213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

05 5300 METAL GRATINGS

05 7000 DECORATIVE METAL

05 7300 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS

05 7301 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS FOR SITEWORK

05 7313 GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS

DIVISION 06 WOOD, PLASTIC, AND COMPOSITES

06 1000 ROUGH CARPENTRY

06 1600 SHEATHING

06 2023 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY

06 4023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

06 4400 WOOD GRILLES

06 8113 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED RAILINGS



June 20, 2019


DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 1300 BELOW-GRADE SHEET WATERPROOFING

07 1413 HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING

07 1616 CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING

07 1800 TRAFFIC COATINGS

07 1900 WATER REPELLENTS

07 2100 THERMAL INSULATION

07 2400 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)

072600 VAPOR RETARDERS

07 2613 BELOW-SLAB VAPOR BARRIERS

07 2726 FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS

07 4213 METAL PLANK WALL AND SOFFIT PANELS

07 4223 METAL-COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS

07 4229 TERRA COTTA WALL PANELS

07 4646 FIBER-CEMENT PANELS

07 5623 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING

07 5563 VEGETATED PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING

07 6200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

07 7200 ROOF ACCESSORIES

07 8100 APPLIED FIREPROOFING

07 8413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

07 8446 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

07 9200 JOINT SEALANTS

07 9500 EXPANSION JOINT COVER SYSTEMS

DIVISION 08 OPENINGS

08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08 1416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

08 1433 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS

08 1613 FLUSH FIBERGLASS DOORS AND FRAMES

08 3113 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

08 3313 COILING COUNTER DOORS

08 3323 OVERHEAD ROLLING DOORS

08 3513 FOLDING DOORS

08 4113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

08 4126 ALL-GLASS ENTRANCE SYSTEMS

08 4229 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES

08 4413 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS

08 5113 ALUMINUM WINDOWS AND WINDOW WALLS

08 5313 VINYL WINDOWS AND TERRACE DOORS

08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE

08 7913 FIRE DEPARTMENT KEY BOX

08 8000 GLAZING

08 8300 MIRRORS

08 9119 FIXED LOUVERS

08 9516 WALL VENTS



June 20, 2019


VOLUME 2

DIVISION 09 FINISHES

09 0561 MOISTURE VAPOR EMISSION CONTROL

09 2100 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

09 2116 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES

09 2300 GYPSUM PLASTERING

09 3000 TILING

09 5113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

09 5133 ACOUSTICAL METAL PAN CEILINGS

09 6466 WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING

09 6513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

09 6516 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING

09 6519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

09 6566 RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING

09 6623 RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING

09 6723 INDUSTRIAL RESINOUS FLOOR COATINGS

09 6800 CARPETING

09 7200 WALL COVERINGS

09 8433 SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS

09 8436 SOUND-ABSORBING CEILING UNITS

09 9100 PAINTING

09 9611 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS FOR NATATORIUM

09 9653 ELASTOMERIC COATINGS

09 9656 EPOXY FLOOR COATINGS

09 9672 FLUID-APPLIED INSULATION COATING

DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES

10 1100 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS

10 1400 SIGNS AND GRAPHICS

Interior and Exterior Sign Systems Message Schedules

10 1419 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE

10 1423 INTERIOR PANEL SIGNAGE

10 1473 PAINTED SIGNAGE

10 2113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS AND SCREENS

10 2123 CUBICLE CURTAINS AND TRACK

10 2213 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS

10 2239 FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS

10 2243 SLIDING PANEL PARTITIONS

10 2600 WALL PROTECTION

10 2800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

10 4413 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS

10 4416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

10 4513 PHOTOLUMINESCENT EGRESS PATH MARKINGS

10 5126 PLASTIC LOCKERS

10 5143 WIRE MESH STORAGE LOCKERS

10 5500 POSTAL SPECIALTIES

10 5700 CLOSET SPECIALTIES

10 7316 METAL CANOPIES



June 20, 2019


DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT

11 1136 VEHICLE CHARGING STATIONS

11 1323 LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT

11 2423 BUILDING FAÇADE MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT

11 3100 APPLIANCES

11 3133 GAS FIREPLACES

11 4000 FOODSERVICE

11 6623 GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT

11 8226 FACILITY WASTE COMPACTORS

11 9400 PET WASH EQUIPMENT

DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS

12 2113 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS

12 2413 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES

12 3530 RESIDENTIAL KITCHEN AND BATH CASEWORK

12 3553 PHENOLIC-CORE CASEWORK AND COUNTERTOPS

12 3616 METAL COUNTERTOPS

12 3661 SIMULATED-STONE COUNTERTOPS

12 4813 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS

12 6313 FIXED BLEACHER SEATING

12 6600 TELESCOPING STANDS

12 9300 ROOFTOP SITE FURNISHINGS

12 9313 BICYCLE STORAGE RACKS

DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13 1100 SWIMMING POOLS

13 2000 SWIMMING POOL TIMING SYSTEM

13 3000 SWIMMING POOL FAUX ROCKWORK

DIVISION 14 CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

14 2100 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS

14 9182 TRASH CHUTES



June 20, 2019


VOLUME 3

DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION

21 0513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT

21 0517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

21 0518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

21 0523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

21 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT

21 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

21 1119 FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS

21 1200 FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES

21 1313 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

21 1316 DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

21 3113 ELECTRIC-DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS

21 3400 PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS

21 3900 CONTROLLERS FOR FIRE-PUMP DRIVERS

DIVISION 22 PLUMBING

22 0513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

22 0516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

22 0517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

22 0518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

22 0519 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

22 0523.12 BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

22 0523.13 BUTTERFLY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

22 0523.14 CHECK VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

22 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

22 0533 HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING

22 0548.13 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

22 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

22 0719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

22 1116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

22 1119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

22 1123 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS

22 1123.13 DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS

22 1316 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

22 1319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

22 1329 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS

22 1413 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

22 1423 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

22 1429 SUMP PUMPS

22 3300 ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

22 3400 FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

22 4100 RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES

22 4213.13 COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS

22 4213.16 COMMERCIAL URINALS

22 4216.13 COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES

22 4216.16 COMMERCIAL SINKS

22 4223 COMMERCIAL SHOWERS

22 4716 PRESSURE WATER COOLERS



June 20, 2019


DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)

23 0513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

23 0516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING

23 0517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING

23 0518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING

23 0519 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING

23 0523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

23 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

23 0533 HEAT TRACING FOR HVAC PIPING

23 0548 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS FOR MECHANICAL

COMPONENTS

23 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

23 0713 DUCT INSULATION

23 0716 HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION

23 0719 HVAC PIPING INSULATION

23 0800 COMMISSIONING OF MECHANICAL

23 0900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC

23 0993 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS

23 1113 FACILITY FUEL-OIL PIPING

23 1123 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

23 2113 HYDRONIC PIPING

23 2116 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

23 2123 HYDRONIC PUMPS

23 2300 REFRIGERANT PIPING

23 2513 WATER TREATMENT FOR CLOSED-LOOP HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

23 2516 WATER TREATMENT FOR OPEN-LOOP HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

23 2533 HVAC WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT

23 3113 METAL DUCTS

23 3116 NONMETAL DUCTS

23 3300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

23 3346 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

23 3423 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

23 3600 AIR TERMINAL UNITS

23 3723 HVAC GRAVITY VENTILATORS

23 5100 GENERATOR/ TURBINE EXHAUST SYSTEM

23 5113 DRAFT CONTROL SYSTEM

23 5113.16 VENT DAMPERS

23 5123 GAS VENTS

23 5216 CONDENSING BOILERS

23 5700 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC

23 6423.16 HEAT RECOVERY CHILLERS

23 6426.16 WATER-COOLED, ROTARY-SCREW WATER CHILLERS

23 6500 COOLING TOWERS

23 7223 PACKAGED ROOFTOP ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS

23 7313.16 INDOOR, SEMI-CUSTOM AIR-HANDLING UNITS

23 7313.17 CUSTOM AIR HANDLING UNITS – POOL

23 7416.13 PACKAGED ROOFTOP WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMP

23 8126 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS

23 8146 WATER-SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS

23 8219 FAN COIL UNITS



June 20, 2019


DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC), CONTINUED

23 8236 FINNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATERS

23 8239.13 CABINET UNIT HEATERS

23 8239.19 WALL AND CEILING UNIT HEATERS

23 8413.29 SELF-CONTAINED STEAM HUMIDIFIERS

VOLUME 4

DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL

26 0519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 0533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 0543 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 0544 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

26 0548.16 SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 0572 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY

26 0573 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

26 0574 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY

26 0800 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL

26 0913 ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL

26 0923 LIGHTING CONTROLS - LUTRON

26 2200 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

26 2413 SWITCHBOARDS

26 2416 PANELBOARDS

26 2500 ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES

26 2713 ELECTRICITY METERING

26 2726 WIRING DEVICES

26 2813 FUSES

26 2816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

26 2923 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS

26 3213 ENGINE GENERATORS

26 3600 TRANSFER SWITCHES

26 4113 LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES

26 4313 SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS

26 5100 ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING LUMINAIRES

26 5119 LED INTERIOR LIGHTING

26 5619 LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING

DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS

27 0526 GROUNDING & BONDING FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

27 0537 FIRESTOPPING

27 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS

27 1100 COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT ROOMS FITTING

27 1300 COMMUNICATION BACKBONE CABLING

27 1500 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING

27 4100 AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS

27 5100 PAGING SYSTEMS



June 20, 2019


DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

28 3111 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK

31 1000 SITE CLEARING

31 2000 EARTH MOVING

31 2319 DEWATERING

31 5000 EXCAVATION SUPPORT, UNDERPINNING, AND PROTECTION

DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 1313 CONCRETE PAVING

32 1400 UNIT PAVING

32 1713 PARKING BUMPERS

32 3300 SITE FURNISHINGS

32 3913 MANUFACTURED METAL BOLLARDS

32 5001 MISCELLANEOUS METAL SITE WORK

32 9100 SOILS

32 9200 TURFS AND GRASSES

32 9300 PLANTS

DIVISION 33 UTILITIES

33 4600 SUBDRAINAGE

APPENDICES

Appendix 1A Report of Subsurface Exploration and Geotechnical Engineering Analysis,

Elizabeth House, Silver Spring, Maryland, for For LEE Development Group

Prepared by ECS Mid-Atlantic, LLC, dated August 5, 2014.

Revised Report of Subsurface Exploration and Geotechnical Engineering Analysis,

Elizabeth House, Silver Spring, Maryland, for HOC of Montgomery County,

Prepared by ECS Mid-Atlantic, LLC, dated August 5, 2014, revised July 18, 2017.

Letter Report of Supplemental Geotechnical Subsurface Exploration,

Elizabeth Square III, Silver Spring, Montgomery County, Maryland.

Prepared by ECS Mid-Atlantic, LLC, dated February 27, 2018.

Appendix 2B Multifamily Rental Financing Program Guide, MDHCD, August 9, 2016

Exhibit E.1: Development Quality Threshold Narrative, Elizabeth House III

Exhibit E.2: Development Quality Self-Scoring and Narrative, Elizabeth House III

Appendix 3C EnergyStar Multifamily High Rise National Performance Path Requirements, v1.0



June 20, 2019


VOLUME 5

Appendix 4D

Appendix 5E

Commissioning Appendices

Cx Appendix 1 – Glossary of Terms

Cx Appendix 3 – Commissioning Team Responsibilities Matrix

Cx Appendix 4 – SCRRAC Master Equipment List

Cx Appendix 5 - Sample Draft Equipment Prefunctional Checklist

Cx Appendix 6 - Sample Draft Functional Test Procedure

Cx Appensix 8 – Commissioning Submittal Requirements - SCRRAC

Cx Appendix 9 – Building Operator Training Plan

Cx Appendix 11 – Commissioning Coordination Matrix

Cx Appendix 12 – Commissioning Plan

Cx Appendix 13 -- Program of Requirements

LEED Boundary Diagram, dated August 31, 2018

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Elizabeth Square, Phase 1 KGD Architecture Silver Spring, Maryland Issue for Construction June 20, 2019

APPENDIX D 1 of 1

APPENDIX D

COMMISSIONING APPENDICES



June 20, 2019

GLOSSARY OF TERMS APPENDIX 1 - 1 of 4

APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS



June 20, 2019


APPENDIX 1

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

Action Item: This is any issue that requires an action, response, work, etc. It can be an RFI, a work

directive, a clarification, a “to do” item, an identified deficiency, etc.

Action List: This is a list that is maintained by the Commissioning that includes all action items that

relate to Commissioning activities. These must be categorized as appropriate.

Commissioning (Cx): The process of ensuring that all building systems perform interactively according

to the design intent, the systems are efficient and cost effective and meet MCG's operational needs.

Commissioning Coordinator: This is an individual in various parties that is designated the contact for

that party relative to Commissioning activities.

Commissioning Team (CT): The group of parties involved with the commissioning process of any

given system. The team will generally include a core group involved with all systems. This core group

will generally include the CA, the CM's Commissioning Coordinator, MCG's Commissioning

Coordinator, GC's Commissioning Coordinator. On any given system the team will also include the

Commissioning Coordinator of the contractor(s) responsible for the systems or equipment.

Construction Documents: Generally, the part of the Contract documents that dictate the installation.

Contract Documents: The documents governing the relationships between parties involved in the

design and construction of this project including: Agreements/Contracts, Construction Plans,

Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Commissioning Plan.

Contractor: As used herein is a general reference to the applicable installing party and can therefore

refer to the GC, subcontractors, or vendors.

Decommissioning: The systematic process of verifying through testing, documentation, and training that

specified components and systems have been properly shut down and taken safely out of active service

for demolition, abatement, and removal.

Deficiency: An installation or condition that is not in conformance with the construction documents

and/or the design intent.

EA: Energy and Atmosphere – a category of the LEED rating system.

Energy Management and Control System (EMCS): the computer-based control or automation system.

Also known as Building Automation System (BAS), Energy Management System (EMS), Facility

Management System (FMS), Direct Digital Controls (DDC).

Functional Completion: A milestone that marks the completion of the Acceptance Phase and successful

completion of the FPT.



June 20, 2019


Functional Performance Testing: The detailed and thorough testing of the building systems and their

interactions with the building components and other building systems.

Functional Test Procedure (FTP): The document used to record the results of functional performance

testing.

IAQ: Indoor Air Quality.

IAQ Management Plan: A plan developed by the general contractor to protect the HVAC system during

construction, control pollutant sources and interrupt contamination pathways. Sequence the installation of

material to avoid contamination of absorptive material such as insulation, carpeting, ceiling tile and

gypsum wallboard.

LEED: Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design - LEED is an internationally recognized green

building certification system, providing third-party verification that a building or community was

designed and built using strategies aimed at improving performance across all the metrics that matter

most: energy savings, water efficiency, CO2 emissions reduction, improved indoor environmental quality,

and stewardship of resources and sensitivity to their impacts.

Method of Procedure (MOP): A document detailing precisely how and why a procedure will be

accomplished. MOPs are often required for building renovation that require precise details on how a

contractor will perform construction activities without disrupting the operation or comfort of the facility

and its occupants.

Measurement and Verification (M&V): A method for determining the actual energy usage and

potential savings of the energy using systems for a building(s).

Measurement and Verification Plan: A plan that describes the objectives, approach, method and

implementation of the M&V process.

Party: Person, company or entity.

Pre-Functional Checklist (PCs): PCs are equipment/component focused quality control commissioning

documents that are completed by an installing contractor prior to energizing a system or beginning a

functional performance test.

Project Manager (PM): Person in employ of MCG who is in charge of the design and construction

coordination.

RFI: Request for Information.

Start Up: Typically used to refer to the static testing or check out of systems or equipment to ensure that

they are complete, properly installed, and ready for dynamic testing. This will typically be documented

via checklists or forms.

Start Up Checklist Item: This is an item of check out inspections that simply require a Yes/No or

OK/Not response. These are used as one component to the equipment start up verification (start up tests

being the other).



June 20, 2019


Start up Test: This is a test involved with equipment start up. It differs from a checklist item in that a

measurement is required to be documented or a sequence of events must be documented such that it

requires more than a binary response.

Trending: Monitoring and recording a history of parameters typically using the facility management

system.

USGBC: United States Green Building Council.

Web Portal: Web based Commissioning Information Tool. The full version that facilitates developing

the tests is licensed and copyrighted. Web Portal Viewer is shareware that can be used to view existing

tests and record the results. This tool will be used by the Commissioning Authority to store

commissioning documents for this project.



June 20, 2019

COMMISSIONING TEAM RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX APPENDIX 3

APPENDIX 3

COMMISSIONING TEAM

RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX

Commissioning Team Responsibility Matrix APPENDIX 3 Commissioning Plan

Phase MCG Responsibilities Architect & CxA Responsibilities Engineer Responsibilities Contractor Responsibility CA Responsibility

· Develop the Program for the facility. · Assist MCG in documenting the

requirements of the facility

· Assist MCG in documenting the

requirements of the facility

N/A

· Identify the requirements, goals,

preferences, MCG standards or

guidelines that will impact the design

of the facility

· Notify MCG of codes and regulations

that affect the facility

· Notify MCG of codes and regulations

that affect the facility

· Clearly communicate requirements,

preferences, and budget targets to A/E

in a timely manner.

· Endeavor to fully understand MCG's

requirements and preferences and

propose design alternatives to meet

those requirements. Advise MCG of

advantages, disadvantages, and

limitations of various alternatives.

· Endeavor to fully understand MCGs

requirements and preferences and

propose design alternatives to meet

those requirements. Advise MCG of

advantages, disadvantages, and

limitations of various alternatives.

· N/A

· Select CA · Attend design meetings and present

alternatives.

· Attend design meetings and present

alternatives.

· Review and comment on the

conceptual design

· Document the primary thought

processes that result in the concepts

that will form the basis of design.

· Document the primary thought

processes that result in the concepts

that will form the basis of design.

· Identify operations or facilities

personnel for the facility who will be

involved in key decisions throughout

the design/construct process and

eventually operate the facility.

AE and CxA

CxA

AE (review by CxA as needed)

Pro

gra

mm

ing

Co

nce

ptu

al D

esig

n

N/A

N/A

Appendix 3 - Page 1 Elizabeth Square Phase 1 - SCRRAC



N/A· Review design intent and design

criteria documentation


alternatives.


alternatives.

· N/A · Conduct Cx kick off meeting

· Review suggestions and alternatives

proposed by A/E and CA and decide

upon direction for design.

· Draft a appropriate portions of a

"Design Intent" narrative in accordance

with the MCG "Model Design Criteria"

to communicate expectations and

limitations of facility/systems and

equipment. Submit to MCG and CA for

review.

· Draft a appropriate portions of a

"Design Intent" narrative to

communicate expectations and

limitations of facility/systems and

equipment. Submit to MCG and CA for

review.

· Observe, review, and assist

communications between MCG and

A/E.

· Attend design meetings. · Consult with CA and consider

incorporating CA's input.

· Consult with CA and consider

incorporating CA's input.

· Conceive/propose alternatives/issues

for design consideration.

· Appropriately involve anticipated

Operators in key decisions made during

this phase.

· Copy CA on all pertinent

correspondence.


correspondence.

· Review the conceptual design

documents


correspondence.

· Prepare the initial Cx Plan and submit

to MCG and CA for review

· Review correspondence and advise on

design direction.

· Review preliminary Cx plan · Review and comment on preliminary

Cx Plan

· Endeavor to ensure MCG's best

interests are incorporated in design.

· Attend design meetings selected by

CA to facilitate performance of work.

· Review, edit and supplement the

Design Intent and Design Criteria

documentation

AE and CxA

CxA


Sch

em

atic D

esig

n




N/A· Schematic Design Phase

responsibilities apply also to this phase.

· All responsibilities of the Schematic

Design Phase apply.

· All responsibilities of the Schematic

Design Phase apply.

· N/A · Applicable Schematic Design

responsibilities apply.

· In a timely manner, perform detailed

review of all documents prepared by

A/E and CA and issue comments to

clarify or specify requirements and/or

preferences, including specifically those

of Operators.

· Prepare thorough, accurate, and clear

contract documents.

· Prepare thorough, accurate, and clear

contract documents.

· Review construction documents for

systems included in the Cx scope.

· Endeavor to fully understand the

design intent and the Contract

Documents and request clarifications

as appropriate.

· Send CA one copy of all review

submissions.

· Specify systems that are operable and

maintainable and that meet MCGs

requirements

· Develop PM Codes to be used. These

codes should be those to be

incorporated in the CMMS

(computerized maintenance

management system). These codes will

be used to index the equipment and

associated documentation.

· Specify materials and finishes that do

not outgas excessive air contaminants

and/or cause poor IAQ.

· Read and respond to MCG's and CA's

comments and questions in a timely

fashion. Incorporate MCG's and CA's

comments/suggestions in Contract

Documents when A/E does not feel

they will adversely affect the project.

· Prepare, edit and/or supplement

specifications to identify Cx

requirements

· Incorporate Cx specifications or

related edits in the construction

specifications

· Incorporate Cx specifications or

related edits in the appropriate

sections of the construction

specifications

· Issue comments resulting from

reviews to MCG and A/E in a timely

fashion.

AE and CxA

CxA


De

sign

De

ve

lop

me

nt a

nd

Co

nstru

ction

Do

cum

en

t De

sign




N/A· Read and respond to MCG's and CA's

comments and questions in a timely

fashion. Incorporate MCG's and CA's

comments/suggestions in Contract

Documents when A/E does not feel

they will adversely affect the project.

· Update Design Intent narrative and

author a "Design Criteria" narrative in

accordance with the MCG "Model

Design Criteria".

· Attend key design/review meetings as

selected by CA and as required to

facilitate work.

· Update Design Intent narrative and

author a "Design Criteria" narrative.

· Prepare and submit clear and orderly

calculations to MCG and CA for review

and comment. Respond in writing to

comments.

· Review design calculations selected by

CA.

· Incorporate the PM code indexes

developed by MCG on equipment

nomenclature into the design

documents.

· Include in the documents the

requirements for the MCG Operation

and Maintenance Support Information

(OMSI) format for the hard copy [and

the electronic copy] of the operation

and maintenance information.

· Finalize the Cx Plan including all

pertinant Cx specifications, Checklist

and FPT.

· Review the Cx Plan

AE and CxA

CxA


De

sign

De

ve

lop

me

nt a

nd

Co

nstru

ction

Do

cum

en

t De

sign

(con

t'd)




N/A· Attend progress meetings to observe

progress and decide upon direction for

open issues.

· Attend coordination meetings called

by CA

· Issue necessary changes in

construction and copy CA.

· Attend coordination meetings called

by CA

· Conduct Cx meeting

· Provide [resident] inspector to

thoroughly inspect construction

through all phases of installation.

Inspector shall identify deficiencies in a

timely manner.

· Issue necessary changes in

construction and copy CA.

· Review shop drawings and product

data. Contact CA prior to approval of

pertinent systems/equipment and

incorporate CA's comments in A/E's

markup or approval.

· As outlined in Construction

Specifications. Generally to completely

install and thoroughly inspect, startup,

test, adjust, balance, and document all

systems and equipment prior to

Acceptance Phase.

· Review applicable project

documentation (shop drawings,

product date, TAB reports, record

drawings, O&M information, etc.) for

adequacy and to ensure system

functionality.

· Involve operators in the inspection

process and communicate their

observations and requirements.

· Review shop drawings and product

data. Contact CA prior to approval of

pertinent systems/equipment and

incorporate CA's comments in A/E's

markup or approval.

· Inspect construction in accordance

with MCG - A/E agreement.

· Include Cx requirements in price and

plan for work. Itemize individual Cx

tasks by system/area in the project

schedule.

· Review and approve start up checklist

forms.

· Witness equipment startup related

tests

· Inspect construction in accordance

with MCG - A/E agreement.

· Author appropriate portions of a

"Systems Overview" that will be

included in the O&M information and

be used for operator training

· Provide a Commissioning Manager

(GCCM). All

subs/vendors/manufacturers with

commissioning responsibilities will

provide a Commissioning Coordinator

(CxC). GCCM and all contractor CxC are

to attend all commissioning meetings.

· Inspect installation periodically, as

follows:

· After completion of major equipment

floor plan layout but prior to the

installation.

· After installation of major equipment,

but prior to hook up with piping and

duct.

· Avail operators for required training

and demonstrations.

· Issue clarifications or interpretations

of Design Intent as required.

· Issue clarifications or interpretations

of Design Intent as required.

· Prepare and submit required draft

forms and systems information.

· Witness equipment startup related

tests

· Facilitate the coordination of the

commissioning work by the CA, and,

with the GC and CA, ensure that

commissioning activities are being

scheduled into the master schedule.

· Maintain a record set of shop

drawings, product data, warrantees,

test reports, balance reports, start up

certifications, etc.

· MDE shall review and approve

balancing reports

· Complete approved start up checklists

and submit along with other

installation certification information

such as balancing reports, warrantees,

testing results, etc.

AE and CxA

CxA


Co

nstru

ction




N/A· Provide a Resident Commissioning

Coordinator (CM CxC)

· Review O&M manuals and

incorporate CA's comments in mark up

or approval.

· Maintain a record set of shop

drawings, product data, warrantees,

test reports, balance reports, start up

certifications, etc.

· Schedule and coordinate Cx efforts

required by appropriate subs and

vendors. Participate in respective

portions of start ups and training

· After completion installation of all

major equipment, duct, piping,

electrical equipment and wiring,

sprinkler, fire alarm etc. but prior to

installation of ceiling and drywalls.

· Provide resident inspector to

thoroughly inspect construction

through all phases of installation.

Inspector shall identify deficiencies in a

timely manner. May be the same

person as the CM CxC

· Review O&M manuals and

incorporate CA's comments in mark up

or approval.

· Demonstrate the systems as specified · Attend selected progress meetings to

observe progress and help expedite

completion.

· Furnish a copy of all construction

documents, addenda, change orders

and approved submittals and shop

drawings related to commissioned

equipment to the CA.

· Certify that systems have been

installed and are operating per

Contract Documents.

· Witness selected tests start-ups, and

equipment training.

· Review and approve the functional

performance test procedures

submitted by the CA, prior to testing.

· Submit all O&M information,

instruction postings and diagrams, etc.

· Review O&M information for

information required for the systems

manual

· Maintain an updated set of record

documentation

· Review commissioning progress and

deficiency reports

· Verify (spot check: minimum 10%)

TAB reports.

· Verify (spot check, minimum 10%)

control component calibration.

AE and CxA

CxA


Co

nstru

ction

(con

t'd)




N/A· Witness/participate in functional

performance tests.

· Witness key tests and verifications as

selected by A/E.

· Witness key tests and verifications as

selected by A/E.

· As outlined in Construction

Specifications.

· Verify (spot check) equipment

performance certifications.

· Inspect installations and identify

deficiencies.

· Consult on and resolve any design

related issues/problems that arise

during this phase.

· Consult on and resolve any design

related issues/problems that arise

during this phase.

· Generally assist CA in verification and

functional performance testing.

· Witness/participate in 100%

functional performance tests.

· Schedule and provide qualified

operators and maintenance personnel

to attend all training sessions.

· Participate in the systems level

training program for the operators.

· Provide technicians to work at

direction of CA as specified.

· Review commissioning progress and

deficiency reports

· Provide facilities for training sessions

and personnel and equipment to

videotape the training sessions.

·Functionally test systems and

equipment.

· Correct any work not in accordance

with Contract Documents.

· Coordinate the resolution of non-

compliance and design deficiencies

identified in all phases of

commissioning.

· Endeavor to fully understand design

intent; system and equipment

inspections, operation, maintenance,

repair and troubleshooting of systems

and equipment.

· Submit training plan. · Review training plan.

· Assist the GC in coordinating the

training of owner personnel.

· Sign-off (final approval) on individual

commissioning tests as completed and

passing. Recommend completion of the

commissioning process to the PO.

· Record Cx procedures.

Provide Cx Final Report

Provide Systems Manual

AE and CxA

CxA


Acce

pta

nce




N/A· Operate and maintain the facility per

the design intent

· Periodically monitor the facility as

applicable

· Log system parameter and document

any deficiencies

· Perform opposite season FTP as

necessary

· Notify design/construct team of any

significant changes required or of any

unanticipated occupancy requirements

that become evident.

· Issue recommendation for

“Substantial Completion”, based on full

satisfaction of spot check and system

performance test result.

· Inform the design construct team of

any salient alterations or changes to

the systems and their setup and

indicate why it was necessitated.

Attend 10 month warranty review · Perform 10 month warranty review,

provide plan for resolution of

outstanding issues, update final

commissioning documentation.

· Endeavor to learn the characteristics

of the facility to better quantify the

requirements. Notify the design

construct team of any significant

deviations from the anticipated

requirements.

· Assist the CA as necessary in the

seasonal or deferred testing and

deficiency corrections required by the

specifications.

AE and CxA

CxA


Wa

rran

ty / P

ost A

ccep

tan

ce P

erio

d

· Consult with MCG as necessary to

convey and maintain design intent and

respond to any identified deficiencies.

· · Consult with MCG as necessary to

convey and maintain design intent and

respond to any identified deficiencies.




June 20, 2019

DESIGN MASTER EQUIPMENT LIST APPENDIX 4

APPENDIX 4

DESIGN MASTER EQUIPMENT LIST

APPENDIX 4SCRRAC Master Equipment List

Design Master Equipment List

Discipline Building Location Equipment ID Equipment Type System PFC Provided

FPT Ptovided MFG

MFG SUBJECT TO CHANGE

Div. 13 - SWIMMING POOLS

SCRRAC POOL FILTER ROOM

P-1A & P-1B FILTER PUMPS COMPETITION POOL

YES YES PACO #50957



NO TAG PUMP CONTROLLER VFD

COMPETITION POOL

N/A N/A NOT LISTED



NO TAG CHEMICAL CONTROLLER

COMPETITION POOL

N/A N/A BECSYS-5



NO TAG CHEMICAL FEEDERS COMPETITION POOL

N/A N/A STENNER 85M5



NO TAG ACID PUMP COMPETITION POOL




NO TAG CO2 FEEDER COMPETITION POOL

N/A N/A CAT AC005



NO TAG U.V. UNIT COMPETITION POOL

N/A N/A AQUIONICS UV SWIM

#PMD150C1/4AWDiv. 13 -

SWIMMING POOLSSCRRAC POOL FILTER

ROOMNO TAG WATER LEVEL

CONTROLLERCOMPETITION

POOL N/A N/A AQUATICONTR

OL #ELC-810



P-2 FILTER PUMP RECREATION POOL

N/A YES PACO#25957



NO TAG PUMP CONTROLLER VFD

RECREATION POOL

N/A N/A NOT LISTED

Page 1 of 18




FPT Ptovided MFG




RECREATION POOL

N/A N/A BECSYS-5



NO TAG CHEMICAL FEEDERS RECREATION POOL




NO TAG ACID PUMP RECREATION POOL




NO TAG CO2 FEEDER RECREATION POOL

N/A N/A CAT AC004 FEEDER



NO TAG U.V. UNIT RECREATION POOL

N/A N/A AQUIONICS UV SWIM




CONTROLLERRECREATION

POOLN/A N/A AQUATICONTR

OL #ELC-810



P-5 FILTER PUMP RECREATION SPA YES INCLUDED WITH P-4

PACO#25957



WF-P-4 JET PUMP RECREATION SPA YES INCLUDED WITH P-4

PACO#25957



NO TAG FILTER PUMP CONTROLLER VFD

RECREATION SPA N/A N/A NOT LISTED




RECREATION SPA N/A N/A BECSYS-5



NO TAG CHEMICAL FEEDERS RECREATION SPA N/A N/A STENNER 85M5

Page 2 of 18




FPT Ptovided MFG



NO TAG ACID PUMP RECREATION SPA N/A N/A STENNER 45M4



NO TAG C02 FEEDER RECREATION SPA N/A N/A CAT AC004 FEEDER



NO TAG U.V. UNIT RECREATION SPA N/A N/A AQUIONICS UV SWIM




CONTROLLERRECERATION SPA N/A N/A AQUATICONTR

OL #ELC-810

Div. 13 - SWIMMING

POOLS


WF-P-1 WATER FEATURE POOL PUMP W/ VFD

LEISURE POOL YES INCLUDED WITH P-3

PACO #40957

Div. 13 - SWIMMING

POOLS


WF-P-2 TIDAL BUCKET PUMP LEISURE POOL YES INCLUDED WITH P-3

PENTAIR CHALLENGER

#345202Div. 13 -

SWIMMING POOLS


P-3 FILTER PUMP LEISURE POOL YES YES PACO #40957

Div. 13 - SWIMMING

POOLS



LEISURE POOL N/A N/A NOT LISTED

Div. 13 - SWIMMING

POOLS



LEISURE POOL N/A N/A BECSYS-5

Div. 13 - SWIMMING

POOLS


NO TAG CHEMICAL FEEDERS LEISURE POOL N/A N/A STENNER 45M5

Div. 13 - SWIMMING

POOLS


NO TAG ACID PUMP LEISURE POOL N/A N/A STENNER 85M4

Page 3 of 18




FPT Ptovided MFG

Div. 13 - SWIMMING

POOLS


NO TAG C02 FEEDER LEISURE POOL N/A N/A CAT AC004 FEEDER

Div. 13 - SWIMMING

POOLS


NO TAG WATER LEVEL CONTROLLER

LEISURE POOL N/A N/A AQUATICONTROL #ELC-810

Div. 13 SWIMMING POOLS


NO TAG U.V. UNIT LEISURE POOL N/A N/A AQUIONICS UV SWIM

#PMD150C1/4AW

Div. 13 - SWIMMING

POOLS


P-4 FILTER PUMP LEISURE SPA YES INCLUDED WITH P-3

PACO #25957

Div. 13 - SWIMMING

POOLS



LEISURE SPA N/A N/A NOT LISTED

Div. 13 - SWIMMING

POOLS


WF-P-3 JET PUMP W/ VFD LEISURE SPA YES INCLUDED WITH P-3

PACO #25957

Div. 13 - SWIMMING

POOLS



LEISURE SPA N/A N/A BECSYS-5

Div. 13 - SWIMMING

POOLS


NO TAG CHEMICAL FEEDERS LEISURE SPA N/A N/A STENNER 85M5

Div. 13 - SWIMMING

POOLS


NO TAG ACID PUMP LEISURE SPA N/A N/A STENNER 45M4

Div. 13 - SWIMMING

POOLS


NO TAG WATER LEVEL CONTROLLER

LEISURE SPA N/A N/A AQUATICONTROL #ELC-810

Page 4 of 18




FPT Ptovided MFG

Div. 13 - SWIMMING

POOLS


NO TAG U.V. UNIT LEISURE SPA N/A N/A AQUIONICS UV SWIM


SWIMMING POOLS


NO TAG CO2 FEEDER LEISURE SPA N/A N/A CAT AC004 FEEDER

Div. 22 - Plumbing SCRRAC WATER PUMP ROOM (G109)

CP-1 CIRCULATING PUMP DOM. HOT WATER

YES N/A NOT LISTED



YES YES NOT LISTED



YES YES BELL&GOSSETT

ECOCIRC XL B65-130Div. 22 - Plumbing SCRRAC MECH ROOM

(S003)CP-4 CIRCULATING PUMP DOM. HOT

WATERYES YES XL B55-45

Div. 22 - Plumbing SCRRAC MECH ROOM(S003)


YES YES XL B36-45

Div. 22 - Plumbing SCRRAC ELEVATOR SUMP

SP-1 SUMP PUMP W/ CONTROLLER

PARKING DRAINAGE

YES YES PUMP ZOELLER 295

CONT. ZOELLER 10-

1084Div. 22 - Plumbing SCRRAC ELEVATOR SUMP


PARKING DRAINAGE


CONT. ZOELLER 10-

1084Div. 22 - Plumbing SCRRAC ELEVATOR

SUMPSP-3 SUMP PUMP W/

CONTROLLERPARKING

DRAINAGE YES YES PUMP:

ZOELLER MODEL H165Div. 22 - Plumbing SCRRAC B2 GARAGE

AREA A G200SP-4 SUMP PUMP W/

CONTROLLERPARKING

DRAINAGE YES YES PUMP ZOELLER

293CONT.

ZOELLER 10-1044

Page 5 of 18




FPT Ptovided MFG

Div. 22 - Plumbing SCRRAC B2 GARAGE AREA A G200


PARKING DRAINAGE


CONT. ZOELLER 10-

1044Div. 22 - Plumbing SCRRAC BICYCLE

STORAGE (G206)


PARKING DRAINAGE


CONT. ZOELLER 10-

1045Div. 22 - Plumbing SCRRAC BICYCLE STORAGE

(G206)


PARKING DRAINAGE


CONT. ZOELLER 10-

1045Div. 22 - Plumbing SCRRAC BICYCLE

STORAGE (G206)


POOL WASTE YES YES PUMP ZOELLER 641

CONT. ZOELLER 10-1110

Div. 22 - Plumbing SCRRAC BICYCLE STORAGE

(G206)


POOL WASTE YES YES PUMP ZOELLER 641



(G206)


SEWAGE PUMP YES YES PUMP ZOELLER 292

CONT. ZOELLER 10-

1045Div. 22 - Plumbing SCRRAC BICYCLE STORAGE

(G206)



CONT. ZOELLER 10-

1045

Page 6 of 18




FPT Ptovided MFG









Div. 22 - Plumbing SCRRAC WATER PUMPROOM (G109)

WH-1 GAS WATER HEATER HOT WATER YES YES CAMUS AV(W)0500


WH-2 GAS WATER HEATER HOT WATER YES YES CAMUS AV(W)0500


WH-3 GAS WATER HEATER HOT WATER YES YES CAMUS VT-339


WH-4 GAS WATER HEATER HOT WATER YES YES CAMUS VT-339


(G206)

WH-5 ELECTIRC WATER HEATER HOT WATER YES YES AO SMITH MODEL: DEL-80

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC ROOF CT-R-3 COOLING TOWER BUILDING CHILLERS

YES YES BAC

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC ROOF CT-R-4 COOLING TOWER BUILDING CHILLERS

YES YES BAC

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC CHILLER ROOM CH-1-1 CHILLER BUILDING COOLING

YES YES DAIKIN WWVRNNS

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC CHILLER ROOM CH-1-2 CHILLER BUILDING COOLING

YES YES DAIKIN WWVRNNS

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC CHILLER ROOM CWP-1-1 PUMP W/ VFD BUILDING CHILLERS

YES YES BELL&GOSSETT

OR EQUAL

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC CHILLER ROOM CWP-1-2 PUMP W/ VFD BUILDING CHILLERS

YES YES BELL&GOSSETT OR EQUAL

Page 7 of 18




FPT Ptovided MFG

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRACCHILLER ROOM

CWP-1-3 PUMP W/ VFD BUILDING CHILLERS


Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRACBOILER ROOM

HRC-1-1 HEAT RECOVERY CHILLER

HEAT RECOVERY CHILLERS

YES YES MULTISTACK MS050XN-410A

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC

BOILER ROOM





BOILER ROOM





CHILLER ROOM

RCHP-1-1 PUMP W/ VFD HEAT RECOVERY CHILLERS


Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC BOILER ROOM RHP-1-1 PUMP W/ VFD HEAT RECOVERY CHILLERS


Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC CHILLER ROOM SCHP-1-1 PUMP W/ VFD BUILDING CHILLERS


Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC CHILLER ROOM SCHP-1-2 PUMP W/ VFD BUILDING CHILLERS


Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC CHILLER ROOM PCHP-1-1 PUMP W/ VFD BUILDING CHILLERS






Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC BOILER ROOM PHP-1-1 PUMP W/ VFD POOL YES YES BELL&GOSSETT OR EQUAL

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC BOILER ROOM PHP-1-2 PUMP W/ VFD POOL YES YES BELL&GOSSETT OR EQUAL

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC BOILER ROOM SHP-1-1 PUMP W/ VFD POOL YES YES BELL&GOSSETT OR EQUAL



Page 8 of 18




FPT Ptovided MFG


Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC LEVEL 1 PDU-1-1 DEHUMIDIFICATION POOL DEHUMIDIFICATI

ON

YES YES INNOVENT CAHU

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC B1 MECH ROOM PDU-B1-1 DEHUMIDIFICATION POOL DEHUMIDIFICATI

ON


Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC LEVEL 1 PDU-1-2 DEHUMIDIFICATION POOL DEHUMIDIFICATI

ON


Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC LEVEL 1 OAU-1-1 OUTSIDE AIR POOL YES YES INNOVENT ERU

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC LEVEL B1 ERU-B1-1 ENERGY RECOVERY CONDITIONED AIR

YES YES INNOVENT ERU

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC BOILER ROOM B-1-1 BOILER BUILDING HEATING

YES YES VIESSMANN CITOCROSSAL

300 Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC BOILER ROOM B-1-2 BOILER BUILDING HEATING

YES YES VIESSMANN CITOCROSSAL

300 Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC B1 LEVEL (G105) FCU-B1-1 FAN COIL POOL PUMP ROOM

HEATING/COOLING

YES YES INNOVENT CAHU/

TRANE BCH &FCHG

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC B1 LEVEL (S009) FCU-B1-2 FAN COIL LIFE GUARD. HEATING/COOLI

NG


TRANE BCH &FCHG

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC B1 LEVEL (S005A)

FCU-B1-3 FAN COIL WET CLASS HEATING/COOLI

NG


TRANE BCH &FCHG

Page 9 of 18




FPT Ptovided MFG

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC LEVEL 1 FCU-1-1 FAN COIL MAIN MECH HEATING/COOLI

NG


TRANE BCH &FCHG

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC LEVEL 1 FCU-1-2 FAN COIL MEZZANINEHEATING/COOLING


TRANE BCH &FCHG

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC LEVEL 2 (S218) FCU-2-1 FAN COIL GYM STORAGE HEATING/COOLI

NG


TRANE BCH &FCHG

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC LEVEL 1 AHU-1-1 AIR HANDLING UNIT SOCIAL HALL HEATING/COOLI

NG

YES YES DAIKIN CAH

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC LEVEL 1 AHU-1-2 AIR HANDLING UNIT LOBBY HEATING/COOLI

NG

YES YES DAIKIN CAH

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC LEVEL 2 AHU-2-1 AIR HANDLING UNIT EXERCISE HEATING/COOLI

NG

YES YES DAIKIN CAH

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC LEVEL 2 AHU-2-2 AIR HANDLING UNIT LOBBY HEATING/COOLI

NG

YES YES DAIKIN CAH

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC LEVEL 3 AHU-3-1 AIR HANDLING UNIT COMMUNITY HEATING/COOLI

NG

YES YES DAIKIN CAH

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC LEVEL 3 AHU-3-2 AIR HANDLING UNIT GYM HEATING/COOLING W/RE-HEAT

YES YES DAIKIN CAH

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC LEVEL 2 AHU-3-3 AIR HANDLING UNIT GYM HEATING/COOLING W/RE-HEAT

YES YES DAIKIN CAH

Page 10 of 18




FPT Ptovided MFG

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC LEVEL 1 MAU-1-1 AIR HANDLING UNIT KITCHEN MAKE UP AIR

YES YES DAIKIN CAH

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC BOILER ROOM ET-1-1/AS-1-1 EXPANSION TANK &AIRSEPARATOR

CHILLED WATER N/A N/A BELL & GOSSETT

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC BOILER ROOM ET-1-2/AS-1-2 EXPANSION TANK &AIRSEPARATOR

HOT WATER N/A N/A BELL & GOSSETT

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC KITCHEN VAV 1-1-1 VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL

BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC SOCIAL HALL VAV 1-1-2 VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL

BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE


BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE


BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE


BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC SOCIAL STORAGE

VAV 1-1-6 VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL

BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC HOF/VEST VAV 1-2-1 VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL

BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC LOBBY/PRE-FUNC


BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC CAFÉ/CORRIDOR


BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE

Page 11 of 18




FPT Ptovided MFG

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC ADMIN OFFICE VAV 1-2-4 VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL

BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC ADMIN OFFICE VAV 1-2-5 VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL

BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC FITNESS VAV 2-1-1 VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL

BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE


BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE


BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC EXERCISE STUDIO


BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE



BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE



BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE



BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC RESTROOMS VAV 2-1-8 VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL

BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC TELECOM/DATA


BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE

Page 12 of 18




FPT Ptovided MFG

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC LOBBY VAV 2-2-1 VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL

BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE


BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE


BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC LOBBY/REC VAV 2-2-4 VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL

BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC FAMILY PLAY VAV 2-2-5 VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL

BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE


BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC HOLY CROSS CORR.


BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC COMM. LOUNGE


BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC COMM. LOUNGE


BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC ACTIVITY VAV 3-1-3 VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL

BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC RESTROOMS VAV 3-1-4 VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL

BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE

Page 13 of 18




FPT Ptovided MFG


BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC ART VAV 3-1-6 VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL

BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC ART VAV 3-1-7 VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL

BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC GAME VAV 3-1-8 VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL

BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC GAME VAV 3-1-9 VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL

BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE


BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE


BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC CORRIDOR VAV 3-1-12 VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL

BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC CONFERENCE VAV 3-1-13 VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL

BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE


BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC ELEV. CONTROLT


BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE

Page 14 of 18




FPT Ptovided MFG

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC TELECOM/DATA


BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC CONFERENCE VAV 3-1-17 VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL

BUILDING HEATING

MATRIX PROVIDE

D

YES PRICE

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC TELECOM B2 MSSI-B2-1/MSSOB2-1

MINI SPLIT SYSTEM TELECOM COOLING/HEATI

NG

YES YES DAIKIN FAQ/FBQ

RZR

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC SWITCHGEAR MSSI-B2-3/MSSO-B2-3

MINI SPLIT SYSTEM SWITCHGEAR COOLING/HEATI

NG


RZQ

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC TELECOM B1 MSSI-B1-3/MSSO-B1-3

MINI SPLIT SYSTEM TELECOM COOLING ?

YES YES DAIKIN FAQ/FBQ RZQ

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC FIREPUMP B1 MSSI-B1-4/MSSO-B1-4

MINI SPLIT SYSTEM FIREPUMP COOLING/HEATI

NG


RZQ

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC MAIN LOBBY 11 UNITS

BEH-A BASEBOARD ELECTRIC HEAT

MAIN LOBBY HEATING

YES YES REDD-I


BEH-B BASEBOARD ELECTRIC HEAT

MAIN LOBBY HEATING

YES YES REDD-I


BEH-C BASEBOARD ELECTRIC HEAT

MAIN LOBBY HEATING

YES YES REDD-I

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC GENERATOR G215

UH-B2-11 ELECTIRC HEAT GENERATOR HEATER

YES YES RAYWALL 5100


UH-B2-10 ELECTRIC HEAT GENERATOR HEATER



UH-B2-12 ELECTIRC HEAT GENERATOR HEATER


Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC PUMPROOM B1 UH-B1-7 ELECTIRC HEAT PUMPROOM HEATING


Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC PUMPROOM B1 UH-B1-8 ELECTIRC HEAT PUMPROOM HEATING


Page 15 of 18




FPT Ptovided MFG

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC STORAGE B1 UH-B1-11 ELECTIRC HEAT STORAGE HEATING


Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC STAIR F WH-B1-1 WALL HEATER STAIR HEATING YES YES RAYWALL 5100Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC STAIR E WH-1-1 WALL HEATER STAIR HEATING YES YES RAYWALL 5100Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC STAIR D WH-1-2 WALL HEATER STAIR HEATING YES YES RAYWALL 5100Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC CHEM

STORAGEEF-B1-1 EXHAUST FAN CHEM EXHAUST YES YES GREENHECK,

BIG ASS FANS

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC POOL EQUIP EF-B1-4 EXHAUST FAN POOL EQUIPMENT

YES YES GREENHECK, BIG ASS FANS

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC WATER PUMP ROOM

EF-B1-6 EXHAUST FAN PUMP EXHAUST YES YES GREENHECK, BIG ASS FANS

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC GEN. ROOM EXHAUST

EF-B1-7 EXHAUST FAN GENERATOR EXHAUST

YES YES GREENHECK, BIG ASS FANS

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC ELECTRICAL EF-2-1 EXHAUST FAN ELECTRICAL EXHAUST

YES YES GREENHECK, BIG ASS

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC POOL PUMP ROOM B1-1

HX-B1-1 HEAT EXCHANGER - PLATE AND FRAME

POOL WATER HEATING

YES YES SONDEX



POOL WATER HEATING

YES YES SONDEX



POOL WATER HEATING

YES YES SONDEX



POOL WATER HEATING

YES YES SONDEX



POOL WATER HEATING

YES YES SONDEX

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC AHU-3-2 H-3-2 GAS HUMIDIFIERS HUMIDIFCATION YES INCLUDED WITH AHU-3-

2 TEST

CAREL UG045

Div. 23 - HVAC SCRRAC AHU-3-3 H-3-3 GAS HUMIDIFIERS HUMIDIFCATION YES INCLUDED WITH AHU-3-

3 TEST

CAREL UG045

Page 16 of 18




FPT Ptovided MFG

Div. 26 - Electrical SCRRAC EMERGENCY GENERATOR

RM (G215)

GENERATOR NATURAL GAS - EXISTING

SCRRAC SHELTER IN

PLACE

YES/MAY NOT BE IN

SCOPE

YES


RM (G215)

GENERATOR 350KW DIESEL GENERATOR W/ 200

GAL TANK

SCRRAC LIFE SAFETY

GENERATOR

YES YES BOD CATERPILLAR


RM (G215)

ATS-S AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

LIFE SAFETY YES YES ASCO SERIES 300


RM (G215)

ATS-RE AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES


Div 26 - Electrical SCRRAC EMERGENCY GENERATOR

RM (G215)

ATS SLR AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES


Div 26 - Electrical SCRRAC SWITCHGEAR G201

LUTRON - LIGHTING

CONTROL ( G201A)

LIGTING MANAGEMENT HUB

QP3

LIGHTING CONTROL

YES YES SEE SPECIFICATION

S& SHEET E705

Div 26 - Electrical SCRRAC EMERGENCY GENERATOR ROOM

LUTRON - LIGHTING CONTROL

(G201A)


QP3

LIGHTING CONTROL


S& SHEET E705

Div 26 - Electrical SCRRAC EMERGENCY GENERATOR ROOM

LUTRON - LIGHTING CONTROL

(S008)


QP3

LIGHTING CONTROL


S& SHEET E705

Div 26 - Electrical SCRRAC VARIES VARIES PANELBOARD POWER DISTRIBUITION

YES YES N/A

Page 17 of 18




FPT Ptovided MFG

Div 26 - Electrical SCRRAC VARIES VARIES DISTRRIBUITTION PANEL

POWER DISTRIBUITION

YES YES N/A

Div 26 - Electrical SCRRAC VARIES VARIES SWITCHGEAR POWER DISTRIBUITION

YES YES N/A

Div 26 - Electrical SCRRAC VARIES VARIES TRANSFORMER POWER DISTRIBUITION

YES N/A N/A

Div 26 - Electrical SCRRAC STORAGE S015 LUTRON - LIGHTING CONTROL

(S008)


QP3

LIGHTING CONTROL


S& SHEET E705

Page 18 of 18



June 20, 2019

EQUIPMENT PREFUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS APPENDIX 5

APPENDIX 5

EQUIPMENT PRE-FUNCTIONAL

CHECKLISTS

Elizabeth House - SCRRACInstallation Verification Checklist

1

Equipment Name: Gas Water Heater Equipment Tag: WH-2Location: Water Pump Room (G109) Service: Domestic Hot Water Manufacturer: Model:Serial Number:

Installation Verification: (Mark with either “X” or “N/A”)General

Unit installed level and properly supported Verify service/maintenance clearanceEquipment labels installed Verify vibration isolation installed

Checked by Subcontractor Foreman: Initials Date: / /

Electrical

Power supply identified & labeled Two emergency shutdown buttons installed Service disconnect switch installed, labeled, & in sight Unit & component grounding installed properly


Ductwork & Piping

Pipes are installed and supported properly Wall/roof penetrations sealed properlyStrainers pulled, cleaned, & re-installed Combustion intake sized & located properlyGas piping connections and components are installed Exhaust flue is sized & located properlyAll gas train accessories provided per Specification Flue stack drain is piped to PH neutralizerPipes are insulated & labeled properly PH neutralizer is piped to floor drainAll valves & gauges installed properly


Controls

Sensors & control devices installed & calibrated Point to point checkout completeMixing valve is set to proper output oF Graphics & sequence of operation programing complete


General Contractor Approval: Date:

Commissioning Provider Approval Date:


1

Equipment Name: Electric Water Heater Equipment Tag: WH-5Location: Bicycle Storage (G206) Service: Domestic Hot Water Manufacturer: Model:Serial Number:




Electrical



Ductwork & Piping

Piping installed and supported properly Wall/floor penetrations sealed properlyStrainers pulled, cleaned, & re-installed All accessories provided per SpecificationValves, connections and components are installed Piping is insulated properlyPiping is labeled properly PH neutralizer is piped to floor drain


Controls






1

Equipment Name: Gas Water Heater Equipment Tag: WH-1Location: Water Pump Room (G109) Service: Domestic Hot Water Manufacturer: Model:Serial Number:




Electrical



Ductwork & Piping



Controls






1

Equipment Name: Gas Water Heater Equipment Tag: WH-3Location: Mech. Room (S003) Service: Domestic Hot Water Manufacturer: Model:Serial Number:




Electrical



Ductwork & Piping



Controls






1

Equipment Name: Gas Water Heater Equipment Tag: WH-4Location: Mech. Room (S003) Service: Domestic Hot Water Manufacturer: Model:Serial Number:




Electrical



Ductwork & Piping



Controls






1

Equipment Name: Domestic Hot Water Circulating Pump Equipment Tag: CP-1Location: Water Pump Room (G109) Service: Domestic Hot WaterManufacturer: Model:Serial Number:




Electrical

Power supply identified & labeled Service disconnect switch installed, labeled, & in sight


Piping

Flex connections where specified All valves & gauges installed properlyPipes are installed and supported properly Strainers pulled, cleaned, & re-installedPipes are insulated & labeled properly No excessive noise or vibrationsIsolation valves have been provided as needed


Controls

Aquastat set to proper output oF Point to point checkout completeTime clock set with occupied hours of





1





Electrical



Piping



Controls






1

Equipment Name: Domestic Hot Water Circulating Pump Equipment Tag: CP-4Location: Mech. Room (S003) Service: Domestic Hot WaterManufacturer: Model:Serial Number:




Electrical



Piping



Controls






1

Equipment Name: Domestic Hot Water Circulating Pump Equipment Tag: CP-5Location: Mech. Room (S003) Service: Domestic Hot WaterManufacturer: Model:Serial Number:




Electrical



Piping



Controls






1

Equipment Name: Sump Pumps (TYP of All) Equipment Tag: SP-Location: Service:Manufacturer: Model:Serial Number:


Pumps installed level and properly supported Verify service/maintenance clearanceEquipment labels installed Verify vibration isolation installed


Electrical



Piping

Flex connections where specified All valves & gauges installed properlyPipes are installed and supported properly Strainers pulled, cleaned, & re-installedPipes are labeled properly No excessive noise or vibrationsIsolation valves have been provided as needed


Controls

Floats set to proper operating levels oF Point to point checkout completeLead/Lag operation set-up Alarms (levels & failure) operationalSump filled with water and pump out verified




beyond engineering

Elizabeth House - SCRRAC Installation Verification Checklist

Equipment Name: Air Handling Unit Equipment Tag: AHU-1-1

Location: Level 1 Service: Social Hall

Manufacturer: Model:

Serial Number:

Installation Verification: (Mark with either “X” or “N/A”)

General

Unit installed level and properly supported Verify service/maintenance clearance

Equipment labels installed Verify vibration isolation installed


Electrical

Power supply identified & labeled Unit & component grounding installed

Service disconnect switch installed, labeled, & in properly

sight


Ductwork & Piping

Wall/roof penetrations sealed properly Pipes are installed and supported properly

Duct is installed and supported properly Strainers pulled, cleaned, & re-installed

Duct is insulated & labeled properly Pipes are insulated & labeled properly

All valves & gauges installed properly


Controls

Sensors & control devices installed & calibrated Point to point checkout complete

Safety items installed & verified Graphics & control programing complete

Calibrations have been verified



Commissioning Provider Approval: Date:

beyond engineering



Location: Level 1 Service: Lobby


Serial Number:


General




Electrical



sight


Ductwork & Piping






Controls







beyond engineering



Location: Level 2 Service: Exercise


Serial Number:


General




Electrical



sight


Ductwork & Piping






Controls







beyond engineering



Location: Level 2 Service: Lobby


Serial Number:


General




Electrical



sight


Ductwork & Piping






Controls







beyond engineering



Location: Level 3 Service: Community


Serial Number:


General




Electrical



sight


Ductwork & Piping






Controls







beyond engineering



Location: Level 3 Service: Gym


Serial Number:


General




Electrical



sight


Ductwork & Piping






Controls







beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Boiler Equipment Tag: B-1-1

Location: Boiler Room Service: Heating Hot Water System

Manufacturer: Model Number:

Serial Number: V/ ᶲ /Hz: kW

General




Electrical

Power supply identified & labeled Two emergency shutdown buttons installed

Service disconnect switch installed, labeled, & in sight Unit & component grounding installed properly


Venting & Piping

Pipes are installed and supported properly Wall/roof penetrations sealed properly

Strainers pulled, cleaned, & re-installed Combustion intake sized & located properly

Gas piping connections and components are installed Exhaust flue is sized & located properly

All gas train accessories provided per Specification Flue stack drain is piped to PH neutralizer

Pipes are insulated & labeled properly PH neutralizer is piped to floor drain



Controls







beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Boiler Equipment Tag: B-1-2

Location: Boiler Room Service: Heating Hot Water System



General




Electrical

Power supply identified & labeled Two emergency shutdown buttons installed

Service disconnect switch installed, labeled, & in sight Unit & component grounding installed properly


Venting & Piping

Pipes are installed and supported properly Wall/roof penetrations sealed properly

Strainers pulled, cleaned, & re-installed Combustion intake sized & located properly

Gas piping connections and components are installed Exhaust flue is sized & located properly

All gas train accessories provided per Specification Flue stack drain is piped to PH neutralizer

Pipes are insulated & labeled properly PH neutralizer is piped to floor drain



Controls





General Contractor Approval:


beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Baseboard Electric Heat Equipment Tag: BEH-A

Location: Main Lobby Service: Main Lobby




General

Installed level and properly supported Vibration isolation installed

Equipment labels installed Service/maintenance & minimum clearances


Electrical

Power supply energized and identified Fused disconnect installed and labeled


Controls

Control devices installed & calibrated Fan rotates in correct direction

Heating element energizes Heaters Interlocked to operate with the associated VAV identified.




beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Baseboard Electric Heat Equipment Tag: BEH-B





General




Electrical



Controls






beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Baseboard Electric Heat Equipment Tag: BEH-C





General




Electrical



Controls






beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Chiller Equipment Tag: CH-1-1

Location: Chiller Room Service: SCRRAC

Manufacturer: DAIKIN MODEL: WWVRNNS

SERIAL NUMBER:


General

Verify Unit Secured to Structure Verify Service/Maintenance Clearance

Verify Shipping Material Removed Verify All Piping Installed & Insulated Properly

Verify all Valves and Flexible connections installed

Verify Isolation Installed

Verify Location Matches Shop Drawing Verify Exterior Casing is Free of Damage

Verify Equipment Labels Installed Verify Chilled Water pipe leak tested.


Electrical

Verify Local Disconnect(s) Installed Verify Unit Voltage Checked

Verify VFDs /Breaker Size(s) Adequate Verify Disconnect/VFDs Labels Installed

Verify Conduit Properly Connected


Controls

Sensors & control devices installed & calibrated




beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Chiller Equipment Tag: CH-1-2


Manufacturer: DAIKIN MODEL: WWVRNNS

SERIAL NUMBER:


General








Electrical





Controls





beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Cooling tower Equipment Tag: CT-R-3

Location: Roof Service: Building Chillers

Manufacturer: BAC MODEL:

SERIAL NUMBER:


General



Verify Fan Rotating Freely Verify Isolation Installed

Verify Fan Bolts Torqued Verify Exterior Casing is Free of Damage

Verify Bearings Lubricated

Verify Water Level Controlled, Installed Properly

Verify Equipment Labels Installed Verify Ladder and Railing Installed Properly

Verify Location Matches Shop Drawing Verify Sheaves Alignment Checked

Verify Condenser Water Piping/Valves Installed Properly


Electrical

Verify Fan Motors Amps Checked Verify Fan Motors Voltage Checked

Verify Local Disconnect(s) Installed Verify VFD/Breaker Size(s) Adequate

Verify Fan Motors Rotation Verify Disconnect/VFD Labels Installed



Controls





beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Cooling tower Equipment Tag: CT-R-4

Location: Roof Service: Building Chillers

Manufacturer: BAC MODEL:

SERIAL NUMBER:


General



Verify Fan Rotating Freely Verify Isolation Installed

Verify Fan Bolts Torqued Verify Exterior Casing is Free of Damage

Verify Bearings Lubricated

Verify Water Level Controlled, Installed Properly

Verify Equipment Labels Installed Verify Ladder and Railing Installed Properly

Verify Location Matches Shop Drawing Verify Sheaves Alignment Checked

Verify Condenser Water Piping/Valves Installed Properly


Electrical

Verify Fan Motors Amps Checked Verify Fan Motors Voltage Checked

Verify Local Disconnect(s) Installed Verify VFD/Breaker Size(s) Adequate

Verify Fan Motors Rotation Verify Disconnect/VFD Labels Installed



Controls





beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Exhaust Fan Equipment Tag: EF-2-1

Location: Electrical Service: Electrical Exhaust


Serial Number:


General

Unit level and properly supported Service/maintenance/minimum clearances

Equipment labels installed Vibration isolation installed


Electrical

Disconnect(s) installed & labeled Connections to fire alarm panel complete


Venting & Piping

Ducts are installed and supported properly Verify bird screen installed

Ducts are sealed, insulated, & labeled properly Verify motorized dampers installed

Ducts are clean and clear of obstruction


Controls

Verify control devices installed & calibrated Verify point to point checkout complete

Verify direction of fan rotation Verify damper interlock with fan




beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Exhaust Fan Equipment Tag: EF-B1-1

Location: Chem Storage Service: Chem Exhaust


Serial Number:


General




Electrical



Venting & Piping





Controls






beyond engineering



Location: Pool Equipment Service: Pool Equipment Exhaust


Serial Number:


General




Electrical



Venting & Piping

Ducts are installed and supported properly Verify birdscreen installed




Controls






beyond engineering



Location: Water Pump Room Service: Pump Room Exhaust


Serial Number:


General




Electrical



Venting & Piping





Controls






beyond engineering



Location: Generator Room Service: Generator Room Exhaust


Serial Number:


General




Electrical



Venting & Piping

Ducts are installed and supported properly Verify birds creen installed




Controls






beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Energy Recovery Unit Equipment Tag: ERU-B1-1

Location: Level B1 Service: Lockers.


Serial Number:


General




Electrical



sight


Ductwork & Piping






Controls







beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Fan Coil Unit – 4 Pipe Equipment Tag: FCU-1-1

Location: Level 1 Service: Main Mech.


Serial Number:


General




Electrical



sight


Ductwork & Piping






Controls







beyond engineering



Location: Level 1 Service: Mezzanine


Serial Number:


General




Electrical



sight


Ductwork & Piping






Controls







beyond engineering



Location: Level 2 (S218) Service: Gym Storage


Serial Number:


General




Electrical



sight


Ductwork & Piping






Controls







beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Fan Coil Unit – 4 Pipe Equipment Tag: FCU-B1-1

Location: B1 Level (G105) Service: Pool Filter Room


Serial Number:


General




Electrical



sight


Ductwork & Piping






Controls







beyond engineering



Location: B1 Level (S009) Service: Life Guard


Serial Number:


General




Electrical



sight


Ductwork & Piping






Controls







beyond engineering



Location: B1 Level (S005A) Service: Wet Class


Serial Number:


General




Electrical



sight


Ductwork & Piping






Controls







beyond engineering


Equipment Name: GAS HUMIDIFERS Equipment Tag: H-3-2

Location: Level 3 Service: AHU-3-2

Manufacturer: CAREL Model: UG045

Serial Number:


General




Electrical



sight


Ductwork/Venting & Piping


Flue/Duct is installed and supported properly Strainers pulled, cleaned, & re-installed

Flue/Duct is insulated & labeled properly Pipes are insulated & labeled properly



Controls







beyond engineering


Equipment Name: GAS HUMIDIFERS Equipment Tag: H-3-3

Location: Level 2 Service: AHU-3-2.

Manufacturer: CAREL Model: UG045

Serial Number:


General




Electrical



sight


Ductwork/Venting & Piping


Flue/Duct is installed and supported properly Strainers pulled, cleaned, & re-installed

Flue/Duct is insulated & labeled properly Pipes are insulated & labeled properly



Controls







beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Heat Recovery Chiller Equipment Tag: HRC-1-1


Manufacturer: MULTISTACK MODEL: MS050XN-410A

SERIAL NUMBER:


General








Electrical





Controls





beyond engineering





SERIAL NUMBER:


General








Electrical





Controls





beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Heat Exchanger – Plate and Frame

Equipment Tag: HX-B1-1

Location: Pool Pump Room Service: SCRRAC

Manufacturer: SONDEX MODEL:

SERIAL NUMBER:


General






Verify Equipment Labels Installed Verify Water piping leak tested.




beyond engineering






SERIAL NUMBER:


General










beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Make-Up Air Equipment Tag: MAU-1-1

Location: Level 1 Service: Kitchen


Serial Number:


General




Electrical



sight


Ductwork & Piping






Controls







beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Outdoor Air Unit Equipment Tag: OAU-1-1

Location: Level 1 Service: Lockers


Serial Number:


General




Electrical



sight


Ductwork & Piping






Controls







beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Pool Dehumidification Equipment Tag: PDU-1-1

Location: Level 1 Service: SCRRAC

Manufacturer: INNOVENT Model:

Serial Numbers:


General




Electrical



sight


Ductwork & Piping






Controls







beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Pool Dehumidification Equipment Tag: PDU-1-2

Location: Level 1 Service: SCRRAC


Serial Numbers:


General




Electrical



sight


Ductwork & Piping






Controls







beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Pool Dehumidification Equipment Tag: PDU-B1-1

Location: B1 Mechanical Room Service: SCRRAC


Serial Numbers:


General




Electrical



sight


Ductwork & Piping






Controls







beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Condenser Water Pump Equipment Tag: CWP-1-1

Location: Chiller Room Service: CW Loop


Serial Number:


General




Electrical

Power supply energized and identified Pump connected to emergency power and UPS

Fused disconnect installed and labeled Pump connected to VFD


Piping

Flex connections where specified All valves & gauges installed properly

Pipes are installed and supported properly Strainers pulled, cleaned, and re-installed

Pipes are insulated and labeled properly No excessive noise or vibrations


Controls

Control devices installed & calibrated Pump rotates in correct direction

Point to point checkout complete




beyond engineering





Serial Number:


General




Electrical




Piping





Controls






beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Chilled Water Pump Equipment Tag: PCHP-1-1

Location: Chiller Room Service: PCHP Loop


Serial Number: V/ ᶲ /Hz:


General




Electrical




Piping





Controls






beyond engineering







General




Electrical




Piping





Controls






beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Boiler Water Pump Equipment Tag: PHP-1-1

Location: Boiler Room Service: PHW Loop




General




Electrical




Piping





Controls






beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Boiler Water Pump Equipment Tag: PHP-1-2

Location: Boiler Room Service: PHW Loop




General




Electrical




Piping





Controls






beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Condenser Water Pump Equipment Tag: RCHP-1-1

Location: Chiller Room Service: HRC Loop


Serial Number:


General




Electrical




Piping





Controls






beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Condenser Water Pump Equipment Tag: RHP-1-1

Location: Boiler Room Service: HRC Loop


Serial Number:


General




Electrical




Piping





Controls






beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Chilled Water Pump Equipment Tag: SCHP-1-1

Location: Chiller Room Service: SCHW Loop


Serial Number:


General




Electrical




Piping





Controls






beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Chilled Water Pump Equipment Tag: SCHP-1-2

Location: Chiller Room Service: SCHW Loop


Serial Number:


General




Electrical




Piping





Controls






beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Boiler Water Pump Equipment Tag: SHP-1-1

Location: Boiler Room Service: SHW Loop


Serial Number:


General




Electrical




Piping





Controls






beyond engineering



Location: Boiler Room Service: SHW Loop


Serial Number:


General




Electrical




Piping





Controls






beyond engineering



Location: Boiler Room Service: Pool -SHW Loop


Serial Number:


General




Electrical




Piping





Controls






beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Electric Unit Heater Equipment Tag: UH-B1-7

Location: PUMPROOM B1 Service: PUMPROOM




General




Electrical



Controls


Heating element energizes




beyond engineering



Location: PUMPROOM B1 Service: PUMPROOM




General




Electrical



Controls






beyond engineering



Location: Storage B1 Service: Storage




General




Electrical



Controls






beyond engineering



Location: Generator G215 Service: Generator




General




Electrical



Controls






beyond engineering







General




Electrical



Controls






beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Electric Wall Heater Equipment Tag: WH-1-1

Location: Stair E Service: Stair E




General




Electrical



Controls






beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Electric Wall Heater Equipment Tag: WH-1-2

Location: Stair D Service: Stair D




General




Electrical



Controls






beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Electric Wall Heater Equipment Tag: WH-B1-1

Location: Stair F Service: Stair F




General




Electrical



Controls




Final Sign-Off

Manufacturer’s startup complete and attached No open issues

Approved O&M Manual is available Installed system is shown on record drawings




beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Mini-Split System (Cooling only) Equipment Tags: MSSI-B1-3 MSSO-B1-3

Location: Telecom B1 Serves: Telecom RVITELECOMCE:

Indoor Unit Outdoor Unit

Manufacturer: Daikin Manufacturer: Daikin

Serial Number: Serial Number:

Model Number: FAQ Model Number: RZR


General

Verify installed level and properly supported Verify outdoor unit mounted on stand

Verify equipment labels installed Verify vibration isolation installed

Verify condensate pump installed Verify service/maintenance clearance


Electrical

Service disconnect switch installed & labeled Verify disconnect labels installed

Verify indoor unit powered from outdoor unit Verify power provided for condensate pump

Smoke detectors and smoke dampers wired


Piping

Verify piping connections at outdoor unit Verify pipes are installed & supported properly

Verify piping connections at indoor unit Verify pipes are properly insulated & labeled

Verify condensate pump piped to drain


Controls


Verify direction of outdoor unit fan rotation Verify direction of indoor unit fan rotation




beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Mini-Split System (Heat Pump) Equipment Tags: MSSI-B1-4 MSSO-B1-4

Location: Fire pump B1 Serves: Fire pump RVITELECOMCE:




Model Number: FBQ Model Number: RZQ


General





Electrical





Piping





Controls






beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Mini-Split System (Cooling only) Equipment Tags: MSSI-B2-1 MSSO-B2-1

Location: Telecom B2 Serves: Telecom RVITELECOMCE:




Model Number: FAQ Model Number: RZR


General





Electrical





Piping





Controls






beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Mini-Split System (Heat Pump) Equipment Tags: MSSI-B2-3 MSSO-B2-3

Location: Switchgear Serves: Switchgear RVITELECOMCE:




Model Number: FBQ Model Number: RZQ


General





Electrical





Piping





Controls






beyond engineering


Equipment Name: VAV- W/ Electric Heat Equipment Tag: VAV-____-____Location: Varies Service: Varies

Use this in reference with VAV provided matrix




Electrical

Power supply identified & labeled Unit & component grounding installed Service disconnect switch installed, labeled, & in properlysight


Ductwork & Piping

Wall/roof penetrations sealed properly Pipes are installed and supported properlyDuct is installed and supported properly Strainers pulled, cleaned, & re-installedDuct is insulated & labeled properly Pipes are insulated & labeled properly



Controls

Sensors & control devices installed & calibrated Point to point checkout completeSafety items installed & verified Graphics & control programing completeCalibrations have been verified


Final Sign-Off

Manufacturer’s startup complete and attached Verify approved O&M Manual is availableVerify installed system is shown on record Verify no open issuesdrawings




Elizabeth square, Phase 1Elizabeth House III - SCRRAC

Installation Verification Checklist Matrix

2 of 3

VAV TERMINALBOX UNIT TAG

INSTALLATION VERIFICATION: (Mark with value or "X")

BOX LOCATION AREA SERVED GENERAL ELECTRICAL DUCT PIPING CONTROLFINAL SIGN-

OFFCOMMENTS

VAV- 1-1-1 KITCHEN KITCHEN

VAV- 1-1-2 SOCIAL HALL SOCIAL HALL




VAV- 1-1-6 SOCIAL STORAGE SOCIAL STORAGE

VAV- 1-2-1 HOF/VEST HOF/VEST

VAV- 1-2-2 LOBBY/PRE-FUNC LOBBY/PRE-FUNC

VAV- 1-2-3 CAFÉ/CORRIDOR CAFÉ/CORRIDOR

VAV- 1-2-4 ADMIN OFFICE ADMIN OFFICE

VAV- 1-2-5 ADMIN OFFICE ADMIN OFFICE

VAV- 2-1-1 FITNESS FITNESS



VAV- 2-1-4 EXERCISE STUDIO EXERCISE STUDIO




VAV- 2-1-8 RESTROOMS RESTROOMS

VAV- 2-1-9 TELECOM/DATA TELECOM/DATA

VAV- 2-2-1 LOBBY LOBBY



VAV- 2-2-4 LOBBY/REC LOBBY/REC

VAV- 2-2-5 FAMILY PLAY FAMILY PLAY

Elizabeth square, Phase 1Elizabeth House III - SCRRAC

Installation Verification Checklist Matrix

3 of 3


VAV- 2-2-7 HOLY CROSS CORR. HOLY CROSS CORR.

VAV- 3-1-1 COMM. LOUNGE COMM. LOUNGE

VAV- 3-1-2 COMM. LOUNGE COMM. LOUNGE

VAV- 3-1-3 ACTIVITY ACTIVITY

VAV- 3-1-4 RESTROOMS RESTROOMS


VAV- 3-1-6 ART ART

VAV- 3-1-7 ART ART

VAV- 3-1-8 GAME GAME

VAV- 3-1-9 GAME GAME



VAV- 3-1-12 CORRIDOR CORRIDOR

VAV- 3-1-13 CONFERENCE CONFERENCE


VAV- 3-1-15 ELEV. CONTROL ELEV. CONTROL

VAV- 3-1-16 TELECOM/DATA TELECOM/DATA

VAV- 3-1-17 CONFERENCE CONFERENCE

VAV TERMINALBOX UNIT TAG

INSTALLATION VERIFICATION: (Mark with value or "X")

BOX LOCATION AREA SERVED GENERAL ELECTRICAL DUCT PIPING CONTROLFINAL SIGN-

OFFCOMMENTS


1

EQUIPMENT NAME: Emergency Diesel Generator UNIT ID: GENERATORLOCATION: Emergency Generator Room (G215) SERVICE: SCRRAC Life Safety MANUFACTURER: CATERPILLAR MODEL NUMBER:SERIAL NUMBER: V/ ᶲ /Hz: kW 350


Unit installed level & secured to slab properly Service/maintenance & min manufacturer clearancesEquipment labels installed and visible Warning signs installed as requiredVerify vibration isolation installed Safety items installed & verified


Electrical

Power supply identified & labeled Annunciation panel remotely installed & operationalService disconnect switch installed & labeled Remote E-stop installed & operationalFlex electrical & control connections provided Batteries fully charged & ready for serviceWiring - correct bend radius, no insulation damage Cables terminated in lugs, torqued per ManufacturerPower conductors braced/tied per manufacturer Anchor, alignment, bonding & grounding per CodeConduit is Properly Installed and Free of Damage


Venting & Piping

Enclosure roof penetrations sealed properly Intake and discharge air dampers functionalLouvers and screen installed properly Exhaust flue is sized & located properly – rain capFluids full, operation, & free of leaks (fuel, coolant, lube) Exhaust silencer & pipe insulation complete Pipes are installed and supported properly – flex Exhaust has condensate drain installed at silencerAll valves & gauges installed properly Sensors & control devices installed & calibrated





1

EQUIPMENT NAME: Emergency Generator (Existing Natural Gas)

UNIT ID: GENERATOR

LOCATION: Emergency Generator Room (G215) SERVICE: SCRRAC Shelter-In-PlaceMANUFACTURER: MODEL NUMBER:SERIAL NUMBER: V/ ᶲ /Hz: kW


Unit installed level & secured to slab properly Service/maintenance & min manufacturer clearancesEquipment labels installed and visible Warning signs installed as requiredVerify vibration isolation installed Safety items installed & verified


Electrical

Power supply identified & labeled Annunciation panel remotely installed & operationalService disconnect switch installed & labeled Remote E-stop installed & operationalFlex electrical & control connections provided Batteries fully charged & ready for serviceWiring - correct bend radius, no insulation damage Cables terminated in lugs, torqued per ManufacturerPower conductors braced/tied per manufacturer Anchor, alignment, bonding & grounding per CodeConduit is Properly Installed and Free of Damage


Venting & Piping

Enclosure roof penetrations sealed properly Intake and discharge air dampers functionalLouvers and screen installed properly Exhaust flue is sized & located properly – rain capFluids full, operation, & free of leaks (fuel, coolant, lube) Exhaust silencer & pipe insulation complete Pipes are installed and supported properly – flex Exhaust has condensate drain installed at silencerAll valves & gauges installed properly Sensors & control devices installed & calibrated




Elizabeth House - SCRRACInstallation Verification

1

EQUIPMENT NAME: Automatic Transfer Switch UNIT ID: ATS-ELOCATION: Emergency Generator RM (G215) SERVICE: Life SafetyMANUFACTURER: MODEL:SERIAL NUMBER:


Equipment installed level & supported properly Equipment labels installedApplication of manufacturers recommend lubricants Manual transfer operation warning attached & visibleService/maintenance & min manufacturer clearances Room & enclosure - clean, dry & door lockableGang switch mechanism working properly


Electrical

Fed from appropriate sources as indicated on CDs Cables terminated in lugs torques per ManufacturerServing appropriate sources as indicated on CDs Anchor, alignment, bonding & grounding per codeNormal & Emergency sources available Verify Normal & Emergency line side phase rotation


Controls

Manual transfer operation performed successfully Control wiring included in generator startAutomatic transfer operation performed successfully Settings adjusted per Engineer/Specifications





1

EQUIPMENT NAME: Automatic Transfer Switch UNIT ID: ATS-LRLOCATION: Emergency Generator RM (G215) SERVICE: Life SafetyMANUFACTURER: MODEL:SERIAL NUMBER:




Electrical



Controls






1

EQUIPMENT NAME: Automatic Transfer Switch UNIT ID: ATS-SLOCATION: Emergency Generator RM (G215) SERVICE: Life SafetyMANUFACTURER: MODEL:SERIAL NUMBER:




Electrical



Controls






24 Hartwell Avenue, Third Floor, Lexington, Massachusetts 02421 1

1

EQUIPMENT NAME: Distribution Panel (typ of all) UNIT ID:LOCATION: SERVICE: SCRRACMANUFACTURER: MODEL:SERIAL NUMBER:

Pre-Installation Verification: (Mark with either “X” or “N/A”)General

Actual manufacturer matches submittal Shipping materials removedActual model number matches submittal Components provided per submittalUnit inspected for physical damage Remove enclosure door and set aside



Determine location and mount panel Equipment labels installedEquipment installed level & supported properly Arc Flash warning attached & visibleService/maintenance & min manufacturer clearances Room & enclosure - clean, dry & door lockableConduits (Feeder and Branch Circuit) complete


Electrical

Pull dedicated line & neutral - terminate to transformer Cables terminated in lugs, torqued per ManufacturerPull line wires from circuit breaker to relays Test all cables with appropriate cable testerConnect load wiring to relays Ground/ground bus installed & terminated properlySafely Test for shorts prior to powering circuits Phasing marked correctlyClear faults – line, load & relay wiring Breakers operational & working properly


Final Sign-Off

Manufacturer’s startup complete and attached Typed circuit directory completed and accurateNo open issues Filler plates installed in unused panel spacesInstalled system is shown on record drawings Amp - Rated ActualInsulation resistance test complete & attached Volt - Rated ActualDevices installed at proper amp rating & all setting Components/are clearly & correctly identified with have been adjusted to match system Short Circuit & permanent labels (bus, section, breaker, & devices)Coordination Study Clean cabinet of any construction debris or dust

Install enclosure door






1

EQUIPMENT NAME: Lighting Control Panel UNIT ID:LOCATION: SERVICE:MANUFACTURER: MODEL:SERIAL NUMBER:


Determine location and mount panel on wall Equipment labels installedEquipment installed level & supported properly Arc Flash warning attached & visibleService/maintenance & min manufacturer clearances Room & enclosure - clean, dry & door lockablePunch knockout holes for high & low voltage conduit Panel directory is typed and accurate


Electrical

Pull dedicated line & neutral - terminate to transformer Pull CAT5 data lines to panel and device and terminatePull line wires from circuit breaker box to relays Cables terminated in lugs torques per ManufacturerConnect line wires to load wires Test all cables with appropriate cable testerSafely Test for shorts prior to powering circuits Pull any switch, dimmer, or sensor wires and terminateClear faults – connect line and load wires to relay Ground/ground bus installed & terminated properlyPull load wires to lighting loads from relay Breaker operational & working properly






1

EQUIPMENT NAME: Panelboard (typ of all) UNIT ID:LOCATION: SERVICE: SCRRACMANUFACTURER: MODEL:SERIAL NUMBER:







Electrical



Final Sign-Off

No open issues Typed circuit directory completed and accurateManufacturer’s startup complete and attached Filler plates installed in unused panel spacesInsulation resistance test complete & attached Amp - Rated ActualInstalled system is shown on record drawings Volt - Rated Actual

Devices installed at proper amp rating & all setting have been adjusted to match system Short Circuit &Coordination Study

Clean cabinet of any construction debris or dustInstall enclosure door

Components/are clearly & correctly identified with permanent labels (bus, section, breaker, & devices)






1

EQUIPMENT NAME: Switchgear (typ of all) UNIT ID:LOCATION: SERVICE: SCRRACMANUFACTURER: MODEL:SERIAL NUMBER:







Electrical



Final Sign-Off

No open issues Typed circuit directory completed and accurateManufacturer’s startup complete and attached Filler plates installed in unused panel spacesInsulation resistance test complete & attached Amp - Rated ActualInstalled system is shown on record drawings Volt - Rated Actual

Devices installed at proper amp rating & all setting have been adjusted to match system Short Circuit &Coordination Study

Clean cabinet of any construction debris or dustInstall enclosure door

Components/are clearly & correctly identified with permanent labels (bus, section, breaker, & devices)






1

EQUIPMENT NAME: Transformer (typ of all) UNIT ID:LOCATION: SERVICE: SCRRACMANUFACTURER: MODEL:SERIAL NUMBER:





Determine location and mount panel

Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary

Equipment installed level & supported properly Arc Flash warning attached & visibleService/maintenance & min manufacturer clearances Room & enclosure - clean, dry & lockableConduits (Feeder and Branch Circuit) complete


Electrical

Pull dedicated line & neutral - terminate to transformer Cables terminated in lugs, torqued per ManufacturerPull line wires from switchgear Test all cables with appropriate cable testerConnect load wiring to relays Ground/ground bus installed & terminated properlySafely Test for shorts prior to powering circuits Phasing marked correctlyClear faults – line, load & relay wiring Breakers operational & working properly


Final Sign-Off

Manufacturer’s startup complete and attached Components/are clearly & correctly identified with permanent labels (bus, section, breaker, & devices)

No open issues Install enclosure doorInstalled system is shown on record drawings Amp - Rated ActualInsulation resistance test complete & attached Volt - Rated ActualDevices installed at proper amp rating & all setting Clean cabinet of any construction debris or dusthave been adjusted to match system Short Circuit &Coordination Study






2

beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Filter Pump Equipment Tag: P-1ALocation: Pool Filter Room Service: Competition PoolManufacturer: Model Number:Serial Number: V/ ᶲ /Hz: kW


Installed level and properly supported Vibration isolation installedEquipment labels installed Service/maintenance & minimum clearances


Electrical

Power supply energized and identified Pump connected to emergency power and UPSFused disconnect installed and labeled Pump connected to VFD


Piping

Flex connections where specified All valves & gauges installed properlyPipes are installed and supported properly Strainers pulled, cleaned, and re-installedPipes are insulated and labeled properly No excessive noise or vibrations


Controls

Control devices installed & calibrated Pump rotates in correct directionPoint to point checkout complete


Final Sign-Off

Verify approved TAB report available Verify no open issuesVerify installed system is shown on record drawings Manufacturer’s startup complete and attachedVerify approved O&M Manual is available




beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Filter Pump Equipment Tag: P-1BLocation: Pool Filter Room Service: Competition PoolManufacturer: Model Number:Serial Number: V/ ᶲ /Hz: kW




Electrical



Piping



Controls



Final Sign-Off





beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Filter Pump Equipment Tag: P-2Location: Pool Filter Room Service: Recreation PoolManufacturer: Model Number:Serial Number: V/ ᶲ /Hz: kW




Electrical



Piping



Controls



Final Sign-Off





beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Filter Pump Equipment Tag: P-3Location: Pool Filter Room Service: Leisure PoolManufacturer: Model Number:Serial Number: V/ ᶲ /Hz: kW




Electrical



Piping



Controls



Final Sign-Off





beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Filter Pump Equipment Tag: P-4Location: Pool Filter Room Service: Leisure SPAManufacturer: Model Number:Serial Number: V/ ᶲ /Hz: kW




Electrical



Piping



Controls



Final Sign-Off





beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Filter Pump Equipment Tag: P-5Location: Pool Filter Room Service: Recreation SPAManufacturer: Model Number:Serial Number: V/ ᶲ /Hz: kW




Electrical



Piping



Controls



Final Sign-Off





beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Water Feature Pool Pump W/ VFD Equipment Tag: WF-P-1Location: Pool Filter Room Service: Leisure PoolManufacturer: Model Number:Serial Number: V/ ᶲ /Hz: kW




Electrical



Piping



Controls



Final Sign-Off





beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Tidal Bucket Pump Equipment Tag: WF-P-2Location: Pool Filter Room Service: Leisure PoolManufacturer: Model Number:Serial Number: V/ ᶲ /Hz: kW




Electrical



Piping



Controls



Final Sign-Off





beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Jet Pump W/ VFD Equipment Tag: WF-P-3Location: Pool Filter Room Service: Leisure SPAManufacturer: Model Number:Serial Number: V/ ᶲ /Hz: kW




Electrical



Piping



Controls



Final Sign-Off





beyond engineering


Equipment Name: Jet Pump Equipment Tag: WF-P-4Location: Pool Filter Room Service: Recreation SPAManufacturer: Model Number:Serial Number: V/ ᶲ /Hz: kW




Electrical



Piping



Controls



Final Sign-Off







June 20, 2019

FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURES APPENDIX 6

APPENDIX 6

FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURES

beyond engineering

beyond engineering

Elizabeth Square, Phase IElizabeth House III - SCRRAC

Functional Performance Test

1 of 5

OverviewEquipment/Systems Domestic Hot Water System (typ of WH-1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and associated

circulation pump) Complete one form for eachEquipment ID/Tag No. WH-____ & CP-______Equipment Location: VariesArea(s) Served: SCRRAC VariesSystem Description: Gas Fired Hot Water Heater and Circulating pump Spec Section(s): 01 9113.14, 22 1116, 22 3400

Test ExecutionInitial Date: Initial Time:Retest Date: Retest Time:

☐ Dry ☐ Rain ☐ Snow ☐ Sunny ☐ CloudyOutside Air Temperature oF Outside Air Humidity %RHHot Water Temperature oF Chilled Water Temperature oF

Ambient Conditions:

Equipment Data Equipment

NameplateCP-1 WH-1

Matches Approved Submittal

Manufacturer ☐

Model Number ☐Serial Number

Prerequisite DocumentationItem Yes NoVerify that the Pre-Functional Checklist for this piece of equipment has been successfully completed, signed by appropriate parties, and returned to the Commissioning Authority.

☐ ☐

Contractor has issued certification of passed pressure test. ☐ ☐

Contractor has issued certification of approved system flushing ☐ ☐Verify that the manufacturer’s start-up procedure for this piece of equipment has been successfully completed and a copy of the completed start-up procedure has been submitted to the Commissioning Authority.

☐ ☐

Contractor has certified passing of water heater and associated pump leak test ☐ ☐Verify that Test & Balance for this piece of equipment has been successfully completed, reviewed and approved by the Engineer of record, and submitted to the Commissioning Authority.

☐ ☐

beyond engineering

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah

www.aha-engineers.com 2 of 5

Prerequisite DocumentationItem Yes No

Verify unit is tied into the BMS system and graphics are complete. (if applicable) ☐ ☐

Verify all required I/O points are listed on the BMS system. (if applicable) ☐ ☐Verify ATC point-to-point and sensor/actuator calibration checks have been completed, documented and has been submitted to the Commissioning Authority. (if applicable) ☐ ☐

All trends specified at the end of this test have been setup and are trending. (if applicable) ☐ ☐

Required Personnel and Tools Available ☐ ☐

System Ready for Functional Testing ☐ ☐

Participants:Required Name Company Project Role

Yes No

CM/GC ☐ ☐

Owner/Owners Rep ☐ ☐

Sub-Contractor ☐ ☐

Controls Contractor ☐ ☐Commissioning Authority ☐ ☐

Commissioning Agent ☐ ☐

Supplies Required for Testing Tools/Supplies Provided by

Schedule

System runs based on non-scheduled variable (e.g.: temperature, pressure) ☒

System runs 24 hours a day, 7 days a week (no schedule) ☒

System runs on then programmable schedule indicated below ☐

beyond engineering

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Mon - Fri Sat - Sun Holiday

*Adj – indicates the point is adjustableSetpoints

Parameter Expected Actual Unit BMS Adj

Temperature (oF) ☐ ☐ ☐Domestic Hot Water Setpoint 120 oF oF ☒ ☐ ☒Kitchen Hot Water Setpoint 140 oF

Alarm Temperature (oF / psi) ☒ ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

☐ ☐ ☐

Initial ConditionsConditions Unit/ Measured Thermostat/ BMSTemperature oF oF

System hot water temperature oF oF

Alarm (normal) (alarm) (normal) (alarm)

Status (on) (off) (on) (off)

Water Heater

Circulation pump

Comments: The above set points and initial conditions are key items for commissioning purposes. Review all data available at local controllers and the Building Management System (BMS) front-end computer and note any additional values the affect system operations (e.g. lockouts or time delays). Some values will require the use of measurement equipment.

Device Calibration ChecksThe actuators or devices listed below are to be checked for calibration. This is a spot check on a sample of the calibrations completed during the pre-functional checklist and contractor start-up processes. “In calibration” means observing a readout at the BMS and going to the actuator or controlled device and verifying that the BMS reading is correct, this was done during the recording of initial conditions. For the calibration portion - command speed or position to open, intermediate, and closed. Record read out and field observations at each.Below add actual sampled devices

beyond engineering

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Device Calibration Checks

Pass Device or Actuator & Location Procedure/ State 1st BAS

ValueSite

Observation Final BAS Reading Yes No

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐Pump

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

1. Closed ☐ ☐

2. 50 % ☐ ☐Valve

3. Full Open ☐ ☐

Sensor Calibration ChecksCheck the sensors listed below for calibration and adequate location. This is a sampling check of calibrations done during the pre-functional checklist and contractor start-up processes. “In calibration” means making a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 6 inches of the site sensor. Verify that the sensor reading (via permanent thermostat, gauge, packaged control panel or Building Management System [BMS]) compared to the test instrument-measured value is within the tolerances specified. If not, install offset at BMS, calibrate or replace sensor. Use the same test instrument as used for the original calibration, if possible. This should instrument should be provided by the controls or mechanical contractor.Below add actual sampled devices

Sensor Calibration ChecksLocation

OK* Pass **Sensor & Location

Yes No

Gauge or Pkg & BAS

Values

Instrument Measured

Value

Point Type

Yes No

Supply Temperature ☐ ☐ oF oF AI ☐ ☐

Return Temperature ☐ ☐ oF oF AI ☐ ☐

Flow Switch ☐ ☐ AI ☐ ☐Pump Start/Stop ☐ ☐ DO ☐ ☐Pump Status ☐ ☐ DI ☐ ☐

* Sensor location is appropriate and away from cause of erratic operation.** See acceptable ranges per specifications in table below

Sensor Calibration PointsPoint Acceptable RangeStatic Pressure ± 0.3 in.wcTemperature ± 1 FDifferential Pressure ± 10 %

beyond engineering

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Airflow ± 10 %Waterflow ± 10 %

Comments:

Functional Performance VerificationThe following procedures are a summary of the steps required to test the system function as described in the attached sequence of operations. The intent is for the system operation to be reviewed at both the piece of equipment (local/measured) and the controller - thermostat, BMS, DDC, etc. (Control). It should be noted that additional steps (not listed) may be required in order to achieve the noted simulation. Items will be noted as Pass Yes/No, N/A – Not Applicable, or N/T – Not Tested. Detailed information on failures will be noted in the commissioning issues log...

Control# Testing Procedure Pass CommentDescription: Gas fired domestic water heater and circulator pump. Water Heater (WH-x) supplied with internal controls and cycles pump as required.

1.

System Operation

Water Heater will cycle i=on and off based on sensed hot water temperature in the system.

As the water heater cycles on and off the associate circulating pump (interlocked) will cycle in unison.

Y / N

Alarm# Testing Procedure Pass Comment1. Y / N2. Y / N3. Y / N

Wrap Up# Testing Procedure Pass Comment1. Y / N2. Y / N3. Y / N

beyond engineering

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Comments:

Trend Report

The following points will be trended every 15 minutes for period of not less than 2 weeks. These trends will be conducted at least twice a year: one in the cooling season and once in the heating season.

Completed Trend Reports will be submitted in a format compatible with MS Excel.

Trend ReportTrend Trend Group Points

Acceptance of Test:

☐ This test cannot be accepted at this time due to the Corrective Issues noted above.

☐This test is accepted by the Commissioning Authority identified below. Any Corrective Issues noted above do not adversely impact the overall performance of the system.

Tested by Date

Witnessed by DateCommissioning Provider

Attachment(s): Sequence of Operations

beyond engineering

beyond engineering



1 of 7

OverviewEquipment/Systems Sump Pump (typ) Complete form for eachEquipment ID/Tag No. SP-Equipment Location:Area(s) Served: SCRRACSystem Description: Sump PumpSpec Section(s): 01 9113.14, 22 1429



Ambient Conditions:


NameplateSP-___


Manufacturer n/a ☐

Model Number n/a ☐Serial Number n/a


☐ ☐

Verify that the manufacturer’s start-up procedure for this piece of equipment has been successfully completed and a copy of the completed start-up procedure has been submitted to the Commissioning Authority.

☐ ☐

Verify that Test & Balance for this piece of equipment has been successfully completed, reviewed and approved by the Engineer of record, and submitted to the Commissioning Authority.

☐ ☐

Verify unit is tied into the BMS system and graphics are complete. ☐ ☐

Verify all required I/O points are listed on the BMS system. ☐ ☐Verify ATC point-to-point and sensor/actuator calibration checks have been completed, documented and has been submitted to the Commissioning Authority. ☐ ☐

beyond engineering

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



All trends specified at the end of this test have been setup and are trending. ☐ ☐




Yes No

CM/GC ☐ ☐






Schedule

System runs based on non-scheduled variable (e.g.: temperature, pressure) ☐


System runs on then programmable schedule indicated below (TBD) ☐




☐ ☐ ☐

beyond engineering

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


SetpointsParameter Expected Actual Unit BMS AdjLead Off 6” ☒ ☐ ☐Lead On 3’ 6” ☒ ☐ ☐Lag On 4’ 6” ☒ ☐ ☐High Level 5’ ☒ ☐ ☐Emergency High Level 5’ 6” ☒ ☐ ☐

Alarm ☒ ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐Emergency Level 5’ 6” ☒ ☐ ☐High Level 5’ ☒ ☐ ☐

Initial ConditionsConditions Unit/ Measured Thermostat/ BMSSump Level oF oF

Level “ n/a


High Water Level

Emergency High Level

Pump Start


Pump Status (6)

Pump Status (7)



beyond engineering

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Pass Device or Actuator & Location Procedure/ State Site

Observation ActualYes No

1.Lead On

☐ ☐

2.Lag On

☐ ☐Level Floats

3. Off ☐ ☐

1. High ☐ ☐Alarm Level(s)

2. Emer ☐ ☐




Yes No

Gauge or Pkg & BAS

Values

Instrument Measured

Value

Point Type

Yes No

Float Switch ☐ ☐ AI ☐ ☐Pump Start/Stop ☐ ☐ DO ☐ ☐Pump Status ☐ ☐ DI ☐ ☐


Sensor Calibration PointsPoint Acceptable RangeStatic Pressure ± 0.3 in.wcTemperature ± 1 FDifferential Pressure ± 10 %Airflow ± 10 %Waterflow ± 10 %

Comments:

beyond engineering

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Control# Testing Procedure Pass CommentDescription: The sump pumps shall be provided with and controlled by a factory provided, factory mounted and wired, control system including a controller. Below is a sequence of operation.

The sequence of operation is provided to define the basic intent of unit function but is not to conflict with, override or take precedence over the factory controls, sequences, safeties and alarms. The sump pumps shall be monitored by the BAS system

1.

Upon water level of lead start level the internal control package will enable the lead pump.

Once the water level is drawn down below the normal Lead Off level the pump will cycle off.

Y / N

2.

If at any time the water level reaches the “Lag Level” the second pump will be enabled along with the Lead pump.

Both pumps will run in unison till the water level reaches the normal Off level then both pumps will cycle off.

Y / N

Alarm# Testing Procedure Pass Comment1. High Level Alarm Y / N2. Emergency Level Alarm Y / N3. Y / N4. Y / N5. Y / N6. Y / N7. Y / N

beyond engineering

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


8. Y / N9. Y / N10. Y / N11. Y / N12. Y / N13. Y / N

Wrap Up# Testing Procedure Pass Comment1. Y / N2. Y / N3. Y / N4. Y / N5. Y / N6. Y / N7. Y / N8. Y / N

Comments:

Trend Report




Acceptance of Test:

beyond engineering

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah




Tested by Date



beyond engineering

Elizabeth Square, Phase I Elizabeth House III - SCRRAC


1 of 12

Overview

Equipment/Systems AHU-1-1 (typ. of 1-2, 2-1, 2-2, 3-1) Complete one for each

Equipment ID/Tag No. AHU 1-1

Equipment Location: LEVEL 1

Area(s) Served: SCRRAC SOCIAL HALL

System Description: AIR HANDLING UNITS – VARIABLE AIR VOLUME

Spec Section(s): 23 0993 2.7, 23 7313.16

Test Execution

Initial Date: Initial Time:

Retest Date: Retest Time:

Ambient Conditions: ☐ Dry ☐ Rain ☐ Snow ☐ Sunny ☐ Cloudy

Outside Air Temperature oF Outside Air Humidity %RH

Hot Water Temperature oF Chilled Water Temperature oF

Equipment Data

Equipment

Nameplate

AHU-1-1



Model Number n/a ☐

Serial Number n/a

Prerequisite Documentation

Item Yes No

Verify that the Pre-Functional Checklist for this piece of equipment has been successfully completed, signed by appropriate parties, and returned to the Commissioning Authority.

☐ ☐


☐ ☐


☐ ☐


Verify all required I/O points are listed on the BMS system. ☐ ☐ Verify ATC point-to-point and sensor/actuator calibration checks have been completed, documented and has been submitted to the Commissioning Authority. ☐ ☐

beyond engineering

Elizabeth Square, Phase I

Elizabeth House III - SCRRAC Functional Performance Test

-3000 www.ah



Item Yes No




Participants:

Name Company Project Role Required

Yes No

CM/GC ☐ ☐



Controls Contractor ☐ ☐

Commissioning Authority ☐ ☐


Supplies Required for Testing

Tools/Supplies Provided by

Schedule


System runs 24 hours a day, 7 days a week (no schedule) ☐

System runs on then programmable schedule indicated below (TBD) ☒


*Adj – indicates the point is adjustable

Setpoints


Temperature (oF) ☐ ☐ ☐

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Setpoints


Supply air temperature set point (leaving unit) Outside Air Reset

Reset from 60°F (adj.)

to 55°F (adj)

oF ☐ ☒ ☒

Supply Air Static Pressure (AHU-1-1, 1-2, 2-1, 2-2, 2-1 only)

T&B to set

“wc ☐ ☒ ☒

Preheating Mixed Air Temperature Setpoint 55 deg F oF ☐ ☒ ☒

Alarm Temperature (oF / psi) ☒ ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐ High Static Shutdown TBD ☐ ☐ ☐ Freeze stat 35 deg F ☒ ☒ ☒ High Supply Air Static Pressure 25% (adj.)

greater than setpoint.

☐ ☒ ☒

Low Supply Air Static Pressure 25% (adj.) less than setpoint

☐ ☒ ☒

High Supply Air Temperature 5°F (adj.) greater than

setpoint. ☐ ☒ ☒

Low Supply Air Temperature 45ºF (adj) ☐ ☒ ☒ High Mixed Air Temp greater than

90°F (adj.). ☐ ☒ ☒

Low Mixed Air Temp: is less than 45°F (adj.).

☐ ☒ ☒

High Return Air Humidity greater than 70% (a

dj) ☐ ☒ ☒

Low Return Air Humidity less than 35% (a

dj.) ☐ ☒ ☒

High Return Air Temp greater than 90°F (adj.)

Low Return Air Temp less than 45°F (adj.)

Initial Conditions

Conditions Unit/ Measured Thermostat/ BMS

Temperature oF oF

Supply air temperature set point (leaving unit) oF oF

Supply Air Static Pressure “wc “wc

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Initial Conditions


(AHU-1-1, 1-2, 2-1, 2-2, 2-1)

Building Static Pressure (AHU-2-1, 3-1 only) oF oF

Mixed Air Temperature oF oF

Heat Exchanger Discharge Air Temperature (AHU-2-1, 3-1 only)

oF oF

Heat Exchanger Discharge Air Humidity (AHU-2-1, 3-1 only)

oF oF

Return Air Humidity % %

Return Air Temperature oF oF

Supply Air Temperature

Preheating Mixed Air Temperature oF oF

Return Air Dampers % %

Exhaust Air Dampers % %

Outside Air Dampers % %

Humidity % %



High Static Shutdown

Freeze stat

Supply Fan Failure

Supply Fav VFD Failure

Supply and Return Air Smoke Detection

Filter Differential Pressure

Chilled Water Control Valve Failure

Pre-Heating Hot Water Control Valve Failure

Return Air Dampers Failure

Exhaust Air Dampers Failure

Outside Air Dampers Failure

Low Supply Air Static Pressure

High Supply Air Temperature

Low Supply Air Temperature

High Mixed Air Temp

Low Mixed Air Temp

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Initial Conditions


Damper Position % %





Supply Fan Status

Supply Fan Start/Stop

Exhaust Fan Status (AHU-2-1, 3-1)

Exhaust Fan Start/Stop (AHU-2-1, 3-1)

Operating Hours hrs hrs

Supply Fan VFD

Exhaust Fan VFD (AHU-2-1, 3-1)

Valve 2-way & 3 Way (open) (closed) (open) (closed)

Chilled Water Control Valve

Pre-Heating Hot Water Control Valve

VFD Speed hz/% hz/%

Supply fan VFD speed

Exhaust Fan VFD Speed (AHU-2-1, 3-1 only)

Comments:

The above set points and initial conditions are key items for commissioning purposes. Review all data available at local controllers and the Building Management System (BMS) front-end computer and note any additional values the affect system operations (e.g. lockouts or time delays). Some values will require the use of measurement equipment.


The actuators or devices listed below are to be checked for calibration. This is a spot check on a sample of the calibrations completed during the pre-functional checklist and contractor start-up processes. “In calibration” means observing a readout at the BMS and going to the actuator or controlled device and verifying that the BMS reading is correct, this was done during the recording of initial conditions. For the calibration portion - command speed or position to open, intermediate, and closed. Record read out and field observations at each. Below add actual sampled devices

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Device or Actuator & Location

Procedure/ State 1st BAS Value

Site Observation

Final BAS Reading

Pass

Yes No

Supply Fan VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

Supply Fan VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

Valve

1. Closed ☐ ☐

2. 50 % ☐ ☐


Sensor Calibration Checks

Check the sensors listed below for calibration and adequate location. This is a sampling check of calibrations done during the pre-functional checklist and contractor start-up processes. “In calibration” means making a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 6 inches of the site sensor. Verify that the sensor reading (via permanent thermostat, gauge, packaged control panel or Building Management System [BMS]) compared to the test instrument-measured value is within the tolerances specified. If not, install offset at BMS, calibrate or replace sensor. Use the same test instrument as used for the original calibration, if possible. This should instrument should be provided by the controls or mechanical contractor. Below add actual sampled devices


Sensor & Location

Location OK*

Gauge or Pkg & BAS

Values

Instrument Measured

Value

Point Type

Pass **

Yes No Yes No



Flow Switch ☐ ☐ AI ☐ ☐

Pump Start/Stop ☐ ☐ DO ☐ ☐

Pump Status ☐ ☐ DI ☐ ☐

Pump VFD Fault ☐ ☐ DI ☐ ☐ * Sensor location is appropriate and away from cause of erratic operation. ** See acceptable ranges per specifications in table below

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Sensor Calibration Points

Point Acceptable Range

Static Pressure ± 0.3 in.wc

Temperature ± 1 F

Differential Pressure ± 10 %

Airflow ± 10 %

Waterflow ± 10 %

Comments:

Functional Performance Verification

The following procedures are a summary of the steps required to test the system function as described in the attached sequence of operations. The intent is for the system operation to be reviewed at both the piece of equipment (local/measured) and the controller - thermostat, BMS, DDC, etc. (Control). It should be noted that additional steps (not listed) may be required in order to achieve the noted simulation. Items will be noted as Pass Yes/No, N/A – Not Applicable, or N/T – Not Tested. Detailed information on failures will be noted in the commissioning issues log...

Control

# Testing Procedure Pass Comment

Note: AHU-2-1 & 3-1 will be equipped with a fixed plate heat exchanger and exhaust fan. All other units will be re-circulation and mixing of outside air only. Run Conditions – Requested: The unit shall run whenever: Any zone is occupied, or a definable number of unoccupied zones need heating or cooling.

1. Freeze Protection: 23 0993 2.7 D

Verify freeze stat is set at 35 deg F, and manually trip device. The unit shall shut down and generate an alarm upon receiving a freeze stat status. Freeze stats shall be set at 35 deg. F Chilled water control valve shall open to 100% (adj.) whenever the freeze stat is on. Return all to normal

Y / N

2. High Static Shutdown: 23 0993 2.7 F

Using a squeeze bulb, trip the high static pressure device, verify alarming at the BMS

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


The unit shall shut down and generate an alarm upon receiving a high static shutdown signal. Return all to normal

3. Supply and Return Air Smoke Detection: 23 0993 2.7 G

With AHU enabled preform the following: Manually trip each device to verify shutdown and alarming at the BMS The unit shall shut down and generate an alarm upon receiving a return or supply air smoke detector status. Return all to normal

Y / N

4. Normal Off

With the unit off, verify the following – visually and at the BMS. The Return Air Dampers will be open, the Exhaust Air Dampers and Outside Air Dampers will be closed. Supply fan will be off, and the VFD will be command off. Exhaust fan will be off and the VFD will be commanded off (AHU-2-1, 3-1 only). 23 0993 2.7 O. The outside and exhaust air dampers shall close and the return air damper shall open when the unit is off. If Optimal Start Up is available the mixed air damper shall operate as described in the occupied mode except that the outside air damper shall modulate to fully closed Chilled water and Pre-Heating Hot Water Control Valve will be closed.

Y / N

5. AHU Optimal Start: 23 0993 2.7 H

With the AHU off, from the BMS adjust normal start time (2 hours later than current time of day and adjust the space (zone) temperature setpoint (higher or lower) as needed to force the optimum start of the unit. Outside air temperature may need overriding also. The unit shall start prior to scheduled occupancy based on the time necessary for the zones to reach their occupied setpoints. The start time shall automatically adjust based on changes in outside air temperature and zone temperatures. The outside air damper shall remain fully closed.

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


Preform this test multiple times to verify optimum start time function. Return all to normal

6. Supply Fan (Short Cycling): 23 0993 2.7

From the BMS command the FCU(s) on and off several times to verify proper mapping of command and short cycling prevention. The supply fan shall run anytime the unit is commanded to run, unless shutdown on safeties. To prevent short cycling, the supply fan shall have a user definable (adj.) minimum runtime. Return all to normal.

Y / N

7. Supply Air Duct Static Pressure Control: 23 0993 2.7 J

From the BMS increase and then decrease the duct static setpoint from normal. Allow time for the system to stabilize. The controller shall measure duct static pressure and modulate the supply fan VFD speed to maintain a duct static pressure setpoint of 1.5” W.C. (adj.). The speed shall not drop below 30% (adj.). The static pressure setpoint shall be reset based on zone cooling requirements. Return all to normal

Y / N

8. Exhaust Fan (AHU-2-1, 3-1 ONLY): 23 0993 2.7 K

Verify for the approved TAB report that the VFD and the BMS is set for the proper speed. The exhaust fan shall run at constant speed (balanced by VFD) to maintain design airflow

Y / N

9. Supply Air Temperature Setpoint – Outside Air Reset: 23 0993 2.7 L

From the BMS, override the Outside air temperature up and then down to verify Supply Air Temperature reset. The controller shall monitor the supply air temperature and shall maintain a supply air temperature setpoint reset based on outside air temperature. 1. The supply air temperature setpoint shall reset for cooling as follows: a. As outside air temperature rises from 50°F (adj.) to 85°F (adj.), the supply air temperature setpoint shall reset downwards from 60°F (adj.) to 55°F (adj.).

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


2. If the return air temperature drops below 68°F (adj.), then the supply air temperature setpoint shall be reset for heating as follows: a. As outside air temperature drops from 50°F (adj.) to 20°F (adj.), the supply air temperature setpoint shall reset upwards from 55°F (adj.) to 60°F (adj.). Continue to below Tests # 9 & 10.

10. Chilled Water Control Valve: 23 0993 2.7 M

In conjunction with the supply air temperature reset above (Test #9) observe the valve operation. The controller shall measure the supply air temperature and modulate the chilled water control valve to maintain its cooling setpoint. 1. The cooling shall be enabled whenever: a. The supply fan status is on. b. The heating is not active. 2. The chilled water control valve shall open to 100% (adj.) whenever the freeze stat is on.

Y / N

11. Pre-Heat Hot Water Control Valve (All Units): 23 0993 2.7 N

In conjunction with the supply air temperature reset above (Test #9) observe the valve operation. The controller shall measure the supply air temperature and modulate the hot water control valve to maintain its heating setpoint. 1. The heating shall be enabled whenever: a. Outside air temperature is less than 65° (adj.). b. AND the supply fan status is on. c. AND the cooling is not active. 2. The hot water control valve shall modulate open for freeze

protection whenever: a. Mixed air temperature drops from 40° to 35°F (adj.). b. The supply fan status is on

Y / N

12. Ensure all setpoints and overrides are returned to normal.

End of Testing

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Alarm


1. Freezestat Y / N

2. High Static Shutdown Y / N

3. Return Air Smoke Detection Y / N

4. Supply Air Smoke Detection Y / N

5. Return Air Dampers Y / N

6. Exhaust Air Dampers Y / N

7. Outside Air Dampers Y / N

8. Supply Fan Status Commanded on, but the status is off. Supply Fan in Hand: Commanded off, but the status is on.

Y / N

9. Exhaust Fan Status (AHU-2-1, 3-1) Commanded on, but the status is off. Fan in Hand: Commanded off, but the status is on.

Y / N

10. Supply Fan VFD Y / N

11. Exhaust Fan VFD (AHU-2-1, 3-1) Y / N

12. Supply Fan Runtime Exceeded Y / N

13. Exhaust Fan Runtime Exceeded Y / N

14. Low Supply Air Static Pressure Y / N

15. High Supply Air Temperature Y / N

16. Low Supply Air Temperature Y / N

17. High Mixed Air Temp Y / N

18. Low Mixed Air Temp: Y / N

19. High Return Air Humidity Y / N

20. Low Return Air Humidity Y / N

21. High Return Air Temp Y / N

22. Low Return Air Temp Y / N

Wrap Up


1. Y / N

2. Y / N

3. Y / N

4. Y / N

5. Y / N

6. Y / N

7. Y / N

8. Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Comments:

Trend Report

The following points will be trended every 15 minutes for period of not less than 2 weeks. These trends will be conducted at least twice a year: one in the cooling season and once in the heating season. Completed Trend Reports will be submitted in a format compatible with MS Excel.

Trend Report

Trend Trend Group Points

Acceptance of Test:


☐ This test is accepted by the Commissioning Authority identified below. Any Corrective Issues noted above do not adversely impact the overall performance of the system.

Tested by Date

Witnessed by Date

Commissioning Provider Attachment(s): Sequence of Operations

beyond engineering



1 of 12

Overview

Equipment/Systems AHU (typ. 3-2 & 3-3) Complete one for each

Equipment ID/Tag No. AHU 3-2

Equipment Location: LEVEL 3

Area(s) Served: SCRRAC Gym

System Description: AIR HANDLING UNITS – CONSTANT VOLUME

Spec Section(s): 23 0993 2.7, 23 7313.16

Test Execution






Equipment Data

Equipment

Nameplate

AHU 3-2




Serial Number n/a


Item Yes No


☐ ☐


☐ ☐


☐ ☐



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Item Yes No




Participants:


Yes No

CM/GC ☐ ☐








Schedule






Setpoints



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Setpoints


Preheating Mixed Air Temperature Setpoint 55 deg F oF ☐ ☒ ☒ Occupied mode Heating Setpoint 70°F (adj.) oF ☐ ☒ ☒ Occupied mode Cooling Setpoint 75°F (adj.) oF ☐ ☒ ☒ Unoccupied mode Heating Setpoint 55°F (adj.) oF ☐ ☒ ☒ Unoccupied mode Cooling Setpoint 80°F (adj.) oF ☐ ☒ ☒ Zone Override / occupied mode adjustable period of time

TBD mins ☐ ☒ ☒

Zone Setpoint Adjust dead band

set point (IE +/- 3 deg. F)

oF ☐ ☒ ☒

Space Humidity 50% % ☐ ☒ ☒ Supply fan VFD speed TBD % ☐ ☒ ☒ Freeze-stat 35 deg F oF ☒ ☐ ☐ Minimum Outside Air minimum position TBD % ☐ ☒ ☒ High Humidity Discharge TBD % ☒ ☐ ☐

Alarm Temperature (oF / psi) ☒ ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐ Freeze stat 35 deg F ☒ ☐ ☒ High Mixed Air Temp greater than

60°F (adj.). ☐ ☒ ☒

Low Mixed Air Temp: is less than 40°F (adj.).

☐ ☒ ☒

High Zone Temp greater than 90°F (adj.)

☐ ☒ ☒

Low Zone Temp less than 45°F (adj.)

☐ ☒ ☒

Initial Conditions


Temperature oF oF

Space Temperature oF oF

Mixed Air Temperature oF oF


Heating Setpoint oF oF

Cooling Setpoint oF oF

Space Temperature Setpoint oF oF

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Initial Conditions



Space Humidity (AHU-3-2, 3-3) % %


Freeze stat

Supply and Return Air Smoke Detection

Filter Differential Pressure

Re-Heating Hot Water Control Valve Position (AHU-3-2, 3-3) Failure


Hot Water Control Valve Failure

Return Air Dampers Failure


High Humidity Discharge

High Mixed Air Temp

Low Mixed Air Temp

Damper Position % %


Mixed Air Dampers % %



Supply Fan Status


Humidifier Status (H-3-2 & H-3-3)

Zone Override


Supply Fan VFD

Exhaust Fan VFD (AHU-2-1, 3-1)


Chilled Water Control Valve % %

Hot Water Control Valve % %

Re-Heating Hot Water Control Valve Position (AHU-3-2, 3-3)

% %

Capacity % %

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Initial Conditions


Humidifier Capacity (AHU-3-2, 3-3)

VFD Speed hz/% hz/%


Comments:







Site Observation

Final BAS Reading

Pass

Yes No

Supply Fan VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

Supply Fan VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

Valve

1. Closed ☐ ☐

2. 50 % ☐ ☐



Check the sensors listed below for calibration and adequate location. This is a sampling check of calibrations done during the pre-functional checklist and contractor start-up processes. “In calibration” means making a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 6 inches of the site sensor. Verify that

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


the sensor reading (via permanent thermostat, gauge, packaged control panel or Building Management System [BMS]) compared to the test instrument-measured value is within the tolerances specified. If not, install offset at BMS, calibrate or replace sensor. Use the same test instrument as used for the original calibration, if possible. This should instrument should be provided by the controls or mechanical contractor. Below add actual sampled devices


Sensor & Location

Location OK*

Gauge or Pkg & BAS

Values

Instrument Measured

Value

Point Type

Pass **

Yes No Yes No










Temperature ± 1 F


Airflow ± 10 %

Waterflow ± 10 %

Comments:



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


Description: 23 0993 2.8 A AHU’s controls and sensors shall be provided by the BAS contractor. AHU-3-2, 3-3 will be equipped with a humidifier and re-heat coil for space humidity control. Humidifier shall come with factory controls with network interface card for integration into BAS Run Condition - Scheduled: The unit shall run according to a user definable time schedule.

1. Freeze Protection: 23 0993 2.8 H


Y / N

2. Minimum Outside Air Ventilation: 23 0993 2.8 Q

The outside air dampers shall maintain a minimum position (adj.) during building occupied hours and be closed during unoccupied hours.

Y / N

3. Supply and Return Air Smoke Detection: 23 0993 2.8 I


Y / N

4. Normal Off

With the unit off, verify the following – visually and at the BMS. The Return Air Dampers will be open, the Exhaust Air Dampers and Outside Air Dampers will be closed. Supply fan will be off, and the VFD will be command off. Exhaust fan will be off and the VFD will be commanded off (AHU-2-1, 3-1 only).

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


23 0993 2.7 O. The outside and exhaust air dampers shall close, and the return air damper shall open when the unit is off. If Optimal Start Up is available, the mixed air damper shall operate as described in the occupied mode except that the outside air damper shall modulate to fully closed Chilled water and Pre-Heating Hot Water Control Valve will be closed.

5. AHU Optimal Start: 23 0993 2.8 F

With the AHU off, from the BMS adjust normal start time (2 hours later than current time of day and adjust the space (zone) temperature setpoint (higher or lower) as needed to force the optimum start of the unit. Outside air temperature may need overriding also. The unit shall start prior to scheduled occupancy based on the time necessary for the zones to reach their occupied setpoints. The start time shall automatically adjust based on changes in outside air temperature and zone temperatures. The outside air damper shall remain fully closed. Preform this test multiple times to verify optimum start time function. Return all to normal

Y / N

6. Zone Unoccupied Override: 23 0993 2.8 G

With the unit in normal unoccupied mode activate the zone sensor override. A timed local override control shall allow an occupant to override the schedule and place the unit into an occupied mode for an adjustable period of time. At the expiration of this time, control of the unit shall automatically return to the schedule

Y / N

7. Supply Fan (Short Cycling): 23 0993 2.8 J


Y / N

8. Humidifier: 23 0993 2.8 O (H-3-2 & H-3-3)

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


Humidifier shall be provided by manufacturer of equipment and mounted in the ductwork. Humidifier manufacturer shall provide duct mounted high humidity sensor in supply and humidity sensor in return for control and operation. Humidity controller shall be integrated to the BAS. With the unit in normal mode, adjust the space humidity setpoint 5% higher than current reading. The BMS will call to enable the humidifier. Allow the humidifier to operate and then trip the high discharge humidity sensor. The humidifier will be disabled and alarm at the BMS. Reset the high discharge humidity alarm and the Humidifier will be enabled once again. Allow the humidifier and observe the setpoint being met. Once the setpoint is met the humidifier will be command off by the BMS. Return all to normal.

Y / N

9. Chilled Water Control Valve: 23 0993 2.8 K

With the unit in normal, adjust the space setpoint (for the zone sensor) 5 deg F lower than current space temperature The controller shall measure the space temperature and modulate the chilled water control valve to maintain its cooling setpoint. 1. The cooling shall be enabled whenever: a. The supply fan status is on. b. The heating is not active. 2. The chilled water control valve shall open to 100% (adj.)

whenever the freeze stat is on. Return the space setpoint to normal

Y / N

10. Heat Hot Water Control Valve (All Units): 23 0993 2.8 L

In conjunction with the above test, now adjust the zone setpoint 5 deg F higher.

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


The controller shall measure the supply air temperature and modulate the hot water control valve to maintain its heating setpoint. 1. The heating shall be enabled whenever: a. Outside air temperature is less than 65° (adj.). b. The supply fan status is on. c. The cooling is not active. 2. The hot water control valve shall modulate open for freeze

protection whenever: a. Mixed air temperature drops from 40° to 35°F (adj.). b. The supply fan status is on.

11 De-Humidification Mode: 23 0993 2.8 M

From the BMS adjust the space humidity setpoint 5% lower the current space value. The Humidifier, if enabled, with be command off by the BMS. Once off the BMS will command the chilled water valve open and then modulate the re-heat valve open to maintain discharger setpoint and space setpoint as required. Allow time for the system to stabilize. Return all to normal.

Y / N

12. Mixing Damper (Economizer) Control: 23 0993 2.8 R / THIS TEST MAY REQUIRED TO BE CONDUCTED IN THE OFF SEASON.

With the unit enabled, and the outside temperature below 55 deg F, adjust the mixed air setpoint 5 deg F below the current value and then 10 deg F higher – allow time for the system to adjust the higher, lower setpoint. The BMS will modulate the mixing damper as required to maintain new setpoint. The BMS will not allow the mixed air temperature to drop below 40 Deg F. Return all to normal.

Y / N

13. Ensure all setpoints and overrides are returned to normal. End testing.

Y / N

End of Testing

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Alarm


1. Freezestat Y / N

2. Return Air Smoke Detection Y / N


4. Return Air Dampers Y / N

5. Mixing Air Dampers Y / N



Y / N


9. Humidifier Failure Y / N

10. Supply Fan Runtime Exceeded Y / N

11. Chilled Water Control Valve Y / N

12. Hot Water (Pre-heat) Control Valve Y / N

13. Re-Heating Hot Water Control Valve Position (AHU-3-2, 3-3) Y / N

Wrap Up


1. Y / N

2. Y / N

3. Y / N

4. Y / N

5. Y / N

6. Y / N

7. Y / N

8. Y / N

Comments:

Trend Report


beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Trend Report


Acceptance of Test:



Tested by Date

Witnessed by Date


beyond engineering



1 of 23

Overview

Equipment/Systems WATER-COOLED, ROTARY-SCREW WATER CHILLERS & HEAT RECOVERY CHILLERS

Equipment ID/Tag No. CH-1-1, 1-2, PCHP-1-1, 1-2, 1-3, SCHP-1-1, 1-2 / HRC-1-1, 1-2, 1-3, RCHP-1-1, RHP-1-1

Equipment Location: Mechanical Room S110

Area(s) Served: Varies

System Description: CHILLED WATER SYSTEM

Spec Section(s): 23 0993, 23 2123, 23 6423.16 & 23 6426.16

Test Execution






Equipment Data (random verification of installation check documentation)

Chillers

Nameplate

CH1-1 CH1-2


Manufacturer ☐

Model Number ☐

Serial Number

Nameplate HRC-1-1 HRC-1-2

Manufacturer ☐

Model Number ☐

Serial Number

Nameplate HRC-1-3



Serial Number n/a

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Equipment Data

Primary Pumps

Nameplate

PCHP-1-1 PCHP 1-2


Manufacturer ☐

Model Number ☐

Serial Number

Nameplate PCHP-1-3



Serial Number n/a Equipment Data

Secondary Pumps

Nameplate

SCHP-1-1 SCHP 1-2


Manufacturer ☐

Model Number ☐

Serial Number Equipment Data

Heat Recovery Chiller Pumps

Nameplate

RCHP-1-1 RHP-1-1


Manufacturer ☐

Model Number ☐

Serial Number


Item Yes No

Verify that the Pre-Functional Checklist for this piece of equipment has been successfully completed, signed by appropriate parties, and returned to the Commissioning Authority and Cx.

☐ ☐

Prior to testing, the Condenser Water System must be tested and pass proper operation ☐ ☐ Verify that the manufacturer’s start-up procedure for this piece of equipment has been successfully completed and a copy of the completed start-up procedure has been submitted to the Commissioning Authority and Cx.

☐ ☐

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Item Yes No

Verify that Test & Balance for this piece of equipment has been successfully completed, reviewed and approved by the Engineer of record, and submitted to the Commissioning Authority and Cx.

☐ ☐

Verify unit is tied into the BMS system and graphics are complete. ☐ ☐ Verify all required I/O points are listed on the BMS system. (refer to the I/O point list on the following page) ☐ ☐

Verify ATC point-to-point and sensor/actuator calibration checks have been completed, documented and has been submitted to the Commissioning Authority and Cx. ☐ ☐




Participants:


Yes No

CM/GC ☐ ☐








Schedule



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah




I/O Point List (expected but not limited to)

CV-C-1 = 2-Position Isolation Valve (CH-1-1 Evaporator) / (fail open) ☐ CV-C-2 = 2-Position Isolation Valve (CH-1-1 Condenser) / (fail open) ☐ CV-C-3 = 2-Position Isolation Valve (CH-1-2 Evaporator) / (fail open) ☐ CV-C-4 = 2-Position Isolation Valve (CH-1-2 Condenser) / (fail open) ☐ CV-C-9 = 2-Position Isolation Valve (HRC) / (fail open) ☐

CV-C-10 = 2-Position Isolation Valve (HRC) / (fail open) ☐ CV-C-11 = 2-Way Modulating Control Valve (Chilled Water Pump Bypass) ☐ FM-C-1 (BTU) = Chilled Water Secondary Capacity and Flow ☐ FM-C-2 = Decoupler Flow (Bi-Directional) ☐ FM-C-3 (BTU) = HRC Chilled Water Capacity and Flow ☐ Chiller Leaving Water Temperature Set Point ☐ Chilled water supply temperature. (CH-1-1, 1-2) ☐ Chilled water return temperature. (CH-1-1, 1-2) ☐ HR Chilled water supply temperature ☐ HR Hot water supply temperature ☐ Heat recovery Chiller flow status - each heat recovery chiller ☐ Percent of full load current - each heat recovery chiller ☐ Each Heat recovery Chiller Status ☐ Heat Recovery Chiller kW - each chiller ☐ Heat recovery Chiller operating hours - each heat recovery chiller ☐ Differential pressure set point. ☐ On/Off control of each chiller (CH-1-1, 1-2) ☐ On/Off control of each chiller (HRC-1-1, 2, 3) ☐ Lead chiller designation. ☐ Lead pump designation. ☐ Lead HRC designation ☐ Primary chilled water pump VFD speed. (PCHP-1-1, 1-2, 1-3) ☐ Secondary chilled water pump VFD speed. (SCHP-1-1, 1-2) ☐ On/off control of each pump and VFD (PCHP-1-1, 1-2, 1-3, SCHP-1-1, 1-2, RCHP-1-1) ☐ Chilled water supply temperature. ☐ Condenser water supply temperature. ☐

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Setpoints (all adjustable through BAS)


Temperature Setpoint (oF) ☐ ☐ ☒

Chilled water supply temperature 44 ☐ ☒ ☒

Chilled water reset “up” 4 ☐ ☒ ☒

Chilled water reset “down” 1 ☐ ☒ ☒

Chilled water reset high limit 46 ☐ ☒ ☒

Chilled water reset high limit 42 ☐ ☒ ☒

HR Chilled water supply temperature 46 ☐ ☒ ☒

HR Low chilled water supply temperature 42 ☐ ☒ ☒

Off-peak heating (summer) BTU Setpoint 125 tons ☐ ☒ ☐

HRC System enable delay 15 mins ☐ ☒ ☐

Primary Chiller Plant disable (HRC operating) 15 mins ☐ ☒ ☐

Pressure (“w.c.) / (psi) ☐ ☐ ☐

System Differential Pressure 12 psi

(to be established at test and balance)

☐ ☒ ☒

Alarm Setpoints ☐ ☐ ☐

Low chilled water supply temperature 40 ☐ ☒ ☒

High chilled water supply temperature 50 ☐ ☒ ☒

High Differential Pressure 25% greater

than set point

☐ ☒ ☒

Low Differential Pressure 25% lower

than set point

☐ ☒ ☒

High chilled water return temperature 60 ☐ ☒ ☒ Low chilled water return temperature 48 ☐ ☒ ☒ HR High chilled water supply temperature 50 deg. F ☐ ☒ ☒ HR High chilled water return temperature 60 deg. F ☐ ☒ ☒ HR Low chilled water return temperature 48 deg. F ☐ ☒ ☒ Primary chillers demand limit (Primary operating)

100% ☐ ☒ ☒

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Setpoints (all adjustable through BAS)


Primary chillers demand limit (HRC operating) 50% ☐ ☒ ☒ Lead/Lag rotation schedule ☐ ☐ ☐

Manually through the BAS (User

selectable) TBD ☐ ☒ ☒

Daily (User


Weekly (User


Monthly (User


Initial Conditions (add as needed)


Chilled water Supply Temperature (CH-1-1) oF oF

Chilled water Return Temperature (CH-1-1) oF oF

Chilled water Supply Temperature (CH-1-2) oF oF

Chilled water Return Temperature (CH-1-2) oF oF

Condenser water supply temperature oF oF

Condenser water return temperature oF oF

Heat Recovery CHW Supply Temp (HRC-1) oF oF

Heat Recovery CHW Return Temp (HRC-1) oF oF






Chilled water Supply Temperature ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

Chilled water Return Temperature ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

CH-1-1 Fail ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

CH-1-2 Fail ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

HRC-1 Fail ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

HRC-2 Fail ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah




HRC-3 Fail ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

PCHP-1-1 Fail ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

PCHP-1-2 Fail ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

PCHP-1-3 Fail ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

SCHP-1-1 Fail ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

SCHP-1-2 Fail ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

RCHP-1-1 Fail ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

CV-C-1 Isolation valve failure (fail open) ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐







Enable / Lead (Lead) (Lag) (Lead) (Lag)

Chiller-1-1 ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

Chiller-1-2 ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

HRC-1 ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

HRC-2 ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

HRC-3 ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

PCHP-1-1 ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

PCHP-1-2 ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

PCHP-1-3 ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

SCHP-1-1 ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah




SCHP-1-2 ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

RCHP-1-1 ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐


Chiller-1-1 ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

Chiller-1-2 ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

HRC-1 ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

HRC-2 ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

HRC-3 ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

PCHP-1-1 ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

PCHP-1-2 ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

PCHP-1-3 ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

SCHP-1-1 ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

SCHP-1-2 ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

RCHP-1-1 ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐


Chilled Water System

Isolation Valve(s) (record any delays) (open) (closed) (open) (closed)

CV-C-1 Isolation valve ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐




CV-C-9 Isolation valve (HRC) ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

CV-C-10 Isolation valve (HRC) ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐


Flow gpm

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah




FM-C-1 (BTU) = Chilled Water Secondary Capacity and Flow

FM-C-2 = Decoupler Flow (Bi-Directional)

FM-C-3 (BTU) = HRC Chilled Water Capacity and Flow

VFD Speed hz/% hz/%

PCHP-1-1

PCHP-1-2

PCHP-1-3

SCHP-1-1

SCHP-1-2

RCHP-1-1

Comments:







Site Observation

Final BAS Reading

Pass

Yes No

Supply Pump VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

Secondary VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah





Site Observation

Final BAS Reading

Pass

Yes No

Valve

1. Closed % % % ☐ ☐

2. 50 % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Full Open % % % ☐ ☐


Check the sensors listed below for calibration and adequate location. This is a sampling check of calibrations done during the pre-functional checklist and contractor start-up processes. “In calibration” means making a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 6 inches of the site sensor. Verify that the sensor reading (via permanent thermostat, gauge, packaged control panel or Building Management System [BMS]) compared to the test instrument-measured value is within the tolerances specified. If not, install offset at BMS, calibrate or replace sensor. Use the same test instrument as used for the original calibration, if possible. This instrument should be provided by the controls or mechanical contractor. Below add actual sampled devices


Sensor & Location

Location OK*

Gauge or Pkg & BAS

Values

Instrument Measured

Value

Point Type

Pass **

Yes No Yes No



Flow Switch ☐ ☐ DI ☐ ☐







Temperature ± 1 F


Airflow ± 10 %

Waterflow ± 10 %

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Comments:



Control


1.

Operational Schedule Chiller plant will be scheduled in occupied mode at all times. 23 0993 2.1 E. 1.

Y / N

2.

Chiller Run Conditions 23 0993 2.1 F. (adjust system delays / enables as required) Chiller-1-1 selected as Lead Chiller, associated PCHP-1-1 will be Lead pump.

Y / N

3. 23 0993 2.1 K Chiller Operation

When there is a call for cooling from a chilled water control valve (as monitored by the BAS), the chiller plant will be enabled to run. When a system chilled water valve is open for 5 minutes (adj.), the

lead chiller will be enabled.

Adjust any system chilled water valve to call for chilled water.

a. Associated isolation vales will open (CV-C-1 = CH-1-1

Evaporator / CV-C-2 = CH-1-1 Condenser).

b. Associated primary chilled water pumps will start and run

constant volume once isolation valves prove open (PCHP-1-1 &

CWP-1-1)

c. The chiller will only start after proof of valve open status for 10

seconds (adj.) and pump flow.

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


d. The chiller will start and operate under its own internal controls and safeties to maintain the leaving water temperature set-point (reset adjustable)

4. Lag Chiller Control 23 0993 2.1 K. 2.

From the BMS override the current chilled water supply temperature by 3 Deg higher than current calculated setpoint

1. If the supply chilled water temperature, as monitored by the BAS, exceeds set point by 2 deg F. (adj.) , then following will occur:

a. The lag chiller and associated lag primary pump will stage

on and operate in tandem with the lead chiller to maintain the chilled water temperature set point.

b. Prior to transitioning, the demand limit for both chillers will be set to 50% (adj.).

c. Once both chillers are online, the demand limit will reset back to 100% (adj.)

Remove any system modification – allow system to return to normal.

Y / N

2. On decreasing return chilled water temperature, the BAS will stage off the chillers as follows; (From the BMS override the current chilled water return temperature to 48) a. If the return chilled water temperature from the building

drops below 50 degrees F (50% capacity), the lag chiller

and associated pump and isolation valve will stage off.

b. Prior to transitioning, the demand limit for both chillers

will be set to 50% (adj.).

c. Once the lag chiller is offline, the demand limit will reset

back to 100% (adj.) for the operating (Lead) chiller.


Y / N

5. Chilled Water Supply Temperature Reset 23 0993 2.1 L.

(This is typical for Chiller -1-2 operation and will not be test with Chiller-1-2. Verify that Chiller-1-2 is receiving the same setpoint)

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


The chilled water supply temperature setpoint will be reset using a trim and respond algorithm based on cooling requirements

Modify system temperatures and/or delays to verify the following:

a. The chilled water supply temperature setpoint will reset up to 4 deg. F above setpoint based on chilled water valve feedback.

b. If all system valves are 90% open (adj.) or greater for a period of 10 minutes, the chilled water supply temperature will reset down 1 deg. F until it reaches design of 42 deg. F.

c. Once the chilled water coils are satisfied (valves closing) then the chilled water supply temperature setpoint will gradually rise 1 deg. F in 10-minute increments to a maximum of 46 deg. F.


6. Refrigerant Detection 23 0993 2.1 M.

The chiller will shut down and an alarm generated upon receiving a refrigerant leak detection status. With the appropriate gas equipment activate the refrigerant alarm. Verify the following:

a. The chiller will shutdown based on internal controls and safeties.

b. Allow time for the refrigerant alarm to clear.

c. Once refrigerant levels reach a safe setpoint in the mechanical plant, the chiller will be restarted manually through the BAS and resume in the last mode of operation and setpoints and will change operation mode as defined by the BAS

Y / N

7. Short cycling Prevention 23 0993 2.1 F. 4.

The chiller will have a minimum downtime between stop and start as

defined by the unit manufacturer. Note chiller cycle delay in

Comment section at right.

a. Remove any BMS overrides or delay adjustments.

b. Chiller will cycle off after delay

c. Associated pumps will de-energize

d. Associated isolation valves will close.

Through the BMS once again enable the chiller, verify the start delay.

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


8. Emergency Shutdown 23 0993 2.1 G.

Chiller-1-1 selected as Lead Chiller

Fail Chiller as needed to verify the following:

a. Associated pumps and valves will function as detailed above.

b. The chiller will shutdown (as detailed above) and an alarm

generated upon receiving an emergency shutdown signal status

c. The chiller will shutdown based on internal controls and safeties.

d. Upon receiving a failure alarm, the BAS will start the stand-by

chiller and associated pump and shut down the pump and chiller

associated with the isolation valve in failure.

e. The failed chiller will be restarted manually through the BAS only. f. Once the chiller restarts after a shutdown, the chiller will resume

in the last mode of operation and setpoints and will change operation mode as defined by the BAS.

Y / N

9. Lead / Lag chiller rotation 23 0993 2.1 K. 4 & 5

The designated lead and lag chillers will be determined in the BAS by

one of the following conditions: (Note at right the current method of

rotation)

a. Manually through the BAS. b. Daily c. Weekly d. Monthly Verify the BMS is programed to preform all method of rotation.

** During normal rotation, the BAS will keep the lead chiller enabled

until the new lead chiller has proven to run before shutting down to

ensure smooth rotation.

Y / N

Chiller Run Conditions (adjust system delays / enables as required) Chiller-1-2 selected as Lead Chiller, associated PCHP-1-2 will be Lead pump.

Y / N

10 23 0993 2.1 K Chiller Operation (Chiller-1-2)

When there is a call for cooling from a system chilled water control valve (as monitored by the BAS), the chiller plant will be enabled to run. When a chilled water valve is open for 5 minutes (adj.), the lead chiller will be enabled.

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


Adjust any system chilled water valve to call for chilled water. a. Associated isolation vales will open (CV-C-3 = CH-1-2

Evaporator / CV-C-4 = CH-1-4 Condenser).

b. Associated primary chilled water pumps will start and run

constant volume once isolation valves prove open (PCHP-1-2 &

CWP-1-2)

c. The chiller will only start after proof of valve open status for 10

seconds (adj.) and pump flow.

d. The chiller will start and operate under its own internal controls and safeties to maintain the leaving water temperature set-point (reset adjustable).

11 Lag Chiller Control 23 0993 2.1 K. 2.

Chilled Water Supply Control: From the BMS override the current chilled water supply temperature by 3 Deg higher than current calculated setpoint.

1. If the supply chilled water temperature, as monitored by the BAS, exceeds set point by 2 deg F. (adj.) , then following will occur:

a. The lag chiller and associated lag primary pump will stage

on and operate in tandem with the lead chiller to maintain the chilled water temperature set point.

b. Prior to transitioning, the demand limit for both chillers will be set to 50% (adj.).

c. Once both chillers are online, the demand limit will reset back to 100% (adj.)


2. On decreasing return chilled water temperature, the BAS will stage off the chillers as follows; (From the BMS override the current chilled water return temperature to 48) a. If the return chilled water temperature from the building

drops below 50 degrees F (50% capacity), the lag chiller

and associated pump and isolation valve will stage off.

b. Prior to transitioning, the demand limit for both chillers

will be set to 50% (adj.).

c. Once the lag chiller is offline, the demand limit will reset

back to 100% (adj.) for the operating (Lead) chiller.

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control



12 Refrigerant Detection 23 0993 2.1 M.

The chiller will shut down and an alarm generated upon receiving a refrigerant leak detection status. With the appropriate gas equipment activate the refrigerant alarm. Verify the following:

a. The chiller will shutdown based on internal controls and safeties.

b. Allow time for the refrigerant alarm to clear.

c. Once refrigerant levels reach a safe setpoint in the

mechanical plant, the chiller will be restarted manually through the BAS and resume in the last mode of operation and setpoints and will change operation mode as defined by the BAS

13 Short cycling Prevention 23 0993 2.1 F. 4.

To prevent short cycling, the chiller will have a minimum downtime

between stop and start as defined by the unit manufacturer. Note

chiller cycle delay in Comment section at right.

a. Remove any BMS overrides or delay adjustments.

b. Chiller will cycle off after delay

c. Associated pumps will de-energize

d. Associated isolation valves will close.

Through the BMS once again enable the chiller, verify the start delay.

Y / N

14 Emergency Shutdown 23 0993 2.1 G.

Chiller-1-2 selected as Lead Chiller Fail Chiller as needed to verify the following:

a. Associated pumps and valves will function as detailed

above.

b. The chiller will shutdown (as detailed above) and an alarm

generated upon receiving an emergency shutdown signal

status

c. The chiller will shutdown based on internal controls and

safeties.

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


d. Upon receiving a failure alarm, the BAS will start the stand-

by chiller and associated pump and shut down the pump

and chiller associated with the isolation valve in failure.

e. The failed chiller will be restarted manually through the BAS only.

f. Once the chiller restarts after a shutdown, the chiller will resume in the last mode of operation and setpoints and will change operation mode as defined by the BAS.

15. Primary Chilled Water Pump Lead/Lag/Standby Pump Operation: 23 0993 2.1 I. (The designated lead pump will be determined in the BAS based run-time)

1. When the associated chiller is enabled verify the associated pump operates as follows:

a. A differential pressure sensor is provided at each pump to

monitor and prove flow. b. The lead primary chilled water pump will run anytime the

associated lead chiller is called to run. c. The associated pump will start prior to the chiller being

enabled and will stop only after the chiller shutdown for 2 minutes (adj.)

d. The lead primary chilled water pumps will operate in lead/lag fashion as follows:

1. Pumps will stage on and off as chillers are commanded on and off as described in the Chiller Operation below and the following sequence.

2. The chiller isolation valve will open and be proven open.

3. After the chiller isolation valve is proven open by the BAS, the lead pump will run.

Y / N

2. Upon failure of the lead pump, the lag pump will be commanded on and the lead pump will be turned off. a. Fail the current lead pump and verify that the lag pump

starts. b. After the lag pump is in operation, fail the lag pump.

• The stand-by pump will operate anytime the lag pump fails.

Y / N

3. Verify short cycling prevention on all 3 pumps as defined by the unit manufacturer.

Y / N

16. Secondary Chilled Water Pump Differential Pressure Control – Pump Speed Control 23 0993 2.1 J.

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


1. Secondary Chilled Water Pumps will be determined in the BAS by one of the following conditions: (Note at right the current method of rotation). Secondary Chilled Water Pumps will operate continuously as they serve both the Primary and Heat Recovery Chiller systems. a. Manually through the BAS. b. Daily c. Weekly d. Monthly

Y / N

2. The BAS will monitor the chilled water differential pressure

and modulate the VFD on the secondary pump to maintain the

chilled water differential pressure setpoint.

a. The initial differential pressure recommendation will be 12

LBF/square inch and will be field adjusted by TAB to meet

the requirements of the actual field conditions. The pump

speed will not drop below 20%.

b. Verify BMS and VFD low limit is limited to 20% (Note value

in Comment column).

c. A dead band of +/- 2 psi will be included in the

programming to reduce hunting of pumps for set point

(Note value in Comment column)

Y / N

3. Lag pump enable:

If the lead secondary pump VFD is at 95% for 5 minutes (adj.),

and the differential pressure is below set-point, the lag

secondary pump will be enabled. The lead and lag pump VFD

speeds will ramp in unison to maintain set point.

a. Through the BMS adjust the differential setpoint higher to

simulate a greater need to secondary water pressure.

b. The lag secondary pump will be enabled.

c. The lead and lag pump will ramp in unison.

d. Allow time for the system to stabilize.

Return all values to normal.

4. Will the differential setpoint returned to normal verify the

following: Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


a. If the lag secondary pump VFD is at 40% for 5 minutes

(adj.), the lag pump will be turned off and the lead pump

VFD speed will modulate to maintain differential pressure

set point.

b. Allow time for the system to stabilize.

5. In event of failure, differential pressure sensor will restart to

last known operating setpoint.

a. Manually fail each sensor.

b. Verify the BMS maintains the last VFD speed signal.

c. Return all to normal.

d. Verify the BMS adjusts to the revised signal.

e. Allow time for the system to stabilize.

Y / N

Now that the Primary chilled water system has be verified the following section of the test will address the Heat Recovery Chiller operation. This system directly affects the enabling and disabling of the Primary chilled water system.

17. Heat Recovery Chiller Operation

1. The heat recovery chiller (HRC-1, 2, 3) and associated pumps (RCHP-1-1, SCHP-1-1, SCHP-1-2 and RHP-1-1) will be enabled to operate continuously under its own internal controls (HRC-1, 2, 3) and safeties. The heat recovery chiller will continuously monitor both the chilled water and hot water conditions and prioritize setpoint based on entering water conditions

2. Off-peak cooling (winter operation) The BAS shall monitor the BTU meter in the secondary chilled water main. If the BTU meter indicates a capacity of 125 tons or less for a period of 15 minutes, the BAS shall enable the heat recovery chiller to operate. The primary chilled water plant will remain operating per its sequence for a period of 15 minutes to allow for compressor loading to increase on the heat recovery chiller. If the BTU meter still indicates a total load of 125 tons or less, the BAS will shut-down the primary chilled water plant.

Via the BMS adjust the BTU Meter (HR Chiller Water) setpoint above the current BTU setpoint by 50 tons and decrease time delays to active the heat recovery chiller system.

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


a. HRC isolation valves will open b. RHP-1-1 will start c. HRC (selected Lead) will start has flow is proven. d. Primary chiller will turn off. e. Primary and condenser water pumps will be turned

off. f. Primary Chiller (1-1 or 1-2) evaporator and

condenser isolation valves will close. g. Cooling tower filtration pump and cooling tower

fans will turn-off. h. Secondary pumps will remain operating as

described in the Secondary Chilled Water Pump(s) sequence above.

i. Primary chillers will have demand limit enabled when the heat recovery chillers are enabled and handling a majority of the load (50%)

3. The BAS will continue to monitor the BTU meter in the secondary chilled water main. If the BTU meter indicates a capacity of 130 tons or more for a period of 15 minutes, the reverse will occur, and the primary chiller system will operate.

Via the BMS return the BTU Meter (HR Chiller Water) setpoint to normal or above (if needed) the current BTU setpoint by 50 tons and decrease time delays to deactivate the heat recovery chiller system.

a. Primary chillers demand limit reset to 100% b. Secondary pumps will remain operating as

described in the Secondary Chilled Water Pump(s) sequence above

c. Cooling tower filtration pump and cooling tower fans will turn-on.

d. Primary Chiller (1-1 or 1-2) evaporator and condenser isolation valves will open.

e. Primary and condenser water pumps will be turned on.

f. The selected lead primary chiller will be enabled to run.

g. RHP-1-1 will be disabled (if Off-peak heating (summer mode) is not enabled.

h. The HRC isolation valves will close (if Off-peak

heating (summer mode) is not enabled.

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


4. Heat Recovery Chiller Isolation Valve’s

1. The heat recovery chilled water and hot water isolation valves will open anytime the heat recovery chiller is called to run.

2. The isolation valves shall open prior to the heat recovery chiller turning on and close after the heat recovery chiller is proven off. The delay times shall be set appropriately to allow for orderly chilled water system start-up and shutdown. The isolation valve shall therefore have:

a. A user adjustable delay on start b. A user adjustable delay on stop

The heat recovery chiller will only start after proof of valve open status for 10 seconds (adj.) and associated pump has proven status.

3. Isolation valves shall fail to the open position to reduce risk of dead heading the chilled water and hot water pumps. Upon receiving a failure alarm, the BAS shall start the stand-by chiller and associated pump, and shut down the pump and chiller associated with the isolation valve in failure.

Y / N

18.

Refrigerant Detection 23 0993 2.1 M With the necessary gases, provide by the contractor, active the refrigerant alarm.

a. The chiller will shut down and an alarm generated upon receiving a refrigerant leak detection status.

b. The chiller will shutdown based on internal controls and safeties.

c. Once refrigerant levels reach a safe setpoint in the mechanical plant, the chiller will be restarted manually through the BAS and resume in the last mode of operation and setpoints and will change operation mode as defined by the BAS.

Y / N

Alarm


1. Chiller failure (typ of all) Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


2. Isolation valve failure (typ of all) Y / N

3. Differential pressure sensor failure Y / N

4. Temperature sensor failure (typ of all) Y / N

5. VFD failure (all pumps) Y / N

6. Low chilled water supply temperature Y / N

7. High chilled water supply temperature Y / N

8. Low chilled water return temperature Y / N

9. High chilled water return temperature Y / N

10. High differential pressure Y / N

11. Low differential pressure Y / N

12. Low condenser water supply temperature Y / N

13. High condenser water supply temperature Y / N

14. Pump No Water Flow (CT) (typ of all) Y / N

15. High level water switch turns on Y / N

16. Low water make-up switch turns on Y / N

17. Low level water switch turns on Y / N

18. Vibration Cut-Out switch turns on Y / N

19. Communication Failure: BAS is unable to communicate to chiller controller.

Y / N

20. Refrigerant Detection System alarm Y / N

21. Y / N

Wrap Up


1. Y / N

2. Y / N

3. Y / N

4. Y / N

5. Y / N

6. Y / N

7. Y / N

8. Y / N

Comments:

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Trend Report


Trend Report


Differential Pressure Control

1. Differential Pressure Setpoint

2. Differential Pressure

3. Fan/Pump Speed

Supply Temperature Control

1. Supply Temperature Setpoint

2. Supply Temperature

3. Return Temperature

4. Boiler, Valve, Cooling/Heating

Acceptance of Test:



Tested by Date

Witnessed by Date


beyond engineering



1 of 14

Overview

Equipment/Systems Cooling Tower(s) 3 & 4, Condenser Water Pumps 1-1, 1-2, (SCRRAC only)

Equipment ID/Tag No. CT-R-3, CT-R-4, CTF-R-2, CWP-1-1, 1-2 & 1-3

Equipment Location: SCRRAC Roof \ Mechanical Room S110

Area(s) Served: SCRRAC

System Description: Condenser Water System (SCRRAC only)

Spec Section(s): 23 0993, 23 2123 & 23 6500

Test Execution






Equipment Data

Cooling Tower

Nameplate

Cooling Tower-R-3 Cooling Tower-R-4


Manufacturer ☐

Model Number ☐

Serial Number

Equipment Data

CW Pump

Nameplate

CWP-1-1 CWP-1-2


Manufacturer ☐

Model Number ☐

Serial Number

Equipment Data

CW Pump

Nameplate

CWP-1-3




Serial Number n/a

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Equipment Data

CW Pump

Nameplate

CTF-R-2




Serial Number n/a


Item Yes No


☐ ☐


☐ ☐


☐ ☐






Participants:


Yes No

CM/GC ☐ ☐





beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah





Schedule






Setpoints


Condenser water supply temperature (oF) 75 deg. F ☐ ☐ ☐ High condenser water supply temperature (oF) 90 deg. F

☐ ☐ ☐

Low condenser water supply temperature (oF) 50 deg. F

☐ ☐ ☐

CWP-1-1 (set by TAB contractor) TBD ☒ ☐ ☐

CWP-1-2 (set by TAB contractor) TBD ☒ ☐ ☐ CWP-1-3 (set by TAB contractor) TBD ☒ ☐ ☐ CT-R-3 Basin Electronic level control setpoint TBD ☐ ☒ ☒ CT-R-4 Basin Electronic level control setpoint TBD ☐ ☒ ☒ CT-R-3 Basin mechanical float switch setpoint TBD ☒ ☐ ☐ CT-R-4 Basin mechanical float switch setpoint TBD ☒ ☐ ☐ CT-R-3 Basin Heater Enable setpoint TBD ☒ ☐ ☐ CT-R-4 Basin Heater Enable setpoint TBD ☒ ☐ ☐

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Initial Conditions


Temperature oF oF

Condenser water supply temperature oF oF

Condenser Water Supply (Common Basin) Temp oF oF

Condenser Water Return Temp oF oF


CV-C-5 Fail

CV-C-6 Fail

CV-C-7 (Cooling Tower Bypass)

CV-C-8 Fail

CT-R-3

CT-R-4

CWP-1-1

CWP-1-2

CWP-1-3

CTF-R-2

CT-R-3 Vibration Switch

CT-R-4 Vibration Switch

Electronic Low Water Level Switch

Electronic High Water Level Switch

CT-R-3 VFD

CT-R-4 VFD

CWP-1-1 VFD

CWP-1-2 VFD

CWP-1-3 VFD

Low condenser water supply temperature

High condenser water supply temperature

Enable (on) (off)

CT-R-3

CT-R-4

CWP-1-1

CWP-1-2

CWP-1-3

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Initial Conditions


CTF-R-2


CT-R-3

Basin Heater Status (CT-R-3)

CT-R-4

Basin Heater Status (CT-R-4)

CWP-1-1

CWP-1-2

CWP-1-3

CTF-R-2

Electronic Low Water Level Makeup Switch

Mechanical Low Water Level Makeup Switch


CT-R-3 hrs hrs

CT-R-4 hrs hrs

CWP-1-1 hrs hrs

CWP-1-2 hrs hrs

CWP-1-3 hrs hrs

CTF-R-2 hrs hrs

Valve(s) (open) (closed) (open) (closed)

CV-C-5 = 2-Way Modulating Control Valve (Makeup Water)

CV-C-6 = 2-Way Modulating Control Valve (Cooling Tower Blowdown)

CV-C-7 = 3-Way Modulating Control Valve (Cooling Tower Bypass)

CV-C-8 = 2-Way Modulating Control Valve (Filtration Blowdown)

Flow gpm

FM-C-4 = Makeup Water Flow gpm

FM-C-5 = Blowdown Water Flow gpm

VFD Speed hz/% hz/%

CT-R-3 hz/% hz/%

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Initial Conditions


CT-R-4 hz/% hz/%

CWP-1-1 hz/% hz/%

CWP-1-2 hz/% hz/%

CWP-1-3 hz/% hz/%

Comments:







Site Observation

Final BAS Reading

Pass

Yes No

Supply Pump VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

Supply Fan VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

Valve

1. Closed ☐ ☐

2. 50 % ☐ ☐



Check the sensors listed below for calibration and adequate location. This is a sampling check of calibrations done during the pre-functional checklist and contractor start-up processes. “In calibration”

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


means making a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 6 inches of the site sensor. Verify that the sensor reading (via permanent thermostat, gauge, packaged control panel or Building Management System [BMS]) compared to the test instrument-measured value is within the tolerances specified. If not, install offset at BMS, calibrate or replace sensor. Use the same test instrument as used for the original calibration, if possible. This should instrument should be provided by the controls or mechanical contractor. Below add actual sampled devices


Sensor & Location

Location OK*

Gauge or Pkg & BAS

Values

Instrument Measured

Value

Point Type

Pass **

Yes No Yes No










Temperature ± 1 F


Airflow ± 10 %

Waterflow ± 10 %

Comments:


The following procedures are a summary of the steps required to test the system function as described in the attached sequence of operations. The intent is for the system operation to be reviewed at both the piece of equipment (local/measured) and the controller - thermostat, BMS, DDC, etc. (Control). It should be noted that additional steps (not listed) may be required in order to achieve the noted

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


simulation. Items will be noted as Pass Yes/No, N/A – Not Applicable, or N/T – Not Tested. Detailed information on failures will be noted in the commissioning issues log...

Control


1.

Cooling Tower Operation - 23 0993 2.1 O. 1, 2 & 3 The BAS will measure the cooling tower condenser water supply (basin) temperature and modulate the condenser water bypass valve and fan VFD in sequence to maintain setpoints

Modify condenser water supply temperature 5 Deg F above current value. 1. On a rise in condenser water supply above setpoint, the

tower will operate as follows: a. The bypass valve will modulate open to the tower

to maintain the condenser water supply temperature set point. Allow time for the system to stabilize.

Once new setpoint is met adjust setpoint 5 more Deg F. b. Bypass valve will be fully open to the cooling

towers and the condenser water supply temperature is still above setpoint, the cooling tower fans will be energized and ramp up to maintain setpoint in unison.

Allow time for the system to stabilize.

Y / N

Modify condenser water supply temperature 5 Deg F below current value.

1. On a drop in temperature below setpoint, the tower will

operate as follows:

a. The fans will ramp down in unison to maintain

setpoint. Allow time for the system to stabilize.

Once new higher setpoint is met adjust the setpoint 10 more Deg lower.

b. Once the fan reaches its minimum speed and the condenser water supply temperature is still below setpoint, the fan will be de-energized.

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


c. The cooling tower bypass valve will modulate closed to the cooling tower to maintain temperature setpoint.

Leave the system as is to ensure the bypass valve will modulate in “low ambient” mode to maintain the minimum allowable condenser water supply temperature to the chiller as specified by the manufacturer – verify value. May need to be verified in the Opposite Season. Return all setpoints, temperature values to normal.

2. CT-R-3 Vibration cut-out 23 0993 2.1 O. 4 (repeat test for CT-R-4)

Manually trip the vibration sensor on tower CT-R-3, verify the following:

a. The switch activation will shut-off the cooling towers and generate an alarm at the BMS.

b. Manually reset the vibration switch. c. Tower falls will be enabled to run.

Y / N

3. Basin heaters 23 0993 2.1 O. 5 – (Opposite season verification)

Adjust each basin heater setpoints 5 deg F below current basin temperature – verify the following:

a. The basin heaters will energize. b. The BMS will indicate basin heaters are activated.

Y / N

4. Condenser Lead/Lag/Stand-by Pump Operation 23 0993 2.1 N

The condenser water pump will run anytime the primary chiller is called to run. Override needed variables to call for the primary chilled water system to be enabled.

1. The lead pump will start prior to the chiller being

enabled and will stop only after the chiller is disabled. (Note, condenser water isolation valves associated to each chiller will open prior to the lead condenser water pump is enabled)

2. The constant speed condenser water pumps will

operate in a lead/lag/stand-by. (VFD speed to be set by the TAB contractor) a. Pump(s) will stage on and off as chillers are commanded on and off as described in the Chiller Operation above and the following sequence. b. The chiller isolation valve will open and be proven open.

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


3. c. After the chiller isolation valve is proven open by the BAS, the lead pump will run.

With the lead pump running, fail the pump. c. Upon failure of the lead pump, the lag pump will be

commanded on and the lead pump will be turned off.

Leaving the lead pump failed, also fail the lag pump. Upon failure of the lag pump, the standby pump will be commanded on and the lag pump will be turned off.

Upon any pump failure there will be any alarm generated at the BMS.

The designated lead pump will be determined in the BAS by one of the following conditions:

Lead Pump will be determined in the BAS by one of the following conditions: (Note at right the current method of rotation).

a. Manually through the BAS. b. If the current lead pump exceeds it’s maximum runtime. c. Daily d. Weekly e. Monthly

Y / N

5. The lead condenser water pump will turn off and the

isolation valve will close when the chiller is proven off.

6. To prevent short cycling, the condenser water pumps will have a minimum downtime between stop and start as defined by the unit manufacturer.

Y / N

5. Cooling Tower Filtration System 23 0993 2.1 P

1. Filtration pump will be enabled to run anytime a condenser water pump is called to run. The separator packaged controller will open/close the blowdown valve based on the factory controller settings.

Y / N

6. Cooling Tower Fill/Make-up Water and Supply Water Meter 23 0993 2.1 Q

A water meter will be installed on the main cooling tower fill/make-up water supply piping to measure the amount of water supplied to fill

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


the cooling tower/condenser piping and/or the cooling tower water treatment blow down make-up water. This data will be sent from the meter to the BAS system for flow rate totalization. The BAS will provide an alarm if the water meter is measuring flow when all float valves and make-up water valves are closed

The cooling tower basin will have an electronic level to maintain the basin water level in the tower. In addition to the electronic level control system, a mechanical float switch will be provided at a level slightly lower than the electronic fill sensor location. (Test to be conducted for both towers). The BAS will monitor both switches and operate fill if either signal indicates low water fill required.

a. From the BMS adjust the electronic level control setpoint slightly higher than the current sensed basin water level.

b. Low sump alarm will be sent to the BAS. c. Verify the make-up valve opens and is indicated

on the BMS. d. Return the electronic fill level setpoint to normal. e. The make-up water valve will close, BMS low

sump alarm will clear. Once all clear(s) have been cleared, manually active the mechanical float switch.

a. Low sump alarm will be sent to the BAS. b. Verify the make-up valve opens and is indicated on

the BMS. c. Release the mechanical float switch. The make-up

water valve will close, d. BMS low sump alarm will clear.

Verify all alarms are cleared and the system is operating normally.

Y / N

Manually active the blow down valve at the cooling tower water treatment location.

1. When the blow down valve at the cooling tower water treatment location opens to drain, the similarly sized make-up water valve, also at the cooling tower water treatment area, will also open.

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


a. The BMS will indicate valve activation and valve position.

b. Make-up water valve will activate also – indicated at the BMS.

When the blow down valve closes, the make-up supply valve will also close.

a. Verify the BMS indicates the change in status.

7. Cooling Tower Drain Valves and Drain Water Meter 23 0993 2.1 R

1. From the BMS verify the follow:

a. The user will be provided with a separate onscreen button for the cooling tower’s drain valve.

b. When the button is pushed, the valve will automatically fully open the 2-way drain control valve.

c. A ‘deduct’ water meter will be installed on the main cooling tower drain piping to measure the amount of water sent to sanitary sewer. This data will be sent from the meter to the BAS system for flow rate totalization.

d. The ‘deduct’ water meter will also be sent any water that the cooling tower water treatment chooses to blow down to the drain by opening a 2-way valve.

2. The BAS will provide an alarm if the water meter is measuring flow if either drain or blow down valves indicate closed.

3. The user will be provided with an onscreen button for the condenser water system’s drain valve that when it is pushed will automatically fully open the corresponding 2-way drain control valve.

Y / N

Alarm


1. Cooling Tower(s) failure (typ of both) Y / N

2. Isolation valve failure (typ of all) Y / N

3. Differential pressure sensor failure Y / N

4. Temperature sensor failure (typ of all) Y / N

5. VFD failure (all pumps) Y / N

6. High differential pressure Y / N

7. Low differential pressure Y / N

8. Low condenser water supply temperature Y / N

9. High condenser water supply temperature Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


10. Pump No Water Flow (CT) (typ of all) Y / N

11. High level water switch turns on Y / N

12. Low water make-up switch turns on Y / N

13. Low level water switch turns on Y / N

14. Vibration Cut-Out switch turns on Y / N

Wrap Up


1. Y / N

2. Y / N

3. Y / N

4. Y / N

5. Y / N

6. Y / N

7. Y / N

8. Y / N

Comments:

Trend Report


Trend Report





3. Fan/Pump Speed






Acceptance of Test:

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah




Tested by Date

Witnessed by Date


beyond engineering



1 of 6

Overview

Equipment/Systems Exhaust Fan

Equipment ID/Tag No. EF-2-1 (typ of EF-B1-7)

Equipment Location:

Area(s) Served: SCRRAC Electrical Closet

System Description: Electrical Closet Exhaust

Spec Section(s): 23 0993, 23 5100

Test Execution






Equipment Data

Equipment

Nameplate

EF-2-1




Serial Number n/a


Item Yes No


☐ ☐


☐ ☐


☐ ☐



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Item Yes No




Participants:


Yes No

CM/GC ☐ ☐








Schedule






Setpoints



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Setpoints


Local Thermostat setpoint 85 deg F

(adj.) oF ☒ ☐ ☐

Alarm Temperature (oF / psi) ☒ ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

Initial Conditions


Temperature oF oF

Space temperature oF oF


Fan Failure


Fan Status

Local Speed Controller % %

Comments:




beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah





Site Observation

Final BAS Reading

Pass

Yes No

Supply Fan VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

Supply Fan VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

Valve

1. Closed ☐ ☐

2. 50 % ☐ ☐





Sensor & Location

Location OK*

Gauge or Pkg & BAS

Values

Instrument Measured

Value

Point Type

Pass **

Yes No Yes No







beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah





Temperature ± 1 F


Airflow ± 10 %

Waterflow ± 10 %

Comments:



Control


Description: General Exhaust

1.

Exhaust Fan will operate via local thermostat. From the local thermostat, adjust the setpoint up and then down to operate the fan. Verify operation at the BMS.

Y / N

2. Verify fan failure at the BMS Y / N

Alarm


1. Fan Failure Y / N

Wrap Up


1. Y / N

2. Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Comments:

Trend Report


Trend Report


Acceptance of Test:



Tested by Date

Witnessed by Date


beyond engineering



1 of 7

Overview


Equipment ID/Tag No. EF-B1-1, & 6

Equipment Location: G107

Area(s) Served: SCRRAC Pool Chemical, Pool Equip

System Description: EXHAUST

Spec Section(s): 23 0993, 23 5100

Test Execution






Equipment Data

Equipment

Nameplate

EF-B1-1




Serial Number n/a


Item Yes No


☐ ☐


☐ ☐


☐ ☐



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Item Yes No




Participants:


Yes No

CM/GC ☐ ☐








Schedule






Setpoints



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Setpoints


oF ☒ ☐ ☐


Initial Conditions


Pressure psi psi

Stack Pressure psi psi


Fan Failure

High/Low stack pressure (coordinate values with selected domestic water heating vendor)


Fan Status

Fan Start/Stop


Fan Speed

Comments:




beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah





Site Observation

Final BAS Reading

Pass

Yes No

Supply Fan VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

Supply Fan VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

Valve

1. Closed ☐ ☐

2. 50 % ☐ ☐





Sensor & Location

Location OK*

Gauge or Pkg & BAS

Values

Instrument Measured

Value

Point Type

Pass **

Yes No Yes No







beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah





Temperature ± 1 F


Airflow ± 10 %

Waterflow ± 10 %

Comments:



Control


Description: 23 0993 2.15 H Exhaust fan shall be provided for common venting of the domestic water heating system located on B1 in Water Pump Room G109. The fan shall operate 24/7/ Exhaust fan manufacturer shall provide fan, vent system controller, and all associated sensors.

1.

The mechanical contractor will vary the control settings to verify the following operation: The controller shall monitor the vent stack pressure and modulate the ECM motor on the vent fan to maintain stack pressure set point as coordinated with the furnished domestic water heaters.

Y / N

2. From the BMS verify the monitoring as detailed below: Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


The controller shall monitor the fan status, speed, and stack pressure and shall be provided with network interface card to integrate into the BAS.

Alarm



2. High/Low stack pressure (coordinate values with selected domestic water heating vendor)

Y / N

Wrap Up


1. Y / N

2. Y / N

3. Y / N

4. Y / N

5. Y / N

6. Y / N

7. Y / N

8. Y / N

Comments:

Trend Report


Trend Report


beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Trend Report


Acceptance of Test:



Tested by Date

Witnessed by Date


beyond engineering



1 of 6

Overview


Equipment ID/Tag No. EF-B1-4

Equipment Location: Pool Equipment Room

Area(s) Served: SCRRAC Emergency Exhaust Fan

System Description: Exhaust

Spec Section(s): 23 0993, 23 5100

Test Execution






Equipment Data

Equipment

Nameplate

EF-B1-4




Serial Number n/a


Item Yes No


☐ ☐


☐ ☐


☐ ☐



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Item Yes No




Participants:


Yes No

CM/GC ☐ ☐








Schedule






Setpoints



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Initial Conditions


Temperature oF oF

Space temperature oF oF


Fan Failure


Fan Status


Comments:







Site Observation

Final BAS Reading

Pass

Yes No

Supply Fan VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

Supply Fan VFD 1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah





Site Observation

Final BAS Reading

Pass

Yes No

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

Valve

1. Closed ☐ ☐

2. 50 % ☐ ☐





Sensor & Location

Location OK*

Gauge or Pkg & BAS

Values

Instrument Measured

Value

Point Type

Pass **

Yes No Yes No










Temperature ± 1 F


Airflow ± 10 %

Waterflow ± 10 %

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Comments:



Control


Description: Emrgency Exhaust

1.

Exhaust Fan will operate via local switch and/or the BMS. From the local switch, enable the fan. From the BMS enable the fan. Verify operation at the BMS.

Y / N

2. Verify fan failure at the BMS Y / N

Alarm



Wrap Up


1. Y / N

2. Y / N

Comments:

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Trend Report


Trend Report


Acceptance of Test:



Tested by Date

Witnessed by Date


beyond engineering



1 of 11

Overview

Equipment/Systems Energy Recovering Unit

Equipment ID/Tag No. ERU-B1-1

Equipment Location: LEVEL B1


System Description: Conditioned Air serving Level B-1 Locker Room

Spec Section(s): 23 0993, 23 7313.16 & 23 7313.17

Test Execution






Equipment Data

Equipment

Nameplate

ERU-B1-1




Serial Number n/a


Item Yes No


☐ ☐


☐ ☐


☐ ☐



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Item Yes No




Participants:


Yes No

CM/GC ☐ ☐








Schedule






Setpoints



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Setpoints


Occupied mode Supply air temperature set point (supply air temperature set point)

80 deg. F oF ☐ ☒ ☐

Occupied mode Supply fan VFD speed 100 % of design flow

oF ☐ ☒ ☒

Occupied mode Exhaust fan VFD speed 100 % of design flow

oF ☐ ☒ ☒

Unoccupied mode Supply air temperature set point (supply air temperature set point)

80 deg. F oF ☐ ☒ ☐

Unoccupied mode Supply fan VFD speed TBD oF ☐ ☒ ☒ Unoccupied mode Exhaust fan VFD speed TBD oF ☐ ☒ ☒ Exhaust Air Defrost 38 deg. F oF ☐ ☒ ☒

Alarm Temperature (oF / psi) ☒ ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐ Chilled Water Coil Freeze Protection 35 deg. F ☒ ☐ ☐ High Supply Air Temperature 5°F (adj.)

greater than setpoint.

☐ ☒ ☒

Low Supply Air Temperature 45ºF (adj.) ☐ ☒ ☒ Return Air Temperature (High) 90°F (adj.). ☐ ☒ ☒ Return Air Temperature (Low) 45°F (adj.). ☐ ☒ ☒ Return Air Humidity 70% (adj. ☐ ☒ ☒

Initial Conditions


Temperature oF oF

Supply Leaving Air Temperature oF oF

Supply Air Temperature Setpoint oF oF

Plate Heat Exchanger Discharge Air Temp oF oF

Plate Heat Exchanger Discharge Air Humidity oF oF

Chilled Water Coil Leaving Air Temperature oF oF


Outside Air Temperature (polled from roof) oF oF

Exhaust Air Temperature oF oF

Zone Temperature 1 oF oF

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Initial Conditions


Zone Temperature 2 oF oF

Humidity % %


Outside Air Humidity (polled from roof) % %


Freeze stat

High Static Shutdown



OA Filter Differential Pressure

RA Filter Differential Pressure

Condensate drain plan overflow switch activated.

Return Air Dirty Filter

Re-Circ Air Damper Failure


Re-Heating Valve Failure

Supply Air Smoke Detection.

Return Air Smoke Detection.

Supply Fan VFD Failure

Exhaust Fan VFD Failure

Damper Position % %

Re-Circ Air Damper Position % %


Supply Fan Status


Exhaust Fan Status

Exhaust Fan Start/Stop

OA Damper open/closed

Exhaust Air Damper open/closed


AHU

Supply fan (adj.) minimum runtime

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Initial Conditions


Exhaust fan (adj.) minimum runtime


Chilled Water Control Valve Position

Heating Valve Position

VFD Speed hz/% hz/%

Supply Fan Speed

Exhaust Fan Speed

Comments:







Site Observation

Final BAS Reading

Pass

Yes No

Supply Fan VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

Supply Fan VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

Valve

1. Closed ☐ ☐

2. 50 % ☐ ☐


beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah





Sensor & Location

Location OK*

Gauge or Pkg & BAS

Values

Instrument Measured

Value

Point Type

Pass **

Yes No Yes No










Temperature ± 1 F


Airflow ± 10 %

Waterflow ± 10 %

Comments:


beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Control


1.

Supply and Exhaust Air Smoke Detection: 23 0993. 2.9 F The unit shall shut down and generate an alarm upon receiving a supply or exhaust air smoke detector status

Y / N

2. Outside Air Dampers 23 0993. 2.9 G

If the unit is enabled, disable the unit (from the BMS) and then enable the unit again – verify the following. The outside air damper will open anytime the unit runs and will close anytime the unit stops. The supply fan will start only after the damper status has proven the damper is open.

Y / N

3.

Exhaust Fan: 23 0993 2.9 H The exhaust fan shall run whenever the supply fan runs, unless shutdown on safeties.

Y / N

4. Fan Operation – 23 0993 2.9 I

Supply Fan From the BMS adjust / override as needed to verify the below: The supply fan shall run anytime the unit is commanded to run, unless shutdown on safeties. Cycle the fan to verify short cycling prevention: To prevent short cycling, the supply fan shall have a user definable (adj.) minimum runtime. The fan shall operate at 100% of design airflow in occupied mode (as determined by T&B Contractor). Return the system to normal

Y / N

Exhaust Fan: From the BMS adjust / override as needed to verify the below:

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


The exhaust fan shall run anytime the unit is commanded to run, unless shutdown on safeties. Cycle the fan to verify short cycling prevention: To prevent short cycling, the exhaust fan shall have a user definable (adj.) minimum runtime. The fan shall operate at 100% of design airflow in occupied mode (as determined by T&B Contractor). Return the system to normal

5. Chilled Water Control Valve: 23 0993 2.9 K

The controller will measure the supply air temperature and modulate the chilled water control valve to maintain its cooling setpoint. With the ERU enabled - From the BMS decrease the supply air temperature setpoint 5 deg F and override the Outside air temperature above 60 deg F (if required). 1. The cooling shall be enabled whenever: a. Outside air temperature is greater than 60°F (adj.). b. The supply air temperature is above the cooling setpoint. c. The fan status is on. During normal operation, at no time will the chilled and hot water valve be open simultaneously. The re-heat valve will modulate closed, then the chilled water valve will modulate open as required to maintain the lower setpoint. Allow time for the system to stabilize.

Y / N

6. Hot Water Control Valve; 23 0993 2.9 l

The controller shall measure the supply air temperature and modulate the hot water control valve to maintain its heating setpoint. 1. The heating shall be enabled whenever: a. Outside air temperature is less than 65° (adj.). b. The supply air temperature is below heating setpoint. c. The fan status is on. During normal operation, at no time will the chilled and hot water valve be open simultaneously.

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


The chilled water valve will modulate closed, then the re-heat valve will modulate open as required to maintain the higher setpoint. Allow time for the system to stabilize. 2. The hot water control valve shall modulate open for freeze

protection Return all to normal.

7. Freeze Protection: The chilled water control valve and re-heat valve shall open to 50% (adj.) whenever the freeze stat is on.

Y / N

8. \ Verify all setting are restored to pre-test conditions? Y / N

Alarm


1. Freeze stat / The unit shall shut down and generate an alarm upon receiving a freezestat status. Freeze stats shall be set at 35 deg. F

Y / N



4. Dirty Filter Y / N

5. Re-Circ Air Damper Failure Y / N

6. Chilled Water Control Valve Failure Y / N

7. Re-Heating Valve Failure Y / N

8. Supply Air Smoke Detection. Y / N

9. Exhaust Air Smoke Detection. Y / N

10. Supply Fan VFD Failure Y / N

11. Exhaust Fan VFD Failure Y / N

12. Outside air damper

13. Exhaust Air Damper

Wrap Up


1. Y / N

2. Y / N

3. Y / N

4. Y / N

5. Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


6. Y / N

7. Y / N

8. Y / N

Comments:

Trend Report


Trend Report


Acceptance of Test:



Tested by Date

Witnessed by Date

Commissioning Provider

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



beyond engineering



1 of 9

Overview

Equipment/Systems FCU-B1-1 (typ of B1-2, B1-3, 1-1, 1-2 & 2-1) Complete one for each

Equipment ID/Tag No. B1-1

Equipment Location: B1 LEVEL

Area(s) Served: SCRRAC Varies

System Description: Fan Coil Unit

Spec Section(s): 23 0993,

Test Execution






Equipment Data

Equipment

Nameplate

FCU-B1-1




Serial Number n/a


Item Yes No


☐ ☐


☐ ☐


☐ ☐



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Item Yes No




Participants:


Yes No

CM/GC ☐ ☐








Schedule






Setpoints



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Setpoints


Space Temperature Setpoint 85°F oF ☐ ☒ ☒ Occupied mode – cooling setpoint 85°F oF ☐ ☒ ☒ Occupied mode – heating setpoint 80°F oF ☐ ☒ ☒ Unoccupied mode – cooling setpoint 85°F oF ☐ ☒ ☒ Unoccupied mode – heating setpoint 80°F oF ☐ ☒ ☒ Minimum Supply air fan minimum runtime TBD mins ☐ ☒ ☒


High Zone Temperature Greater

than 95°F. ☐ ☒ ☒

Low Zone Temperature Less than

75°F. ☐ ☒ ☒

Initial Conditions


Temperature oF oF

Space Temperature (Zone) oF oF

Heating Setpoint oF oF

Cooling Setpoint oF oF


Freeze stat.

Return Smoke Detected. (FCU-B1-1, 1-2, 2-1)

Supply Smoke Detected. (FCU-B1-1, 1-2, 2-1)

Valve Failure

Supply Fan Failure: Commanded on, but the status is off or on when commanded off.

High Zone Temperature – Greater than 95°F.

Low Zone Temperature – Less than 75°F.


Freeze stat

Supply Fan Status




Hot Water Control Valve Position

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Comments:







Site Observation

Final BAS Reading

Pass

Yes No

Supply Fan VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

Supply Fan VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

Valve

1. Closed ☐ ☐

2. 50 % ☐ ☐




beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Sensor & Location

Location OK*

Gauge or Pkg & BAS

Values

Instrument Measured

Value

Point Type

Pass **

Yes No Yes No










Temperature ± 1 F


Airflow ± 10 %

Waterflow ± 10 %

Comments:



Control


Description: Fan Cool Unit(s) provide conditioned air to the pool area

1. Zone Setpoint Adjust: 23 0993 2.10 E

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


From the space sensor(s) adjust the space setpoint up and ten down to verify the BMS indicates the change within the limits and the proper sensor is mapped to the BMS. The occupant will be able to adjust the zone temperature heating and cooling setpoints at the zone sensor. The zone sensor will only be able to be adjusted between 80°F - 90°F (adj.). Return to normal setpoint.

Y / N

2. Freeze Protection: 23 0993 2.10 F

Verify the Freeze stat is set to 35 deg. F. Manually trip the freeze stat(s) to verify alarming and proper mapping to the BMS. The unit will shut down and generate an alarm upon receiving a freezestat status. Freeze stats will be set at 35 deg. F. Return all to normal

Y / N

3. Supply and Return Air Smoke Detection (FCU-B1-1, 1-2, 2-1 ONLY): 23 0993 2.10 G

Manually trip the smoke detector(s) to verify alarming and proper mapping to the BMS. The unit shall shut down and generate an alarm upon receiving a supply or return air smoke detector status Return all to normal

Y / N

4. Supply Fan Minimum Runtime: 23 0993 2.10 H

From the BMS command the FCU(s) on and off several times to verify proper mapping of command and short cycling prevention. The supply fan shall run anytime the unit is commanded to run, unless shutdown on safeties. To prevent short cycling, the supply fan shall have a user definable (adj.) minimum runtime Return all to normal.

Y / N

5. Cooling: 23 0993 2.10 I

The controller will measure the zone temperature and modulate the chilled water control valve to maintain its cooling setpoint.

The cooling will be enabled whenever: a. The zone temperature is above cooling setpoint. b. The supply fan status is on. c. The heating is not active

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


1. Decrease the Zone Temperature Set Point; is the Heating Control Valve fully closed and does the Chilled Water Control Valve modulate open to maintain the new zone setpoint?

Allow time for the system to stabilize. Return all to normal

6. Heating: 23 0993 2.10 J

The controller shall measure the zone temperature and modulate the hot water control valve to maintain its heating setpoint.

The heating shall be enabled whenever: a. The zone temperature is below heating setpoint b. The supply fan status is on. c. The cooling is not active

1. Increase the Zone Temperature Set Point; is the Chilled Water

Control Valve fully closed and does the Heating Control Valve modulate open to maintain the new zone setpoint?

Allow time for the system to stabilize. Return all to normal

Y / N

Alarm


1. Occupied mode – cooling setpoint Y / N

2. Occupied mode – heating setpoint Y / N

3. Unoccupied mode – cooling setpoint Y / N

4. Unoccupied mode – heating setpoint Y / N

5. High Zone Temperature – Greater than 95°F. Y / N

6. Low Zone Temperature – Less than 75°F. Y / N

7. Supply Fan Failure: Commanded on, but the status is off or on when commanded off.

Y / N

8. Freeze stat. Y / N

9. Chilled water valve failure Y / N

10. Hot water valve failure Y / N

11. Return Smoke Detected. (FCU-B1-1, 1-2, 2-1) Y / N

12. Supply Smoke Detected. (FCU-B1-1, 1-2, 2-1) Y / N

Wrap Up

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



1. Y / N

2. Y / N

3. Y / N

4. Y / N

5. Y / N

6. Y / N

7. Y / N

8. Y / N

Comments:

Trend Report


Trend Report


Acceptance of Test:



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Tested by Date

Witnessed by Date


beyond engineering



1 of 16

Overview

Equipment/Systems Boiler(s) & Pumps

Equipment ID/Tag No. B-1-1, 1-2, PHP-1-1,1-2, SHP-1-1, 1-2, 1-3, 1-4

Equipment Location: MECHANICAL ROOM S110


System Description: HOT WATER SYSTEM

Spec Section(s): 23 0993, 23 2123 & 23 5216

Test Execution






Equipment Data

Equipment

Nameplate

B-1-1 B-1-2


Manufacturer ☐

Model Number ☐

Serial Number

Equipment Data

Equipment

Nameplate

PHP-1-1 PHP-1-2


Manufacturer ☐

Model Number ☐

Serial Number

Equipment Data

Equipment

Nameplate

SHP-1-1 SHP-1-2


Manufacturer ☐

Model Number ☐

Serial Number

Equipment Data

Equipment SHP-1-3 SHP-1-4 Matches

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Nameplate

Approved Submittal

Manufacturer ☐

Model Number ☐

Serial Number

Equipment

Nameplate

P-1-10




Serial Number n/a


Item Yes No


☐ ☐


☐ ☐


☐ ☐






Participants:


Yes No

CM/GC ☐ ☐


beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah








Schedule






Setpoints



Hot water supply temperature 140 deg. F ☐ ☒ ☒

Emergency Fill hot water supply temperature 180 deg. F ☐ ☒ ☒

Minimum Hot Water Reset 130 deg. F

Timed Events ☐ ☐ ☐

Lead pump maximum runtime (rotation) TBD TBD ☐ ☒ ☒

Pump cycle delay TBD TBD ☐ ☒ ☒

Hot Water Reset calculation 10 min ☐ ☒ ☒

System Limits ☐ ☐ ☐

VFD minimum speed limit 20% ☒ ☒ ☒

Pressure (“w.c. / psi) ☒ ☐ ☒ ☐ ☐

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Setpoints


Differential Pressure setpoint (building) 12 psi

(to be established at test and balance)

☐ ☐ ☐

High Differential Pressure

25% greater than set

point

(to be determined by the TAB)

☐ ☒ ☒

Low Differential Pressure

25% less than set

point

(to be determined by the TAB)

☐ ☒ ☒


Low hot water supply temperature 110 deg. F ☐ ☒ ☒

High hot water supply temperature

180 deg. F (pool initial

fill) ☐ ☒ ☒

High hot water return temperature 130 deg. F ☐ ☒ ☒

Low hot water return temperature 90 deg. F ☐ ☒ ☒

Emergency Fill hot water supply temperature 180 deg. F ☐ ☒ ☒

Initial Conditions


Temperature oF oF

B-1-1 Hot Water Supply Temp oF oF

B-1-2 Hot Water Supply Temp oF oF

B-1-1 Hot Water Return Temp oF oF

B-1-2 Hot Water Return Temp oF oF

Primary Hot Water Return Temp oF oF

Hot Water Return (FROM POOL HEAT EXCHANGERS) oF oF

Hot Water Supply (TO POOL HEAT EXCHANGERS) oF oF

Secondary HW Supply Temp (TO BUILDING) oF oF

Secondary HW Return Temp (TO BUILDING) oF oF

Heat Recovery HW Supply Temp oF oF

Heat Recovery HW Return Temp oF oF

Capacity % %

B-1-1 Capacity % %

B-1-2 Capacity % %

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Initial Conditions



B-1-1 Enable Fail

B-1-2 Enable Fail

PHP-1-1 Pump Fail

PHP-1-2 Pump Fail

SHP-1-1 Pump Fail

SHP-1-2 Pump Fail

SHP-1-3 Pump Fail

SHP-1-4 Pump Fail

Low hot water supply temperature

High hot water supply temperature

High hot water return temperature

Low hot water return temperature

Emergency Fill hot water supply temperature

High Differential Pressure

Low Differential Pressure

Enable (on) (off) (on) (off)

B-1-1 Enable

B-1-2 Enable

PHP-1-1 Pump Start/Stop

PHP-1-2 Pump Start/Stop

SHP-1-1 Pump Start/Stop





B-1-1 Status

B-1-2 Status

PHP-1-1 Pump Status

PHP-1-2 Pump Status

SHP-1-1 Pump Status

SHP-1-2 Pump Status

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Initial Conditions


SHP-1-3 Pump Status

SHP-1-4 Pump Status


B-1-1 Operating Hours

B-1-2 Operating Hours

Isolation Valve / Mixing (open) (closed) (open) (closed)

CV-H-1 = 2-Position Isolation Valve (B-1-1)

CV-H-2 = 2-Position Isolation Valve (B-1-2)

CV-H-3 = 2-Position Isolation Valve (HRC)

CV-H-4 = 2-Position Isolation Valve (HRC)

CV-H-5 = 3-Way Modulating Control Valve (Mixing Valve)

CV-H-6 = 2-Way Modulating Control Valve (Bypass)

Flow gpm gpm

FM-H-1 (BTU) = Hot Water Secondary Capacity and Flow (Building)

FM-H-2 (BTU) = Hot Water Secondary Capacity and Flow (Pool)

FM-H-3 = Decoupler Flow (Bi-Directional)

FM-H-4 (BTU) = HRC Hot Water Capacity and Flow

VFD Speed hz/% hz/%

PHP-1-1 Pump VFD Speed

PHP-1-2 Pump VFD Speed

SHP-1-1 Pump VFD Speed




Differential Press psi psi

Hot Water Differential Pressure (Building)

Comments:

The above set points and initial conditions are key items for commissioning purposes. Review all data available at local controllers and the Building Management System (BMS) front-end computer and note any additional values the affect system operations (e.g. lockouts or time delays). Some values

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


will require the use of measurement equipment.






Site Observation

Final BAS Reading

Pass

Yes No

Supply Pump VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

Supply Fan VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

Valve

1. Closed ☐ ☐

2. 50 % ☐ ☐





Sensor & Location

Location OK*

Gauge or Pkg & BAS

Values

Instrument Measured

Value

Point Type

Pass **

Yes No Yes No

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Sensor & Location

Location OK*

Gauge or Pkg & BAS

Values

Instrument Measured

Value

Point Type

Pass **

Yes No Yes No










Temperature ± 1 F


Airflow ± 10 %

Waterflow ± 10 %

Comments:



Control


Operational Schedule – 23 0993 2.2 E. When the operator defined schedule within the BAS or commanded to the occupied mode, the hot water system will be enabled. If the

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


system is not in occupied mode or off due to internal safeties or alarm, the system will be considered in unoccupied mode.

Primary Lead/Lag Pump Operation – 23 0993 2.2 F The boilers are served by two (2) primary boilers piped in parallel. The pumps will be controlled by the factory provided boiler controller and configured so that either pump can operate with either boiler.

1. Boiler Operation 23 0993 2.2 H

From the BMS adjust the Hot Water Return setpoint 5 F above current

system hot water return setpoint. Verify the following:

1. As the secondary supply hot water temperature, as monitored

by the BAS, falls 4 degrees F (adj.) below setpoint, the lead

boiler external controller will receive a signal from the BAS to

provide heat, the boiler plant will operate as follows:

a. The external controller will start the primary hot water pump for the lead boiler, and proof of water flow from the primary hot water pump will be confirmed.

b. The lead boiler will operate under its internal control logic and safeties to maintain the leaving secondary hot water temperature setpoint.

Once the system is operating and controlling to maintain the secondary hot water temperature setpoint, adjust the

setpoint again and additional 5 F higher. c. If the secondary hot water supply temperature

setpoint cannot be maintained by the lead boiler, the lead boiler external controller will be capable of staging on the second boiler and its associated primary hot water pump to maintain the secondary hot water temperature setpoint.

Allow time for the system to stabilize.

Y / N

With the system operating to maintain the higher setpoint, now

reduce the setpoint 5 F. 23 0993 2.2 H. 3. Verify the following:

1. As secondary supply hot water temperature rises 4 degrees F (adj). above the setpoint, the lead boiler external controller will stage off boilers and primary hot water pumps as required to maintain setpoint via its own internal controls and safeties.

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


Return all setpoints to normal.

2. Boiler Isolation Valve 23 0993 2.2 I

From the BMS once again enable the hot water system. Verfiy isolation valve sequencing as detailed below:

1. The boiler isolation valve will open anytime the boiler is called to run.

2. The boiler isolation valve will open prior to the boiler turning on and close after the boiler is proven off. The delay times will be set appropriately to allow for orderly hot water system start-up and shutdown. The isolation valve will therefore have:

a. A user adjustable delay on start (note delay(s) at right) b. And a user adjustable delay on stop

The boiler will only start after proof of valve open status for 10 seconds (adj.) and associated pump has proven status. 3. Isolation valves will fail to the open position to reduce risk

of dead heading the hot water pump. Upon receiving a failure alarm, the BAS will start the stand-by boiler and associated pump, and shut down the pump and boiler associated with the isolation valve in failure.

Place the system into normal operation for the following test.

Y / N

3. Boiler 3-Way Mixing Valve 23 0993 2.2 J.

With the system in normal operation, adjust the setpoint for the

leaving hot water system 5 F lower than the normal 140 F. Modify pool fill setpoint as required.

1. The 3-way mixing valve will modulate to maintain a leaving water temperature of 140 deg. F to the building loop. 3-Way valve will only be enabled to control when pool fill operation is occurring (supply temperature reset to 180 deg. F)

From the 3-way valve, remove the BMS AO signal.

2. In the event of a signal loss from the BAS, the 3-Way valve will

revert to its last known position.

Re-connect the BMS AO signal to the 3-way valve; the valve

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


will modulate to the commanded signal.

4. Secondary Lead/Stand-by Pump Operation 23 0993 2.2 K.

From the BMS, select SHP-1-1 and SHP-1-3 as lead pumps. Verify lead / standby operation as detailed below.

1. When enabled by the BAS each set of two (2) secondary variable (SHP-1-1,1-2) and constant (SHP-1-3, 1-4) speed hot water pumps will operate in a lead/stand-by fashion as follows: Adjust system setting to verify.

a. The lead pump(s) will run. Manually fail the lead (SHP-1-1) pump.

b. Upon failure of the lead pump, the stand-by pump (SHP-1-2) will be commanded on and the lead pump will be turned off.

Upon verification of standby pump (SHP-1-2) operation, fail lead SHP-1-3. Standby pump SHP-1-4 will be enabled to operate. From the BMS, disable the system (allow time for the system to return to normal off). Now select pumps SHP-1-2 and SHP-1-4 as the lead pumps and repeat the above test of fail rotation. Upon verification of new lead pump selection proceed to the next testing step below. From the BMS, adjust the Hot water differential setpoint higher 5 psi. Verify the building system pumps operate as detailed below.

c. On decreasing hot water differential pressure, the lag pump will stage on and run in unison with the lead pump to maintain hot water differential pressure setpoint. (SHP-1,2 only)

Once verified disable the system and rotate the building pumps and retest.

Y / N

Based upon the user selected means of pump rotation, verify through the BMS proper operation.

2. The designated lead pump will be determined in the BAS by one of the following conditions:

a. Manually through the BAS. b. If the current lead pump exceeds the maximum runtime. c. Daily d. Weekly e. Monthly

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


5. Short cycling Prevention

The pumps will have a minimum downtime between stop and start as defined by the unit manufacturer. With the system in operation: a. Remove any BMS overrides and disable the system. b. Boiler will cycle off after delay c. Associated pumps will de-energize d. Associated isolation valves will close. Through the BMS once again enable the hot water system, verify the start delay.

Y / N

6. Hot Water Differential Pressure Control – Pump Speed Control (SHP-1-1, 1-2) 23 0993 2.2 L

With the system enabled for normal operation, adjust the hot water system (building) differential pressure setpoint 5 psi above the current system differential pressure and increase as required to verify complete sequence. Verify system operation as detailed below:

1. The BAS will monitor the hot water differential pressure and modulate the VFD on the lead pump (SHP-1-1 or 1-2) to maintain the hot water differential pressure setpoint. The initial differential pressure recommendation will be 12 LBF/square inch and will be field adjusted by TAB to meet the requirements of the actual field conditions. The pump speed will not drop below 20%. Note any system deadband values at right.

2. On dropping hot water differential pressure, the BAS will stage on the VFD's to run and maintain setpoints as follows:

a. The BAS will modulate the lead VFD to maintain setpoint b. If the lead VFD speed is greater than 95% (adj.), the lag VFD will stage on c. The lag VFD will ramp up to match the lead VFD speed and then run in unison with the lead VFD to maintain setpoint.

3. On rising hot water differential pressure, the BAS will stage off

the VFD's as follows: a. If the VFD's speed drops back to 40% (adj.) below setpoint, the lag VFD will stage off. b. The lead VFD will continue to run to maintain setpoint.

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


c. If the lead VFD minimum speed is reached, the minimum pump flow control sequence below will be initiated.

4. SHP-1-3, 1-4 will be constant volume and serve pool heat exchangers with 3-way mixing valves at each heat exchanger.

Return all to normal.

7. Hot Water Supply Temperature Reset 23 0993 2.2 M

Through override the “system hot water valve call” as required to verify the below sequence.

1. The hot water supply temperature setpoint will be reset using

a trim and respond algorithm based on heating requirements. 2. The hot water supply temperature setpoint will reset down 10

deg. F below setpoint based on hot water valve feedback. 3. If all valves are 90% open (adj.) or greater for a period of 10

minutes, the hot water supply temperature will reset up 1 deg. F until it reaches design of 140 deg. F. Once the hot water coils are satisfied (valves closing) then the hot water supply temperature setpoint will gradually lower 1 deg. F in 10 minute increments to a minimum of 130 deg. F.

Return all to normal

Y / N

8. Pool Fill Override 23 0993 2.2 N

From the BMS, select the graphical button “pool fill override command”. Verify the following sequence:

1. The hot water plant will be equipped with pool fill override command. This feature will be available to the user at the graphic interface and will override the current plant operation to provide a leaving water temperature set-point of 180 deg. F.

2. The building hot water loop 3-way valve will modulate as required to maintain leaving hot water temperature set point (130 to 140 deg. F).


Y / N

Alarm


1. B-1-1 Enable Fail Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


2. B-1-2 Enable Fail Y / N

3. B-1-1 low water Y / N

4. B-1-2 low water Y / N

5. PHP-1-1 Pump Fail Y / N

6. PHP-1-2 Pump Fail Y / N

7. SHP-1-1 Pump Fail Y / N




11. Low hot water supply temperature Y / N

12. High hot water supply temperature Y / N

13. High hot water return temperature Y / N

14. Low hot water return temperature Y / N

15. Emergency Fill hot water supply temperature Y / N

16. CV-H-1 = 2-Position Isolation Valve (B-1-1) Y / N

17. CV-H-2 = 2-Position Isolation Valve (B-1-2) Y / N

18. CV-H-3 = 2-Position Isolation Valve (HRC) Y / N

19. CV-H-4 = 2-Position Isolation Valve (HRC) Y / N

20. CV-H-5 = 3-Way Modulating Control Valve (Mixing Valve) Y / N

21. CV-H-6 = 2-Way Modulating Control Valve (Bypass) Y / N

22. Hot Water Differential Pressure High (Building) Y / N

23. Hot Water Differential Pressure Low (Building) Y / N

24. B-1-1 Hot Water Supply Temp High Y / N

25. B-1-2 Hot Water Supply Temp High Y / N

26. Primary Hot Water Return Temp Y / N

27. Hot Water Return (FROM POOL HEAT EXCHANGERS) Y / N

28. Hot Water Supply (TO POOL HEAT EXCHANGERS) Y / N

29. Secondary HW Supply Temp (TO BUILDING) Y / N

30. Secondary HW Return Temp (TO BUILDING) Y / N

31. Heat Recovery HW Supply Temp Y / N

32. Heat Recovery HW Return Temp Y / N

33. PHP-1-1 VFD Fail Y / N

34. PHP-1-2 VFD Fail Y / N

35. SHP-1-1 VFD Fail Y / N




beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


39. Temperature Sensor Failure (typ of all) Y / N

40. Boiler 1-1 Communication Failure Y / N

41. Boiler 1-2 Communication Failure Y / N

42. Boiler 1-1 Emergency Shutdown Y / N

43. Boiler 1-2 Emergency Shutdown Y / N

44.

Wrap Up


1. Y / N

2. Y / N

3. Y / N

4. Y / N

5. Y / N

6. Y / N

7. Y / N

8. Y / N

Comments:

Trend Report


Trend Report





3. Fan/Pump Speed






beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Acceptance of Test:



Tested by Date

Witnessed by Date


beyond engineering



1 of 7

Overview


Equipment ID/Tag No. EF-1-1 & EF-R-2

Equipment Location: Varies


System Description: Kitchen Exhaust Fan(s)

Spec Section(s): 23 0993, 23 5100

Test Execution






Equipment Data

Equipment

Nameplate

EF-1-1 EF-R-2


Manufacturer ☐

Model Number ☐

Serial Number


Item Yes No


☐ ☐


☐ ☐


☐ ☐



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Item Yes No




Participants:


Yes No

CM/GC ☐ ☐








Schedule






Setpoints



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Setpoints


oF ☐ ☐ ☐

Initial Conditions



EF-1-1 Failure

EF-R-2 Failure

EF-R-2 VFD Failure


EF-1-1 Status

EF-R-2 Status

EF-R-2 VFD Status

VFD Speed hz/% hz/%

EF-R-2 VFD

Comments:







Site Observation

Final BAS Reading

Pass

Yes No

Supply Fan VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah





Site Observation

Final BAS Reading

Pass

Yes No

Supply Fan VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

Valve

1. Closed ☐ ☐

2. 50 % ☐ ☐





Sensor & Location

Location OK*

Gauge or Pkg & BAS

Values

Instrument Measured

Value

Point Type

Pass **

Yes No Yes No










Temperature ± 1 F

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Airflow ± 10 %

Waterflow ± 10 %

Comments:



Control


Description: 23 0993 2.12 A Kitchen exhaust fan shall be tied into the kitchen demand-controlled ventilation system. The kitchen demand-controlled ventilation system shall be provided by the kitchen hood manufacturer. All system controls, sequences, safeties and alarms shall be handled by the factory controls and shall operate in a standalone fashion.

1.

The kitchen exhaust fan shall be provided with a VFD for variable speed operation. EF-R-2 Only). EF-R-2 staus to be monitored form the Kitchen Hood Manufacturers’ control panel. From the BMS and/or the Kitchen Ventilation System cycle the system on and off to verify proper interlocking and VFD control. EF-1-1 will cycle on and off with the above-mentioned system also. Return all to normal

Y / N

Alarm


1. EF-1-1 Failure (not matching BMS command state) Y / N

2. Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Wrap Up


1. Y / N

2. Y / N

3. Y / N

4. Y / N

5. Y / N

6. Y / N

7. Y / N

8. Y / N

Comments:

Trend Report


Trend Report


EF-1-1

Commanded state

Status

Kitchen Hood ststus

Acceptance of Test:



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Tested by Date

Witnessed by Date


beyond engineering



1 of 10

Overview

Equipment/Systems Air Handling Unit

Equipment ID/Tag No. MAU-1-1

Equipment Location: Level 1

Area(s) Served: SCRRAC Kitchen

System Description: Kitchen Make-Up Air Unit

Spec Section(s): 23 0993, 23 7313.16

Test Execution






Equipment Data

Equipment

Nameplate

MUA-1-1




Serial Number n/a


Item Yes No


☐ ☐


☐ ☐


☐ ☐



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Item Yes No




Participants:


Yes No

CM/GC ☐ ☐








Schedule






Setpoints



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Setpoints


Supply air temperature set point 75 deg. F oF ☐ ☒ ☒ Space temperature 80 deg. F oF ☐ ☒ ☒ Freeze Protection 35 oF oF ☒ ☐ ☐ Cooling Setpoint (reset on high space temperature)

65 oF oF ☐ ☒ ☒


Initial Conditions


Temperature oF oF

Supply air temperature set point oF oF

Supply Temperature oF oF


Freeze stat

Exhaust Air Smoke Detector

Supply Air Smoke Detection


Heating Hot Water Control Valve Failure


Exhaust Air Dampers Failure

Damper Position % %




Supply Fan Status

Supply Fan VFD Status

Supply Fan Command (start/stop)

Exhaust Fan Status

Exhaust Fan VFD Status

Exhaust Fan Command (start/stop)


Supply Fan

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Initial Conditions


Supply Fan VFD


Chilled Water Control Valve

Heating Hot Water Control Valve

VFD Speed hz/% hz/%


Exhaust fan VFD speed

Comments:







Site Observation

Final BAS Reading

Pass

Yes No

Supply Fan VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

Supply Fan VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

Valve 1. Closed ☐ ☐

2. 50 % ☐ ☐

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah





Site Observation

Final BAS Reading

Pass

Yes No





Sensor & Location

Location OK*

Gauge or Pkg & BAS

Values

Instrument Measured

Value

Point Type

Pass **

Yes No Yes No










Temperature ± 1 F


Airflow ± 10 %

Waterflow ± 10 %

Comments:

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah




Control


Description: 23 0993 2.11 A MAU operation shall be integrated into the demand control ventilation system provided by the Kitchen Consultant

1. Freeze Protection: 23 0993 2.7 D


Y / N

2. Supply and Return Air Smoke Detection: 23 0993 2.7 G


Y / N

3. Normal Off

With the unit off, verify the following – visually and at the BMS. The Exhaust Air Dampers and Outside Air Dampers will be closed. Supply fan will be off, and the VFD will be command off. Exhaust fan will be off and the VFD will be commanded off. 23 0993 2.7 O. The outside and exhaust air dampers shall close.

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


Chilled water and Heating Hot Water Control Valve will be closed.

4. Run Conditions: 23 0993 2.11 D

The makeup air unit shall be scheduled to operate by the kitchen demand control ventilation system. If demand control ventilation system is not provided, the makeup air unit shall be interlocked to operate with the kitchen exhaust fan. (This test was created prior to the submission of the equipment thus this operation is TBD)

Y / N

5. Supply Fan: 23 0993 2.11 G

The supply fan shall run anytime the unit is commanded to run, unless shutdown on safeties. To prevent short cycling, the supply fan shall have a user definable (adj.) minimum runtime. 1. Kitchen demand control system shall provide 0-10V DC or 4-20

mA signal to control supply fan speed. Coordinate with kitchen equipment provider. (This test was created prior to the submission of the equipment thus this operation is TBD)

2. Exhaust air fan will be interlocked with the supply fan.

Y / N

6. Supply Fan (Short Cycling): 23 0993 2.11 G


Y / N

7. Cooling: 23 0993 2.11 H

The controller will measure the zone temperature and modulate the chilled water control valve to maintain its cooling setpoint. The cooling will be enabled whenever: a. The zone temperature is above cooling setpoint. b. The supply fan status is on. c. The heating is not active 1. Decrease the Zone Temperature Set Point; is the Heating Control Valve fully closed and does the Chilled Water Control Valve modulate open to maintain the new zone setpoint? Allow time for the system to stabilize.

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control



8. Heating: 23 0993 I

The controller shall measure the zone temperature and modulate the hot water control valve to maintain its heating setpoint. The heating shall be enabled whenever: a. The zone temperature is below heating setpoint b. The supply fan status is on. c. The cooling is not active 1. Increase the Zone Temperature Set Point; is the Chilled Water Control Valve fully closed and does the Heating Control Valve modulate open to maintain the new zone setpoint? Allow time for the system to stabilize. Return all to normal

Y / N

9. Supply Air Temperature Reset: 23 0993 2.11 K

The controller shall monitor the supply air temperature for setpoint control. From the BMS adjust the current space temperature setpoint 5 deg F below the current space temperature 1. If the space temperature rises above setpoint, the supply air

temperature setpoint shall reset to down to 65 deg. F (adj.) Allow time for the system to stabilize and make the new discharge setpoint and space setpoint. Return all to normal

Y / N

Alarm


1. Freezestat Y / N

2. Exhaust Air Smoke Detection Y / N


4. Exhaust Air Dampers Y / N



Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


7. Exhaust Fan Status - Commanded on, but the status is off. Fan in Hand: Commanded off, but the status is on.

Y / N


9. Exhaust Fan VFD Y / N

Wrap Up


1. Y / N

2. Y / N

3. Y / N

4. Y / N

5. Y / N

6. Y / N

7. Y / N

8. Y / N

Comments:

Trend Report


Trend Report


Acceptance of Test:


beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Tested by Date

Witnessed by Date


beyond engineering



1 of 13

Overview

Equipment/Systems 100% OUTSIDE AIR UNIT

Equipment ID/Tag No. OAU-1-1

Equipment Location: Level 1


System Description: 100% Out Side Air Unit - Pool

Spec Section(s): 23 0993, 23 7313.17

Test Execution






Equipment Data

Equipment

Nameplate

B-1-1 B-1-2


Manufacturer ☐

Model Number ☐

Serial Number

Equipment Data

Equipment

Nameplate

OAU-1-1




Serial Number n/a


Item Yes No


☐ ☐


☐ ☐

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Item Yes No


☐ ☐






Participants:


Yes No

CM/GC ☐ ☐








Schedule



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah





Setpoints


Temperature (oF) ☐ ☐ ☐ Occupied mode Supply air temperature set point (supply air temperature set point)

80 deg. F oF ☐ ☒ ☒

Occupied mode Supply air dew point temperature set point (leaving unit) 1 deg. F below lowest space dew-point temperature, whichever is lower)

62 deg. F oF ☐ ☒ ☒

Occupied mode Supply fan VFD speed 100 % of design flow

oF ☐ ☒ ☒

Occupied mode Exhaust fan VFD speed 100 % of design flow

oF ☐ ☒ ☒

Unoccupied mode Supply air temperature set point (supply air temperature set point)

80 deg. F oF ☐ ☒ ☒

Unoccupied mode Supply air dew point temperature set point (leaving unit) 1 deg. F below lowest space dew-point temperature, whichever is lower)

62 deg. F oF ☐ ☒ ☒

Unoccupied mode Supply fan VFD speed 50 % of

design flow oF ☐ ☒ ☒

Unoccupied mode Exhaust fan VFD speed 50 % of

design flow oF ☐ ☒ ☒

Exhaust Air Defrost 38 deg. F oF ☐ ☒ ☒

Alarm Temperature (oF / psi) ☒ ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐ Chilled Water Coil Freeze Protection 35 deg. F ☒ ☐ ☐ High Supply Air Temperature 90 deg. F ☐ ☒ ☒ Low Supply Air Temperature 70 deg. F ☐ ☒ ☒

High Supply Air Dew Point Temperature

Exceeds Lowest

Space Dew Point Temp

☐ ☒ ☒

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Initial Conditions


Temperature oF oF

Space Dew Point (three pool areas) oF oF

Supply Leaving Air Temperature oF oF

Supply Leaving Air Dew Point oF oF

Chilled Water Coil Leaving Air Temperature oF oF


Outside Air Temperature oF oF

Exhaust Air Temperature oF oF

Humidity % %


Outside Air Humidity % %

Exhaust Air Humidity % %


Freeze stat




Dirty Filter

Face/Bypass Damper Failure


Re-Heating Valve Failure

Pre-Heating Valve Failure

Supply Air Smoke Detection.

Exhaust Air Smoke Detection.


Exhaust Fan VFD Failure

Damper Position % %

Face/Bypass Dampers % %


Supply Fan Status


Exhaust Fan Status

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Initial Conditions


Exhaust Fan Start/Stop

OA Filter Differential Pressure

Outside Air Damper Status

Exhaust Air Damper Status


AHU

Supply fan (adj.) minimum runtime

Exhaust fan (adj.) minimum runtime



Re-Heating Valve Position

Pre-Heating Valve Position

Flow CFM CFM

Supply Airflow (CFM)

Exhaust Airflow (CFM)

VFD Speed hz/% hz/%

Supply Fan Speed

Exhaust Fan Speed

Comments:




beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah





Site Observation

Final BAS Reading

Pass

Yes No

Supply Fan VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

Supply Fan VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

Valve

1. Closed ☐ ☐

2. 50 % ☐ ☐





Sensor & Location

Location OK*

Gauge or Pkg & BAS

Values

Instrument Measured

Value

Point Type

Pass **

Yes No Yes No







beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah





Temperature ± 1 F


Airflow ± 10 %

Waterflow ± 10 %

Comments:



Control


Description 23 0993 2.6 A 100% Outside air unit will provide ventilation and exhaust to the natatorium space. Unit will be equipped with fixed plate heat exchanger for energy recovery. Unit will be provided with factory controls and sensors to meet the intent of the sequence described below.

1.

Purge Mode 23 0993 2.6 D 3. Switch is located at Lifeguard Station. Upon active from the Lifeguard Station, the system will control as detailed below.

a. An 80°F (adj.) supply air temperature set point.

b. A 61°F (adj.) supply air dew-point temperature set point OR 1 deg. F below lowest space dew-point temperature (from three pool space sensors). Lower of the two values shall be utilized as set point.

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


c. Supply and Exhaust Fan shall be 100% of design airflow.

d. Cooling/Heating/Dehumidification as described

below.

e. PDU-1-1, 1-2 and B1-1 shall be turned off and re-circulation dampers closed.

2.

Supply and Exhaust Air Smoke Detection: 23 0993.6 G. The unit shall shut down and generate an alarm upon receiving a supply or exhaust air smoke detector status

Y / N

3. Fan Operation – 23 0993 2.6 H

Supply Fan From the BMS adjust / override as needed to verify the below: The supply fan shall run anytime the unit is commanded to run, unless shutdown on safeties. Cycle the fan to verify short cycling prevention: To prevent short cycling, the supply fan shall have a user definable (adj.) minimum runtime. The fan shall operate at 100% of design airflow in occupied mode (as determined by T&B Contractor). The fan shall operate at 50% of design airflow in unoccupied mode (as determined by T&B Contractor).

Y / N

Exhaust Fan: From the BMS adjust / override as needed to verify the below: The exhaust fan shall run anytime the unit is commanded to run, unless shutdown on safeties. Cycle the fan to verify short cycling prevention: To prevent short cycling, the exhaust fan shall have a user definable (adj.) minimum runtime. The fan shall operate at 100% of design airflow in occupied mode (as determined by T&B Contractor).

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


The fan shall operate at 50% of design airflow in unoccupied mode (as determined by T&B Contractor).

4.

Supply Air Temperature Set Point – 23 0993 2.6 K From the BMS, adjust the supply air setpoint 5 deg F lower than current value.

1. The controller will modulate the heating (pre-heat and re-heat) and cooling coil as required to maintain a supply air temperature set point of 80 deg. F (adj.).

2. The hot water re-heat coil shall be provided with a 2-way

modulating control valve. The controller shall modulate the hot water control valve to maintain the supply temperature set point.

Normal Mode A three-mode (P+I+D) fan discharge temperature controller will control in sequence the face and bypass damper of the preheat coil and the chilled water coil valve, to maintain the supply air set point temperature, as sensed by a temperature transmitter located in the supply air duct. In normal mode, lower the discharge temperature setpoint. a. Does the cooling valve modulate to meet the setpoint? b. Do the heating coil control valve(s) and face bypass dampers close completely? Allow time for the system stabilize. From the BMS, adjust the supply air setpoint 10 deg F increase than current value. In normal mode, raise the discharge temperature setpoint. a. Does the cooling coil valve close completely? b. Do the heating coil valves and face bypass dampers open to maintain discharge air temperature set point? Allow time for the system stabilize. Return all normal

Y / N

5. Enable the air-air heat recovery sequence. (Free Cooling) THIS TEST MAY REQUIRE OFF SEASON TESTING.

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


The heat exchanger will be controlled by modulating two (2) control dampers. Dampers are located in series (intake) and parallel (bypass) with the heat exchanger. The BMS system will position the dampers as follows: 1) Outdoor Air Temperature Greater than Exhaust Air

Temperature: During this mode, the DDC program shall position the heat exchanger’s intake damper open and the bypass damper closed. In this mode, the heat exchanger is used for free-cooling prior to operating the chilled water valve. a. Does the minimum outside air damper close? b. Does the outside air bypass damper open? c. Does the return air damper close? d. Does the system maintain supply air setpoint and modulate the chilled water control valve if needed? Return all to normal

6.

Enable the air-air heat recovery sequence (Free Heating). From the BMS adjust / override as needed to verify the below THIS TEST MAY REQUIRE OFF SEASON TESTING. a. Does the minimum outside air damper open? b. Does the outside air bypass damper close? c. Does the return air damper open? d. Does the system maintain supply air setpoint and modulate the preheat the control valves if needed?

Y / N

7.

THIS TEST MAY REQUIRE OFF SEASON TESTING. Outdoor Air Temperature Is Less than Exhaust Air Temperature and the Outdoor Air Temperature is Greater than 30°F (adjustable) a) Cooling Required: The heat exchanger’s intake air damper and the bypass damper shall modulate in sequence with the chilled water valve to maintain supply air temperature set point. In this mode, the heat exchanger shall be used as the first stage of cooling. The intake damper shall be fully closed and the bypass damper shall be fully open prior to chilled water valve opening.

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


b) Heating Required: During this mode, on a call for heating, the DDC controller shall first modulate the heat exchanger’s intake and bypass dampers to maintain supply air temperature. On a continued decrease in supply air temperature, the controller shall modulate the preheat coil face damper open while simultaneously closing the bypass damper. In this mode, the heat exchanger coil shall be the first stage of heating. 3) Outdoor Air Temperature is Less than Exhaust Air

Temperature and the Outdoor Air Temperature Is less than 30°F (adjustable):

During this mode, a DDC software program shall prevent the outdoor air bypass damper from opening, unless it is required for frost protection of air-to-air heat exchanger. The intake damper will be fully open to the heat exchanger. On a call for heating, the DDC controller shall modulate the preheat coil face damper open while simultaneously closing the bypass damper. Return all to normal

8.

Dehumidification - 23 0993 2.6 J. From the BMS override the calculated space dew point temperature (pool space(s)) high and then lower to verify the below: The controller shall monitor the space dew point temperature of the three (3) spaces served by the PDU’s. The controller will reset the cooling coil leaving air temperature set point up and down in order to maintain supply air dew point temperature set point. Return all to normal

Y / N

9. \ Verify all setting are restored to pre-test conditions? Y / N

Alarm

# Testing Procedure

Manually or via the BMS verify the following alarms: Pass Comment

1. Freeze stat / The unit shall shut down and generate an alarm upon receiving a freezestat status. Freeze stats shall be set at 35 deg. F

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah




4. Condensate drain plan overflow switch activated. Y / N


6. Face/Bypass Damper Failure Y / N

7. Chilled Water Control Valve Failure Y / N

8. Re-Heating Valve Failure Y / N

9. Pre-Heating Valve Failure Y / N


11. Exhaust Air Smoke Detection. Y / N


13. Exhaust Fan VFD Failure Y / N

Wrap Up


1. Y / N

2. Y / N

3. Y / N

4. Y / N

5. Y / N

6. Y / N

7. Y / N

8. Y / N

Comments:

Trend Report


beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Trend Report


Acceptance of Test:



Tested by Date

Witnessed by Date


beyond engineering



1 of 13

Overview

Equipment/Systems Dehumidification Units (typ of 3 / fill out one for each)

Equipment ID/Tag No. PDU-1-1, PDU-1-2, PDU-B1-1

Equipment Location: B1 MECH (PDU-B1-1), LEVEL 1 (PDU-1-1 & PDU-1-2)


System Description: POOL DEHUMIDIFICATION UNITS

Spec Section(s): 23 0993, 23 7313.17

Test Execution






Equipment Data

Equipment

Nameplate

PDU-1-1 PDU-1-2


Manufacturer ☐

Model Number ☐

Serial Number

Equipment Data

Equipment

Nameplate

PDU-B1-1




Serial Number n/a


Item Yes No


☐ ☐


☐ ☐

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Item Yes No


☐ ☐






Participants:


Yes No

CM/GC ☐ ☐








Schedule



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


System runs on then programmable schedule indicated below (TBD - user definable time schedule)

☒



Setpoints


Setpoint range(s) ☐ ☐ ☐ Space temperature 80-85 deg. F ☐ ☒ ☒ Space humidity 55% RH ☐ ☒ ☒ Space dew point – (calculated from temperature and humidity)

62-67 deg. F ☐ ☒ ☒

Cooling coil leaving air temperature 50 deg. F – 67 deg. F

(see sequence)

☐ ☒ ☒

Supply air temperature set point (cooling) 69 deg. F – 80 deg. F

(see sequence)

☐ ☒ ☒

Supply air temperature set point (heating) 75 deg. F – 100 deg. F

(see sequence)

☐ ☒ ☒

Supply Fan speed - 100% of design airflow (set per unit design

schedule) ☐ ☒ ☒

Occupied mode setpoints ☒ ☐ ☒ ☐ ☐ Cooling and heating space temperature set point

85°F ☐ ☒ ☒

Cooling and heating space relative humidity 55% RH ☐ ☒ ☒ A (adj.) cooling and heating space dew-point set point

67°F ☐ ☒ ☒

Supply Fan speed 100% of design airflow

☐ ☒ ☒

Unoccupied mode setpoints ☐ ☐ ☒ ☐ ☐ Cooling and heating space temperature set point

85°F ☐ ☒ ☒

Cooling and heating space relative humidity 60% RH ☐ ☒ ☒

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Setpoints


Cooling and heating space dew-point set point

70°F ☐ ☒ ☒

Supply Fan speed 50% of design

airflow as determined

by T&B

☐ ☒ ☒

Dehumidification in unoccupied mode, the unit will be indexed into occupied mode for a minimum run-time.

30 min. ☐ ☒ ☒

Alarm Temperature (oF / psi) ☒ ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐ Chilled Water Coil Freeze Protection 35 deg. F ☒ ☐ ☐ High space dew point (2 deg

above set point)

☐ ☒ ☒

High Space Temperature (3 deg. above set

point) ☐ ☒ ☒

Low Space Temperature (5 deg. below set

point) ☐ ☒ ☒

Window Mullion Temperature Below Dew Point

1 Deg below setpoint

☐ ☒ ☒

Initial Conditions


Temperature / Humidity oF oF

Space Temperature oF oF

Space Dew Point oF oF

Supply Air Temperature oF oF

Chilled Water Coil Air Temperature oF oF

Heat Pipe Pre-cooling Coil Leaving Air Temperature oF oF

Heat Pipe Pre-heating Coil Leaving Air Temperature oF oF


Window Mullion Temperature 1 oF oF

Window Mullion Temperature 2 oF oF

Space Humidity % %

Supply Leaving Air Humidity % %

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Initial Conditions



Position

Chilled Water Control Valve Position % %

Hot Water Control Valve Position % %

Spectator Area Damper Position (PDU-1-1), Typ. of 2 % %

Cooling Valve Position

Heating Valve Position


Freeze stat (Chilled Water Coil)

Return Air Smoke Detection.

Supply Air Smoke Detection


High space dew point (2 deg above set point)

High Space Temperature (3 deg. above set point)

Low Space Temperature (5 deg. below set point)


Window Mullion Temperature Below Dew Point

Dirty Filter (record switch setting)

Damper Failure

Control Valve(s) Failure

Filter Differential Pressure Switch



Purge Mode

Bypass Damper Position (PDU-1-1 only)


Supply Fan Status

Purge Mode

Return Air Damper

Bypass Damper Status (PDU-1-1 only)

VFD Speed hz/% hz/%

Supply Fan Speed

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Comments:







Site Observation

Final BAS Reading

Pass

Yes No

Supply Pump VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

Supply Fan VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

Valve

1. Closed ☐ ☐

2. 50 % ☐ ☐




beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Sensor & Location

Location OK*

Gauge or Pkg & BAS

Values

Instrument Measured

Value

Point Type

Pass **

Yes No Yes No










Temperature ± 1 F


Airflow ± 10 %

Waterflow ± 10 %

Comments:



Control


Description – 23 0993 2.5 A Pool dehumidification units will be provided with factory controls and sensors as required to meet the sequence of operation below. Units

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


will be re-circulation only (temperature and humidity control). 100% Outside air unit (see sequence for OAU-1-1) will provide ventilation and exhaust to the natatorium space. Each unit will be provided with a dedicated space temperature and humidity sensor as indicated on the contract documents.

1.

Purge Mode 23 0993 2.5 D 3: From the BMS enable the Purge Mode – verify below operation The unit will shut-down and associated dampers close to prevent re-circulation in the spaces. Return system to normal.

Y / N

2.

Occupied Mode 23 0993 2.5 D 1 – Refer to the occupied mode setpoint shown above. Adjust setpoints and schedule as need. The supply fan will run anytime the unit is commanded to run, unless shutdown on safeties.

Y / N

The fan will operate as follows 23 0993 2.5 H: Adjust setpoints and override sensors as needed. If the ambient temperature falls below 40 deg. F (adj.), the fan speed will be forced to 100%. When ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg. F, the fan speed will modulate between 50% and 100% to maintain space air temperature set point. The leaving air temperature set point will be the first stage of cooling or heating and will change between max and min prior to fan speed modulating control. Once the leaving air temperature is at max (heating) or min (cooling) and space temperature is not maintained, the fan speed will modulate up from 50% to a maximum of 100% to maintain space temperature.

Y / N

3.

Supply Air Temperature Set Point – 23 0993 2.5 K: The controller will reset the supply temperature set point up and down between the following values (all adjustable) in order to maintain the space temperature set point: (The cooling output will respond to the highest demand between the supply temperature and dehumidification control loops. 23 0993 2.5 M)

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


Override the system space sensor(s) to verify the supply air reset detailed below.

a. Supply heating discharge minimum set point – 75 deg. F.

b. Supply cooling discharge minimum set point – 64-69 deg. F (2 deg. F above dew point set point)

c. Supply heating discharge maximum set point – 100 deg. F.

d. Supply cooling discharge maximum set point – 80 deg. F


4.

Hot-Water Re-heat Coil – 23 0993 2.5 L. Override space sensor(s) has required to verify proper operation. (refer to the above reset scale) The hot water re-heat coil will be provided with a 2-way modulating control valve. The controller will modulate the hot water control valve to maintain the supply heating and cooling temperature set point. Return all to normal.

Y / N

5.

Window Mullion Surface Temperature Sensor – 23 0993 2.5 J. Override the window mullion temperature sensor(s) to verify the supply air reset detailed below. Two (2) window mullion surface temperature sensors will be provided in the competition pool (PDU-1-1) and leisure pool (PDU-1-2) and will be monitored by the BAS.

If the surface temperature drops below the dew point set point of 62-67 deg. F (based on 80-85 deg. F space temperature and 55%RH) for a period of 5 minutes, the following will occur:

a. The BAS will enable the associated PDU into dehumidification mode by reducing space relative humidity set point to 45% RH.

b. Unit will operate at reduced RH set point until mullion temperature is above dew point for a period of 30 minutes, after which:

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


c. Unit will be released by BAS to continue operating at original set points prior to mullion temperature sensor alarm.


6.

Dehumidification: 23 0993 2.5 I. Override the return air temperature and humidity sensor(s) to verify the dehumidification mode reset detailed below. The controller will monitor the return dew point temperature (as calculated from temperature and humidity sensors). When the return dew point temperature is above the set point of 62-67 deg. F (based on space temperature of 80 to 85 deg. F), the mechanical cooling (chilled water coil) will be enabled for dehumidification. The controller will reset the cooling coil leaving air temperature set point up and down between the values listed below in order to maintain the space dew point set point by modulating the cooling coil valve to meet the following values: Cooling coil leaving minimum set point will be 50 deg. F (adj.) Cooling coil leaving maximum set point will be 67 deg. F (adj.) Return all to normal.

Y / N

7.

Spectator Area Motor Operated Damper (PDU-1-1 only): 23 0993 2.5 N. With the Spectator pool area vacant and PDU-1-1 in normal operation, preform the following verification. The spectator area ductwork distribution will have a motor operated damper that is interlocked with a local occupancy sensor for each area. The damper will open upon detection of the occupancy sensor. Ensure to allow time for the system to go occupied then back to unoccupied.

Y / N

8. Unoccupied mode: 23 0993 2.5 D. 2. From the BMS, place the unit into unoccupied mode.

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


Adjust / override sensor as required to verify the following. The unit will maintain: A 85°F (adj.) cooling and heating space temperature set point A 60% RH (adj.) cooling and heating space relative humidity A 70°F (adj.) cooling and heating space dew-point set point Supply Fan will be 50% of design airflow as determined by T&B If mechanical dehumidification is required in unoccupied mode, the unit will be indexed into occupied mode for minimum run-time of 30 minutes (adj.) Return all to normal.

Alarm

# Testing Procedure

Manually and through sensor overrides verify each alarm Pass Comment

1. Freeze stat. Y / N

2. Return Air Smoke Detection. Y / N



5. High space dew point (2 deg above set point) Y / N

6. High Space Temperature (3 deg. above set point) Y / N

7. Low Space Temperature (5 deg. below set point) Y / N

8. Condensate drain plan overflow switch activated. Y / N

9. Window Mullion Temperature Below Dew Point Y / N


11. Damper Failure Y / N

12. Control Valve Failure Y / N

Wrap Up


1. Y / N

2. Y / N

3. Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


4. Y / N

5. Y / N

6. Y / N

7. Y / N

8. Y / N

Comments:

Trend Report

The following points will be trended every 15 minutes for period of not less than 2 weeks. These trends will be conducted at least twice a year: one in the cooling season and once in the heating season. Completed Trend Reports will be submitted in a format compatible with MS Excel. The BMS will trend all the monitoring points and modes of operation.

Trend Report


Filter Differential Pressure switch 1. Differential Pressure

2. Fan/Pump Speed






Acceptance of Test:



Tested by Date

Witnessed by Date

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



beyond engineering



1 of 13

Overview

Equipment/Systems Pool Heating Heat Exchangers

Equipment ID/Tag No. HX-B1-1, 2, 3, 4 & 5

Equipment Location: POOL PUMP ROOM – B-1


System Description: Pool Heat Exchangers

Spec Section(s): 23 0993 & 23 5700

Test Execution






Equipment Data

Equipment

Nameplate

HX-B1-1 HX-B1-2


Manufacturer ☐

Model Number ☐

Serial Number

Equipment Data

Equipment

Nameplate

HX-B1-3 HX-B1-4


Manufacturer ☐

Model Number ☐

Serial Number

Equipment Data

Equipment

Nameplate

HX-B1-5




Serial Number n/a

Equipment Data

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Item Yes No


☐ ☐


☐ ☐


☐ ☐






Participants:


Yes No

CM/GC ☐ ☐








beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Schedule






Setpoints


Temperature (oF) ☐ ☐ ☐ Competition Pool 81 deg. F ☐ ☒ ☒ Leisure Pool 85 deg. F ☐ ☒ ☒ Leisure Spa 104 deg. F ☐ ☒ ☒ Recreational Pool 85 deg. F ☐ ☒ ☒ Recreational Spa 104 deg. F ☐ ☒ ☒ Pool Fill Setpoint (typ. of all 5) 180 deg. F ☐ ☒ ☒

Alarm Temperature (oF / psi) ☒ ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐ Low Competition Pool Mixed Water Temperature

TBD ☐ ☒ ☒

Low Leisure Pool Mixed Water Temperature TBD ☐ ☒ ☒ Low Leisure Spa Mixed Water Temperature TBD ☐ ☒ ☒ Low Recreational Pool Mixed Water Temperature

TBD ☐ ☒ ☒

Low Recreational Spa Mixed Water Temperature

TBD ☐ ☒ ☒

Initial Conditions


Temperature oF oF

Competition Pool Mixed Water Temperature oF oF

Leisure Pool Mixed Water Temperature oF oF

Leisure Spa Mixed Water Temperature oF oF

Recreational Pool Mixed Water Temperature oF oF

Recreational Spa Mixed Water Temperature oF oF

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Initial Conditions


Competition Pool Return Water Temperature (HX-B1-1)

oF oF

Leisure Pool Return Water Temperature (HX-B1-2) oF oF

Leisure Spa Return Water Temperature (HX-B1-3) oF oF

Recreational Pool Return Water Temperature (HX-B1-4)

oF oF

Recreational Spa Return Water Temperature (HX-B1-5)

oF oF

Competition Pool Supply Water Temperature (HX-B1-1)

oF oF

Leisure Pool Supply Water Temperature (HX-B1-2) oF oF

Leisure Spa Supply Water Temperature (HX-B1-3) oF oF

Recreational Pool Supply Water Temperature (HX-B1-4)

oF oF

Recreational Spa Supply Water Temperature (HX-B1-5)

oF oF

Return Water Temperature (HX-B1-1) oF oF





Supply Water Temperature (HX-B1-1) oF oF






Low Competition Pool Mixed Water Temperature

Low Leisure Pool Mixed Water Temperature

Low Leisure Spa Mixed Water Temperature

Low Recreational Pool Mixed Water Temperature

Low Recreational Spa Mixed Water Temperature

HX-B1-1 - 3 Way Valve Failure


beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Initial Conditions





HX-B1-1 - Circulating Pump Failure






HX-B1-1 - Circulating Pump






HX-B1-1 - Circulating Pump Status





Mixing Valve (open) (closed) (open) (closed)

HX-B1-1 - 3 Way Valve Position





Comments:



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah






Site Observation

Final BAS Reading

Pass

Yes No

Supply Pump VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

Supply Fan VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

Valve

1. Closed ☐ ☐

2. 50 % ☐ ☐





Sensor & Location

Location OK*

Gauge or Pkg & BAS

Values

Instrument Measured

Value

Point Type

Pass **

Yes No Yes No



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Sensor & Location

Location OK*

Gauge or Pkg & BAS

Values

Instrument Measured

Value

Point Type

Pass **

Yes No Yes No








Temperature ± 1 F


Airflow ± 10 %

Waterflow ± 10 %

Comments:



Control


1.

Description: (23 0993 2.3 A.)

1. Heat exchangers will be provided for each of the pools to allow for normal and emergency heating operation. The building loop side of the heat exchanger will be equipped with a modulating 3-way control valve and associated

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


sensors. The pool side of the heat exchanger will be equipped with a circulation pump and associated sensors.

2. HX-B1-1 Control

The BAS will monitor the Pool Water Mixed Temperature. 23 0993 2.3 B. From the BMS adjust the fill setpoint 5 deg. F above current mixed water temperature. Verify the below operation: BMS will indicate low mixed water alarm. On a drop in temperature below setpoint, the BAS will enable the circulation pump (provided by Pool Vendor). Then modulate the 3-way valve on the building side to maintain the Pool Water Mixed Temperature setpoint. Allow time for the system to stabilize. Manually fail the circulation pump and the 3way valve – verify alarming for each at the BMS. Return all to normal and release the adjusted setpoint and the reverse will occur. Verify all system settings are returned to normal

Y / N

From the BMS select the emergency fill and verify the following operation: 23 0993 2.3 C. On a call for emergency fill from the BAS Workstation, the associated heat exchanger and 3-way valve for the pool being called for fill will introduce 180 deg. F from the hot water plant. The 3-way valve will modulate to 100% during emergency fill operation. Once complete, the system will return to normal sequence as described above. Return all to normal

Y / N

3. HX-B1-2 Control

The BAS will monitor the Pool Water Mixed Temperature. 23 0993 2.3 B. From the BMS adjust the fill setpoint 5 deg. F above current mixed water temperature. Verify the below operation: BMS will indicate low mixed water alarm.

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


On a drop in temperature below setpoint, the BAS will enable the circulation pump (provided by Pool Vendor). Then modulate the 3-way valve on the building side to maintain the Pool Water Mixed Temperature setpoint. Allow time for the system to stabilize. Manually fail the circulation pump and the 3way valve – verify alarming for each at the BMS. Return all to normal and release the adjusted setpoint and the reverse will occur. Verify all system settings are returned to normal From the BMS select the emergency fill and verify the following operation: 23 0993 2.3 C. On a call for emergency fill from the BAS Workstation, the associated heat exchanger and 3-way valve for the pool being called for fill will introduce 180 deg. F from the hot water plant. The 3-way valve will modulate to 100% during emergency fill operation. Once complete, the system will return to normal sequence as described above. Return all to normal

Y / N

4. HX-B1-3 Control

The BAS will monitor the Pool Water Mixed Temperature. 23 0993 2.3 B. From the BMS adjust the fill setpoint 5 deg. F above current mixed water temperature. Verify the below operation: BMS will indicate low mixed water alarm. On a drop in temperature below setpoint, the BAS will enable the circulation pump (provided by Pool Vendor). Then modulate the 3-way valve on the building side to maintain the Pool Water Mixed Temperature setpoint. Allow time for the system to stabilize. Manually fail the circulation pump and the 3way valve – verify alarming for each at the BMS. Return all to normal and release the adjusted setpoint and the reverse will occur.

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


Verify all system settings are returned to normal


Y / N

5. HX-B1-4 Control


Y / N

From the BMS select the emergency fill and verify the following operation: 23 0993 2.3 C. On a call for emergency fill from the BAS Workstation, the associated heat exchanger and 3-way valve for the pool being called for fill will introduce 180 deg. F from the hot water plant. The 3-way valve will modulate to 100% during emergency fill operation. Once complete, the system will return to normal sequence as described above.

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control



6. HX-B1-5 Control


Y / N


Y / N

7.

Alarm


1. Low Competition Pool Mixed Water Temperature Y / N

2. Low Leisure Pool Mixed Water Temperature Y / N

3. Low Leisure Spa Mixed Water Temperature Y / N

4. Low Recreational Pool Mixed Water Temperature Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


5. Low Recreational Spa Mixed Water Temperature Y / N

6. HX-B1-1 - 3 Way Valve Failure Y / N





11. HX-B1-1 - Circulating Pump Failure Y / N





Wrap Up


1. Y / N

2. Y / N

3. Y / N

4. Y / N

5. Y / N

6. Y / N

7. Y / N

8. Y / N

Comments:

Trend Report


beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Trend Report







Acceptance of Test:



Tested by Date

Witnessed by Date


beyond engineering



1 of 8

Overview

Equipment/Systems MINI-SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMPS (typ of MSSI-B2-1/MSSOB2-1, MSSI-B2-3/MSSO-B2-3, MSSI-B1-3/MSSO-B1-3, MSSI-B1-4/MSSO-B1-4) Complete one form for each

Equipment ID/Tag No. MSSI-B2-1/MSSOB2-1

Equipment Location: TELECOM


System Description: Ductless split systems

Spec Section(s): 23 0993, 23 8126

Test Execution






Equipment Data

Equipment

Nameplate

MSSI-B2-1 MSSOB2-1


Manufacturer ☐

Model Number ☐

Serial Number


Item Yes No


☐ ☐


☐ ☐


☐ ☐


Verify all required I/O points are listed on the BMS system. ☐ ☐

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Item Yes No

Verify ATC point-to-point and sensor/actuator calibration checks have been completed, documented and has been submitted to the Commissioning Authority. ☐ ☐




Participants:


Yes No

CM/GC ☐ ☐








Schedule






beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Setpoints


Temperature (oF) ☐ ☐ ☐ Zone Setpoint (local) 75 oF oF ☒ ☐ ☒

Alarm Temperature (oF / psi) ☒ ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐ High Zone Temperature (local) ☒ ☐ ☒ High Zone Temperature (BMS) ☐ ☒ ☒

Initial Conditions


Temperature oF oF

Zone temperature oF oF


High Zone Temperature (local)

High Zone Temperature (BMS)

High water condensate


Fan Status

Condensate Pump Status

Comments:




beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah





Site Observation

Final BAS Reading

Pass

Yes No

Supply Fan VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

Supply Fan VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

Valve

1. Closed ☐ ☐

2. 50 % ☐ ☐





Sensor & Location

Location OK*

Gauge or Pkg & BAS

Values

Instrument Measured

Value

Point Type

Pass **

Yes No Yes No







beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah





Temperature ± 1 F


Airflow ± 10 %

Waterflow ± 10 %

Comments:



Control


Description: 23 0993 2.13 A MINI-SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMPS (MSSI/MSSO) – Cooling Only Ductless split systems shall be provided with and controlled by a factory provided, factory mounted and wired, control system. Below is a sequence of operation. The sequence of operation is provided to define the basic intent of unit function but is not to conflict with, override or take precedence over the factory controls, sequences, safeties and alarms. All system controls, sequences, safeties and alarms shall be handled by the factory controls and shall operate in a standalone fashion except for a space temperature sensor provided by the BAS contractor

1.

Run Conditions – Continuous 23 0993 2.13 B:

The unit shall be continuously enabled to maintain a cooling setpoint of 75°F (adj.).

Y / N

2. Zone Setpoint Adjust: 23 0993 2.13 C

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


The occupant shall be able to adjust the zone temperature cooling setpoints at the zone sensor. From the local Zone sensor adjust up and then down the zone setpoint. Verify from the local controller verify the adjusted setpoint(s). Return to normal.

Y / N

3.

Fan Operation: 23 0993 2.13 D The unit fan will run as required to maintain zone setpoint unless off on internal safeties. Manual trip unit safeties (condensate float switch) to verify unit shutdown and condensate pump activation. Return to normal

Y / N

4.

Cooling Stage: 23 0993 2.13 E The unit controller shall measure the zone temperature and stage the cooling to maintain its cooling setpoint. Manually cycle fan to verify short cycling prevention. To prevent short cycling, the stage shall have a user definable (adj.) minimum runtime

Y / N

5.

BMS / Unit Zone Sensor(s) Measure the space temperature and verify the local (unit) and BMS sensor are reading within +/- 1 deg F.

Y / N

Alarm


1. High zone temperature (BMS) Y / N

2. High zone temperature (local) Y / N

3. High water – condensate pan (local) Y / N

Wrap Up


1. Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


2. Y / N

3. Y / N

4. Y / N

5. Y / N

Comments:

Trend Report


Trend Report


Acceptance of Test:



Tested by Date

Witnessed by Date

Commissioning Provider

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



beyond engineering



1 of 7

Overview

Equipment/Systems ELECTRIC UNIT HEATER (typ of UH-B1-7, 8, 11, B2-11 & 12) Complete one form for each

Equipment ID/Tag No. UH-B1-7

Equipment Location: Pool Pump Room

Area(s) Served: SCRRAC Pump Room

System Description: Zone Electric Heat

Spec Section(s): 23 0993, 23 8239.19

Test Execution






Equipment Data

Equipment

Nameplate

UH-B1-7




Serial Number n/a


Item Yes No


☐ ☐


☐ ☐


☐ ☐



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Item Yes No




Participants:


Yes No

CM/GC ☐ ☐








Schedule






Setpoints



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Setpoints


Zone Setpoint (local) 75 oF oF ☒ ☐ ☒

Alarm Temperature (oF / psi) ☒ ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐ Low Zone Temperature (BMS) 50 oF ☐ ☒ ☒

Initial Conditions


Temperature oF oF

Zone Temperature (BMS) oF oF

Zone Temperature (local) oF oF


Low Zone Temperature (BMS)


Fan Status

Comments:







Site Observation

Final BAS Reading

Pass

Yes No

Supply Fan VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐


beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah





Site Observation

Final BAS Reading

Pass

Yes No

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

Valve

1. Closed ☐ ☐

2. 50 % ☐ ☐





Sensor & Location

Location OK*

Gauge or Pkg & BAS

Values

Instrument Measured

Value

Point Type

Pass **

Yes No Yes No










Temperature ± 1 F


beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Airflow ± 10 %

Waterflow ± 10 %

Comments:



Control


Description: The Unit Heater will operate based on its own local thermostat. The BMS will monitor the space temperature only.

1.

Run Conditions – Based on zone temperature 23 0993 2.13 B: The unit will be enabled to maintain a heating setpoint of 75°F (adj.).

Y / N

2. Zone Setpoint Adjust:

The occupant shall be able to adjust the zone temperature heating setpoint at the zone sensor. From the local Zone sensor adjust up and then down the zone setpoint. Verify the unit cycles on and off Return to normal.

Y / N


Y / N

Alarm


beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


1. Low Zone temperature Y / N

Wrap Up


1. Y / N

2. Y / N

3. Y / N

4. Y / N

5. Y / N

6. Y / N

7. Y / N

8. Y / N

Comments:

Trend Report


Trend Report


Acceptance of Test:



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Tested by Date

Witnessed by Date


beyond engineering



1 of 11

Overview

Equipment/Systems VAV (typ of all) - Complete one from for each

Equipment ID/Tag No. VAV-1-1-1

Equipment Location: Kitchen


System Description: VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINAL UNITS W/ HEAT

Spec Section(s): 23 0993, 23 3600

Test Execution






Equipment Data

Equipment

Nameplate

VAV-1-1-1


Manufacturer ☐

Model Number ☐

Serial Number


Item Yes No


☐ ☐


☐ ☐


☐ ☐



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Item Yes No


Approve T&B report ☐ ☐




Participants:


Yes No

CM/GC ☐ ☐








Schedule






beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Setpoints


Temperature (oF) ☐ ☐ ☐ Occupied mode cooling setpoint 75 oF oF ☐ ☒ ☒ Occupied mode heating setpoint 70 oF oF ☐ ☒ ☒ Unoccupied mode cooling setpoint 80 oF oF ☐ ☒ ☒ Unoccupied mode heating setpoint 55 oF oF ☐ ☒ ☒ Maximum Flow 945 CFM CFM ☐ ☒ ☒ Minimum Flow 305 CFM CFM ☐ ☒ ☒


Zone High Temperature User

Defined oF ☐ ☒ ☒

Zone Low Temperature User

Defined oF ☐ ☒ ☒

High Zone CO2 Levels OA CO2 plus

100 PPM PPM ☐ ☒ ☒

Initial Conditions


Temperature oF oF

Zone temperature oF oF

Zone CO2 Level oF oF


High Zone Temperature

High Zone CO2 Levels.

Low Zone Temperature.

High Discharge Air Temperature.

Low Discharge Air Temperature.

Valve Failure

Damper Failure

Damper Position % %

Damper position %


Occupied Mode

Unoccupied Mode

Occupancy Sensor

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Initial Conditions



Heating Valve

Flow CFM CFM

Max Flow

Min Flow

Comments:







Site Observation

Final BAS Reading

Pass

Yes No

Supply Fan VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

Supply Fan VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

Valve

1. Closed ☐ ☐

2. 50 % ☐ ☐



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah




Sensor & Location

Location OK*

Gauge or Pkg & BAS

Values

Instrument Measured

Value

Point Type

Pass **

Yes No Yes No










Temperature ± 1 F


Airflow ± 10 %

Waterflow ± 10 %

Comments:


beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Control


Run Conditions – Scheduled: 23 0993 2.14 A The unit shall run according to a user definable time schedule.

1.

Zone Setpoint Adjust: 23 0993 2.14 B From the local sensor adjust the setpoint up and down to verify the programmed deadband and proper BMS mapping. The occupant shall be able to adjust the zone temperature heating and cooling setpoints at the zone sensor. The dead band for set point adjustment shall be defined by the owner (IE +/- 3 deg. F)

Y / N

2.

Zone Optimal Start: 23 0993 2.14 C From the BMS adjust system start time and zone temperature to verify the BMS Optimal Start Algorithm. Note the associated AHU startup and shutdown during this test also. The unit shall use an optimal start algorithm for morning start-up. This algorithm shall minimize the unoccupied warm-up or cool-down period while still achieving comfort conditions by the start of scheduled occupied period. Return all adjustments and place the system into Unoccupied Mode to conduct the following test.

Y / N

3.

Zone Unoccupied Over-ride: 23 0993 2.14 D With the system in Unoccupied Mode perform the following test.

From the local space sensor activate the unoccupied override. A timed local override control shall allow an occupant to override the schedule and place the unit into an occupied mode for an

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


adjustable period of time. At the expiration of this time, control of the unit shall automatically return to the schedule. Return system to normal Occupied Mode.

4. Variable Volume Terminal Unit – Flow Control: 23 0993 2.14 E

5. Unoccupied:

BMS has system in normal Occupied Mode. The unit shall maintain zone setpoints by controlling the airflow through one of the following. Adjust space setpoint high and lower to verify. 1. Occupied:

a. When zone temperature is greater than its cooling setpoint, the zone damper shall modulate between the minimum occupied airflow (adj.) and the maximum cooling airflow (adj.) until the zone is satisfied.

b. When the zone temperature is between the cooling

setpoint and the heating setpoint, the zone damper shall maintain the minimum required zone ventilation (adj.).

c. When zone temperature is less than its heating setpoint,

the controller shall enable heating to maintain the zone temperature at its heating setpoint. The terminal damper will modulate to it’s minimum CFM flow.

d. Hot Water Reheat: 23 0993 2.14 F The controller shall measure the zone temperature and modulate the hot water control valve to maintain the zone heating setpoint.

e. The hot water reheat shall be enabled when the

minimum flow CFM is met.

f. Additionally, if warm air is available from the AHU, the zone damper shall modulate between the minimum occupied airflow (adj.) and the maximum heating airflow (adj.) until the zone is satisfied.

Place the system into Unoccupied Mode.

Y / N

2. Unoccupied: Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


a. When the zone is unoccupied the zone damper shall control to its minimum unoccupied airflow (adj.).

b. When the zone temperature is greater than its cooling setpoint, the zone damper shall modulate between the minimum unoccupied airflow (adj.) and the maximum cooling airflow (adj.) until the zone is satisfied.

c. When zone temperature is less than its unoccupied heating setpoint, the controller shall enable heating to maintain the zone temperature at the setpoint. The terminal damper will modulate to it’s minimum CFM flow.

d. Hot Water Reheat: 23 0993 2.14 F The controller shall

measure the zone temperature and modulate the hot

water control valve to maintain the zone heating

setpoint.

e. The hot water reheat shall be enabled when the

minimum flow CFM is met.

f. Additionally, if warm air is available from the AHU, the zone damper shall modulate between the minimum unoccupied airflow (adj.) and the auxiliary heating airflow (adj.) until the zone is satisfied.

Release any overrides or setting adjustments. Place the system into normal Occupied Mode for the next test.

6. Baseboard Electric Heater Interlock: 23 0993 2.14 G (VAV-1-2-1, 2-2-2, 2-2-6 only) Units BEH-A, B C

From the zone sensor adjust the setpoint to place the terminal box (VAV) into the heating mode. The VAV will first go into its normal heating mode and if can not met the heating setpoint the Baseboard electric heater as the first stage.

1. Baseboard electric heaters shall be controlled by the BAS and interlocked to the associated VAV as indicated on the contract documents.

2. The baseboard heat shall be enabled by the BAS as the

first stage of heating. Once enabled by the BAS, the baseboard heaters will operate under their integral thermostats to maintain set point.

3. If the temperature is below set point for a period of 10

minutes (adj.) the BAS shall enable the second stage of

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


heat through the VAV hot water re-heat coil. The re-heat coil shall modulate open to maintain space heating set point.

4. If the space temperature is above set point, the hot water reheat coil shall modulate closed first. If the space temperature is still below set point, the BAS shall disable the associated baseboard heaters.

7. Demand Control Ventilation: 23 0993 2.14 H Refer to drawings for VAV’s equipped with CO2 sensors for demand control ventilation.

1. From the BMS adjust the zone CO2 setpoint below the current measured value by 50 PPM. a. Upon detection of high CO2 levels above setpoint, the VAV

primary air valve shall open from current position to maximum position as required to reduce CO2 level to setpoint.

b. Hot water re-heat coil shall modulate as required to maintain space temperature setpoint.

Return all setting to normal.

Y / N

8.

Occupancy Sensor Override: 23 0993 2.14 I Throughout testing, utilize the zone occupancy sensor to enable the VAV into Occupied Mode and verify at the BMS.

Y / N

Alarm


1. High Zone Temperature Y / N

2. High Zone CO2 Levels. Y / N

3. Low Zone Temperature. Y / N

4. High Discharge Air Temperature. Y / N

5. Low Discharge Air Temperature. Y / N

6. Valve Failure Y / N

7. Damper Failure Y / N

Wrap Up


1. Y / N

2. Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


3. Y / N

4. Y / N

5. Y / N

6. Y / N

7. Y / N

8. Y / N

Comments:

Trend Report


Trend Report


Acceptance of Test:



Tested by Date

Witnessed by Date

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



beyond engineering



1 of 7

Overview

Equipment/Systems ELECTRIC UNIT HEATER – WALL (typ of WH-B1-1, WH-1-1 & 1-2 ) Complete one form for each

Equipment ID/Tag No. WH-B1-1

Equipment Location: Pool Pump Room

Area(s) Served: SCRRAC Pump Room

System Description: Zone Electric Heat

Spec Section(s): 23 0993, 23 8239.19

Test Execution






Equipment Data

Equipment

Nameplate

WH-B1-1




Serial Number n/a


Item Yes No


☐ ☐


☐ ☐


☐ ☐



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Item Yes No




Participants:


Yes No

CM/GC ☐ ☐








Schedule






Setpoints



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Setpoints


Zone Setpoint (local) 75 oF oF ☒ ☐ ☒

Alarm Temperature (oF / psi) ☒ ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐ Low Zone Temperature (BMS) 50 oF ☐ ☒ ☒

Initial Conditions


Temperature oF oF






Fan Status

Comments:







Site Observation

Final BAS Reading

Pass

Yes No

Supply Fan VFD

1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐


beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah





Site Observation

Final BAS Reading

Pass

Yes No

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

Valve

1. Closed ☐ ☐

2. 50 % ☐ ☐





Sensor & Location

Location OK*

Gauge or Pkg & BAS

Values

Instrument Measured

Value

Point Type

Pass **

Yes No Yes No










Temperature ± 1 F


beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Airflow ± 10 %

Waterflow ± 10 %

Comments:



Control


Description: The Unit Heater will operate based on its own local thermostat. The BMS will monitor the space temperature only.

1.

Run Conditions – Based on zone temperature 23 0993 2.13 B: The unit will be enabled to maintain a heating setpoint of 75°F (adj.).

Y / N

2. Zone Setpoint Adjust:

The occupant shall be able to adjust the zone temperature heating setpoint at the zone sensor. From the local Zone sensor adjust up and then down the zone setpoint. Verify the unit cycles on and off Return to normal.

Y / N


Y / N

Alarm


beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Wrap Up


1. Y / N

2. Y / N

3. Y / N

4. Y / N

5. Y / N

6. Y / N

7. Y / N

8. Y / N

Comments:

Trend Report


Trend Report


Acceptance of Test:



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Tested by Date

Witnessed by Date


beyond engineering

beyond engineering



1 of 7

OverviewEquipment/Systems BASEBOARD ELECTRIC HEAT (typ of BEH-A(11 total), BEH-B(4 total), and

BEH-C (18 total) Complete one form for eachEquipment ID/Tag No. BEH-___Equipment Location:Area(s) Served: Main LobbySystem Description: Zone Electric Heat Spec Section(s): 23 0993, 23 8239.19



Ambient Conditions:


NameplateBEH-___



Model Number n/a ☐Serial Number n/a


☐ ☐


☐ ☐


☐ ☐


Verify all required I/O points are listed on the BMS system. ☐ ☐Verify ATC point-to-point and sensor/actuator calibration checks have been completed, documented and has been submitted to the Commissioning Authority. ☐ ☐

beyond engineering

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah







Yes No

CM/GC ☐ ☐






Schedule








beyond engineering

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


SetpointsParameter Expected Actual Unit BMS AdjZone Setpoint (local) 75 oF oF ☒ ☐ ☒

Alarm Temperature (oF / psi) ☒ ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐Low Zone Temperature (BMS) 50 oF ☐ ☒ ☒

Initial ConditionsConditions Unit/ Measured Thermostat/ BMSTemperature oF oF






Fan Status





ValueSite


1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐Supply Fan VFD

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐Supply Fan VFD 1. Min: % % % % ☐ ☐

beyond engineering

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah




ValueSite


2. Mid: % % % % ☐ ☐

3. Max: % % % % ☐ ☐

1. Closed ☐ ☐

2. 50 % ☐ ☐Valve





Yes No

Gauge or Pkg & BAS

Values

Instrument Measured

Value

Point Type

Yes No



Flow Switch ☐ ☐ AI ☐ ☐Pump Start/Stop ☐ ☐ DO ☐ ☐Pump Status ☐ ☐ DI ☐ ☐Pump VFD Fault ☐ ☐ DI ☐ ☐


Sensor Calibration PointsPoint Acceptable RangeStatic Pressure ± 0.3 in.wcTemperature ± 1 FDifferential Pressure ± 10 %

beyond engineering

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Airflow ± 10 %Waterflow ± 10 %

Comments:


Control# Testing Procedure Pass CommentDescription: The Unit Heater will operate based on its own local thermostat.

The BMS will monitor the space temperature only.

1.

Run Conditions – Based on zone temperature 23 0993 2.13 B:

The unit will be enabled to maintain a heating setpoint of 75°F (adj.).

Y / N

2. Zone Setpoint Adjust:The occupant shall be able to adjust the zone temperature heating setpoint at the zone sensor.

From the local Zone sensor adjust up and then down the zone setpoint.

Verify the unit cycles on and off

Return to normal.

Y / N

BMS / Unit Zone Sensor(s)

Measure the space temperature and verify the local (unit) and BMS sensor are reading within +/- 1 deg F.

Y / N

Alarm# Testing Procedure Pass Comment

beyond engineering

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Wrap Up# Testing Procedure Pass Comment1. Y / N2. Y / N3. Y / N4. Y / N5. Y / N6. Y / N7. Y / N8. Y / N

Comments:

Trend Report




Acceptance of Test:



beyond engineering

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Tested by Date



beyond engineering



1 of 6

Overview

Equipment/Systems Automatic Transfer Switch(s) Complete one form for each

Equipment ID/Tag No. ATS-S, RE & SLR

Equipment Location: EMERGENCY GENERATOR RM (G215)


System Description: Emergency Power - TRANSFER SWITCHES

Spec Section(s): 26 3600

Test Execution






Equipment Data

Equipment

Nameplate

STAND BY GENERATOR




Serial Number n/a


Item Yes No


☐ ☐


☐ ☐

All required Factory Test documents received. ☐ ☐

Contractor has issued the passed and approved Field Quality Control 26 3600 A - G ☐ ☐



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Item Yes No




Participants:


Yes No

CM/GC ☐ ☐








Schedule






Phase Voltage Measure Metered

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Phase A Voltage (Normal)

Phase B Voltage (Normal)

Phase C Voltage (Normal)

Phase A Voltage (Emergency) Verify during Generator Test #1

Phase B Voltage (Emergency) Verify during Generator Test #1

Phase C Voltage (Emergency) Verify during Generator Test #1

Time Delays Minutes Time Delays

ATS normal source outages n/a

ATS normal source outages delay to transfer n/a

ATS time delay transfer to emergency n/a

Cooldown time delay n/a


ATS on emergency

Status Normal Emerg Normal Emerg

ATS Status

Comments:


Comments:

Control


1. Power up both emergency and normal feeds, observe metering. Confirm normal and emergency power to this ATS. Re-confirm phase rotation at the normal bus, and that phase rotation of

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


normal and emergency both agree. Confirm metering on the ATS display.

2. Under no load conditions, initiate manual transfer to and from emergency for this ATS. Confirm proper operation of the manual transfer feature. Repeat 2-4 times.

Y / N

3. Confirm automatic re-transfer to normal as follows. Kill input on emergency side, with normal available. Observe the ATS automatically re-transferring to normal.

Y / N

4. Simulate a utility outage by removing the normal input. Observe automatic start of the generator, and automatic transfer of the ATS to emergency. Perform under nominal available load

Y / N

5.

Confirm functionality of external maintenance bypass (as applicable) by transferring to and from external maintenance bypass with load bank connected and insuring no interruption of power to the load.

Y / N

6.

VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY SENSING: 26 3600 2.6 Voltage and frequency on both the normal and emergency sources (as noted below) shall be continuously monitored, with the following pickup, dropout, and trip settings capabilities. Assisted by the factory-authorized service representative, verify the below setting:

Parameter Sources Dropout/Trip Pickup/Reset

Undervoltage N & E 70 to 98% 85 to 100% Y / N

Overvoltage N & E 102 to115% 2% below trip Y / N

Overfrequency N & E 102 to 110% 2% below trip Y / N

Data Logging

# Verify the following points are provided Pass Comment

1. Data and time and reason for transfer normal to emergency Y / N

2. Data and time and reason for transfer emergency to normal Y / N

3. Data and time and reason for engine start Y / N

4. Data and time engine stopped Y / N

5. Data and time emergency source available Y / N

6. Data and time emergency source not available Y / N

7. Total number of transfers Y / N

8. Total number of transfers due to source failure Y / N

9. Total number of day’s controller is energized Y / N

10. Total number of hours both normal and emergency sources are available

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


11. Total time load is connected to normal Y / N

12. Total time load is connected to emergency Y / N

13. Last engine start Y / N

14. Last engine start up time Y / N

15. Input and output status Y / N

Alarm

# Testing Procedure / Common Remote Audible Alarm: Pass Comment

1. Y / N

2. Y / N

3. Y / N

4. Y / N

5. Y / N

6. Y / N

7. Y / N

8. Y / N

9. Y / N

Wrap Up


1. Y / N

2. Y / N

3. Y / N

4. Y / N

5. Y / N

6. Y / N

7. Y / N

8. Y / N

Comments:

Trend Report

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Trend Report


Acceptance of Test:



Tested by Date

Witnessed by Date


beyond engineering



1 of 4

Overview

Equipment/Systems Electrical Distribution Panel (typ of all) Complete one form for each

Equipment ID/Tag No. Varies



System Description: Electrical Distribution Panels

Spec Section(s): 26 2416, 26 0800

Test Execution






Equipment Data

Equipment

Nameplate

Panel




Serial Number n/a


Item Yes No


☐ ☐


☐ ☐


All metering and meggering reports have been issued and approved. ☐ ☐ Required studies submitted and approved:




☐ ☐

Contractor has issued the passed and approved Field Quality Control ☐ ☐

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Item Yes No



Participants:


Yes No

CM/GC ☐ ☐













Comments:

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Inspection


From the approved contract documents verify the following:

1. Panels labeled properly (Nameplates 26 2416 3.3 C) Y / N

2. Verify panel is feed from the designate transformer / switchgear. Y / N

3. Verify proper panel grounding Y / N

4. Verify the proper panel schedule is provided Y / N

5. Verify the following:

a. Amperage is correct b. Installed Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD

Y / N

6. Field verify circuit is pulled to specified device (panel) Record actual circuits in table below.

Y / N

# Circuit verification / (test 5 & 6): Pass Comment

1. Y / N

2. Y / N

3. Y / N

4. Y / N

5. Y / N

6. Y / N

7. Y / N

8. Y / N

9. Y / N

10.

Wrap Up


1. Y / N

2. Y / N

3. Y / N

4. Y / N

5. Y / N

6. Y / N

7. Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Comments:

Acceptance of Test:



Tested by Date

Witnessed by Date


beyond engineering



1 of 6

Overview

Equipment/Systems DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM (typ of 4 Hubs) Complete one form for each

Equipment ID/Tag No. LUTRON - LIGHTING CONTROL (S008)

Equipment Location: HUB QP3 – final designation not assigned yet

Area(s) Served: SCRRAC - varies

System Description: Lighting System


Test Execution






Equipment Data

Equipment

Nameplate

HUB QP3




Serial Number n/a


Item Yes No


☐ ☐

Verify that the manufacturer’s start-up procedure for this system has been successfully completed and a copy of the completed start-up procedure has been submitted to the Commissioning Authority.

☐ ☐

Contractor has issued the passed and approved Field Quality Control documents as detailed in 23 0923 2.09 ☐ ☐

Associated ATS have been test and approved ☐ ☐



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Item Yes No

Verify Lutron point-to-point and sensor calibration checks have been completed, documented and has been submitted to the Commissioning Authority. ☐ ☐




Participants:


Yes No

CM/GC ☐ ☐








Schedule



System runs on then programmable schedule indicated below - TBD ☒



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Time Delays Minutes Time Delays

Unoccupied delay off 10 min

shut n/a

Comments:


Comments:

Control


System Description: 26 0923 MAIN UNITS (LUTRON GRAFIK EYE QS) A. Product: Lutron GRAFIK Eye QS. B. Provide main units with configuration and quantity of zones as indicated to control the loads as indicated. C. Engrave units with button, zone, and scene descriptions as indicated on the drawings. D. Integrated Wireless Capability: 1. Provide wireless communication inputs for: a. Occupancy sensors. b. Daylight sensors. c. Wireless controller E. Preset Lighting Control with Zone Override

1. CONTROL STATIONS: 23 0923 2.5

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


Refer to the lighting control contract documents to verify the proper configuration. A. Provide control stations with configuration as indicated to control the loads as indicated.

2.

Verify by the approved lighting control contract documents the proper sensor modules are installed. Sensor Modules: 23 0923 2.06 D Wired Modules: a. Provide wired inputs for: 1) Occupancy sensors. 2) Daylight sensors. 3) IR receivers for personal control. 4) Digital ballast wall stations. 3. Wireless Modules: a. Provide wireless communication inputs for: 1) Occupancy sensors. 2) Daylight sensors. 3) Wireless controller.

Y / N

3.

Sensor Locations: 23 0923 3.02 D For each lighting zone sensor verify proper placement per the manufacturer requirements.

Y / N

4.

Verify lighting levels and installed sensors met the contract documents. Zone data is forthcoming. For each zone, record the lighting level, sensor type and current state prior to testing / Refer to the end of this test document for the record table.

Y / N

5. From each zone verify the operation of the zone Lutron Lighting control keypad (where applicable)

Y / N

Wrap Up


1. Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


2. Y / N

3. Y / N

4. Y / N

5. Y / N

6. Y / N

7. Y / N

8. Y / N

Comments:

Trend Report


Trend Report


Lighting Zone Verification / add as needed

Zone #

Hub Tag -

Measured Lighting Level

Sensor Type / Keypad System activation

On/Off operation Pass

Y / N

Y / N

Y / N

Y / N

Acceptance of Test:

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah




Tested by Date

Witnessed by Date

Commissioning Provider Attachment(s): Approved Lighting Zone Control - Forthcoming

beyond engineering



1 of 4

Overview

Equipment/Systems Electrical Panel (typ of all) Complete one form for each




System Description: Electrical Branch Circuit Panels

Spec Section(s): 26 2416, 26 0800

Test Execution






Equipment Data

Equipment

Nameplate

Panel




Serial Number n/a


Item Yes No


☐ ☐


☐ ☐


All metering and meggering reports have been issued and approved. ☐ ☐ Required studies submitted and approved:




☐ ☐


beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Item Yes No



Participants:


Yes No

CM/GC ☐ ☐













Comments:

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Inspection



1. Panels labeled properly (Panelboard Nameplates 26 2416 3.3 C) Y / N

2. Verify panel is feed from the designate distribution panel. Y / N


4. Verify the proper panel schedule is provided Y / N

5.

Verify the following: a. Breaker amperage is correct b. Installed Breakers are Molded-Case Circuit Breaker

(MCCB)

Y / N

6. Field verify circuit is pulled to specified device (lighting, receptacle…) Record actual circuits in table below.

Y / N

7. With circuit (outlet) tester / GFCI Outlet Tester, verify proper circuit grounding/configuration. Record actual circuits in table below

Y / N

# Circuit verification / (test 6 & 7): Pass Comment

1. Y / N

2. Y / N

3. Y / N

4. Y / N

5. Y / N

6. Y / N

7. Y / N

8. Y / N

9. Y / N

10.

Wrap Up


1. Y / N

2. Y / N

3. Y / N

4. Y / N

5. Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


6. Y / N

7. Y / N

Comments:

Acceptance of Test:



Tested by Date

Witnessed by Date


beyond engineering



1 of 6

Overview

Equipment/Systems ENGINE-GENERATOR SET

Equipment ID/Tag No. Standby GENERATOR

Equipment Location: EMERGENCY GENERATOR RM (G215)


System Description: Emergency Generator


Test Execution






Equipment Data

Equipment

Nameplate

STAND BY GENERATOR




Serial Number n/a


Item Yes No


☐ ☐


☐ ☐

All required Factory Test documents received. ☐ ☐ Contractor has issued the passed and approved Field Quality Control Tests 26 3213 A - K ☐ ☐

Associated ATS have been test and approved ☐ ☐



beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Item Yes No





Participants:


Yes No

CM/GC ☐ ☐








Schedule






beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Time Delays Minutes

Generator Cooldown time n/a



Generator Status


Generator Runtime

Comments:


Comments:

Control


Prior to any generator run functional testing, the factory-authorized service representative will verify and demonstrate all alarms. (refer to alarm list at end of the testing section.

26 3213 2.5

1.

Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: From the associated ATS(s) (ATS-S, RE & SLR) individually manual initiate manual generator run command. When mode-selector switch on the control and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in one or more separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of generator set.

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control


Allow for generator cooldown between ATS call for generator run. Return to normal. When mode selector switch is switched to the on position, generator set starts. Return to normal The off position of same switch initiates generator-set shutdown. Allow for generator cool down delay.

2.

Manually initiate a generator run command. Approved contractor will manually trip generator safety. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of a remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down generator set.

Y / N

3.

Manual Starting System Sequence of Operation: From the Generator Panel verify the following operation. Switching on-off switch on the generator control panel to the on position starts generator set. The off position of same switch initiates generator-set shutdown. Allow for generator cool down delay. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of a remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down generator set. Return all to normal

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Alarm

# Testing Procedure / Common Remote Audible Alarm: Pass Comment

1. Overcrank shutdown. Y / N

2. Coolant low-temperature alarm. Y / N

3. Battery-charger malfunction alarm. Y / N

4. Battery low-voltage alarm. Y / N

5. Fuel tank derangement alarm. Y / N

6. Fuel tank high-level shutdown of fuel supply alarm. Y / N

7. Generator overload Y / N

8. Fuel tank derangement alarm. Y / N

9. Fuel tank high-level shutdown of fuel supply alarm. Y / N

Wrap Up


1. Y / N

2. Y / N

3. Y / N

4. Y / N

5. Y / N

6. Y / N

7. Y / N

8. Y / N

Comments:

Trend Report


Trend Report


beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Trend Report


Acceptance of Test:



Tested by Date

Witnessed by Date


beyond engineering



1 of 4

Overview

Equipment/Systems Electrical Switchgear (typ of all) Complete one form for each




System Description: Electrical Switchgear

Spec Section(s): 26 2413, 26 0800

Test Execution






Equipment Data

Equipment

Nameplate

Switchgear




Serial Number n/a


Item Yes No


☐ ☐


☐ ☐


All metering and meggering reports have been issued and approved. ☐ ☐

Infrared Scanning has been conducted and approved ☐ ☐

NETA Acceptance Testing has been completed, certified and approved ☐ ☐ Required studies submitted and approved:


26 0573 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY ☐ ☐

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Item Yes No





Participants:


Yes No

CM/GC ☐ ☐













Comments:

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Inspection



1. Verify the installation of Transient Voltage Suppression device (TVS) 26 2413 2.2

Y / N

2. Verify the installation of the proper rated disconnect/overcurrent protection. 26 2413 2.3

Y / N

3. Switchgear labeled properly 26 2413 2.7 Y / N


5. Preform functional test of all switches Y / N

6. Verify the proper schedule is provided Y / N

7. Verify the following:

a. Amperage is correct b. Installed Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD

Y / N

8. Field verify feeder is pulled to specified device (panel / transformer) Record actual feeder circuits in table below.

Y / N

# Circuit verification / (test 8): Pass Comment

1. Y / N

2. Y / N

3. Y / N

4. Y / N

5. Y / N

6. Y / N

7. Y / N

8. Y / N

9. Y / N

10.

Wrap Up


1. Y / N

2. Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


3. Y / N

4. Y / N

5. Y / N

6. Y / N

7. Y / N

Comments:

Acceptance of Test:



Tested by Date

Witnessed by Date


beyond engineering



1 of 7

Overview

Equipment/Systems Pool

Equipment ID/Tag No. P-1A and P-1B, associated VFD


Area(s) Served: Competition Pool

System Description: Pool Filtration and Pumping System

Spec Section(s): Division 13

Test Execution






Equipment Data

Equipment

Nameplate

P-1A P-1B


Manufacturer ☐

Model Number ☐

Serial Number

Equipment Data

Equipment

Nameplate

P-1A VFD P-1B VFD


Manufacturer ☐

Model Number ☐

Serial Number


Item Yes No


☐ ☐


☐ ☐

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Item Yes No


☐ ☐

Verify that associated mechanical systems have been tested and are in operation. ☐ ☐

Verify unit is tied into the BMS system and graphics are complete. (where applicable) ☐ ☐

Verify all required I/O points are listed on the BMS system. (where applicable) ☐ ☐ Verify ATC point-to-point and sensor/actuator calibration checks have been completed, documented and has been submitted to the Commissioning Authority. (where applicable)

☐ ☐

All trends specified at the end of this test have been setup and are trending. (where applicable) ☐ ☐



Participants:


Yes No

CM/GC ☐ ☐


Sub-Contractor (Pool) ☐ ☐






Schedule

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah







Setpoints


☐ ☐ ☐

Pump P-1A (system) filtration VFD setting Set by pool

start-up tech

% ☒ ☐ ☒

Pump P-1A (system) backwash VFD setting Set by pool

start-up tech

% ☒ ☐ ☒

Pump P-1B (system) filtration VFD setting Set by pool

start-up tech

% ☒ ☐ ☒

Pump P-1B (system) backwash VFD setting Set by pool

start-up tech

% ☒ ☐ ☒

Backwash time (manual)

Set by pool start-up tech /

minimum 3 mins

mins ☒ ☐ ☒

Filter (dirty) DP 10 PSI PSI ☒ ☐ ☒

Alarm Temperature (oF / psi) ☒ ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐ Dirty Filter DP 10 PSI ☒ ☐ ☒

Initial Conditions


Pump (system) filtration VFD setting (typ of both) % %

Pump (system) backwash VFD setting (typ of both) % %

Filter (dirty) DP PSI PSI




P-1A Status n/a

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Initial Conditions


P-1B Status n/a

System DP PSI n/a

P-1A VFD Status n/a

P-1A VFD Speed (%) n/a

P-1B VFD Status n/a

P-1B VFD Speed (%) n/a

System Status (Filtration / Backwash) n/a

Valving ALL MANUAL Filter Backwash (open) (closed)

Valving (filtration / backwash) n/a

Comments:





Sensor & Location

Location OK*

Gauge or Pkg & BAS

Values

Instrument Measured

Value

Point Type

Pass **

Yes No Yes No

Flow (DP) ☐ ☐ AI ☐ ☐ * Sensor location is appropriate and away from cause of erratic operation. ** See acceptable ranges per specifications in table below




beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah




Control


Note: Pool filtration system to operate continuously. Backwash function requires manually adjusting valves. All functions are controlled via the BECSys5 controller. All control settings and rotation of pumps are initiated by the controller. This testing will require the pool technician to be present. Sequence of Operation located at the end of this document.

1. Normal filtration mode

The controller will enable the selected lead pump and control VFD speed at setting programmed by startup technician. The standby pump and VFD will be disabled.

Y / N

2. Normal pump rotation

From the controller select the standby pump. Controller will disable the lead pump VFD. Lead pump will shutdown Standby pump VFD will be enabled and control to setting programmed by startup technician. Return all to normal

Y / N

3. Backwash Mode

Manually adjust the filter DP lower to initiate a backwash condition. The controller will ramp down the VFD of the lead pump. Manually configure the system valves as instructed by the pool technician. The selected lead pump VFD will be enabled again and ramp up to the “backwash” speed setting. During back wash, the UV unit, Pool Heating system and Chemical Controller are all shut down via interlocks with the VFD

Y / N

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control



4. UV Operation

The UV control will be enabled anytime the system (pump(s)) is in normal operation. Verify proper interlock between pump VFD and UV control.

Y / N

End of Testing

Alarm


1. Pump P-1A failure Y / N

2. Pump P-1A failure Y / N

3. Filter DP exceeded Y / N

Wrap Up


1. Y / N

2. Y / N

3. Y / N

4. Y / N

5. Y / N

Comments:

Trend Report


Trend Report


beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Trend Report


Acceptance of Test:



Tested by Date

Witnessed by Date

Commissioning Provider Attachment(s): Sequence of Operation

Pool Filtration and Back wash:

The pool filtration and chemical treatment system is a continuous loop, drawing water from the pool

via a centrifugal recirculation pump and strainer, filters the water, sends 100% of water thru the UV

treatment chamber, offers a percentage to the building system that provides heat to the pool water,

then measures the water chemistry and adds chlorine, muriatic acid or Co2 to adjust the chemical

balance and returns the water to the pool. The centrifugal recirculation pump output is controlled by

VFD that receives a flow signal from a mag meter flow sensor. The VFD will be set to two flow rates,

one for filtration and one for back wash. When the filter system can no longer maintain design flow

rate or when a 10 PSI differential from a clean filter is reached, the filter is shut down, valves manually

changed to backwash mode, the VFD is set to backwash mode, and the filter is back washed to the

backwash holding tank for a minimum of 3 minutes or until the sight glass in the backwash discharge

line shows clean water. During back wash, the UV unit, Pool Heating system and Chemical Controller

are all shut down via interlocks with the VFD.

beyond engineering



1 of 7

Overview


Equipment ID/Tag No. P-2, associated VFD


Area(s) Served: Recreation Pool



Test Execution






Equipment Data

Equipment

Nameplate

P-2 P-2 VFD


Manufacturer ☐

Model Number ☐

Serial Number


Item Yes No


☐ ☐


☐ ☐


☐ ☐



Verify all required I/O points are listed on the BMS system. (where applicable) ☐ ☐

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Item Yes No

Verify ATC point-to-point and sensor/actuator calibration checks have been completed, documented and has been submitted to the Commissioning Authority. (where applicable)

☐ ☐




Participants:


Yes No

CM/GC ☐ ☐








Schedule






beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Setpoints


☐ ☐ ☐

Pump P-2 (system) filtration VFD setting Set by pool

start-up tech

% ☒ ☐ ☒

Pump P-2 (system) backwash VFD setting Set by pool

start-up tech

% ☒ ☐ ☒



minimum 3 mins

mins ☒ ☐ ☒



Initial Conditions


Pump (system) filtration VFD setting % %

Pump (system) backwash VFD setting % %





P-2 Status n/a

System DP PSI n/a

P-2 VFD Status n/a

P-2 VFD Speed (%) n/a




Comments:


beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah





Sensor & Location

Location OK*

Gauge or Pkg & BAS

Values

Instrument Measured

Value

Point Type

Pass **

Yes No Yes No







Control




beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control



Y / N

2. Backwash Mode

Manually adjust the filter DP lower to initiate a backwash condition. The controller will ramp down the VFD of the lead pump. Manually configure the system valves as instructed by the pool technician. The selected lead pump VFD will be enabled again and ramp up to the “backwash” speed setting. During back wash, the UV unit, Pool Heating system and Chemical Controller are all shut down via interlocks with the VFD Return all to normal

Y / N

3. UV Operation


Y / N

End of Testing

Alarm


1. Pump P-2 failure Y / N

2. Pump P-2 VFD failure Y / N


Wrap Up


1. Y / N

2. Y / N

3. Y / N

4. Y / N

5. Y / N

Comments:

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Trend Report


Trend Report


Acceptance of Test:



Tested by Date

Witnessed by Date







beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah










beyond engineering



1 of 7

Overview


Equipment ID/Tag No. P-3, associated VFD


Area(s) Served: Leisure Pool



Test Execution






Equipment Data

Equipment

Nameplate

P-3 P-3 VFD


Manufacturer ☐

Model Number ☐

Serial Number


Item Yes No


☐ ☐


☐ ☐


☐ ☐



Verify all required I/O points are listed on the BMS system. (where applicable) ☐ ☐

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah



Item Yes No

Verify ATC point-to-point and sensor/actuator calibration checks have been completed, documented and has been submitted to the Commissioning Authority. (where applicable)

☐ ☐




Participants:


Yes No

CM/GC ☐ ☐








Schedule






beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Setpoints


☐ ☐ ☐

Pump P-3 (system) filtration VFD setting Set by pool

start-up tech

% ☒ ☐ ☒

Pump P-3 (system) backwash VFD setting Set by pool

start-up tech

% ☒ ☐ ☒



minimum 3 mins

mins ☒ ☐ ☒



Initial Conditions


Pump (system) filtration VFD setting % %

Pump (system) backwash VFD setting % %





P-3 Status n/a

System DP PSI n/a

P-3 VFD Status n/a

P-3 VFD Speed (%) n/a




Comments:


beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah





Sensor & Location

Location OK*

Gauge or Pkg & BAS

Values

Instrument Measured

Value

Point Type

Pass **

Yes No Yes No







Control




beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Control



Y / N

2. Backwash Mode

Manually adjust the filter DP lower to initiate a backwash condition. The controller will ramp down the VFD of the lead pump. Manually configure the system valves as instructed by the pool technician. The selected lead pump VFD will be enabled again and ramp up to the “backwash” speed setting. During back wash, the UV unit, Pool Heating system and Chemical Controller are all shut down via interlocks with the VFD Return all to normal

Y / N

3. UV Operation


Y / N

End of Testing

Alarm


1. Pump P-3 failure Y / N

2. Pump P-3 VFD failure Y / N


Wrap Up


1. Y / N

2. Y / N

3. Y / N

4. Y / N

5. Y / N

Comments:

beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah


Trend Report


Trend Report


Acceptance of Test:



Tested by Date

Witnessed by Date







beyond engineering



-3000 www.ah












June 20, 2019

CONTRACTOR COMMISSIONING

SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS LOG APPENDIX 8

APPENDIX 8

CONTRACTOR COMMISSIONING

SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS LOG

APPENDIX 8

COMMISSIONING SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS - SCRRAC

DIVISION 22 CONTRACTORS

Spec Section Paragraph Spec Title Paragraph Title Submittal Type Due Prior to Testing

Due after Testing

Date Received

Date Reviewed and Returned

22 0516 1.3 AB. 1,2,3,4

EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

ACTION SUBMITTALS Product data, Delegated-Design Submittal

22 0516 1.4 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

Welding certificates

22 0516 1.5 EXPANSION FIRRINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

Maintenance Data Prior to training

22 0517 1.3 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data

22 0518 1.3 ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING


22 0519 1.3 A,B METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data, Wiring Diagrams

22 0519 1.4 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING


Product Certificates

22 0519 1.4 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

Operation and Maintenance Data Prior to training

Page 1 of 8

APPENDIX 8




Due after Testing

Date Received


22 0523.12 1.4 BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING


22 0523.13 1.4 BUTTERFLY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING


22 0523.14 1.4 CHECK VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING


22 0253.15 1.4 GATE VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING


22 0529 1.5 A, B, C HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data, Shop Drawings, Delegated-Design Submittal

22 0529 1.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


Welding certificates

22 0533 1.3 A,B HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING

ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data. B.Shop Drawings (for electric heating cable)

22 0533 1.4 HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING


Field quality-control reports Test Procedure

Test results/ Report

22 0533 1.5 HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS


22 0533 3.5 A,B,C 1-3,D,E,F

HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Testing Testing

Page 2 of 8

APPENDIX 8




Due after Testing

Date Received


22 0548.13 1.3 A 1-2, B,C VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING AND PIPING EQUIPMENT

ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data, Shop Drawings, Delegated-Design Submittal

22 0548.13 1.4 A-C VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING AND PIPING EQUIPMENT


Coordination Drawings, Qualification Data (testing agency), Welding certificates

22 0553 1.3 A-E IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data, Equipment Label Schedule, Valve numbering.D. Valve Schedules for each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

Prior to training

22 0719 1.3 A,B;1-2,C 1-4,D 1-2

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data, LEED Submittals, Shop Drawings, Samples

22 0719 1.4 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION


Qualification Data, Material Test Reports, Field quality-control reports

Test procedure


22 1116 1.3 A,B DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data, LEED Submittals

22 1116 1.4 A,B;1-3 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING


System purging and disinfecting report, Field quality-control reports

Test procedure


22 1119 1.3 A; 1-3 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data, Shop drawings

22 1119 1.4 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES


Field quality-control reports Test results/ Report

22 1119 1.5 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS


Page 3 of 8

APPENDIX 8




Due after Testing

Date Received


22 1119 3.4 A,B,C DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES


Testing Test Procedure


22 1123.13 1.4 A, B 1-2 DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS

ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data, Shop drawings

22 1123.13 1.5 DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS


22 1123.13 3.5 A,B,C 1-4, D,E

DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS


Testing Test Procedure

22 1123.13 3.6 A 1 DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS

START UP SERVICE Testing Test Procedure

22 1123 1.4 A,B;1-3 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS


22 1123 1.5 A DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS


22 1316 1.5 A,B SANITARY WASTE AMD VENT PIPING


22 1316 1.6 A 1-2,B SANITARY WASTE AMD VENT PIPING


Seismic Qualification Certificates, Field quality-control reports

Test procedure


22 1316 3.9 C,D 1-6, E 1-4

SANITARY WASTE AMD VENT PIPING


Testing Test procedure Test results/ Report

22 1319 1.4 A 1-5, B SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data, Shop Drawings

Page 4 of 8

APPENDIX 8




Due after Testing

Date Received


22 1319 1.5 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS


22 1319 3.5 A, B 1-2 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES



22 1319 3.7 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

DEMONSTRATION Training Training

22 1329 1.3 A,B SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS


22 1329 1.4 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

Operation and Maintenance Data

22 1329 3.5 A,B,C 1-4, D,E

SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS



22 1329 3.8 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS


22 1413 1.4 A,B 1-2 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING


22 1413 1.5 A 1-2,B FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING


Seismic Qualification Certificates, Field quality-control reports

Test procedure


22 1423 1.3 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES


22 1429 1.3 A,B SUMP PUMPS ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data, Wiring Diagrams

22 1429 1.4 SUMP PUMPS CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS


Page 5 of 8

APPENDIX 8




Due after Testing

Date Received


22 1429 3.5 A,B,C 1-4, D,E

SUMP PUMPS FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


22 1429 3.6 A 1 SUMP PUMPS START UP SERVICE Testing Test Procedure

22 14293.8 SUMP PUMPS


22 3300

1.3 A,B,C

ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS ACTION SUBMITTALS

Product Data, LEED Submittals, Shop Drawings

22 3300

1.4 A-E

ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS


quality-control reports, Field quality-control reports, Warranty Test

procedureTest results/ Report

22 3300

1.5


CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and Maintenance Data

Prior to training

22 3300

3.4 A 1-4,B,C


FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing

Test procedure


22 3300

3.5 A

ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS DEMONSTRATION Training Training

22 3400

1.4 A-C

FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS ACTION SUBMITTALS


22 3400

1.5 A 1-3,B-F

FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS


Seismic Qualification Certificates, Product Certificates, Domestic-Water Heater Labeling, Source quality-control reports, Field

Test procedure


22 3400

1.6



Prior to training

22 3400

3.4 A 1-4,B,C


FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing

Test procedure


22 3400

3.5 A

FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS DEMONSTRATION Training Training

Page 6 of 8

APPENDIX 8




Due after Testing

Date Received


22 4213.13 1.3 A 1-3, B 1-3,C

COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS ACTION SUBMITTALS


22 4231.13

1.4COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS


Prior to training

22 4231.13

1.5 A COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS

MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS Furnish extra materials

22 4213.161.3 A 1-2,B 1-4, C

COMMERCIAL URINALS ACTION SUBMITTALS


22 4231.16

1.4COMMERCIAL URINALS


Prior to training

22 4231.16

1.5 A COMMERCIAL URINALS


22 4216.13 1.3 A 1-2,B 1-3, C

COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES ACTION SUBMITTALS


22 4216.13

1.4COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Coordination Drawings

22 4216.13

1.5 A 1 a.COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES


Prior to training

22 4216.13

1.6 A 1-2COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES


22 4216.16 1.3 A 1-2, B 1-3

COMMERCIAL SINKS ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data, LEED Submittals

22 4216.16

1.4 ACOMMERCIAL SINKS

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Coordination Drawings

22 4216.16

1.5 ACOMMERCIAL SINKS


Prior to training

22 4216.16

1.6 A 1-2COMMERCIAL SINKS


22 4223 1.3 A 1-2, B 1-3

COMMERCIAL SHOWERS ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data, LEED Submittals

22 4223

1.4COMMERCIAL SHOWERS


Prior to training

22 4223

1.5 A 1-2COMMERCIAL SHOWERS


Page 7 of 8

APPENDIX 8




Due after Testing

Date Received


22 47161.3 A 1-2, B 1, C

PRESSURE WATER COOLERS ACTION SUBMITTALS


22 4716

1.4PRESSURE WATER COOLERS


Prior to training

Page 8 of 8



June 20, 2019

BUILDING OPERATOR TRAINING PLAN APPENDIX 9

APPENDIX 9

BUILDING OPERATOR TRAINING

PLAN


Silver Spring, Maryland KGD Architecture

Issued for ConstructionJune 20, 2019

BUILDING OPERATOR TRAINING PLAN APPENDIX 9 - 1 of 3

APPENDIX 9

BUILDING OPERATOR TRAINING PLAN

Project:

Date:

Building:

Location:

Equipment/System:

Spec Section:

Attendance. (Manager/ Supervisor signature and number of attendees from department)

Senior Facility Manager Number Attend Maintenance Mechanics Number Attend

Engineering Supervisor Number Attend Security Manager Number Attend

Instructors.

Trainer Company Position/Qualifications

Approvals. This completed checklist has been reviewed. Its completion is approved with the exceptions noted

below.

Commissioning Authority Date Owner’s Representative Date





General Objectives.

Provide an overview of the purpose and operation of this equipment, including required interactions of staff

with the equipment.

Provide technical information regarding the purpose, operation and maintenance of the equipment assuming

all maintenance will be provided by Factory Authorized Technicians.

Provide technical information regarding the purpose, operation, troubleshooting and maintenance of this

equipment at a very detailed level, expecting that almost all operation, service and repair will be provided by

the facilities personnel.

Agenda.

Item Covered Duration Instructor Completed

General purpose of this system or equipment (Owners Project

Requirements)

Review of control drawings and schematics (have copies for

attendees)

Startup, loading, normal operation, unloading, shutdown,

unoccupied operation, seasonal changeover, etc., as applicable

Integral controls (packaged): programming, troubleshooting,

alarms, manual operation

Building automation controls (BAS): programming,

troubleshooting, alarms, manual operation, interface with

integral controls

Interactions with other systems, operation during power outage

and fire

Relevant health and safety issues and concerns and special

safety features

Energy conserving operation and strategies

Any special issues to maintain warranty

Common troubleshooting issues and methods, control system

warnings and error messages, including using the control system

for diagnostics

Special requirements of tenants for this equipment’s function

Service, maintenance, and preventative maintenance (sources,

spare parts inventory, special tools, etc.)

Other subjects covered, specific to the equipment:

Question and answer period

Comments:





Training Methods.

Type Comments

Use of the O&M manuals, illustrating where the verbal

training information is found in writing

Manufacturer training manuals

Discussion/lecture at site

Site demonstration of equipment

Written handouts

Classroom lecture

Classroom hands-on equipment

Video presentation

Question and answer period

Comments:



June 20, 2019

CONTRACTOR COORDINATION MATRIX APPENDIX 11

APPENDIX 11

CONTRACTOR COORDINATION

MATRIX

APPENDIX 11

Elizabeth Square, Phase 1 - SCRRAC

COMMISSIONING COORDINATION MATRIX

Spec Section Specification Title Coordinate with: Questions for ReviewersResponse from Reviewers including Additional

Sections to include

22 0533 HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 0553, 22 0719, 26 0526, 26 0519

22 1119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 0519

22 1123.13 DOMESTIC -WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS

22 1123, 03 3053, 22 0548.13, 22 1116, 22 0523.12, 22 0523.13, 22 0523.15, 22 0553

22 1123 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 22 1123.13, 03 3053, 22 0548.13, 22 1116, 22 0523.12, 22 0523.13, 22 0523.15, 22 0553, 22 0519

22 1329 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS 22 0513, 31 2000, 22 0548, 22 0519, 22 1316

22 1429 SUMP PUMPS 22 1329, 22 1413

22 3300 ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 01 4000, 01 7300, 03 3000, 22 0523.12, 22 0523.13, 22 0523.15, 22 1119, 22 0519, 22 1116,

22 3400 FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 22 0523.12, 22 0523.13, 22 0523.15, 22 1119, 01 4000, 01 7300, 23 1123, 22 0519

22 4213.13 COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS 22 0518, 07 9200, 22 1116, 22 1316, 22 4100, 22 4300, 22 4600

22 4213.16 COMMERCIAL URINALS 22 4600, 22 1116, 22 1316

22 4216.13 COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES 22 4100, 01 7823, 22 0518, 07 9200, 22 0719, 22 1116, 22 1316

22 4216.16 COMMERCIAL SINKS 22 4100, 22 0523.12, 22 0523.15, 22 0518, 07 9200, 22 0719, 22 1116, 22 1316

22 4223 COMMERCIAL SHOWERS 22 4100, 22 0523.12, 22 0523.15, 22 0518, 07 9200, 22 0719, 22 1116, 22 1316

22 4716 PRESSURE WATER COOLERS 22 0523.12, 22 0523.15, 22 0518, 22 1116, 22 1316

23 0533 HEAT TRACING FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0553, 23 0719, 26 0526, 26 0519,

23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

23 3112, 23 3116, 23 3300, 23 0713, 23 0716, 23 2123

23 0800 COMMISSIONING OF MECHANICAL 01 9113, 26 0800

23 0900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS FOR HVAC23 0993 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS

23 0900

23 1113 FACILITY FUEL-OIL PIPING 31 2000, 23 0517, 23 0518, 23 0553, 23 0529, 09 9113

23 1123 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 08 3113, 31 2000, 23 0519, 23 0517, 23 0518, 05 5000, 23 0548, 23 0529, 23 0553

23 2123 HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 0513, 23 0548, 23 0529, 26 0526, 26 0519

23 2300 REFRIGERANT PIPING 08 3113,23 0923, 23 0993.11, 23 0553, 23 0517, 20518, 23 0529,

23 2513 WATER TREATMENT FOR CLOSED-LOOP HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

23 2116, 23 0523

23 5216 WATER TREATMENT FOR OPEN-LOOP HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

23 0900, 23 0513, 23 2116, 23 0523, 22 1119, 26 0526, 26 0519

23 2533 HVAC MAKEUP-WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT

23 0513, 23 2113, 23 0523, 22 1119, 26 0526

23 3423 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 23 0513,23 0548, 23 0553, 23 3300, 26 0526, 26 0519, 23 0593

23 3600 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 01 78230, 23 0900, 23 2113, 23 2116, 23 3113, 23 3300

23 3723 HVAC GRAVITY VENTILATORS 07 9200, 23 0553, 23 3113, 23 3116

23 5100 GENERATOR EXHAUST SYSTEM 1 3000, 07 5000

23 5113.16 VENT DAMPERS 23 5113.11, 23 5123, 26 0526, 26 0519

23 5123 GAS VENTS 23 5113.11, 07 7200

23 5216 CONDENSING BOILERS 23 0548 ,23 0513, 23 0993,23 0548, 23 2116, 26 05190, 01 7900

23 5700 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC 23 0529, 23 2113, 23 2116, 23 0519

23 6423.16 HEAT RECOVERY CHILLERS 23 0548, 23 2113, 23 2116

23 6426.16 WATER-COOLED, ROTARY-SCREW WATER CHILLERS

23 2113, 23 2116,

23 6500 COOLING TOWERS 23 0513, 23 0900, 23 0993, 22 1116, 23 2113,23 2116

23 7313.16 INDOOR, SEMI-CUSTOM AIR HAMDLING UNITS 23 0993, 230900

23 7313.17 CUSTOM AIR HANDLING UNITS-POOL 23 0993

23 8126 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 23 0513, 23 0548, 23 3113, 23 3300

23 8146 WATER-SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS 23 0993, 23 0548, 23 0529, 23 0548

23 8236 FINNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATERS 26 0526, 26 0519,

23 8239.13 CABINET UNIT HEATERS 23 0548, 07 9200, 23 2113, 23 2116, 23 2213, 23 2216, 26 0526, 26 0519

23 8239.19 WALL AND CEILING UNIT HEATERS 23 0513, 26 0526, 26 0519

23 8413.29 SELF-CONTAINED STEAM HUMIDIFIERS 23 0548, 23 1123, 23 5123, 26 0519, 26 0526, 26 0533, 26 0532

26 0932 LIGHTING CONTROLS - LUTRON 01 3000, 01 7800, 01 7900, 01 9113, 26 0553,

26 2200 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 0553, 26 0526, 26 0548.16, 26 0529, 26 0519,

26 2923 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 01 7823, 07 7200, 26 0529, 26 0548.16, 26 2813, 26 0523, 26 0553, 26 0573,

26 3213 ENGINE GENERATORS 26 3600, 26 0548.16, 01 7823, 03 3053, 03 3000, 23 1113, 26 0526, 26 0519, 23 0553, 26 0553, 01 7900

26 3600 TRANSFER SWITCHES 26 0548.16, 01 7823, 03 3000, 26 0529, 26 0553, 26 0526, 26 0519, 01 7900



June 20, 2019

COMMISSIONING PLAN APPENDIX 12

APPENDIX 12

COMMISSIONING PLAN

beyond engineering

APPENDIX 12 – DRAFT COMMISSIONING PLAN

3700 Mansell Road, Mansell One, Suite 200, Alpharetta, Georgia 30022 1

COMMISSIONING PLAN

Elizabeth Square – Phase 1 Elizabeth House III-SCRRAC

Silver Spring, Maryland

Prepared by: Johanna Brau, CPMP, CCP, LEED® AP

AHA Consulting Engineers, Inc.

March 13, 2019

beyond engineering

Elizabeth Square Phase 1 Commissioning Plan Elizabeth House III – SCRRAC March 13, 2019

770-992-8585 www.aha-engineers.com 2

TABLE OF CONTENTS

I. INTRODUCTION/REVISION LOG INTRODUCTION ................................................................. 3

II. OVERVIEW OF COMMISSIONING ........................................................................................... 5

III. COMMISSIONING PROCESS OBJECTIVES ............................................................................... 5

IV. SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED .......................................................................................... 6

V. COMMISSIONING TEAM .................................................................................................... 109

VI. COMMISSIONING TEAM ROLES & RESPONSIBILITIES ...................................................... 1110

DESIGN PHASE .............................................................................................................................. 1110 CONSTRUCTION PHASE ................................................................................................................ 1110 ACCEPTANCE PHASE ..................................................................................................................... 1514 WARRANTY PHASE........................................................................................................................ 1817

VII. COMMUNICATION AND REPORTING ............................................................................... 1918

VIII. COMMISSIONING SCOPE OF WORK ................................................................................. 2019

beyond engineering



I. INTRODUCTION/REVISION LOG

The Owner has retained AHA Consulting Engineers, Inc. (AHA) to provide Fundamental and Enhanced Commissioning Services for the Elizabeth Square - Phase 1 project located in Silver Spring, MD. Included in the scope of the combined commissioning services is the Elizabeth House III project, which will be provided with Fundamental Commissioning services, and the SCRRAC project, which will be provided with Enhanced Commissioning services. The combined deliverables will satisfy the commissioning requirements for a minimum LEED Silver rating as part of the LEED for New Construction and Major Renovations rating system and are outlined in this report. The Elizabeth Square Phase 1 project consists of separate areas and uses with defined commissioning services. The first space is the Elizabeth House III with a total of 267 Senior Housing Independent Living units totaling 223,455 gross floor area (GFA) and located on floors 4-16. The second space is the SCRRAC project which includes a total of 126,895 GFA and includes a recreation center, circulation areas and building services spaces and is located on floors B1 through level 3. The third space is below grade parking areas serving the Elizabeth House III residents and is located on levels B1 and B2 with a total of 31,473 GFA. Due to the required commissioning deliverables for the LEED certification on the SCRRAC project, an independent Third-Party Commissioning firm will be providing additional commissioning services for this space and will be referred to as the Cx Authority for the duration of this project and thorough out this report. All remaining Fundamental Commissioning services for the project, including Base Building services, will be provided by AHA and referred to as the Cx Agent throughout the report and project. The Commissioning Plan outlines and guides the commissioning activities during the design and construction phases and during occupancy and the operational aspects of the project. The Commissioning Plan is a document that evolves throughout the design and into the construction phase of the project and defines the organization, schedule, allocation of resources and documentation requirements of the commissioning process. The following pages outline the commissioning process in each phase and includes responsibly parties and deliverables to the client. All documents created or obtained during the commissioning process will be saved by AHA Consulting Engineers and provided to the Oowner as part of the Final Commissioning Report. This report will serve as documentation of the commissioning activities for the project, as well as reference to all MEP systems for the life of the building. Documents such as design drawings and equipment submittals, construction documents and final TAB report and testing data can be used as reference to assist the Oowner in the daily operations of the facility. The Revision Log is a summary of changes made to the Commissioning Plan document throughout the design, construction, and acceptance phases of the project. The information is critical to keeping all members of the commissioning team aligned on shared assumptions of basic project requirements and the commissioning process. The following revisions are below:

Date Revised by Sections Updated Description of Changes

5/10/18 J. Brau Draft Cx Plan N/A

beyond engineering



Date Revised by Sections Updated Description of Changes

2/22/19 B. Shankus Section IV Systems to be Commissioned; Section VI Roles & Responsibilities; Section VIII, Paragraph B, Specifications

Section IV, Updated Commissioned Systems; Section VI & VIII, Changed per CxA IFC Review Comments

beyond engineering



II. OVERVIEW OF COMMISSIONING

Commissioning is a systematic process of ensuring that all building systems perform interactively according to the Owner’s Project Requirements (OPR) and Basis of Design (BOD). . This is achieved by beginning at the design phase with documented design and operating intent, continuing through construction and acceptance with actual verification of performance, and ensuring the information is sufficient, available and organized for proper operation and maintenance of the building. Commissioning establishes an organized method to document Design, Construction, Testing, and O&M Information. In addition, Commissioning ensures the building is constructed and functions in accordance with the OPR and the BOD. Lastly, Commissioning verifies the Oowner is properly trained and is provided with complete information on the facility.

III. COMMISSIONING PROCESS OBJECTIVES

Commissioning by this plan is intended to achieve the following specific objectives:

A. Clearly define the Owner’s Project Requirements (OPR).

B. Ensure the Basis of Design (BOD) incorporates the OPR requirements.

C. Ensure the BOD has been properly documented in the contract documents.

D. Ensure that the commissioning scope is adequately reflected in the construction documents.

E. Ensure the submitted equipment satisfies the requirements indicated in the contract documents by performing submittal reviews for all MEP equipment.

F. Ensure that following installations that HVAC air and hydronic systems have been properly balanced by reviewing the TAB plan and performing TAB verification during the process.

G. Ensure that applicable equipment and systems are installed and calibrated properly and receive adequate operational checkout by installing contractors. Including monitoring systems.

H. Verify and document proper performance of equipment and systems through normal and other likely operational modes necessary to meet design intent and the Oowner’s project requirements and operational needs.

I. Ensure the Owner’s maintenance staff is properly trained on the applicable equipment and systems and is equipped with complete and accurate operating and maintenance manuals.

J. Ensure that all issues discovered throughout the commissioning process are resolved and properly documented in the Master Issues Log.

K. Identify issues requiring further study or attention, or warranty repair items, after occupancy.

L. Satisfy requirements for the State and Local Energy Codes.

beyond engineering



IV. SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED

The following systems will be commissioned in this project by the assigned commissioning firms. The specific components included, criteria used, and test methods employed will be determined during development of the Functional Performance Testing procedures. Those listed below represent the major components. In general, all components critical to the system operation will be included:

A. HVAC Systems and Controls

1. Rooftop Air Handling Units 2. Air Handling Units 3. Heating and Ventilating Units 4. Fan Coil Units 5. AC Units 6. Dehumidification Units 7. Terminal Units 8. Heat Pumps 9. Ceiling Mounted Radiant Heaters 10. Unit Heaters 11. Fans (Supply, Exhaust, Garage Ventilation, Combustion Air, Boiler Flue, Refrigerant

Purge) 12. Roof and Hoistway Vents 13. Condensing Boilers (Building Heating) 14. Boiler Pumps 15. Chillers and Cooling Towers 16. Chilled and Condenser water pumps 17. Heat Exchangers 18. Pool Dehumidification Units 19. Air Distribution System – Ductwork – Pressure/Leak Testing 20. Water Distribution System – Piping – Pressure/Leak Testing 21. TAB – air and water 22. Energy Management Control System (EMCS) - All equipment with EMCS; Controllers and

Points

a) Sensors b) Controlled devices c) Stand-alone or packaged controls d) Local loop control panels e) Network controllers f) Field interface panels g) Central processing units h) Basic software routines i) Software loop tuning j) All sequences of operation

1. Cooling Towers 2. Boilers 3. Water Source Heat Pumps 4. Outdoor Air Units

beyond engineering



5. Heat Exchangers 6. Split Systems 7. Electric Heaters 8. Heat Recovery Equipment 9. Fans 10. Pumps 11. VFDs 12. Energy Recovery Unit 13. Water Treatment System 14. Energy Management System 15. Testing and Balancing Verification 16. Pipe Flushing and Cleaning Activities 17. Ductwork, Diffusers, Grills, Registers, and associated dampers

B. Electrical Systems

1. Integrated Emergency Power Test

a. Emergency Generator

1) Temporary load-banks shall be provided to test all generators on site. Load banks shall be sufficient for both single generator and both generators being tested concurrently.

b. ATS c. Integration with FACP

2. Building Lighting and Controls 3. Continuity and Ground of Incoming Utility Service Conductors 4. Transformers, Switchboards, and Circuit Breakers 5. Feeders and Branch Circuits 6. AC Motors and Starters 7. Distribution & Branch Circuit Panelboards 8. Lighting System 9. Lighting Control System 10. Sensors 11. Lighting Level Verification 12. Lighting Protection Systems 13. Grounding Equipment & Building Grounding System 14. Elevator Systems & Recall 15. Equipment Monitoring Systems 16. Fire Alarm Equipment/Fire Alarm Equipment Monitoring System 17. Security System & Signaling 18. Emergency System 19. Engine-Generator Sets 20. Switchgear/Switchboard 21. Automatic Transfer Switches 22. Fuel Systems (Storage Tanks, Day Tanks, Pumps, Valves) 23. Annunciation

beyond engineering



24. Grounding and Bonding 25. Engine Alarms 26. Cooling System 27. Batteries 28. Controls and Engine Start Wiring 29. Communication Systems 30. Thermal Scanning of the install Feeders, Transformers, Panels, Circuit Breakers,

Generator and Automatic Transfer Switches 31. Provide annual programmed maintenance schedule for all Panels, Circuit Breakers,

Generator and Automatic Transfer Switches (tightening of lugs) and visual inspection of main service conductors for the main Electrical Feeds, Transformers, Switchgear/Switchboard, Circuit Breakers, Panelboards, Engine-Generator & Automatic Transfer Switches.

C. Generators

1. Automatic Transfer Switches 2. Interior and Exterior Lighting and Lighting Controls 3. Interior and Exterior Daylighting and Daylighting Controls

D.C. Plumbing Systems

1. Water Distribution System – Piping – Pressure/Leak Testing 2. Air Compressors 3. Gas Fired Water Heaters and Circulation Pumps 4. Electric Water Heater with Storage Tank 5. Point of Use Electric Water Heaters 6. Sump Pumps/Sewage Ejectors 7. Tempered Mixing Valves 8. Plumbing Fixtures 9. Pool Pumps 10. Pool Heaters

E. Water Heaters

1. Plumbing Fixtures 2. Pumps 3. Controls

F.D. Pool Systems and Controls

1. Pool Pumps 2. Pool Heaters 3. Pool Controls 4. Pool Dehumidification Units

E. Fire Protection

1. Piping – Pressure/Leak Testing 2. Flow and Tamper Switches (in Integrated Fire Alarm Test) 3. Fire Protection Integrated Test

beyond engineering



4. Wet systems 5. Fire Pumps

beyond engineering



V. COMMISSIONING TEAM

Successful building commissioning requires a collaborative team effort. The Commissioning Team is led by the Commissioning Authority and the Commissioning Agent and includes members of the Design and Construction teams as well as the Oowner’s Operations staff. It is the Commissioning Team’s role to monitor, assist and coordinate the various team members’ efforts with regards to execution of their responsibilities as outlined in the Commissioning Plan. Contact information for the Commissioning Team is included below and should be updated as members join the team as the project proceeds. Persons listed as the commissioning contact should be familiar with their company’s responsibilities as outlined in the Commissioning Plan.

Role Company Contact

Phone:

Office / Cell / Email

Cx Agent AHA Consulting Engineers Randy Wimmer

Cx Authority Facilities Dynamics Scott Stoutenborough

Owner HOC Hyunsuk Choi

Owner’s Project

Manager

Owner’s

Maintenance

Manager

Vantage/Edgewood

Elizabeth House III

Architect KGD Architecture Alexandra Shifflett

Engineer AHA Consulting Engineers Ryan Carter

General Contractor

Construction

Manager

Jones Lang Lasalle (JLL)

Mechanical

Contractor

Electrical Contractor

Plumbing Contractor

Controls Contractor

Fire Protection

Contractor

Testing & Balancing

Contractor

beyond engineering



VI. COMMISSIONING TEAM ROLES & RESPONSIBILITIES

The following is a listing of commissioning responsibilities to be performed, and deliverables to be provided, by each commissioning team member during each project phase. This list is not intended to capture all the tasks required of a team member on the project; just the tasks associated with the commissioning process.

DESIGN PHASE

Role Responsibilities Deliverables

Owner / Owner’s Project Manager

• Develop OPR document.

• Review and comment on Commissioning Plan.

• Review and comment on commissioning specification.

• OPR Document

• Review Comments

Owner’s Operations & Maintenance Staff

• Assist with development of OPR document.

• Assist with review of commissioning plan.

• Assist with review of commissioning specifications.

• Review Comments to Owner

Architect / Engineer

• Develop BOD document.

• Incorporate the commissioning specification sections prepared by the CxA into the Bid documents.

• BOD Document

• Construction Documents

Cx Agent

(HOC, Base Building and SCRRAC)

• Assist Owner with development of OPR document.

• Develop Commissioning Plan.

• Develop Commissioning specification sections (019113) for inclusion in the Design documents.

• Incorporate Cx specifications in construction specifications.

• Draft and finalize Cx Plan

• Edit Cx Specifications

• Attend meetings

Cx Authority (SCRRAC)

• Review construction documents for systems included SCRRAC.

• Prepare, edit and supplement specifications to identify Cx requirements and issue comments.

• Attend design meetings associated with SCRRAC.

• Review design calculations selected

• Review comments

• Edit Cx Plan

• Attend meetings

• Review Cx Plan

CONSTRUCTION PHASE



• Update OPR document as required.

• Facilitate and champion the commissioning process among the project team.

• Review and comment on all Commissioning documentation provided by Cx Agent and Cx Authority.

• Participate in regularly scheduled Commissioning Coordination meetings.

• Revised OPR Document

• Review Comments

beyond engineering



CONSTRUCTION PHASE



• Periodically visit the construction site to become familiar with the components as they are installed and prior to being concealed. Communicate with the commissioning teams concerns regarding system installation.

• Witness, to the greatest extent desired, the Division 21, 22, 23, and& 26 testing and startup procedures conducted by the contractors.

• Provide information to the Cx Agent and Cx Authority regarding how the building will be staffed and operated from a maintenance standpoint.

• Review equipment training plans with respect to appropriateness to the potential trainees.


• Site Visit Comments

• Staffing Info

• Training Plan Review Comments


• Update BOD document as required.

• Coordinate comments on submittals and shop drawings with both Cx teams prior to issue of approval.

• Review O&M Mmanuals submitted by the contractors.

• Copy all Architectural Supplemental Instructions (ASI), Proposal Requests (PR), RFI’s, and fully executed Change Orders (CO), to the Cx teams for informational purposes.


• Revised BOD Document

• O&M Manual Review Comments

• Updated Construction Documents

General Contractor / Construction Manager

• Copy all Meeting Minutes to both Cx teams for informational purposes.

• Incorporate commissioning activities into the master project schedule.

• Provide commissioning with monthly schedule updates.

• Submit all shop drawings and submittals associated with systems being commissioned to the Cx teams for review/information based on scope of work.

• Submit the equipment O&M Mmanuals to the Owner & Design for review.

• Submit training plans to the Owner & Design Team for review.

• Submit testing and balancing (TAB) execution plan to the assigned Cx firm for review.

• Schedule and witness Division 21, 22, 23, and& 26 testing and startup procedures.

• Meeting Minutes

• Project Schedule

• Submittals

• O&M Manuals

• Training Plans

• TAB Execution Plan

beyond engineering



CONSTRUCTION PHASE



Sub-Contractors • Provide input into the master scheduling process.

• Accomplish start up and testing of installed equipment with select sampling/witnessing by the Cx.

• Submit shop drawings and submittals to the construction manager.

• Implement and document Pre-Functional Checklists (PFCs) provided by the Cx Agent. A sampling of the completion of the PFS’s on major equipment to be witnessed by commissioning.

• Submit equipment O&M Mmanuals to the construction manager.

• Submit equipment training plans to the construction manager.

• Submit testing and balancing (TAB) execution plan to the construction manager.

• Review and comment on the Functional Performance Test procedures developed by the Cx Agent.

• Coordinate scheduling and witnessing of Division 21, 22, 23 and 26 testing and startup procedures through the construction manager.


• Submittals

• Completed PFCs

• O&M Manuals

• Training Plans

• TAB Execution Plan

• FPT Review Comments

• Startup and Testing Reports

Cx Agent (HOC and SCRRAC)

• Conduct a joint commissioning meeting with commissioning teams.

• Coordinate and direct all commissioning activities for the Elizabeth House III and base building phases.

• Assist the construction manager, sub-contractors, and owner’s project manager in incorporating commissioning activities into the master project schedule.

• Review submittals and shop drawings applicable to systems being commissioned. Provide formal comments to Owner and Design Team for TAB Execution Plan, Start-up Reports, and ATC submittals, all others for information only.

• Review O&M Mmanuals applicable to systems being commissioned, for information only.

• Cx Meeting Minutes

• Submittal Reviews/ Comments

• Site Visit Reports

• TAB Plan Review

• Develop PFCs and FPTs


• Assist resolving open issues.

beyond engineering



CONSTRUCTION PHASE


• Review additional construction phase documentation, e.g., ASI’s, RFI’s, PR’s, Change Orders, meeting minutes, etc., required to plan and perform commissioning tasks.

• Perform site visits to observe component and system installations. Site visits will be scheduled based on the project progress and quality of installation. Modifications to the dates of site visits will vary but will include early site visits and increase as the project progresses. Attend selected planning and job-site meetings to obtain information on construction progress.

• Develop Pre-Functional Cchecklists (PFC) and Functional Performance Test (FPT) procedures for each system to be commissioned for base and tenant scope.

• Witness selected start-up procedures and PFC completion on major equipment.


• Conduct joint commissioning meetings.

• Coordinate and direct all commissioning activities for the SCRRAC project.

• Review construction documents for SCRRAC.

• Review, edit Cx documents and Cx Plan.

• Coordinate and direct all commissioning activities for the SCRRAC sections including FPT procedures.

• Perform site visits to observe component and system installations. Site visits will be scheduled based on the project progress and quality of installation. Modifications to the dates of site visits will vary but will include early site visits and increase as the project progresses. Attend selected planning and job-site meetings to obtain information on construction progress.

• Issue clarifications or interpretations of design intent as required.

• Maintain a record set of shop drawings, product data, warrantees, test reports, TAB reports, start-up reports for record of project.

• Perform TAB verification on 10% of SCRRAC equipment.

• Witness selected start-up procedures and PFC completion on major equipment.


• Submittal Review Comments

• Site Visit Reports

• Submittal Review Comments

• PFCs and FPTs

beyond engineering



ACCEPTANCE PHASE



• Update OPR document as required.

• Review and comment on all commissioning documentation provided by both Cx firms.


• Final OPR Document

• Review Comments


• Participate in the scheduling of equipment and systems training sessions.

• Participate in the equipment and systems training programs and provide feedback on effectiveness and quality.

• Witness, to the greatest extent possible, the functional performance tests performed by the contractors and overseen by the assigned Cx firm.



• Update BOD Document as required.

• Review and approve Ttest and Bbalance rReport.

• Respond to requests for information and/or disputes with respect to design intent and commissioning issue items found during the functional performance testing process.


• Final BOD Document

• TAB Review Comments

• Cx Issues Log Responses


• Copy all Meeting Minutes to both Cx firms for informational purposes.

• Update commissioning activities in the master project schedule.

• Coordinate and schedule equipment training sessions.

• Submit completed Start-Up Checklists to the assigned Cx firm for review.

• Submit ATC point to point checklist to the assigned Cx firm for review.

• Submit final Ttest and bBalance rReport to the design team and CxA and Cx for review.

• Assist in coordination and periodically witness Functional Performance Tests.

• Oversee the correction of deficiencies identified by the Cx firms and provide written responses indicating action taken to resolve each item.

• Meeting Minutes

• Project Schedule

• Start-up Checklists

• ATC Point to Point Checklist

• Final TAB Report


beyond engineering



ACCEPTANCE PHASE



Sub-Contractors • Schedule equipment training sessions.

• Conduct the equipment and systems training programs.

• Submit ATC point to point checklist to construction manager.

• Submit final TAB report to construction manager.

• Set up Functional Performance Test Trend Logs and monitoring data under the Cx Agent and Cx Authority direction.

• Accomplish Functional Performance Testing directed and documented by the both Cx firms.

• Correct all deficiencies identified by commissioning and other parties and provide written responses indicating action taken to resolve each item.


• Perform re-testing where system deficiencies found during initial testing.

• Provide as-built documents for inclusion in the systems manual.

• Provide operation and maintenance information to be included in the systems manual and to be used for training.

• Provide O&M training for the Owner and Owner’s staff per the OPR and the contract documents.

• Completed PRCs

• Start-up Checklists

• ATC Point to Point Checklist

• Final TAB Report


Cx Agent

Cx Authority

• Coordinate and direct all commissioning activities.

• Coordinate and document commissioning meetings.

• Field-verify proper and thorough completion of Pre-Functional Checklists.

• Witness contract required tests as needed.

• Review contractor-completed Start-up checklists prior to commencing functional performance testing on each system.

• Review ATC point to point checklists prior to commencing functional performance testing on each system.

• Review final TAB report prior to commencing functional performance testing on each system. Provide comments to design team for inclusion in formal response.


• PFC and Start-up Checklists Review Comments

• ATC Point to Point Review Comments

• Final TAB Report Review Comments

• Cx Issues Log

• Final Cx Report

beyond engineering



ACCEPTANCE PHASE


• Conduct functional testing on required equipment.

• Analyze Functional Performance Test Trend Logs and monitoring data to verify performance.

• Direct, witness, and document Functional Performance Tests performed by the installing contractors.

• Maintain a master Deficiency and Resolution Log (Commissioning Master Issues log).

• Submit a Final Commissioning Report.

• Recommend to the Owner that the building is fFunctionally Ccomplete and ready for oOccupancy.


• Coordinate and direct all commissioning activities.

• Coordinate and document commissioning meetings.

• Field-verify proper and thorough completion of pre-functional checklists.

• Witness contract required tests as needed.

• Review contractor-completed Start-up checklists prior to commencing functional performance testing on each system.

• Review ATC point to point checklists prior to commencing functional performance testing on each system.

• Review final TAB report prior to commencing functional performance testing on each system. Provide comments to design team for inclusion in formal response.

• Conduct functional testing on required equipment

• Analyze Functional Performance Test Trend Logs and monitoring data to verify performance.

• Direct, witness, and document functional performance tests performed by the installing contractors.

• Maintain a master Deficiency and Resolution Log (Commissioning Master Issues log).

• Submit a Final Commissioning Data from SCRRAC for final report.

• Recommend to the Owner that the building is functionally complete and ready for occupancy.


• PFC and Start-up Checklists Review Comments

• ATC Point to Point Review Comments

• Final TAB Report Review Comments

• Cx Issues Log

beyond engineering



WARRANTY PHASE



• Determine appropriate payments to hold from contractors until final retesting and seasonal/deferred testing is successfully completed.


• Participate in seasonal/deferred testing as possible.

• Maintain “as-commissioned” proper operation of the building systems.

• Maintain records of problems or concerns associated with the systems during normal operation.


• Be available to consult on the results of the seasonal and deferred functional performance test results.


• Assist in coordinating the participation of the necessary subcontractors in the seasonal and deferred functional performance testing.

• Coordinate the correction of deficiencies identified in the seasonal and deferred functional performance tests.

Sub-Contractors • Set up deferred functional performance test trend logs and monitoring data under the direction of the commissioning firm.

• Participate in the seasonal and deferred functional performance testing.

• Correct deficiencies identified in the seasonal and deferred functional performance tests.


• Analyze deferred functional performance test trend logs and monitoring data to verify performance.

• Direct, witness, and document required seasonal and deferred functional performance tests performed by the installing contractors for SCRRAC.

• Final commissioning warranty data to be included in the final report.

• Amendments to Final Report with data obtained from review.

beyond engineering



VII. COMMUNICATION AND REPORTING

A. Communication

The Commissioning firms are representing the Owner. The Cx Agent and Cx Authority will communicate to the Owner all activities, reports, requests for information, etc. To facilitate communication and flow of information, the CxA will coordinate directly with the Architect and General Contractor on meeting requests, scheduling of site visits and testing, requests for information or clarifications, etc. With the approval of the Architect and General Contractor, both Cx firms may also directly interface with Engineers, Subcontractors, and Vendors. Results of such interfaces, where applicable, will be documented by the CxA and CA, and distributed to the team. Site Visit reports and Master Issues Log updates will be distributed to all team members.

B. Meetings

The Cx Agent and Cx Authority will conduct a commissioning kick-off meeting to review the commissioning process, explain responsibilities, and answer questions by the commissioning team, including involved subcontractors.

Both Cx firms will not normally attend regularly scheduled project meetings, but may occasionally do so to keep abreast of project schedule, activities, changes, etc. Periodic commissioning meetings will be coordinated by both Cx firms on an as-needed basis, as determined by the both parties, or where requested by other team members. The agenda of the meetings will cover commissioning schedule and upcoming activities, process questions by other team members, coordination issues, review outstanding issues from the Master Issues Log, and identify new systems issues. Coordination of commissioning meetings to coincide with regular project meetings will be preferred.

C. Progress Reporting and Logs

The Cx Agent and Cx Authority will issue reports to all commissioning team members after all site visits. Site visits will occur at least monthly during system rough-in phase and will increase when closer to system testing. The Cx firms may adjust the reporting frequency as needed. The reports contain general observed progress of work and a list of items or deficiencies noted, and a description of commissioning progress corresponding to the plan, etc. The Cx Agent and Cx Authority will keep a log of all commissioning related issues that require current or future attention and tracks the status of documentation and testing for each piece of equipment and system. This log is called the Master Issues Log. Some issues will require investigation and/or discussion by the commissioning team. Both Cx firms will regularly communicate with all members of the commissioning team, keeping them apprised of commissioning progress and scheduling issues through memos, progress reports, etc.

beyond engineering



VIII. COMMISSIONING SCOPE OF WORK

A. Owner’s Project Requirements and Basis of Design

The Cx Agent will review the Owner’s Project Requirements (OPR) and Basis of Design (BOD) documentation. The Cx Agent will assist in development of these documents where necessary.

The Owner is responsible for the development of the OPR while the Architect/Engineer are responsible for the development of the BOD.

Both Cx firms will review of the OPR for completeness and clarity of information. The Commissioning firms will review of the BOD will be for consistency with the OPR, completeness and clarity of information. The Cx Agent and Cx Authority will use these documents in development of the checkout and testing procedures, and the design reviews.

B. Specifications

The Cx Agent haswill provide specification sections related to commissioning for inclusion in the bid documents. The specification sections provided will consist of the following: General Commissioning Requirements (019113.14 General Commissioning SCRRAC, 019113 General Commissioning EH3), Commissioning of Mechanical (230800), and Commissioning of Electrical (260800). Division 21 (Fire Protection) and Division 22 (Plumbing) contractors will need to reference 019113, 019113.14, 230800, and 260800 for Commission Requirements. The Cx Agent has addedwill also provide additional language to be added to the General and Supplemental Conditions and general specification sections to ensure the scope of commissioning is properly reflected in the construction documents.

C. Requests for Information, Clarifications, Proposed Changes and Final Responses

The Architect shall forward one (1) copy of all Requests for Information (RFI), Architectural Supplemental Instructions (ASI) or other clarifications, and proposed changes related to commissioned systems, to the Cx firms for informational purposes.

The Cx firms will review these for consistency with OPR and BOD, and incorporate any required changes to the commissioning plan, checklists or procedures. Any inconsistencies with the OPR or BOD will be identified to the team by the Cx Agent.

D. Site Observation and Miscellaneous Meetings

Commissioning will make periodic visits to the site, as necessary, to witness equipment and system rough-in and installations for the Elizabeth Square 1 project, field-verify completion of Pre-Functional Checklists and Test and Balance Reports and attend project meetings. The CxA will provide reports from each visit to the Commissioning team. The CxA will incorporate any identified issues into the Master Issues log. The Cx Authority will oversee the SCRRAC portion of the project for the purpose of functional testing, TAB verification, systems start-up and associated meetings to confirm proper installation.

Both Cx firms will review installation for issues or potential issues related to:

1. System functionality. 2. System maintainability and accessibility. 3. Items that may affect indoor air quality. 4. Items that are not consistent with the OPR or BOD.

beyond engineering



E. Pre-Functional Checklists and Systems Startup

Pre-Functional Checklists are important to ensure that the equipment and systems are installed and operational and that Functional Performance Testing may proceed without unnecessary delays. In general, the pre-functional checking for a given system must be successfully completed prior to formal Functional Performance Testing of equipment or subsystems of the given system.

Commissioning to witness selected completion of PFC’s as well as the start-up procedures on major equipment.

Contractor provided Pre-Functional Cchecklists may be used in lieu of the Cx provided checklist if approved by both Cx firms.

Equipment delivery sections are intended to verify that submitted equipment meets the BOD requirements, all information is submitted, the equipment that is delivered to the project site is consistent with approved submittals, is provided with all specified features and options, is in good condition, has been properly protected from moisture damage, and is generally ready for installation.

Installation verification sections are primarily inspections and procedures to ensure equipment and systems are properly installed and to prepare the equipment or system for initial operation (e.g., oil levels acceptable, fan belt tension, labels affixed, gages in place, etc.). Also included in the installation verification checklists are basic functional and operational checks of the equipment in preparation for functional performance testing, as well as preliminary data recording of equipment voltages, currents, etc.

Pre-Functional Checklists augment and are combined with the manufacturer’s start-up checklists. Documentation of flushing, pressure and leak testing, manufacturer startup testing, and other specified contractor testing shall be attached to the checklists where indicated on each checklist.

The Cx Agent will develop all Pre-Functional Checklists, with review and input by the Commissioning team. The Cx Agent will provide a copy of each checklist to the General Contractor and Cx Authority for implementation.

Pre-Ffunctional Checklists will be completed by the General Contractor and Subcontractors for each piece of equipment in all commissioned systems. The checklist will indicate responsible party of each item. Generally, checklists will be separated by Subcontractor. The Contractors will clearly list any outstanding items of the checklists that were not completed successfully at the bottom of the procedures form or on an attached sheet. The CxA works with the Subcontractors to correct and retest deficiencies or incomplete items, involving other parties as necessary. The installing Subcontractors correct all areas that are deficient or incomplete according to the checklists and tests.

Each Subcontractor shall provide system startup plans. Startup plans shall include the manufacturer installation checklists, flushing and leak testing, manufacturer startup instructions, and manufacturer provided startup where applicable. Startup plans shall be provided by the Subcontractor, reviewed by the General Contractor, and forwarded to both Cx firms for review and approval. The Cx Agent and Cx Authority will review completed documentation associated with each startup plan.

beyond engineering



All checklist items applying to system rough-in of ductwork, piping, raceway, equipment, etc. in walls or above ceilings shall be completed prior to installation of drywall or ceiling grid/framing.

When successfully completed and all deficiencies corrected, the General Contractor and Subcontractors shall sign the checklist. The General Contractor shall then forward the completed checklist to the Cx firms for review.

The Cx Agent and Cx Authority will field-verify the checklists for completeness and accuracy. Any items noted as incorrectly completed or deficient will be returned to the General Contractor for correction or response.

Both Cx firms will track the progress of completed Pre-Functional Checklists and incorporate identified issues from the checklists into the Master Issues Log.

Checklists should be completed and accepted by the commissioning firms prior to operation of equipment, even if for construction use. For example, prior to running equipment for conditioned air in the building for finish work, the checklists associated with the affected equipment should be complete.

F. Pressure Testing, Flushing, Manufacturer Testing

The General Contractor will submit to both Cx firm’s procedures to be used for pipe and duct pressure testing, pipe flushing, duct cleaning, and any manufacturer field testing. The Cx team will provide any comments on the procedures.

The General Contractor shall notify the Cx firm at least one (1) week in advance of any testing or flushing activities. Commissioning will not witness all testing and flushing but will witness sufficient activities to be confident that the procedures were followed and implemented properly.

G. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

The Test and Balance (TAB) Subcontractor shall submit a TAB plan and approach to the Cx Agent and Cx Authority, and the Controls Subcontractor prior to starting TAB. Included in the approach, is an explanation of the intended use of the building control system. The Cx firms review the plan and approach for understanding and coordination issues. The Controls Subcontractor reviews the feasibility of using the building control system for assistance in the TAB work. The TAB Subcontractor submits weekly written reports of discrepancies, contract interpretation requests and lists of completed tests to commissioning. This facilitates quicker resolution of problems and will result in a more complete TAB before Functional Performance Testing begins. The CxA and CA will witness portions of the testing and balancing to verify the accuracy.

Test and Balance must be completed prior to Functional Performance Testing of the HVAC system.

H. Controls Checkout Plan

The Controls Subcontractor develops and submits a written step-by-step plan to commissioning which describes the process they intend to follow in checking out the control system and the forms, including point to point wiring checkout, on which they will document the process. All field-installed sensors and gauges, and all actuators shall be calibrated in accordance with the applicable specification sections. All test instruments shall have a certified calibration within

beyond engineering



the last twelve (12) months. Sensors installed in the unit at the factory with calibrations certification provided with no additional wire being added to the controller need not be field calibrated. The Cx Agent and Cx Authority will spot check on a sample of the calibrations done during construction check listing and start-up. Both Cx firms will include sampling and witnessing of control checkouts, point to point checks and calibration of all control devices.

The Controls Subcontractor will also meet with the TAB Subcontractor prior to the start of TAB and review the TAB plan to determine the capabilities of the control system for use in TAB. The Controls Subcontractor will provide the TAB contractor with the necessary unique instruments to allow access to the control system and instruct them in their use (handheld control system interface for use around the building during TAB, etc.). The Controls Subcontractor shall also provide a technician qualified to operate the controls to assist the TAB Subcontractor in performing TAB.

Where the controls system is required for use in TAB, all CxA-required controls construction checklists, calibrations, start-up and selected functional tests of the system shall be completed and approved by commissioning prior to TAB.

I. Indoor Air Quality

During site visits, the Cx firms will note any activities or items that may adversely affect indoor air quality. Commissioning particularly notes the storage of susceptible materials such as insulation for protection from moisture in accordance with the Construction Indoor Air Quality Plan for the project, and protection of duct and air handling equipment from contamination by construction dirt, dust, and debris. Commissioning will also review submittals for consistency with indoor air quality goals of the project.

J. Functional Performance Test and Verification Procedures

Functional performance testing is the dynamic testing of systems (rather than just components) under full operation and using conditions simulating actual conditions. Systems are tested under various modes, such as during low cooling or heating loads, high loads, component failures, unoccupied, varying outside air temperatures, fire alarm, power failure, etc. The systems are run through all the control system’s sequences of operation (as indicated in the contract documents) and components are verified to be responding as the sequences state.

The Cx Agent develops the Functional Performance Test procedures in a sequential written form. These procedures will be reviewed by the Commissioning team prior to implementation.

The Subcontractors shall operate equipment and manipulate controls software during the functional performance test procedures. Commissioning coordinates, oversees and documents the testing, with the assistance of the installing Contractor.

Prior to performing Functional Performance Testing the following shall be complete: all Pre-Functional Checklists must be completed, signed and returned to the Cx Agent and Cx Authority, the control system must be tested by the Controls Contractor verifying performance and including point-to-point calibration checks, and the test and balance must be complete and signed off by the engineer of record to verify the balancing is completed. Functional Performance Testing proceeds from components to subsystems to systems and finally to interlocks and connections between systems.

beyond engineering



The Cx firms maintain a test log and documents the results of each Functional Performance Test. Corrections of minor deficiencies identified are made during the tests at the discretion of commissioning and documented on the test log. Commissioning records the results of the test on the procedure or test form. Deficiencies or nonconformance issues are noted and reported to appropriate parties. Subcontractors correct deficiencies, notify the Cx teams and return documentation certifying correction. Commissioning schedules retesting through the construction team. The Cx Agent and Cx Authority recommends acceptance of each test to the Owner.

If at any point frequent failures are occurring and testing is becoming more troubleshooting than verification, the Cx teams may stop the testing and require the responsible Subcontractor to perform and document a checkout of the remaining units, prior to continuing with functionally testing the remaining equipment.

When all Functional Performance Tests have been successfully completed, the Cx firms informs the Owner that the project is functionally complete to support occupancy. They then will incorporate any outstanding or follow up issues in the Master Issues Log and Final Commissioning Report.

K. Final Report

The Cx Agent and Cx Authority will compile a final Final Rreport for respective projects. This report may be combined as a Final Report or as two (2) separate reports and will include the following:

1. Executive Summary which documents the commissioning process success and lists any outstanding issues requiring further corrective actions or monitoring.

2. Final Owner’s Project Requirements and Basis of Design documents. 3. Final Commissioning Plan. 4. Submittal Review Log. 5. Commissioning Specifications. 6. Completed Pre-Functional Checklists and Functional Performance Test procedures. 7. Final Master Issues Log. 8. Site Visit Reports.

L. Deliverables

The Cx Agent will provide for the Owner electronic files containing all commissioning information, including that listed below. The Cx Agent will also finalize the Design Basis information with any as built information or changes made during commissioning.

1. Executive Summary which documents the commissioning process success and lists any outstanding issues requiring further corrective actions or monitoring.

2. Final Owner’s Project Requirements and Basis of Design documents. 3. Final Commissioning Plan. 4. Submittal Review Log. 5. Commissioning Specifications. 6. Completed Pre-Functional Checklists and Functional Performance Test procedures. 7. Final Master Issues Log. 8. Site Visit Reports.

beyond engineering





June 20, 2019

PROGRAM OF REQUIREMENT – POR

FOR SOUTH COUNTY REGIONAL RECREATION

AND AQUATIC CENTER APPENDIX 13

APPENDIX 13

PROGRAM OF REQUIREMENT – POR

FOR SOUTH COUNTY REGIONAL

RECREATION AND AQUATIC

CENTER

Program of Requirements - POR for

South County Regional Recreation and Aquatic Center

Silver Spring, Maryland

Department of General Services

April 2017

Montgomery County Maryland

Department of General Services [DGS]

Division of Building Design and Construction [DBDC]

101 Monroe Street, 11th Floor

Rockville, Maryland 20850


Program of Requirements

Acknowledgements:

Prepared by:

• Kishimoto.Gordon.Dalaya. PC, Architecture

• Department of General Services, Montgomery County, MD

• Department of Recreation, Montgomery County, MD

• Randall M. Hawkins, RA, LEED® AP Senior Architect, DBDC

• Rodgers Consulting, INC (Site/Civil Engineer)

• Ellinwood Machado (Structural Engineer)

• AHA Engineers (MEP Engineers)

• Oculus (Landscape Architect)

• SEI Architects (Pool Consultant)

Table of Contents

i. Executive Summary, Approach and Methodology ................................................................................ 17

i.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 17

i.1.1 Project Description ................................................................................................................... 17

i.1.1.1 Elizabeth Square Background ............................................................................................ 17

i.2 Evolution of the Space Program ....................................................................................................... 18

i.3 Approach and Methodology............................................................................................................. 18

i.4 Report Organization ......................................................................................................................... 18

i.4.1 Background and Overview ........................................................................................................ 18

i.4.2 Staffing Overview ..................................................................................................................... 18

i.4.3 Space Standards and Facility Adjacencies ................................................................................. 19

i.4.4 Functional Component Requirements ...................................................................................... 19

i.4.5 Functional Criteria by Space Type ............................................................................................. 19

i.4.6 Criteria for Site ......................................................................................................................... 19

i.4.7 Technical Design Requirements (supplement to Design Manual) .............................................. 19

i.4.8 Selected Site Characteristics (for known sites) .......................................................................... 19

1 Background and Overview ................................................................................................................... 20

Statement of needs for the facility ............................................................................................... 20

Background of the project ............................................................................................................ 20

Department of Recreation mission ............................................................................................... 24

Organization charts ...................................................................................................................... 25

Montgomery County Organization chart ............................................................................... 25

Agency organization chart .................................................................................................... 26

Facility organization chart ..................................................................................................... 26

Mission Statement of the facility .................................................................................................. 26

Building operation hours .............................................................................................................. 26

Building Appearance and Image ................................................................................................... 26

2 Staffing Overview ................................................................................................................................ 28

Facility staff summary by department with growth projections .................................................... 28

List of staff by department with growth projections ..................................................................... 28

3 Space Standards and Facility Adjacencies ............................................................................................. 30

Space standards ........................................................................................................................... 30

3.1.1 Methodology ........................................................................................................................ 30

3.1.2 Definitions ............................................................................................................................ 30

3.1.3 Measurement Standards ...................................................................................................... 31

3.1.4 List of standard spaces ......................................................................................................... 31

Space program summary .............................................................................................................. 32

Detailed Space program by building component .......................................................................... 39

3.3.1 Graphic Program ................................................................................................................. 39

Adjacency requirements for the facility ........................................................................................ 42

Adjacency diagram (bubble diagram) for the facility ..................................................................... 42

Floor adjacency diagram .............................................................................................................. 42

4 Functional Component Requirements .................................................................................................. 43

Main Lobby – Shared Space .......................................................................................................... 43

Functional Requirements ...................................................................................................... 43

Mission ............................................................................................................................. 43

Users ................................................................................................................................ 43

Hours of Operation ........................................................................................................... 43

Access and Circulation ...................................................................................................... 43

Operational and Design Considerations ............................................................................ 43

Main Lobby Component Space Program ............................................................................... 44

Main Lobby Adjacency Diagram ............................................................................................ 44

Administration – Shared Space ..................................................................................................... 45


Mission ............................................................................................................................. 45

Users ................................................................................................................................ 45




Administration Component Space Program ......................................................................... 46

Administration Adjacency Diagram ....................................................................................... 48

Natatorium - Aquatics .................................................................................................................. 49


Mission ............................................................................................................................. 49

Users ................................................................................................................................ 49




Natatorium Component Space Program ............................................................................... 50

Natatorium Adjacency Diagram ............................................................................................ 51

Fitness – Community Recreation Center ....................................................................................... 52


Mission ............................................................................................................................. 52

Users ................................................................................................................................ 52




Fitness Component Space Program ...................................................................................... 53

Fitness Adjacency Diagram ................................................................................................... 54

Community – Community Recreation Center................................................................................ 55


Mission ............................................................................................................................. 55

Users ................................................................................................................................ 55




Community Component Space Program ............................................................................... 56

Community Adjacency Diagram ............................................................................................ 57

5 Functional Criteria by Space Type ........................................................................................................ 58

Room Data Sheets ........................................................................................................................ 58

Key to Space Codes & Chapter Organization ......................................................................... 58

Main Lobby Component Space Data Sheets .......................................................................... 58

Data Sheet: L.1; Main Lobby ............................................................................................ 59

Data Sheet: L.2; Front Desk .............................................................................................. 61

Data Sheet: L.2; Hall of Fame ........................................................................................... 63

Data Sheet: L.3; Hall of Fame Office ................................................................................. 64

Data Sheet: L.4; Cafe ........................................................................................................ 65

Administration Component Space Data Sheets ..................................................................... 66

Data Sheet: A.1; Administration Reception ...................................................................... 67

Data Sheet: A.2; Conference Room .................................................................................. 68

Data Sheet: A.3; Office-1 .................................................................................................. 69



Data Sheet: A.6; Cubicle-1 ................................................................................................ 73

Data Sheet: A.7; Temp/Seasonal ...................................................................................... 74

Data Sheet: A.8; Wellness ................................................................................................ 75

Data Sheet: A.9; Administration Misc. Mech. & Elec. ........................................................ 76

Data Sheet: A.10; Administration Storage .................................................................... 77

Natatorium Component Space Data Sheets .......................................................................... 78

Data Sheet: N.1; Natatorium Prefunction ......................................................................... 79

Data Sheet: N.2; Competition Pool ................................................................................... 81

Data Sheet: N.3; Competition Pool Storage ...................................................................... 83

Data Sheet: N.4; Leisure Pool & Attraction ....................................................................... 84

Data Sheet: N.5; Therapy Pool ......................................................................................... 85

Data Sheet: N.6; Leisure/Therapy Pool Storage ................................................................ 86

Data Sheet: N.7; Spa ........................................................................................................ 87

Data Sheet: N.8; Lifeguard ............................................................................................... 88

Data Sheet: N.9; First Aid ................................................................................................. 89

Data Sheet: N.10; Lifeguard & First Aid Storage ............................................................ 91

Data Sheet: N.11; Sauna ............................................................................................... 92

Data Sheet: N.12; Wet Classroom ................................................................................ 93

Data Sheet: N.13; Wet Classroom Storage .................................................................... 95

Data Sheet: N.14; Pool Deck ......................................................................................... 96

Data Sheet: N.15; Spectator Seating ............................................................................. 98

Data Sheet: N.16; Natatorium Men’s Locker Rooms ..................................................... 99

Data Sheet: N.17; Natatorium Women’s Locker Rooms .............................................. 101

Data Sheet: N.18; Family Changing Area..................................................................... 103

Data Sheet: N.19; Pool Electrical Room ...................................................................... 104

Data Sheet: N.20; Pool Mechanical Room .................................................................. 105

Data Sheet: N.21; Pool Mech. & Elec. Storage ............................................................ 106

Data Sheet: N.22; Pump/Filter Room ......................................................................... 107

Data Sheet: N.23; Surge Vault .................................................................................... 108

Data Sheet: N.24; Pump/Filter/Surge Vault Storage ................................................... 109

Data Sheet: N.25; Pool Equipment Room ................................................................... 110

Data Sheet: N.26; Chemical Room .............................................................................. 111

Data Sheet: N.27; Pool Mechanical/Water ................................................................. 112

Data Sheet: N.28; Natatorium Misc. Mech. & Elec. ..................................................... 113

Fitness Component Space Data Sheets ............................................................................... 114

Data Sheet: F.1; Fitness Prefunction ............................................................................... 115

Data Sheet: F.2; Gymnasium .......................................................................................... 116

Data Sheet: F.3; Gymnasium Storage ............................................................................. 119

Data Sheet: F.4; Gymnasium Mechanical/Electrical ........................................................ 120

Data Sheet: F.5; Gymnasium Mech./Elec. Storage .......................................................... 120

Data Sheet: F.6; Cardio/Weight/Stretch Room ............................................................... 122

Data Sheet: F.7; Cardio/Weight/Stretch Storage ............................................................ 124

Data Sheet: F.8; Exercise Studio ..................................................................................... 125

Data Sheet: F.9; Exercise Studio Storage ........................................................................ 127

Data Sheet: F.10; Fitness Men’s Locker Rooms ........................................................... 128

Data Sheet: F.11; Fitness Woman’s Locker Rooms ...................................................... 130

Data Sheet: F.12; Fitness Family Changing Area .......................................................... 132

Data Sheet: F.13; Fitness Misc. Mechanical & Electrical .............................................. 133

Data Sheet: F.14; Fitness Misc. Mech. & Elec. Storage ................................................ 134

Community Component Space Data Sheets ........................................................................ 135

Data Sheet: C.1; Community Pre-function ...................................................................... 136

Data Sheet: C.2; Social Hall ............................................................................................ 137

Data Sheet: C.3; Social Hall Storage ................................................................................ 139

Data Sheet: C.4; Social Hall Mechanical & Electrical ....................................................... 140

Data Sheet: C.5; Social Hall Exterior Patio ...................................................................... 141

Data Sheet: C.6; Kitchen................................................................................................. 142

Data Sheet: C.7; Kitchen Storage .................................................................................... 144

Data Sheet: C.8; Activity Room-1.................................................................................... 145

Data Sheet: C.9; Activity Room-1 Storage ....................................................................... 147

Data Sheet: C.10; Activity Room-2 .............................................................................. 148

Data Sheet: C.11; Activity Room-2 Storage ................................................................. 150

Data Sheet: C.12; Activity Room-3 .............................................................................. 151

Data Sheet: C.13; Activity Room-3 Storage ................................................................. 153

Data Sheet: C.14; Art Room ........................................................................................ 154

Data Sheet: C.15; Art Room Storage ........................................................................... 156

Data Sheet: C.16; Family Play Area ............................................................................. 157

Data Sheet: C.17; Game Room ................................................................................... 158

Data Sheet: C.18; Community Lounge ........................................................................ 159

Data Sheet: C.19; Community Lounge Storage ........................................................... 161

Data Sheet: C.22; Community Misc. Mechanical & Electrical ...................................... 162

Data Sheet: C.23; Community Misc. Storage............................................................... 163

Miscellaneous Space Data Sheets ....................................................................................... 164

Data Sheet: M.1; Custodial ............................................................................................. 165

Data Sheet: M.2; Tele-data ............................................................................................ 166

Data Sheet: M.3; Typical Men’s Restrooms .................................................................... 167

Data Sheet: M.4; Typical Women’s Restrooms ............................................................... 168

Tables of Furniture, Equipment, Telephone, and Computer Requirements ................................. 169

Furniture Requirements ..................................................................................................... 169

Equipment Requirements ................................................................................................... 169

6 Functional Criteria for Site ................................................................................................................. 170

Site requirements....................................................................................................................... 170

Vehicular access ................................................................................................................. 170

Pedestrian access and safety .............................................................................................. 170

Parking spaces and basis of calculation ............................................................................... 170

Drop-off ............................................................................................................................. 170

Functional areas ................................................................................................................. 170

Utilities ............................................................................................................................... 170

Outdoor furniture and equipment ...................................................................................... 170

Landscaping and security (including fencing) ...................................................................... 170

Exterior lighting .................................................................................................................. 170

Exterior signage and wayfinding ......................................................................................... 171

7 Technical Design Requirements (supplement to Design Manual) ....................................................... 172

Definitions ................................................................................................................................. 172

General Goals............................................................................................................................. 172

Crime Prevention and Security ........................................................................................... 172

System Acceptance Testing and Commissioning ................................................................. 172

General Building Codes, Regulations, and Standards .................................................................. 172

Codes ................................................................................................................................. 172

General........................................................................................................................... 172

Specialty ......................................................................................................................... 173

Regulations ........................................................................................................................ 174

Other Authorities Having Jurisdiction .............................................................................. 174

Sustainability Regulations ............................................................................................... 174

Accessibility Regulations ................................................................................................. 175

Standards ........................................................................................................................... 175

Utility Standards ............................................................................................................. 175

Reference Standards ....................................................................................................... 176

Industry Standards.......................................................................................................... 176

Accreditation Standards.................................................................................................. 176

Building Structure (excluding foundations) ................................................................................. 176

Deflection Criteria .............................................................................................................. 176

Description of the General Structural Systems .................................................................... 177

Foundation ..................................................................................................................... 177

Parking and Driving Surfaces: Below Grade and Elevated ................................................ 177

Occupied Areas: Slab on Grade ....................................................................................... 177

Occupied Floors: Structural Floors .................................................................................. 178

Roof................................................................................................................................ 179

Façade ............................................................................................................................ 179

Construction Materials ................................................................................................... 180

Architecture ............................................................................................................................... 180

Building envelope (General) ............................................................................................... 180

Exterior Enclosure Construction ...................................................................................... 180

Rough Carpentry............................................................................................................. 180

Below grade waterproofing ............................................................................................ 181

Air and Moisture Barriers ................................................................................................ 181

Thermal Barriers ............................................................................................................. 181

Wall Claddings ................................................................................................................ 181

Roofing ........................................................................................................................... 181

Fenestration ................................................................................................................... 182

Glazing: .......................................................................................................................... 182

Doors: ......................................................................................................................... 182

Hardware: ................................................................................................................... 182

Interiors ..................................................................................................................................... 183

Materials and Systems ........................................................................................................ 183

Metal railings .................................................................................................................. 183

Architectural woodwork, cabinetry and countertops ...................................................... 183

Firestopping ................................................................................................................... 184

Doors and Frames ........................................................................................................... 184

Hardware: ...................................................................................................................... 184

Partitions: ....................................................................................................................... 184

Glazing ........................................................................................................................... 184

Ceilings: .......................................................................................................................... 184

Floor Finishes:................................................................................................................. 184

Wall Finishes: .............................................................................................................. 184

Natatorium Finishes: ................................................................................................... 184

Specialties, Equipment & Furnishings ......................................................................................... 185

Specialties .......................................................................................................................... 185

Visual Display Surfaces.................................................................................................... 185

Display, Directories, Signage and Wayfinding .................................................................. 185

Toilet Compartments ...................................................................................................... 185

Operable Partitions:........................................................................................................ 185

Toilet Accessories ........................................................................................................... 185

Lockers and Benches....................................................................................................... 185

Flagpoles ........................................................................................................................ 185

Equipment .......................................................................................................................... 185

Maintenance Equipment Requirements .......................................................................... 185

Residential Kitchen Appliances, Food Cooking Equipment, Ice Machines......................... 185

Residential Laundry Appliances ....................................................................................... 185

Audio Video Equipment .................................................................................................. 185

Athletic and Recreational Equipment .............................................................................. 185

Food Service Equipment ................................................................................................. 186

Furnishings ......................................................................................................................... 186

Window Treatment ........................................................................................................ 186

Furnishings and Accessories (clocks, waste receptacles) ................................................. 186

Entrance mats ................................................................................................................ 186

Furniture ........................................................................................................................ 186

Site Furnishings .............................................................................................................. 186

Special Construction and Conveying Equipment ......................................................................... 186

Special Construction – Natatorium Design .......................................................................... 186

Competition Pool ............................................................................................................ 186

Leisure Pool ............................................................................................................... 189

Therapy Pool .................................................................................................................. 189

Spa ................................................................................................................................. 190

Purification Systems ....................................................................................................... 190

Conveying Equipment ......................................................................................................... 191

Vertical Circulation ......................................................................................................... 191

Fire Suppression ......................................................................................................................... 191

Pipe .................................................................................................................................... 191

Sprinklers ........................................................................................................................... 192

Standpipe systems .............................................................................................................. 192

Fire Department Connections ............................................................................................. 192

Fire Pump / Jockey Pump.................................................................................................... 192

Plumbing .................................................................................................................................... 194

Sanitary Drainage and Vent ................................................................................................ 194

Storm Water Drainage ........................................................................................................ 194

Domestic Cold Water .......................................................................................................... 194

Domestic Hot Water with Recirculation .............................................................................. 195

Plumbing Fixtures ............................................................................................................... 195

Natural Gas ........................................................................................................................ 195

Mechanical ................................................................................................................................ 195

General .............................................................................................................................. 195

Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning (HVAC) ....................................................................... 195

General .............................................................................................................................. 195

Design Parameters and Selection Criteria ........................................................................... 197

Energy Conservation ........................................................................................................... 198

Mechanical Equipment Room (MER) Design ....................................................................... 198

Building Heating and Cooling Systems ................................................................................ 198

Hydronic Hot water systems ............................................................................................... 199

Boilers ................................................................................................................................ 199

Chilled water system ................................................................................................... 200

Air Handling Units ....................................................................................................... 200

Duct Work .......................................................................................................................... 201

VAV Boxes .......................................................................................................................... 202

Air Delivery Devices ........................................................................................................ 202

Building Management Systems ....................................................................................... 203

Vibration & Sound Control .............................................................................................. 203

HVAC Commissioning...................................................................................................... 203

Electrical .................................................................................................................................... 204

General Systems Scope ....................................................................................................... 204

Electrical Systems ....................................................................................................... 204

Communication Systems ............................................................................................. 205

Electronic Safety and Security Systems ....................................................................... 205

Electric Service ............................................................................................................ 205

Systems and Building Commissioning .......................................................................... 205

Electrical Distribution .................................................................................................. 206

Emergency power systems ................................................................................................. 207

Low Voltage Wires and Cables ............................................................................................ 207

Raceways and Wiring .................................................................................................. 208

Grounding & Bonding ................................................................................................. 208

Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS)................................................................ 209

Lighting .............................................................................................................................. 209

Communication Systems ............................................................................................................ 211

Electronic Safety and Security Systems ....................................................................................... 213

Access Control System ........................................................................................................ 213

Intrusion Detection System ................................................................................................ 213

CCTV System ...................................................................................................................... 214

Fire Alarm System............................................................................................................... 214

Power ................................................................................................................................. 214

Communications ........................................................................................................................ 214

Audio-Video (including instructional technology, electronic digital, audio loop, public address,

paging, antenna systems, etc.) ........................................................................................................... 215

7.1.9.3 – Instructional Technology .............................................................................. 215

Master Clock System ................................................................................................... 216

Electronic surveillance ........................................................................................................ 216

Video Surveillance ...................................................................................................... 216

Perimeter Security and Lighting .................................................................................. 216

Staff Security .............................................................................................................. 216

Fire detection and alarm..................................................................................................... 216

Fire Detection and Alarm System ................................................................................ 217

Site ............................................................................................................................................ 217

Earthwork........................................................................................................................... 217

Exterior Improvements ....................................................................................................... 217

Fire department access ............................................................................................... 217

Utilities ............................................................................................................................... 217

8 Selected Site Characteristics .............................................................................................................. 218

Location, size, and surroundings................................................................................................. 218

Location and size ................................................................................................................ 218

Surroundings ...................................................................................................................... 218

Access, transportation, and ROW ............................................................................................... 218

Vehicular Access ................................................................................................................. 218

Pedestrian Access ............................................................................................................... 218

Transportation ................................................................................................................... 218

Underground Transportation .......................................................................................... 218

Easements .......................................................................................................................... 218

ROW ................................................................................................................................... 219

Jurisdiction and Zoning ............................................................................................................... 219

Jurisdiction ......................................................................................................................... 219

Zoning ................................................................................................................................ 219

Topography and natural features ............................................................................................... 219

Geotechnical Information........................................................................................................... 219

Wetlands and streams................................................................................................................ 220

Drainage and storm water management .................................................................................... 220

Availability of utilities and names of companies ......................................................................... 220

Availability of fiber optic line ...................................................................................................... 220

Historical aspects ....................................................................................................................... 220

Environmental assessment ......................................................................................................... 220

Anticipated traffic impact ........................................................................................................... 220

Pedestrian safety ....................................................................................................................... 220

Other aspects of the site ............................................................................................................ 220

A. Appendices ........................................................................................................................................ 221

Cost Categories .......................................................................................................................... 221

A.1.1 Requirements ..................................................................................................................... 221

A.1.2 Items to be included in CCAP budget (in Construction Documents): .................................... 221

A.1.3 Items to be included in Furniture/FF&E allowance (not in Construction Documents): ......... 222

A.1.4 Items to be coordinated by County agencies and provided by County vendors (not in

Construction Documents): ................................................................................................................. 222

Space Plan Layouts ..................................................................................................................... 223

A.2.1 Space Plan: P.1; Competition Pool (N.2) ............................................................................ 224

A.2.2 Space Plan: P.2; Therapy Pool (N.5) ................................................................................... 225

A.2.3 Space Plan: P.3; First Aid (N.9) .......................................................................................... 226

A.2.4 Space Plan: P.4; Family Changing Area (N.18) .................................................................... 227

A.2.5 Space Plan: P.5; Pump/Filter Room (N.22)......................................................................... 228

A.2.6 Space Plan: P.6; Gymnasium – Ideal Layout (F.2) ............................................................... 229

A.2.7 Space Plan: P.7; Gymnasium – Minimum Layout (F.2) ....................................................... 230

A.2.8 Space Plan: P.8; Cardio/Weight/Stretch Room (P.8) .......................................................... 231

A.2.9 Space Plan: P.9; Social Hall (C.2) ........................................................................................ 232

A.2.10 Space Plan: P.10; Kitchen (C.6) .......................................................................................... 233

A.2.11 Space Plan: P.11; Community Lounge (C.18) ..................................................................... 234

A.2.12 Space Plan: P.12; Typical Activity Room ............................................................................ 235

A.2.13 Space Plan: P.13; Art Room (C.14) ..................................................................................... 236

A.2.14 Space Plan: P.14; Family Play Area (C.16) .......................................................................... 237

A.2.15 Space Plan: P.15; Game Room (C.17) ................................................................................ 238

Site Test Fit Diagram .................................................................................................................. 239

A.3.1 SCRRAC Phase I................................................................................................................... 239

A.3.2 SCRRAC Phase II .................................................................................................................. 242

A.3.3 SCRRAC Section Diagram .................................................................................................... 245

A.3.4 Elizabeth Square and SCRRAC 3D Diagrams ........................................................................ 246

Sample Space Planning Precedent .............................................................................................. 247

A.4.1 NSF Diagrams ..................................................................................................................... 247

A.4.2 GSF Diagrams ..................................................................................................................... 250

A.4.3 Grossing Factor Analysis Table ............................................................................................ 250

Department of Technology Service Requirements ............................. Error! Bookmark not defined.

Lessons Learned ......................................................................................................................... 254

..................................................................................................................................................... 254

..................................................................................................................................................... 254

..................................................................................................................................................... 254

..................................................................................................................................................... 254

..................................................................................................................................................... 254

..................................................................................................................................................... 254

A.6.1 Main Lobby ........................................................................................................................ 254

A.6.1.1 Design ............................................................................................................................ 254

A.6.2 Administration ................................................................................................................... 254

A.6.2.1 Offices ............................................................................................................................ 254

A.6.3 Natatorium ......................................................................................................................... 254

A.6.3.1 Equipment ...................................................................................................................... 254

A.6.3.2 Finishes .......................................................................................................................... 255

A.6.4 Fitness ................................................................................................................................ 255

A.6.4.1 Design ............................................................................................................................ 255

A.6.5 Community......................................................................................................................... 255

A.6.6 Miscellaneous .................................................................................................................... 255

A.6.6.1 Design ............................................................................................................................ 255

Reference Specification .............................................................................................................. 257

Facility Market Analysis .............................................................................................................. 257


April 2017 Program of Requirements 17 of 257

i. Executive Summary, Approach and Methodology

i.1 Introduction

The design team presents the Program of Requirements (POR) for the South County Regional

Recreation Center (SCRRAC) to be located within the Elizabeth Square development at Second

Avenue and Fenwick Lane in Silver Spring, MD.

The purpose of this document is to establish the size and scope of the new facility along with

general design guidelines to follow in subsequent phases of the project. This document may also

be used to justify the need for this project and intention to comply with all state, local and federal

requirements for a Regional Recreation Center facility. The scope of this project shall include all

building systems, complete and fully functioning for their intended purposes.

This POR, on its own or in conjunction with referenced codes, regulations and standards, may

include conflicting and/or confusing requirements. The design team shall summarize all such

cases and submit a request to Montgomery County Department of General Services (DGS) for

guidance. Until guidance is rendered the most stringent and most costly requirement shall be

considered the basis of design.

i.1.1 Project Description

The facility will provide all program and support space needs for a Regional Recreation

Center facility in Silver Spring. This facility has thus far been called the South County Regional

Recreation Center (SCRRAC) and will be located in the existing Elizabeth Square

development. The facility will be constructed in two phases and provide the first Regional

Recreation Center for the County, including swimming pools, a gymnasium, social hall, fitness

rooms, activity rooms, and more to serve the entire metro Silver Spring region population.

i.1.1.1 Elizabeth Square Background

Elizabeth Square is comprised of an entire square block in downtown Silver Spring,

MD consisting of three different parcels of land. It is located several minutes from the

Silver Spring Metro Station, and is part of an Arts and Entertainment District. The

Housing Opportunities Commission (HOC) of Montgomery County Maryland, the local

housing authority, owns the existing Alexander House and Elizabeth House , while Lee

Development Group (LDG), a private land owner, owns the third parcel of

approximately 1 acre with 25K SF of office space. A mutual partnership was created

among the two entities after evaluating existing conditions on site. An opportunity

was created, and the resulting product is Elizabeth Square.

The entire site will be redeveloped to yield over 900 units of housing and associated

amenities. Upon completion there will be three buildings, including the renovation of

the existing Alexander House, and the construction of Elizabeth House III and

Elizabeth House IV. The entire project will focus on amenities and services around the

arts, technology, healthcare and sustainability. Elizabeth House III will house seniors



and Elizabeth House IV will house millennials and families. The entire square will offer

both affordable housing and market rate units. Elizabeth House III has been previously

designed through the Design Development phase and Elizabeth House IV has not yet

started design. Both buildings will be redesigned with a connected podium to house

the SCRRAC. The SCRRAC will be built in two phases, the first with the construction of

Elizabeth House III and the second with the construction of Elizabeth House IV.

In December 2016, KGD Architecture began programming services for the new facility. The

project kicked off with a partnering session on December 9, 2016. This POR is the first phase

of the SCRRAC project.

i.2 Evolution of the Space Program

HOC approached Montgomery County in early 2016 with the idea to include a new Regional

Recreation facility within the Elizabeth Square development currently under design by KGD

Architecture. HOC, KGD, MCR and DGS toured existing facilities to understand the requirements of

a Regional Recreation Center. KGD Architecture then studied the program requirements and a

potential layout of the facility and presented it to DGS and the Department of Recreation in June,

2016. Once the programming services were awarded, KGD Architecture met with DGS and the

Department of Recreation to create the POR. This POR reflects the same approximate square

footage of 120,000 gross square feet originally presented to the County. The SCRRAC will occupy

two and a half levels of space at the base of both Elizabeth House III and Elizabeth House IV.

i.3 Approach and Methodology

The POR process began with the review of the program in existing County facilities, including

Germantown Indoor Aquatic Center and North Potomac Recreation Center, which was

accumulated to form the basis for a Regional Recreation Center. Meetings were conducted to

review requirements of proposed spaces, confirm square footages, and discuss issues and

concerns from existing facilities that should be addressed in the new center.

The POR brings together all available data from Montgomery County standards, national best

practices, user input and consultant expertise to describe the scope, size, functional operations,

and material needs of the entire facility, organizing the information for County review and

comment.

i.4 Report Organization

This report captures all of the relevant information that DGS requires for a POR.

i.4.1 Background and Overview

This section states the case for justification of the new facility, introduces the general mission

and operations of the building, and introduces the County agencies that have a stake in the

implementation and success of the project.

i.4.2 Staffing Overview

This section provides an overall look at the staff that will be accommodated by the new

facility.



i.4.3 Space Standards and Facility Adjacencies

This section outlines the space standards and benchmarks used to develop the space

program, and provides an overview of the building space program and departmental

adjacencies.

i.4.4 Functional Component Requirements

This section looks at the components of fitness, community, natatorium, administration, and

main lobby in the facility space program to describe each component’s detailed functional

needs. These include: the mission of each component, users, description of key spaces and

activities in the component, access and circulation, operational and design considerations,

detailed space program, and internal adjacency requirements.

i.4.5 Functional Criteria by Space Type

This section contains the Room Data Sheets for the typical spaces contained in the program

and can be cross-referenced to a “Space Code” in the detailed space program of each

functional component. The room data sheets contain the detailed technical, material and

spatial dimensions of each space planned for the facility. For the most part these data sheets

represent typical conditions in similar rooms across each functional component.

i.4.6 Criteria for Site

This section describes the general conditions of the existing site and how the new SCRRAC

facility will be incorporated into the design.

i.4.7 Technical Design Requirements (supplement to Design Manual)

This section describes the key building and site technical requirements that are unique to a

Regional Recreation facility and/or County building standards.

i.4.8 Selected Site Characteristics (for known sites)

This section describes the characteristics of the site that has been selected for this project.

This information is based on existing information from the Elizabeth Square development

and will be verified during the design process.



1 Background and Overview

Statement of needs for the facility

The Montgomery County Department of Recreation intends to initiate a request of the

Montgomery County Executive and Council to approve design and construction for the South

County Regional Recreation Center on the Elizabeth Square site. This building will serve urban

Silver Spring and the surrounding southern portion of the county.

This report is the result of the work performed during the Programming Phase, which synthesizes

the needs of the project. The result of this research allows the project team to determine

feasibility of the project as well as projected project costs.

The following are a list of goals established by DGS and user agencies for the facility:

• State-of-the-Art Community Facility

o State-of-the-art technology

o Sustainable technologies that pay back

• Diverse Programming to attract all ages of users

• Universal Design

• Safe and Secure Environment

o Observable site and building circulation sight lines

• Adaptable and Flexible

o Changeable to future program needs and technologies

• Fresh, Healthy, and Bright Environments Inside and Out

o Maximize natural day light and views to nature

o Open and inviting while providing appropriate privacy

o Sustainability practices

• Good Neighbors in Our Community

o Inspirational building design and site layout

o Acoustical control between noisy and quiet spaces

• On time and on budget

• Efficient and Easy to Maintain

o Long lasting materials that are easy to maintain

o Minimize operations and energy costs

o Sustainable technologies and site design

• Good Design/Aesthetics

o The public deserves high quality design

o Cost effective design

o The best achievable within budget

o Potential interior award-winning project

Background of the project



The SCRRAC will be a new facility in the existing Elizabeth Square site located at Second Avenue

and Fenwick Lane in Silver Spring, Maryland. The SCRRAC will serve Silver Spring and the

surrounding area, including special HOC supported access to the on-site senior population, as well

as programs supporting the art district of Silver Spring. The facility will have extended operation

hours due to its urban environment. The site is accessed by pedestrian traffic from downtown

Silver Spring and the nearby Silver Spring metro station 1,000 feet away, biking traffic from the

Capital Crescent Trail, and vehicular parking provided off-site from the Cameron Street parking

garage across Second Avenue. The SCRRAC will occupy four floors at the base of a new apartment

building, incorporating combined aquatics and community recreation programs. The main

entrance of the SCRRAC is planned to be located in a central plaza with vehicular service areas on

both Apple Avenue and Fenwick Lane. Key challenges in the site include large elevation changes,

below-grade residential garage parking, and a residential tower above the multi-floor facility.

Typical outdoor sports fields included at facilities will not be possible in this urban location, but

outdoor space will still be provided in the adjacent plaza. Key advantages to the site include close

proximity to downtown Silver Spring where new real estate is scarce, as well as over 900

residential units located on site with most directly connected to the facility.

The Program of Requirements outlines a new Regional Recreation Center that will house aquatics

and community recreation programs for a total of approximately 90,000 net square feet (120,000

gross square feet) on the Elizabeth Square site which provides services for seniors, families, and

local businesses, all in one facility. The combined facility will enable easy access to both aquatics

and recreation programs as well as a new opportunity to provide on-site services for Elizabeth

Square residents. A partnership with Holy Cross Hospital will provide an on-site Holy Cross facility

to supplement senior programs. The SCRRAC will include the latest technology to best serve its

customers, including access to county FiberNet. The new facility will be built to comply with all

building codes, be ADA compliant and have a minimum LEED Silver certification from the U.S.

Green Building Council (USGBC).

The new facility will house the following major Program areas (see following sections for more

complete information):

• Lobby, vending, and elevator areas

• Staff offices

• Hall of Fame for Montgomery County sports

• Social Hall

• Competition Pool, Leisure Pool, and Therapy Pool

• Kitchen

• Gymnasium

• Activity rooms and shared spaces

• Restrooms, storage rooms, mechanical and electric rooms

• Receiving and service facilities



Figure 1: County Map



Figure 2: Existing Site Plan at Elizabeth Square

Figure 3: Proposed SCRRAC Site Plan at Elizabeth Square



Department of Recreation mission

The mission the Montgomery County Department of Recreation according to the 2030 Vision Plan

is to:

• Promote healthy living through diverse recreation and leisure activities

• Protect natural, historical, and archaeological resources

• Promote the economic competitiveness of Montgomery County as a place for businesses

to locate through a robust parks and recreation system that attracts knowledge, workers,

and families

• Promote a sense of community and civic pride

• Nurture an appreciation for our natural, cultural legacy

• Provide lifelong learning opportunities

• Shape healthy, safe, green communities

• Collaborate with partners to provide sustainable, accessible, and diverse leisure

opportunities

• Engage a diverse community and proactively respond to changing demographics, needs,

and trends

• Acquire, maintain, and manage the parks and recreation built environment



Organization charts

Montgomery County Organization chart



Agency organization chart

Facility organization chart

(not used)

Mission Statement of the facility

The mission of Montgomery County Recreation is to provide high quality, diverse, and accessible

programs, services and facilities that enhance the quality of life for all ages, cultures, and abilities.

Building operation hours

The department has proposed to operate the facility between 6:00 a.m. and 10:00 p.m. These are

the normal operating hours. Bookings will operate until 11:00pm and must be cleaned up by

12:00am. The facility will share loading and access with the attached residential building.

Building Appearance and Image



The SCRRAC building image should reflect the image of a public facility and invoke a sense of pride

for the County and Department of Recreation. It will be a place for people, a civic landmark, and

promote durability, strength, openness, accessibility, high standards, sustainability, and energy

efficiency. The space must project a professional and aesthetically pleasing appearance including

an attractive front and entrance. The selection of architectural style shall be appropriate to the

context, location, and function of the building. The entrance shall be oriented toward the main

plaza and shall be of a distinctive character that makes it easy to locate. Spaces along Second

Avenue will present a landmark feature advertising the facility.



2 Staffing Overview

Facility staff summary by department with growth projections

Not used.

List of staff by department with growth projections

(following page)



Gro

up

/Org

aniz

ati

on

Nam

e

Po

siti

on

Tit

le

Gra

de

Off

ice

/Cu

bic

le/D

esk

Off

ice

Req

'd (

Y/N

)

Co

un

ty S

tan

da

rd S

QFT

Pro

po

sed

SQ

FT

Da

ta/

Ph

on

e/ A

V

Fu

rnit

ure

Re

qu

irem

en

ts

Sec

uri

ty

No

tes:

South County Regional Recreation Center - Staffing Chart, 12.16

Center Manager

N/A Program Manager II 25 Office Y 140 140 1v/1d

Standard Office

w/ sm conf tbl. card reader / Typ

Center Manager

N/A Front Desk Staff ? Desk N

See data

sheet Front desk

Panic Button;

Video surv syst

There will be 4 positions at the front desk.

Counter needs to allow for seating and working.

Do not put millwork under counter.


See data

sheet Front desk

Panic Button;

Video surv syst





See data

sheet Front desk

Panic Button;

Video surv syst





See data

sheet Front desk

Panic Button;

Video surv syst




Facility Operations

N/A Rec Supr, Comm Rec 23 Office Y 120 120 1v/1d Stndrd Office This is currently not an approved position.

N/A Rec Supr, Aqua 23 Office Y 120 120 1v/1d Stndrd Office

N/A RecSpec, Comm Rec 21 Office Y 100 100 1v/1d Stndrd Office Cntr Ops - Specialist

N/A RecSpec, CommRec 21 Office Y 100 100 1v/1d Stndrd Office Sen Ops - Specialist

N/A RecSpec, Aqua 21 Office Y 100 100 1v/1d Stndrd Office Specialist



N/A RecCrd,CommRec 18 Cubicle N 64 64 1v/1d Stndrd Cub

Shared between Seniors and CRC Open 126 hours

per week. Open hours need to be approved by

the CE. 126 hours is currently not approved. Look

at combining the two Rec Coordinators into one

space.

N/A RecCrd,CommRec 18 Cubicle N 64 64 1v/1d Stndrd Cub

Shared between Seniors and CRC Open 126 hours

per week. Open hours need to be approved by

the CE. 126 hours is currently not approved. Look

at combining the two Rec Coordinators into one

space.

N/A Pool Oper, Aqua 18 Cubicle N 64 64 1v/1d Stndrd Cub

N/A Temp 18 Cubicle N 64 64 1v/1d Stndrd Cub

Temp/Seasonal Cubicle N 25 25 1v/1d Linear Cubicle Nutrition Manager

Temp/Seasonal Cubicle N 25 25 1v/1d Linear Cubicle Summer Fun Director

Temp/Seasonal Cubicle N 25 25 1v/1d Linear Cubicle Club Friday Director

Temp/Seasonal Cubicle N 25 25 1v/1d Linear Cubicle Club Adventure

Temp/Seasonal Cubicle N 25 25 1v/1d Linear Cubicle Senior Program Staff

Temp/Seasonal Cubicle N 25 25 1v/1d Linear Cubicle Misc Program

Cable TV Needs to be located throughout building.



3 Space Standards and Facility Adjacencies

Space standards

3.1.1 Methodology

This space program was developed out of review of existing space programs and facilities in

Montgomery County, interviews with Department of General Services (DGS) and Department

of Recreation, and experienced programming and planning practices employed by the Design

Team on similar type facilities. Each space in the Validated Space Program has been

reviewed according to compliance with County space standards and best practices.

3.1.2 Definitions

Functional Component: Grouping of spaces or rooms defined by a common functional use.

Often used by one single tenant, but not always, a functional component contains spaces

that are generally co-located within the facility, and support the operations. Examples of

functional components would be Administration, Natatorium, Fitness, and Community. For

the most part, functional components are comprised of one tenant or user agency; however,

a tenant agency may be divided into several functional components.

Net Square Feet (NSF): Required floor area for a room, office or functional space exclusive of

partitions, and circulation required to travel from one space to another.

Net Assignable Square Feet (NASF): Often used interchangeably with Net Occupiable SF,

NASF is really the portion of NOSF that would be assigned for the sole use of a tenant agency.

This may include a percentage of shared functional spaces, but would exclude building

support spaces like code required toilets or janitor’s closets. For the purposes of planning,

NASF will be used only to determine compliance with County target building efficiencies and

compliance with state MDDPS standards. NOSF will be used for planning and design

purposes because it is the best way to estimate required space for the building to function.

Net Occupiable Square Feet (NOSF): Also known as Usable SF (BOMA), floor area required for

a functional component or tenant within the facility. This includes all the listed required

space NSF, multiplied by a circulation factor or grossing factor. This grossing factor estimates

the area required for partitions between rooms, and circulation required within the

functional space to travel from room to room. This does not include building common space

or circulation required to travel from one tenant space to another, exterior wall thickness,

structure components, building support space, or life safety required components like stairs.

Gross Square Feet (GSF): This is the total space or footprint of all building components,

including NSF, and NOSF, and all building common areas like stairs elevators, utility spaces,

and exterior walls. In design phases, GSF is based on many factors including configuration of

spaces, code requirements, selected building systems, construction materials and systems,

etc. To estimate the GSF for budget purposes, a grossing factor is applied to the total NOSF



for the functional components in the facility. This factor includes exterior walls, circulation

required between functional components,

Programmable Square Feet: This is terminology used by the County to indicate all net square

feet spaces in the facility per the preliminary program. This does not include internal

departmental circulation, or support elements like janitor’s closets, and does not include

exterior walls and structure.

Preliminary NSF: The “Prelim NSF” on the Space Program Summary refers to the square

footage established in this POR and will be modified under the “Required NSF” category as

necessary.

3.1.3 Measurement Standards

All measurements use the imperial system of measurement.

NSF for each space will be measured to the face of enclosing walls

GSF will be measured to the outside face of exterior walls

All measurements and calculation shall conform to Building Owners and Managers

Association International (BOMA) Standard Methods of Measurement appropriate to the

building type.

3.1.4 List of standard spaces

For the compilation of Standard Spaces, refer to the Space Data Sheets located in Section 5,

Functional Criteria by Space Type.



Space program summary

The County has determined that this facility will be designed to accommodate projections up to

and including the 2030 forecast. Below is the full program summary for the facility. Each

component is broken out individually in later sections.



Detailed Space program by building component

3.3.1 Graphic Program



Adjacency requirements for the facility

Adjacency diagram (bubble diagram) for the facility

See Appendix A.3

Floor adjacency diagram

See Appendix A.3



4 Functional Component Requirements

Main Lobby – Shared Space

Functional Requirements

Mission

There will be one main entrance for the SCRRAC located in phase I of construction. It

will open into the Main Lobby which will house the main front desk, Hall of Fame, and

a small café. It will include soft seating and tables for guests to wait before or after

events. This area will be open, inviting, well-lit, and the first impression for guests to

the facility.

Users

All users of the SCRRAC will enter through this area. SCRRAC staff will be located at

the front desk, with other users operating the Hall of Fame and Café.

Hours of Operation

The SCRRAC will operate from 6:00 a.m. to 10:00 p.m. and therefore, the Main Lobby

will be open during those hours.

Access and Circulation

The Main Lobby is the central circulation area to other building components. A

security control point will be located at the Front Desk. Avoid requiring multiple front

desks, include pinch points for guiding guests.

Operational and Design Considerations

Visitors should not be able to pass through the lobby without passing the control

point at the front desk. It is yet to be determined by the Department of Recreation

how access to the rest of the facility will be controlled, in addition to electric swipe for

access to certain spaces. The lobby will incorporate inviting seating areas integrated

into the Hall of Fame and Café functions.



Main Lobby Component Space Program

Main Lobby Adjacency Diagram



Administration – Shared Space


Mission

The administration component houses offices for all SCRRAC staff not located at the

Front Desk, as well as the main conference room for the facility.

Users

See the staff chart located in section 2.2 for a list of staff located in Administration.

Guests to the administration offices and conference room will also occupy this area.

Hours of Operation

The administration area will have the same hours of operation as the main facility.


The administration component is to be preferred to be near the front customer

service counter, if possible. The conference room is to have direct access from both

the administration area and interior circulation.


Staff offices are to be located as close and efficiently as possible to the reception desk

for ease of communication, like a cluster around the reception desk. All offices and

open desk areas are to be designed as flexible spaces, and the area should provide

extra space for future growth.

The conference room is viewed as programmable space and should be located as to

provide easy access by all patrons of the facility.



Administration Component Space Program



Administration Adjacency Diagram



Natatorium - Aquatics


Mission

The natatorium houses all functions of a typical county aquatics facility.

Users

SCRRAC guests that use the competition pool, leisure pool, therapy pool, spas, wet

classroom, and sauna will have access to this area, as well as associated lifeguard

staff. Spectator Seating is provided for events held in the Competition Pool.

Hours of Operation

The natatorium will have the same hours of operation as the whole facility.


The Main Lobby is to have separate access points to the Spectator Seating area versus

the main Natatorium program area. Access to the natatorium will be controlled by a

control desk located in the Prefunction space directly adjacent to the Main Lobby

circulation. From the control desk, users will have access to the locker rooms, and

from there to the main pool deck and all natatorium program spaces.


The lifeguard station and guard chairs should have visual access to the entire Pool

Deck and pool areas. The natatorium should be carefully considered for all

accessibility issues and designed beyond the threshold of ADA requirements. All

finishes and equipment within this area should be designed to handle a wet

atmosphere.



Natatorium Component Space Program



Natatorium Adjacency Diagram



Fitness – Community Recreation Center


Mission

The fitness area will house the Gymnasium, Cardio/Weight/Stretch room, Exercise

Studio, and Fitness Locker Rooms. This area will provide recreational sport/exercise

activities as well as private sporting/exercising events.

Users

The users of the Fitness component will be any SCRRAC guest with paid access to the

fitness facility, as well as those attending classes or sporting events within the

Gymnasium.

Hours of Operation

The fitness area will be open during the main operating hours of the facility.


A control desk will be located within the Fitness Prefunction space that will monitor

access to all fitness spaces. Circulation to all spaces will be from the Prefunction space

and should be as convenient as possible, although this area may be split between

levels.


Fitness programs are ideally located adjacent to each other on the same level, but can

be located on separate levels if necessary. Considerations should be made to assure

users have ease of circulation between all fitness components if located on separate

levels. Guests attending fitness classes or sporting events will have access monitored

by the Prefunction control desk.



Fitness Component Space Program



Fitness Adjacency Diagram



Community – Community Recreation Center


Mission

The mission of the Community building component is to offer space to house

community programs in Activity Rooms, an Art Room, Social Hall, Kitchen, Game

Room, and Community Lounge.

Users

Users with paid access to the facility will occupy this area, as well as guests taking

classes or attending events in the Social Hall.

Hours of Operation

The Community component will be accessed during the main hours of operation for

the facility. Renters of the Social Hall and Kitchen will have access to those areas until

11:00 pm and must be cleaned up by midnight.


The Community component will be accessed from the Main Lobby through the

Community Prefunction space, which will not house a control desk. Circulation

between community spaces should be made easily, with special consideration given

to house guests will access the Social Hall and Kitchen for events. The spaces within

the Community component may be located on varying levels. Direct adjacency to Holy

Cross senior programs is not necessary.


The Community component should be the most easily accessed area of the facility

because it houses a variety of programs and users. Care should be taken to ensure the

rented spaces are easily accessed by visitors. Rental spaces should be open, inviting,

beautifully designed, and well-lit with natural light. All other Community spaces are to

be designed to be flexible and durable, but still aesthetically pleasing. Family toilet

should be located adjacent to the main restrooms.



Community Component Space Program



Community Adjacency Diagram



5 Functional Criteria by Space Type

Room Data Sheets

Key to Space Codes & Chapter Organization

The space sheets are organized in the following order with appropriate codes:

• Main Lobby Component – Shared (L.xx)

• Administration Component – Shared (A.xx)

• Natatorium Component – Aquatics (N.xx)

• Fitness Component – Community Recreation Center (F.xx)

• Community Component – Community Recreation Center (C.xx)

• Miscellaneous – Shared (B.xx)

The following pages contain a Space Data Sheet for each programmed space and some main

back of house spaces. Each sheet includes a summary of the function, square footage,

occupancy, design requirements, finishes, and equipment required.

Main Lobby Component Space Data Sheets

The following pages contain the space data sheets for the Main Lobby component.



Data Sheet: L.1; Main Lobby

Building Component: Main Lobby (Shared)

Function Main arrival point and transition space from the outside into the SCRRAC and

serve as the host space for the MC Sports Hall of Fame displays

Net Area 1,500 sf

Capacity 60

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Front Desk

• Hall of Fame

• Fitness Prefunction

• Natatorium Prefunction

• Community Prefunction

• Administration

Design Issues • Open, inviting, and well-lit with natural light as well as artificial light.

• Waiting space, lounge, activities, seating located near entry doors

• Civic space, buffer between the uses

• Arrival point from the garage as well as the public outside space.

Special

Requirements

• Vestibule: sliding automatic doors, could stagger placement

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlets at seating areas

General lighting, accent lighting for lounge areas. Lighting

system with motion sensor on 10 min shut off.

Wi-Fi

None

General Building HVAC

Visually connected to Front Desk; security cameras, alarm

control

Yes

Wall mounted TV information screen

Facility PA system

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Acoustic Tile, feature elements, tall ceiling heights

Gypsum Board, Glass, Acoustic/feature elements

Low maintenance (ceramic tile), Walk-off Mat at vestibule

Furniture &

Equipment

• Lounge chairs or benches

• 4 top tables for seating

• (2) Energy efficient vending machines



• Provide duplex power network outlet, and enclosure/built in recess for a total

of 4 screens in main lobby and 1 per floor for a total of 7. DTS/County will

provide the screens, mounts and computers.



Data Sheet: L.2; Front Desk


Function Focal control point, information center, registration area for programs

Net Area 250 sf

Capacity 5 permanent staff + 1 temporary space

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Main Lobby

• Hall of Fame

Design Issues • Provide visual access to entire recreation center.

• Flexible space behind counter for storage etc. Less built-in millwork preferable

• Durable desk material

• Coordinate power, data for equipment, cash register and computers

• Duress button (3)

• Serves as “pinch point” for all entering customers to facilitate check-in

Special

Requirements

• Controls for lighting, security, should be located at the desk

• Provide a counter approximately 25 LF in length and 2 feet wide. The counter

should be 30” high with a 44” transaction counter separating the public from

staff. 2 counter areas at ADA height

• Design cabinets, etc. to provide ample knee space for multiple people

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

General Convenience outlets

Signage lighting, Lighting control panel for entire recreation

center, Task Lighting for desk. Lighting system with motion

sensor on 10 min shut off.

(1) Data port per staff

(1) per staff

General HVAC

Video monitor for CCTV, alarms for doors, door control system

None

None

Control for center PA system

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Same as Main Lobby

Carpet or same as lobby

Same as Main Lobby, could be carpet tile

Furniture • Cabinets to store rentable items (to be determined operationally):

• Basketballs, Volleyballs (on rolling carts)

• Table tennis balls and paddles

• Boxed table games

• Office supplies



• Two compartment safe (dual safe) with top compartment drop

• Computer terminals (1 per staff) w/ security system monitors

• Staff chair/stools: (1) per staff

• PA controls

• Copier/ fax /scanner

• Card machine

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: L.2; Hall of Fame


Function Space within Main Lobby for location of significant Montgomery County sports

memorabilia

Net Area 150 sf

Capacity -

Number Req’d 1


• Front Desk

Design Issues •

Special

Requirements

• Wall space to mount (36) 15”x24” wall plaques

Systems

Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V Equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlets

Display Lighting. Lighting system with motion sensor on 10 min

shut off.

Wi-Fi

None


Security Camera

Yes

None

Facility PA System

Finishes Ceiling

Floor

Walls

(same as Main Lobby)



Furniture &

Equipment

• (2) Freestanding glass display cabinets, 6’ x 6’ x 2’, alternate for built-ins

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: L.3; Hall of Fame Office


Function Space off of the Lobby to serve as a MC SHOF admin office.

Net Area 150 sf

Capacity -

Number Req’d 1


• Hall of Fame

Design Issues

Special

Requirements

• (1) 150 square foot office with 2 full height storage walls 18” deep

Systems

Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V Equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlets

General Lighting. Lighting system with motion sensor on 10

min shut off.

Wi-Fi

None


Security Camera

None

None

Facility PA System

Finishes Ceiling

Floor

Walls

Acoustical materials

Carpet or same as Main Lobby

Painted gypsum board

Furniture &

Equipment

• Desk

• Return

• File cabinets

• Credenza

• (1) staff chair

• (2) guest chairs

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: L.4; Cafe


Function Space for users of the facility to buy food and drinks, socialize and control the

food in a designated area.

Net Area 500 sf, part of Main Lobby

Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Directly visible and accessible from front desk and main lobby

Design Issues • Alcove storage for counter, register, shelving

Special

Requirements

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlets and power for a cash register and two

computers in sale area

General illumination. Lighting system with motion sensor on

10 min shut off.

Wi-Fi

None

Provide adequate ventilation

Locked/gate

Provide in Cafe

None

Facility PA system

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Acoustic materials, gypsum board

Ceramic Tile, Resilient


Furniture &

Equipment

• Display racks for merchandise

• Glass door refrigerator for drinks

• Microwave oven

• Soda fountain machine

• Cash register

Environmental

Requirements



Administration Component Space Data Sheets

The following pages contain the space data sheets for the Administration Component.



Data Sheet: A.1; Administration Reception

Building Component: Administration (Shared)

Function Reception, service, control desk

Net Area 300 square feet

Capacity

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Admin offices/cubicles

Design Issues • Central location within administration component

Special

Requirements

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlets

General lighting. Lighting system with motion sensor on 10 min

shut off.

Wi-Fi

N/A


Locked door or card access from Main Lobby

None

None

Facility PA system

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Acoustic materials, gypsum board, feature elements

Painted gypsum board, glass

Resilient, Tile, or Carpet Tile, easy to maintain

Furniture &

Equipment

• Lounge chairs and side table

• Glass display cases

• Electronic message board

• Central Copier/Printer/Fax

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: A.2; Conference Room


Function Staff meetings, conferences, workshops, membership discussion and one on one

training; will allow visitors to use/book in a large group.


Capacity 25

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Directly accessible from Main Lobby

Design Issues • The access from main lobby should require additional authorization in case the

space is scheduled for public usage.

Special

Requirements

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Duplex receptacles on all walls and floor outlets under table

Dimmable. Lighting system with motion sensor on 10 min shut

off.

Wi-Fi, data ports

Yes

Demand based ventilation and minimum OA settings during

unoccupied periods.

Require authorization from Main Lobby

Yes

Yes

Facility PA system

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Acoustic Materials

Glass, painted gypsum board, acoustic materials

Carpet

Furniture &

Equipment

• Conference table

• Chairs

• Credenza

• TV

• Wall mounted whiteboard

• Telephone

• Computer

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: A.3; Office-1


Function Administrative activities including planning, conferences, supervising, computer

activities, and record keeping.


Capacity 1

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies Admin Reception

Design Issues • Enclosed office with window to exterior

• Desirable to have office overlooking or directly accessible from front desk

• Glass vision panel in door

Special

Requirements

• Cannot be less than 100 sf

• Provide 2 guest seating chairs

• Cannot be combined into conference room

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Duplex receptacles on 3 walls

Standard Office Lighting. Lighting system with motion sensor

on 10 min shut off.

Data port

1

Standard Office HVAC

Locked door

None

None

Facility PA system

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Acoustic Material


Carpet Tile

Furniture &

Equipment

• Desk with return appropriate for PC

• Ergonomic chair

• Arm lounge chair

• Two drawer under desk letter file cabinet

• Four drawer lateral file cabinet

• Standard shelving

• PC

• Telephone

• Shared printer with other offices

Environmental

Requirements





Function Used for administrative activities including planning, conferences, supervising,

computer activities, and record keeping.


Capacity 1

Number Req’d 2

Adjacencies • Admin Reception


• Desirable to have office overlooking or directly accessible from front desk


Special

Requirements

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System



on 10 min shut off.

Data port

1


Locked door.

None

None

Facility PA system

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Acoustic Material


Carpet Tile

Furniture &

Equipment


• Ergonomic chair





• PC

• Telephone


Environmental

Requirements





Function Administrative activities including planning, conferences, supervising, computer

activities, and record keeping.


Capacity 1

Number Req’d 5



• desirable to have office overlooking or directly accessible from front desk


Special

Requirements

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System



on 10 min shut off.

Data port

1


Locked door

None

None

Facility PA system

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Acoustic Material


Carpet Tile

Furniture &

Equipment


• Ergonomic chair





• PC

• Telephone


Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: A.6; Cubicle-1


Function Open office cubicle


Capacity 1

Number Req’d 4


Design Issues • Desirable to have office overlooking or directly accessible from front desk

Special

Requirements

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System



on 10 min shut off.

Data port

1


None

None

None

Facility PA system

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Acoustic Material

Cubicle partitions

Carpet Tile

Furniture &

Equipment

• Prefab cubicle partitions


• Ergonomic chair



• PC

• Telephone

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: A.7; Temp/Seasonal


Function Open office cubicle


Capacity 1

Number Req’d 6 stations max


• Ideally close to Front Desk

Design Issues • Desirable to be overlooking or directly accessible from front desk

• These areas are included in the administration area and not necessarily at the

front desk.

Special

Requirements

• Provide additional space for growth

• Continuous counter for as desk space

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

(1) Duplex receptacle per workstation


on 10 min shut off.

(1) Data port

1


None

None

None

Facility PA system

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Acoustic Material

None

Carpet Tile

Furniture &

Equipment

• Ergonomic chair


• PC

• Telephone

• Max (6) chairs for temp/seasonal

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: A.8; Wellness


Function Lactation room


Capacity 1

Number Req’d 1


Design Issues

Special

Requirements

• Counter space at sink

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlets

General illumination, Soft Light. Lighting system with motion


None

None

Standard Building HVAC

Door locks from inside, locked or coded keypad from exterior

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Acoustical Material, Gypsum board

Gypsum Board, Colorful Paint

VCT or Linoleum

Furniture &

Equipment

• Armchair, comfortable, easy to clean

• Side Table

• Sink

• Small Refrigerator

• Nice Mirror

• Area Rugs

• Paper Towel Holder

• Trash Can

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: A.9; Administration Misc. Mech. & Elec.


Function Space for additional mechanical and electrical units required for administration


Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Administration Component

Design Issues

Special

Requirements

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlet

Industrial LED.

None

None

This is an unmanned space. Use temperature set back and

minimum conditioned air.

Locked door

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed

CMU, durable

Sealed concrete

Furniture &

Equipment

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: A.10; Administration Storage


Function General administration storage


Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Administration

Design Issues

Special

Requirements

• Items to be stored include: administrative and operational supplies and

equipment

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlet

Industrial LED. Lighting system with motion sensor on 10 min

shut off.

None

None



Locked door

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed

CMU

Sealed concrete

Furniture &

Equipment

• Wall Shelving

Environmental

Requirements



Natatorium Component Space Data Sheets

The following pages contain the space data sheets for the Natatorium Component.



Data Sheet: N.1; Natatorium Prefunction

Building Component: Natatorium (Aquatics)

Function Main arrival point and transition space after passing the front desk, before

entering the natatorium.


Capacity 30

Number Req’d 1


• Locker Rooms

• Deck Space

• Utility Spaces

• Wet Classroom (secondary adjacency preferred but not public access)

Design Issues • Open, inviting, and well-lit with natural light and artificial light.

• Transition between Main Lobby and Natatorium.

• Contains control desk

Special

Requirements

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlets. Provide duplex power network outlet,

and enclosure/built in recess for a total of 4 screens in main

lobby and 1 per floor for a total of 7. DTS/County will provide

the screens, mounts and computers.

General lighting, accent lighting for control desk. Lighting


Wi-Fi

None


Cameras, control desk

Wall mounted electronic message board

None

Facility PA system (no individual system)

Finishes Ceiling

Walls

Floor

Acoustic materials, gypsum board, moisture resistant

CMU

Vinyl Composite Tile, thick set tile w/waterproofing

underneath, non-slip

Furniture &

Equipment

• Electronic Message Board



• Control desk shall be furniture designed by Architect and purchased by the

County.

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: N.2; Competition Pool


Function Provide appropriate and comfortable space for both competitive and training

swimming exercise.

Net Area 6163 square feet, 25 meters by 25 yards

Capacity -

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Locker Rooms

• Pool Deck

• Competition Pool Storage

Design Issues • Lane dividers should be easily removable to accommodate diving.

• Waiting/bench space around the deck area

• (2) Lifeguard posts across from each other along the middle of pool.

• Starting blocks may or may not be located at diving boards

• Pool depth 6-13 feet

• Clear ceiling height from pool deck = minimum 26.5 feet

Special

Requirements

• Standard pool with spring board diving on one side

• Four ladder access points, (2) ADA access points (per code requirements)

• Lane lines run both directions

• Accessibility to change lights above pool

• 11 lanes along meters, 10 along yards

• Separate water temperature/filter system

• Water temperature = 83 degrees

• Water reuse on daily or weekly level to be studied by Design Team

• In ground timing tied to scoreboard and touch pad/buttons

• Waterproofing provided at structural level and finish level on all walls and

floors in Natatorium area

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

(see Pool Deck)

Uniform distribution of paired fixtures configured to

provide competition light levels when all fixtures are lit.

Day to day lighting is provided by 50% of the fixtures

with lighting controls configured to alternate between

fixture A and B every other day for each pair of lights.

In addition to accommodating competition level light

levels the paired fixtures also provide a degree of

redundancy to accommodate lamp failures without

impacting the daily lighting scheme.

(see Pool Deck)

(see Pool Deck)

(see Pool Deck)

(see Pool Deck)



Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

(see Pool Deck)

(see Pool Deck)

(see Pool Deck)

Finishes Ceiling:

Floor:

Walls:

(see Pool Deck)

Plaster finish inside pool; lane line markings in tile. Tile

to be thickset with waterproofing underneath at

structural slab.

Plaster finish, same as floor, stainless steel gutter

system. Waterproofing at structural slab.

Furniture &

Equipment

• (2) three-meter spring boards

• (2) one-meter springboards

• starting block per lane (both yards and meters)

• Scoreboard/Timing Board tied into touchpads (Colorado System)

• In-ground timing tied to scoreboards and touchpads/buttons

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: N.3; Competition Pool Storage


Function Storage for the competition pool equipment


Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Main storage adjacent to competition pool off of Pool Deck

Design Issues • Double door, no mullion, no threshold, same elevation as deck space

Special

Requirements

Storage Items:

• (5) Lane line reels

• (3) meter reels

• (2) yard reels

• Kickboards

• Swim team equipment

• Diving boards

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlets


shut off.

N/A

N/A


minimum conditioned air. Good circulation needed due to

humid environment.

Door lock

N/A

N/A

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed

CMU

Same as Pool Deck Same as Pool Deck

Furniture &

Equipment

• Storage cabinets

• Open shelving

• (25) hooks on walls

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: N.4; Leisure Pool & Attraction


Function Space for adult and children leisure swimming and water playing activities.

Net Area 4,100 square feet

Capacity -

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Multiple access points from Pool Deck

• Therapy pool

• Leisure/therapy pool storage

Design Issues • Divided into multiple areas with different built-in attractions

• To be shaped so that lifeguards have visual access to all areas

Special

Requirements

• Zero entry (beach entry)

• Lifeguard posts surrounding

• Water temperature = 86-89 degrees

• Waiting/Bench space at Pool Deck with wall hooks


• Extra accessibility access

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

(See Pool Deck)

None

(See Pool Deck)

(See Pool Deck)

(See Pool Deck)

(See Pool Deck)

(See Pool Deck)

(See Pool Deck)

(See Pool Deck)

Finishes Ceiling

Walls

Floor

(see Pool Deck)

Plaster finish, stainless steel gutters, tile decoration.

Waterproofing at structural slab.

Plaster finish, tile decoration. Waterproofing at structural slab.

Furniture &

Equipment

• Attraction elements: slides, dump buckets, spray features, accessible features,

etc.

• Leisure pool feature pumps must have a central emergency pump off panel in

the guard’s office for safety.

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: N.5; Therapy Pool


Function Private space for individual or group therapeutic programs


Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Leisure Pool

• Leisure/Therapy Pool Storage

• Pool Deck

Design Issues • Separated from other pools by transparent glazing

• Maintain required temperature and moisture level

• ADA compliant ramp entry, and step entry

• Acoustic considerations for music playing

Special

Requirements

• At least 20 yards long for lap swimming

• Dedicated ramp, transfer platform steps (at shallow end)

• 3.5’ to 4.5’ variable depth


• Water temperature = 86-95 degrees

• Extra accessibility access

• Built in seating ledge with hooks on deck nearby

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

(See Pool Deck)

None in pool

(See Pool Deck)

(See Pool Deck)

(See Pool Deck)

(See Pool Deck)

(See Pool Deck)

(See Pool Deck)

(See Pool Deck) Separate music system required

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

(see pool deck)

Plaster finish. Waterproofing at structural slab.

Plaster finish. Waterproofing at structural slab.

Furniture &

Equipment

• Slip resistant mat

• Benches surrounding pool

• Water wheelchair for ADA access ramp.

Environmental

Requirements

• MEP systems to account for higher water temperature in this pool



Data Sheet: N.6; Leisure/Therapy Pool Storage


Function Storage space for Leisure Pool and Therapy Pool


Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Pool Deck

• Therapy Pool

• Leisure Pool

Design Issues

Special

Requirements

• Double door, no center mullion, no threshold, same elevation as Pool Deck

• Items to be stored include:

• Hardware for leisure pool attractions

• Buoyancy aids and equipment for kids’ learning programs

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlet


shut off.

None

None


minimum conditioned air. Good circulation needed due to

humid environment

Locked Door

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed

CMU

Same as Pool Deck

Furniture &

Equipment


• Storage cages

• Shelving

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: N.7; Spa


Function Visually pleasing, comfortable, aquatic recreation space for adults


Capacity -

Number Req’d 2

Adjacencies Pool Deck

Leisure Pool

Design Issues • Integrated with Leisure Pool

• HVAC exhaust air intake grille should be located directly above spa for good

indoor air quality (per Seresco Natatorium Design Guide)

Special

Requirements

• Ledge for transfer access

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

(See Pool Deck)

None in pool

(See Pool Deck)

(See Pool Deck)

(See Pool Deck)

(See Pool Deck)

(See Pool Deck)

(See Pool Deck)

(See Pool Deck)

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

(See Pool Deck)

Tile

Thick set Tile w/waterproofing underneath

Furniture &

Equipment

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: N.8; Lifeguard


Function Space for lifeguard meetings, supervision, rest, and equipment storage


Capacity 15

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Direct access from Pool Deck

• Centered in Natatorium space

• First Aid

Design Issues • Glazing on all sides to allow maximum visibility of pools

Special

Requirements

• Contains single-use restroom

• Controls Natatorium sound system

• Include lost and found area for guest items

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Sufficient outlets for surveillance cameras and use of personal

electronics, including laptop and projectors


shut off.

Computer for controlling the electronic message board (in

separate space), data ports

Data port

Demanded ventilation

Security Camera, No lock on main door, locker room has lock

None

None

Facility PA system, Natatorium sound system

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Acoustical Ceiling Tile, appropriate for wet space

Glass, Tile

Same as Pool Deck

Furniture &

Equipment

• Tables and chairs, counter

• Broadcasting equipment – to include device for controlling message board and

natatorium sound system.

• Toilet with partition

• (24) Lockers

• Refrigerator

• Ice machine

• Provide typical lifeguard equipment



• Lifeguard electronic requirements TBD by Owner



Environmental

Requirements

Data Sheet: N.9; First Aid


Function Store equipment and temporarily house people in need of first aid


Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies Lifeguard

Pool Deck – right off of deck

Design Issues • Able to accommodate stretcher access

• Door connection to back of house preferred

Special

Requirements

• Contains restroom

• Sink to be located as close as possible to door

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlets


shut off.

None

Data Port

Demanded ventilation

Door lock

None

None


Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Acoustical Ceiling Tile, appropriate for wet space

Tile

Same as Pool Deck

Furniture &

Equipment

• Counter

• First aid cabinet

• Treatment table with shelf below (first aid)

• AED cabinet

Environmental



Requirements



Data Sheet: N.10; Lifeguard & First Aid Storage


Function Storage space for Lifeguard and First Aid


Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Accessible from Lifeguard

• First Aid

Design Issues

Special

Requirements

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlet

Industrial fluorescent. Lighting system with motion sensor on

10 min shut off.

N/A

N/A



Locked Door

N/A

N/A

N/A

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed

Tile

Same as Pool Deck

Furniture &

Equipment


• Open shelving

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: N.11; Sauna


Function Shared space for dry or heat sauna sessions, and necessary cleaning, resting and

rinsing activities. Adult only area.


Capacity -

Number Req’d 1


Design Issues • Separate and insulated

• Finishes required to endure heat and moisture

• All appliances to be heat and moisture resistant

Special

Requirements

• Additional resting benches and rinsing devices should be provided in an

outside, separate area on the deck space

• Visible by guards to secure access

• Controls located outside of room, only sensors inside

• Programmable timer system would be helpful

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

None

Required sauna lighting, accent downlights

None

None

Sensors only inside Sauna, controls in Lifeguard office

Security Camera, Adult only

None

None

Facility PA system

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Wood

Wood

Wood

Furniture • Wooden sauna benches – cedar, heat and moisture resistant

• Sauna heater (protected)

• Head and leg rests

• Wooden grab bars along non-seated area

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: N.12; Wet Classroom


Function Classroom for organized training, learning and meeting space


Capacity 20

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Direct access from Natatorium Prefunction

• Direct access from Pool Deck

• Access to Competition Pool

• Do not have to go through locker rooms to enter this area

Design Issues • Windows to pool area

• Windows to outside if possible

Special

Requirements

• Hose bib and drain

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

GFCI Convenience outlets with covers not to exceed 4” from

face of wall and can have a cord plugged into the outlet and

have the cover close.

Standard for classroom. Lighting system with motion sensor on

10 min shut off.

Data ports

None

Standard for classroom, consider using demand based

ventilation

Security Camera

Data port

Wall mounted TV with DVD player


Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Acoustical Ceiling Tile, appropriate for wet area

Glass, Tile

Same as pool deck, provide floor drain as pool deck, provide

floor drain

Furniture • Storage lockers/cabinets

• Whiteboard

• Tables and chairs

• Sink

Environmental



Requirements



Data Sheet: N.13; Wet Classroom Storage


Function Storage space for wet classroom


Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Only accessible from Wet Classroom

Design Issues • Double doors open into Wet Classroom

Special

Requirements

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlet


shut off.

None

None



Door lock

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed

CMU/Tile

Same as Pool Deck Pool Deck

Furniture &

Equipment

• Storage items:

• Refrigerator

• Tables and chairs (4) 6’ folding tables 30”x72” on cart

• Rescue tubes

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: N.14; Pool Deck


Function Provides circulation space between programs in the natatorium.


Capacity -

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • All pools

• Lifeguard

• Locker Rooms

• Sauna

• Wet Classroom

Design Issues • Acoustics

• 12’ minimum width around all pools, extra space around competition pool at

one side (not behind starting blocks)

• Entire deck visible from Lifeguard station

• Seating where required adjacent to pools

• Extra space for bags, etc on one side of Competition Pool (not located at

starting blocks)

• No lounge chair seating required

• Water reuse to be provided on daily or weekly level to be studied by Design

Team

Special

Requirements

• Multiple Hose bibs (50’ radius)

• Direct pool fill line, standard FDC size (3-4”)

• Deck to have approximately 1% slope to provide construction tolerance for

ADA slopes

• Specs for galvanized surfaces and paints to be per wet atmosphere

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

GFCI outlets, 2 per side spaced out, protected

Lights located for easy maintenance access, potentially catwalk

above. Lighting system with motion sensor on 10 min shut off.

Induction lights to be studied for Natatorium to save on

operation costs.

Wi-Fi

None

Sufficient air supply, temperature, and moisture control

Security Cameras

None

Provide general spec for “Colorado System” scoreboard

Facility PA system, separate Natatorium system, equipment to

be able to withstand wet atmosphere,



Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed ceiling and structure, acoustic materials, feature

elements, paints/seals/galvanized steel/surfaces to be

compliant with wet areas and prepped/finished appropriately

Tile/Glass,

Non-slip thick set Tile, waterproof membrane below

Furniture &

Equipment

• Hooks for towels at Leisure Pool

• Bench/ledge at wall near Leisure Pool and Therapy Pool

• Guard chairs

• Portable bleachers for deck area

• Water fountains at deck, bottle filtered type

Environmental

Requirements

• HVAC for wet atmosphere Natatorium (per Seresco Natatorium Design Guide)

• Envelope design and construction for 50%-60% relative humidity year-round

• Low R-values (typically exterior windows) with warm supply air to prevent

condensation

• Window frames and emergency exit doors thermally broken to avoid

condensation

• Vapor barriers in exterior walls to be located on warm side of dew point

• Entire natatorium space to have vapor barrier/retarder installed.

• Fully cover exterior windows with supply air from HVAC to prevent

condensation. Areas not covered with air will condensate. Skylights require

additional air flow as well. Return duct location must compliment this layout.

• High air temperatures reduce evaporation, rule of thumb is air should be 2

degrees F warmer than water

• UV light helps reduce/eliminate chloramines that lower the indoor air quality

• Duct materials to be galvanize, or aluminum, not stainless steel

• Deliver air to the breathing zone, not up high

• Prefer not to use cloth ductwork due to health reasons



Data Sheet: N.15; Spectator Seating


Function Seating for spectators of swimming events


Capacity 300 people

Number Req’d 1


• Located above main pool area

Design Issues • Visual connection through railings to pool area

• Within the natatorium atmosphere

• No draining over edge to pool deck

Special

Requirements

• Hose bib and floor drain

• Some accessible seating required

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlets

Standard. Lighting system with motion sensor on 10 min shut

off.

None

None

Same as general natatorium atmosphere

Security cameras

None

None


Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed, feature elements similar to Pool Deck

CMU

Concrete/thick set Tile w/waterproofing underneath

Furniture &

Equipment

• Fixed aluminum bleachers

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: N.16; Natatorium Men’s Locker Rooms


Function Lockers, showers and restroom facilities


Capacity -

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Natatorium Prefunction

• Pool Deck

• Custodial

Design Issues • Entrance visible from Natatorium control desk

Special

Requirements

• Restroom doors and partitions should be stainless steel or vandal resistant

material, phenolic

• Electric hand dryers for sinks in each restroom, air blades

• Body dryers mounted higher

• All dryers to meet ADA requirements

• Provide water saving fittings throughout. Self-mixing and controlled faucets

and floor drains should be provided in all restrooms.

• Fixtures should be recessed in the wall with vandal resistant screws

• Hose bibs and floor drains

• Physical door to Natatorium Prefunction, open access to pool deck

• Some showers are private

• Provide redundancy for hot water piping

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

GFCI Convenience outlets

Use IESNA guidelines for recommended intensity for locker

rooms. Lighting system with motion sensor on 10 min shut off.

None

None

Use a dedicated 100% OA system with full exhaust and

possibly heat recovery

None

None

None


Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Moisture resistant gypsum board

Ceramic tile

Thick set Ceramic tile w/waterproofing underneath



Furniture &

Equipment

• Lockers (phenolic) and benches

• Hooks near showers

• Shower compartments, all private

• Water fountains

• Additional shower required for emergency shelter requirements

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: N.17; Natatorium Women’s Locker Rooms


Function Lockers, showers and restroom facilities


Capacity -

Number Req’d 1


• Pool Deck

• Custodial

Design Issues • Entrance visible from Natatorium control desk

Special

Requirements


material, phenolic

• Electric hand dryers for sinks in each restroom, air blades

• Body dryers mounted higher

• All dryers to meet ADA requirements




• Hose bibs and floor drains

• Physical door to Natatorium Prefunction, open access to pool deck

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

GFCI Convenience outlets



None

None



None

None

None


Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:


Ceramic tile


Furniture &

Equipment


• Hooks near showers



• Shower compartments, all private

• Additional shower required for emergency shelter

• Water fountains

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: N.18; Family Changing Area


Function Family cabana style locker rooms with individual showers, lockers and restroom

facilities


Capacity 8-10 Cabanas

Number Req’d 1


• Pool Deck

Design Issues • Entrance visible from Natatorium Prefunction

• Doors to be lockable from inside.

Special

Requirements

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlets


10 min shut off.

N/A

N/A

Standard for locker rooms

N/A

N/A

N/A


Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:


Ceramic tile


Furniture &

Equipment


• Baby changing station

• Wall Hooks

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: N.19; Pool Electrical Room


Function Space for electrical units that serve the natatorium


Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Pool Mechanical Room

• Exterior access

• To be accessible from both pool deck and MEP area for aquatics staff to access

and take readings

Design Issues

Special

Requirements

• All floor penetrations (mech and electrical) should have cast in place sleeves 2"

above finish floor.

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlets

Industrial LED

None

None

Unmanned space. Provide required ventilation for equipment.

Locked door

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed

CMU

Sealed concrete, Waterproof/chemical resistant floor coating

that turns up the face of wall 6" to avoid spills leaving the

SCRRAC and entering the other building spaces, recessed slab

to prevent water from leaving the room and entering occupied

spaces or elevator shafts

Furniture &

Equipment

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: N.20; Pool Mechanical Room


Function Space for mechanical units that serve the natatorium


Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Directly services the natatorium from upper level

• Exterior access

• To be accessible from both pool deck and MEP area for aquatics staff to access

and take readings

Design Issues • Pumps for pool to be below water level

Special

Requirements


above finish floor.

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlets


shut off.

None

None


High heat and corrosive environment.

Locked door

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed

CMU

Sealed Concrete, Waterproof/chemical resistant floor coating





Furniture &

Equipment

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: N.21; Pool Mech. & Elec. Storage


Function Storage space for pool mechanical and electrical room


Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Pool Mechanical Room

• Pool Electrical Room

• No connection to pool deck necessary

Design Issues

Special

Requirements

• Spare parts

• Service equipment

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlet


shut off.

None

None


minimum conditioned air. Provide proper

ventilation/isolation.

Locked door

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed

CMU






Furniture &

Equipment

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: N.22; Pump/Filter Room


Function Space for water pumps and filters


Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Pools

• On the same level as the pools

Design Issues

Special

Requirements


above finish floor.

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlets


shut off.

None

None


This is a high heat and corrosive environment.

Locked door

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed

CMU

Epoxy coating over Sealed Concrete, Waterproof/chemical

resistant floor coating that turns up the face of wall 6" to avoid

spills leaving the SCRRAC and entering the other building

spaces, recessed slab to prevent water from leaving the room

and entering occupied spaces or elevator shafts

Furniture &

Equipment

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: N.23; Surge Vault


Function Vault space to temporarily hold the water overflown into the pool gutters


Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Adjacent to all pools

• At the same level as the pool water

Design Issues

Special

Requirements

• Required Access from above via manhole

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

None

None

None

None

-

Locked door

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Epoxy coating over Concrete w/epoxy rebar



Furniture &

Equipment

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: N.24; Pump/Filter/Surge Vault Storage


Function Storage space for pump/filter room and surge vault


Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Pump/Filter Room

• Surge Vault

Design Issues

Special

Requirements

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlet


shut off.

None

None


minimum conditioned air. Circulation to accommodate high

heat/corrosive environment.

Locked door

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed

CMU






Furniture &

Equipment

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: N.25; Pool Equipment Room


Function Space for additional equipment servicing the natatorium


Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1


Design Issues

Special

Requirements


above finish floor.

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlet


shut off.

None

None




Locked door

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed

CMU






Furniture &

Equipment



Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: N.26; Chemical Room


Function Space for chemical storage and processing


Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Pump/Filter Room

Design Issues • Can be located on different level from pool to have access to service exterior

Special

Requirements


above finish floor.

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlet


shut off.

None

None




Locked door

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed

CMU






Furniture &

Equipment

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: N.27; Pool Mechanical/Water


Function Additional space for equipment required to serve the pools, buffer between

pump-filter room and exterior access.


Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Pump/filter room

• Chemical room

• Exterior access

Design Issues

Special

Requirements


above finish floor.

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlet


shut off.

None

None




Locked door

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed

CMU

Epoxy coating over Sealed concrete, Waterproof/chemical

resistant floor coating that turns up the face of wall 6" to avoid

spills leaving the SCRRAC and entering the other building

spaces, recessed slab to prevent water from leaving the room

and entering occupied spaces or elevator shafts

Furniture &

Equipment

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: N.28; Natatorium Misc. Mech. & Elec.


Function Space for additional mechanical and electrical units required for natatorium


Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Adjacent to spaces serving

Design Issues

Special

Requirements


above finish floor.

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlet


shut off.

None

None




Locked door

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed

CMU






Furniture &

Equipment

Environmental

Requirements



Fitness Component Space Data Sheets

The following pages contain space data sheets for the Fitness component.



Data Sheet: F.1; Fitness Prefunction

Building Component: Fitness (Community Recreation Center)

Function Arrival point for the fitness component. Provides excess area for circulation to

avoid congestion in corridors. Contains control desk for access to fitness area.

Net Area 600 sf

Capacity 25

Number Req’d 1


• Fitness Locker Rooms

• Gymnasium

• Exercise Studios

• Cardio

• Free Weights

Design Issues • Control Desk, includes closed circuit TV/computer monitor

Special

Requirements

Systems

Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlets

General lighting, accent lighting for control desk. Lighting


Wi-Fi; Network Connectivity at control desk, Closed circuit TV,

Computer Monitor

At control Desk


Visual connection to the Main Lobby reception desk is desired

but not necessary. Scanned access to fitness area

Yes, connect to wall mounted screens

Wall Mounted Screen as message board

Facility PA system, connected to specific fitness area system,

and can operate only within fitness lobby

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Acoustical materials, gypsum wallboard

Gypsum wallboard, Glass

Low maintenance (tile, resilient)

Furniture &

Equipment

• Chairs/benches

• Electronic Message Board - HOC/POR will provide duplex power network

outlet, and enclosure/built in recess for screen. DTS/County will provide the

screens, mounts and computers.



Environmental

Requirements

Data Sheet: F.2; Gymnasium


Function This is the primary facility for all athletic events including basketball, aerobic exercises,

badminton, floor hockey, volleyball, and large social functions including dances

Net Area 9,570 sf

Capacity 350, Spectator Seating = 200

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Locker Rooms

• Gym Mechanical/Electrical

• Gym Storage

• Fitness Lobby

• Cardio

• Free Weights


• May need to be off of Main Lobby

Design Issues • Clear height of 28 feet below basketball backboards when retracted into the ceiling

(clear height for all sports, not just basketball)

• Rectangular clear glass backboards with breakaway rims

• Divide the gym into half with a high grade “air wall” capable of withstanding normal

athletic activities in the space.

• Provide good acoustical separation between the 2 sides to allow simultaneous

activities

• Electrical: All retractable backboards, dividers and nets to be capable of both

manual and electrical power assisted operation. Wall-mounted electronic

scoreboard (1, 2nd if possible) and basketball shot clocks mounted to ensure an

unobstructed view from the scorer’s table. Control panel for the scorer’s table

should be located near center court. Electrical outlet and cable connection should

be located so the scores table can be operated without creating a trip hazard to

players, officials or spectators. This may be designed as an integral part of the

bleacher system. The scoreboard should be clearly visible from the scorers’ table

and not be obstructed by backboards.

• Mounted equipment: All equipment, electrical, mechanical, HVAC, lighting, PA,

scoreboards/clocks, etc. shall be protected from player and ball contact during

typical use of the space. In addition, all fixtures such as door handles, lights,

activation controls, partitions, etc. shall be recessed (preferred), flush mounted, or

otherwise screened and protected from contact so as to facilitate use of the space

for indoor sports.

Special

Requirements

• Natural, glare free, light is desirable

• Provide seating (bleachers) and spectator area for 200 along long side and end wall

of the undivided space

• ALL fixtures in this space are to be recessed and protected by HD screening

• Wall and ceiling color contrast to allow for shuttle cock visibility

• No devices to be located within wall pads and acoustical panels

• Bleachers preferred to be recessed in wall, preferred both sides but not necessary



• Space to be 110’ long to accommodate 4 pickleball courts

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Flush mounted convenience outlets, not located in runout wall pads

LED with unbreakable fixtures/lenses for minimum color distortion.

Provide minimum of +/- 50 foot candles over useful life. Lighting


Provide data outlet in both sides, plus one located at scorer’s table

None

Provide dedicated HVAC system with dual zones to address half

space division. Consider providing displacement ventilation or use

an energy recovery air delivery system. If possible, minimize or hide

from view ductwork that may interfere with game dynamics. Run

ducts through trusses if possible.

Security cameras, at least 2

(1) connection, at scorer’s table

None

Provide PA system for announcing games, (3) mic ports, one at

scorer’s table and one at each end

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed with acoustical treatment to allow for speeches

Durable, CMU, Wall Mats. Wall mats/pads to be mounted 3.5”

above finished floor

• Sprung Hardwood court floor with court markings:

• Basketball: 1 full court (84’x50’); 2 cross courts

• Volleyball: 3

• Badminton: 3 min, 4 desirable (court = 106’ long min. to

accommodate)

• Floor plates are to be flush mounted and larger than the 3.5”

sleeves in order to compensate for the normal shifting of the gym

floor

Furniture &

Equipment

• Badminton/Volleyball system – 4 ea.

• Floor hockey goals - 4

• Retractable basketboards - 6

• Scoreboard – 1 (2 desirable)

• Clock – 1

• Shot clocks - 2

• Volleyball referee platform – 2

• Gym mats – 16’ at each backboard (2 walls)



• Indoor lacrosse goals – 2

• Gymnasium floor cover – 1

• Lectern is in FF&E for bldg. Gym to be local rack w/ aux plug ins as part of base

building.

Environmental

Requirements

• Excellent ventilation

• Acoustic separation between divided gym spaces



Data Sheet: F.3; Gymnasium Storage


Function Storage for the Gymnasium divided into bulk storage as well as storage for

individual functions

Net Area 1,000 sf

Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Gymnasium

• Corridor, if possible

Design Issues • Doors = standard double with no mullion with deadbolts and no threshold to

allow items to be wheeled in. Doors should be capable of opening 180

degrees.

• Divided lockable storage areas of 8’ x 8’ x 8’

Special

Requirements


• Tables with racks

• Chairs with racks

• Portable stage sections

• Lectern

• Sports equipment including roller skates, floor hockey equipment, volleyball

standards, nets and balls (see equipment for Gymnasium)

• Ping pong tables

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlet


shut off.

None

None



None

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed

CMU

Sealed concrete

Furniture &

Equipment

• Provide the following FF&E:

• 4 storage cabinets

• 4 equipment cages



Environmental

Requirements

Data Sheet: F.4; Gymnasium Mechanical/Electrical


Function Mechanical/Electrical room dedicated to Gymnasium

Net Area 750 sf

Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Gymnasium

• Gymnasium Mechanical/Electrical Storage

Design Issues

Special

Requirements

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlet


shut off.

None

None

-

Locked door

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed

CMU

Sealed concrete

Furniture &

Equipment

Environmental

Requirements

Data Sheet: F.5; Gymnasium Mech./Elec. Storage




Function Storage for Gymnasium Mechanical/Electrical room

Net Area 100 sf

Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Gymnasium Mechanical/Electrical room

Design Issues

Special

Requirements

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlet


shut off.

None

None



Locked door

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed

CMU

Sealed concrete

Furniture &

Equipment

• Shelving

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: F.6; Cardio/Weight/Stretch Room


Function To provide for self-directed and coached fitness

Net Area 4,300 sf

Capacity -

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Cardio Storage

• Exercise Rooms

• Free Weights

• Fitness Lobby

• May need to be off of Main Lobby

Design Issues • Acoustically separated from quiet spaces

• Minimum 10’ ceiling height (as high as possible desired)

• Double doors with no center mullion

• Windows should be provided into the room and for exterior views

Special

Requirements

• Provide mirrors mounted with fully body view

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlets; outlets to power the exercise equipment,

floor and wall outlets required, tread mills should be only

powered equipment

Adjustable with a maximum of 50 foot candles. Lighting


Verify if required at equipment

None

Ventilation system capable of maintaining an acceptable odor-

free environment. Consider using a dedicated 100% OA

system using heat recovery to address ventilation and

temperature requirements. Provide separated flush air

controls with temperature adjustments located at the

customer service desk

Participant access control, system regulated by both the

customer service counter and the use of access cards, security

cameras

4 wall mounted TVs

None

Connect to main facility PA system, and internal sound system

Finishes Ceiling:

Minimum 10’, Acoustic material



Walls:

Floor:

CMU, acoustic materials

Athletic/shock absorbent surface, tile material. Floor finish

may change depending on location in fitness area.

Furniture &

Equipment

• Exercise Equipment: (fixtures TBD per layout by owner during SD)

• Ab crunch

• Abdominal rotation

• Abdominal adductor

• Arm curl

• Horizontal chest press

• Chin and dip

• Climbing wall, built in

• Exercise bike

• Ham/Glute Hyperextens

• Vertical Knee Raise

• Pee Deck

• Lat Deck

• 45 Pull Over

• Seated Leg Extension

• Shoulder Press

• Squat

• Stair Climber

• Standing Calf

• Triceps Press Down

• V Leg Curl

• Vertical Row

• Vertical Chest Press

• Health Rider

• Water Station

• Cleaning Station

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: F.7; Cardio/Weight/Stretch Storage


Function Storage for the space divided into bulk storage as well as storage for individual

functions

Net Area 500 sf

Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Cardio/Weight/Stretch Room

Design Issues

Special

Requirements

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlet, outlets to charge equipment


shut off.

None

None



None

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed

CMU

Sealed Concrete

Furniture &

Equipment

• Shelving

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: F.8; Exercise Studio


Function Flexible space to accommodate athletic programs such as dance, aerobics, and

yoga.

Net Area 2,000 sf

Capacity 133 +/-

Number Req’d 1 (divides into 2 spaces)

Adjacencies • Exercise Studio Storage

• Fitness Lobby

• Cardio

• Free Weights

• Gymnasium

Design Issues • Divides into 2 studios with high quality “air wall”

• Acoustically separated from quiet spaces

• Minimum 10’ ceiling height

• Windows should be provided into the room and for exterior views, if possible

Special

Requirements

• Acoustic separation between the two halves (STC 45)

• Acoustic separation between adjacent spaces (STC 45)

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlets around perimeter

Adjustable with a minimum of 50 foot candles. Lighting system

with motion sensor on 10 min shut off.

Provide 2 data drops, one each side

None

Ventilation system capable of maintaining an acceptable odor-

free environment. Consider using a dedicated 100% OA

system using heat recovery to address ventilation and

temperature requirements.

Security cameras

2 ports, one each side

Portable DVD with monitor

Speakers and ability to plug in portable sound amplification

system, facility PA system connection

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Minimum 10’, Acoustic materials

Painted gypsum board, abuse resistant, acoustic materials

Sprung Hardwood or floating wood floor suitable for dance

and aerobic activities



Furniture &

Equipment

• Mirrors mounted for full body view

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: F.9; Exercise Studio Storage



functions

Net Area 400 sf

Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Exercise Rooms

Design Issues

Special

Requirements

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlet

Industrial LED. Lighting system with motion sensor on 10 min shut

off.

None

None



None

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed

CMU

Sealed concrete

Furniture &

Equipment

• Shelving

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: F.10; Fitness Men’s Locker Rooms


Function Room with lockers, showers and restroom facilities


Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Fitness Women’s Locker Room

• Fitness Family Changing Area

• Custodial

• Fitness Lobby

• Gymnasium

• Cardio

• Free Weights


Design Issues • Provide access for persons with disabilities

• Entrances should be visible from the customer service desk

• Provide private changing stalls (2)

• Able to close/lock locker rooms during private functions, only access to

restrooms

Special

Requirements


material such as KENILIT, Glasboard or HPL Melamine, urinal screens to have

post

• Two electric hair dryers in each restroom. One mounted high for hair/body

use.

• All dryers to meet ADA requirements.




• Lockable doors at showers to separate from restrooms

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Convenience outlets



None

None



None

None

None



Sound System

Facility PA system

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Moisture resistant gypsum board or ACT

Sealed epoxy on CMU

Ceramic tile

Furniture &

Equipment


• (24)1/3 lockers and (6) full lockers (accommodate ADA)

• Benches

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: F.11; Fitness Woman’s Locker Rooms


Function Room with lockers, showers and restroom facilities


Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Fitness Women’s Locker Room

• Fitness Family Changing Area

• Custodial

• Fitness Lobby

• Gymnasium

• Cardio

• Free Weights


Design Issues • Provide access for persons with disabilities

• Entrances should be visible from the customer service desk

• Provide private changing stalls (2)

Special

Requirements


material such as KENILIT, Glasboard or HPL Melamine,

• Two electric hard dryers in each restroom. One mounted high for hair/body

use.

• All dryers to meet ADA requirements.




• Lockable doors at showers to separate from restrooms

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlets



None

None



None

None

None

Facility PA system

Finishes Ceiling: Moisture resistant gypsum board or ACT



Walls:

Floor:

Sealed epoxy on CMU

Ceramic Tile

Furniture &

Equipment


• (24)1/3 lockers and (6) full lockers (accommodate ADA)

• Benches

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: F.12; Fitness Family Changing Area


Function Changing area and restroom for families using fitness area

Net Area 300 sf

Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 3 totaling 300 sf

Adjacencies • Fitness Lobby

• Custodial

• Fitness Men’s Locker Room

• Fitness Women’s Locker Room

Design Issues • Restrooms should be easy to find and entrance doors visible from public area

• Benches to be portable

• Connection is not through main locker rooms

Special

Requirements

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlets


10 min shut off.

None

None

Provide adequate exhaust air flow per IBC

None

None

None

Connected to facility sound system

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board

Ceramic Tile

Ceramic Tile

Furniture • Baby changing station

• Lockers

• Benches or chairs (moveable)

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: F.13; Fitness Misc. Mechanical & Electrical


Function Additional Mechanical/Electrical space for Fitness component

Net Area 425 sf

Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Fitness Lobby

Design Issues

Special

Requirements

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlet


shut off.

None

None

-

Locked door

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed

CMU

Sealed concrete

Furniture &

Equipment

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: F.14; Fitness Misc. Mech. & Elec. Storage


Function Misc storage for fitness Mechanical/Electrical

Net Area 425 sf

Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Fitness Misc. Mechanical/Electrical

• Fitness Lobby

Design Issues

Special

Requirements

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlet


shut off.

None

None



Locked door

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed

CMU

Sealed concrete

Furniture &

Equipment

• Storage shelving

Environmental

Requirements



Community Component Space Data Sheets

The following pages contain the space data sheets for the Community component.



Data Sheet: C.1; Community Pre-function

Building Component: Community (Community Recreation Center)

Function Main arrival point and transition space after passing the front desk into the

community programs.


Capacity 25

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Front desk & Main Lobby

• Main circulation in community programs

Design Issues • Seating should be located near entry doors for people waiting

Special

Requirements

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlets

General lighting, display lighting. Lighting system with motion


Wi-Fi

None


Visual connection to the Main Lobby reception desk

None

None

Facility PA system

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Acoustic materials, gypsum wallboard, feature elements

Gypsum wallboard, Glass

Hard surface

Furniture &

Equipment

• Chairs/benches

• Electronic Message Board - Provide duplex power network outlet, and

enclosure/built in recess for a total of 4 screens in main lobby and 1 per floor

for a total of 7. DTS/County will provide the screens, mounts and computers.

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: C.2; Social Hall


Function Social gatherings, conferences, instructional classroom, space for nonprofit and

for profit organizations to hold meetings. Rental space.

Net Area 4,000 square feet total; divides into 2 spaces

Capacity 260

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Community Prefunction Space

• Kitchen

• Social Hall Exterior Patio

• Social Hall Storage

• Separate Exterior Entrance

• Service Entrance

Design Issues • Divisible with “airwall” type divider w/ automatic keyed control, divides into

two spaces

• Only code minimum number of doors to exterior patio should be provided, rest

of wall is glass. Glass preferred to have Mecho shades

Special

Requirements

• Solid wood core doors – (fits chairs and tables), double doors no mullion

• Acoustic separation between the partitioned rooms (STC 45)

• Acoustic separation between adjacent spaces (STC 45)

• Food service to be provided over durable flooring

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlets 8’ OC min. or per code; locations should

maximize flexibility of room use. Floor outlets – two at lectern

location at head of room

Dimmable, zoned lighting controls for conferences & A/V

presentations. Consider using motion sensors to address

unoccupied periods. Directional lights for speakers on either

side. Lighting system with motion sensor on 10 min shut off.

In floor and along 2 walls; locations should maximize flexibility

of room use. (1 on each side of room); Wi-Fi; located for use of

smartboard screens

None

Use demand ventilation based on CO2 sensor and minimum air

flow during unoccupied periods.

Security cameras

Provide port on each half

Mounted projector recessed and drops down with screen on

one end for full room; smartboards for when room is split,

projector controls located near screen with data connection



Assisted listening loop usable in each of the subdivided rooms

and in single room; portable equipment needs a storage

location and hookup that allows use at the presentation end of

the room for each setup. Portable units can be stored for both

accessible hearing and general PA use.

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Acoustic materials

Paint with chair rail; tall durable institutional base; or

architectural wainscoting. Top of walls to have sound panel

for acoustics

Glued hardwood or other suitable material, high end resilient

flooring, suitable for dancing, no carpet, depressed slab may

be required for flooring. Flooring distribution to be determined

during design.

Furniture • Mecho shades on windows

• Conference type tables – 5’ rounds and 6’ banquet tables

• Stacking chairs & dollies to store them

• (6) sectional tables easily re-configured

• DVD player

• (1) Rectangular table cart 3’ x 6.5’ with wheels

• (6) 5’ Diameter round table carts at 3’ x 6’ each

• (10) Folding chair carts at 3’ x 4’ each (storage for 300 chair limit for banquet

seating, 500 for theatre style seating)

Environmental

Requirements

• Acoustical considerations are critical

• Social hall should optimize musical performances



Data Sheet: C.3; Social Hall Storage



functions and food for catered events.


Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Accessible from social hall and main corridor.

Design Issues • Doors to be 8’ high and 6’ wide with no mullion, deadbolts and no threshold to

allow items to be wheeled in. Doors should be capable of opening 100

degrees.

Special

Requirements


• Tables with racks

• Chairs with racks

• Portable stage sections

• Lectern

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlet


shut off.

None

None



Locked doors

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed

Painted abuse resistant gypsum board or CMU, durable

Sealed Concrete

Furniture &

Equipment


• Equipment cages

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: C.4; Social Hall Mechanical & Electrical


Function Space for mechanical and electrical equipment serving the social hall.


Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Social Hall

• Main circulation

Design Issues

Special

Requirements

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlet


shut off.

None

None

-

None

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed


Sealed concrete

Furniture &

Equipment

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: C.5; Social Hall Exterior Patio


Function Provide exterior space for social hall


Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies Accessible from social hall

Design Issues • Cozy wooded area with planters

• Multiple entry points from social hall

• Can be temporarily open and acoustically treated to prevent disturbance to

the neighborhood.

• Access control from exterior.

Special

Requirements

• Consider walk off mat at interior

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlet

Sufficient exterior lighting

None

None

None

Secure access from exterior

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

None

Railing

Stone/masonry, concrete

Furniture &

Equipment

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: C.6; Kitchen


Function Culinary arts instruction area, nutrition program staging area, food preparation

for catered events.


Capacity 8-10 people for teaching

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Direct access to social hall

• Adjacent to community lounge too is preferred if design allows

• Easily accessible from loading dock/trash room

• Requires direct access from drive for catering trucks

• Custodial Closet

• Connection to main circulation

Design Issues • Provide countertop with drawers & basic cabinets

• Provide wall hung cabinets above countertop (lockable)

• Provide 8’ long x 3’ wide serving counter to social hall thru a lockable pass thru,

Proportion is not long rectangular, more square

• Instructional tables in center

Special

Requirements

• Follow State of Maryland Dept. of Health Code requirements (10.15.03)

• Comply with latest ADA requirements

• Double door access

• All equipment to be commercial grade

• Direct access to custodial closet

• Grease trap vent to outside

• Stainless materials throughout

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Outlets to power equipment, some require 208/244V, 3 ph

service

Moisture resistant lens. Lighting system with motion sensor on

10 min shut off.

None

Wall Mounted

Provide a dedicated manually operated exhaust system to

prevent food odors to recirculate throughout the building.

Security Cameras

None

Monitors/cameras for instructional classes

Dedicated PA system for instructions

Finishes Ceiling: Moisture resistant



Walls:

Floor:

Painted CMU, Tile, durable, easily cleaned

Quarry/ceramic tile/poured floor

Furniture &

Equipment

• Grease trap

• Lockable freezer and refrigerator

• Combination oven with locking range top

• 150 lb. ice making machine (may need more)

• Large microwave ovens

• Large compartment sink. No garbage disposal per WSSC.

• Separate hand sink(s)

• Rack type roast & hold convection oven capable of heating & reheating food

and holding standard catering trays

• 4 – 8 long tables on wheels for demonstrations, teaching, serving

• Fire suppression range hood above stove



Data Sheet: C.7; Kitchen Storage



functions and food for catered events.


Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Kitchen

• Accessible from corridor

Design Issues • Doors to be 8’ high and 8’ wide with deadbolts and no threshold to allow items

to be wheeled in. Doors should be capable of opening 100 degrees.

Special

Requirements

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlet


shut off.

None

None



Locked doors

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed

Painted gypsum board or CMU, durable

Sealed Concrete

Furniture &

Equipment

• Shelving

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: C.8; Activity Room-1


Function Space suitable for multipurpose activity spaces/meeting room easily convertible

to vocal or instrumental instruction or practice


Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Near community lounge or social hall

• Activity Room-1 Storage

Design Issues • Provide a high quality “air wall” partition to separate into two 1,000 sf rooms.

Partition should have a 50 STC rating (confirm)

• Sound insulation, acoustics

Special

Requirements

• Provide double doors for movement of instruments and equipment

• Sink in combined space

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience wall outlets, 50% more than standard amount



unoccupied periods. Lighting system with motion sensor on 10

min shut off.

Wi-Fi, 2 wired data ports

None



None

CCTV with DVR

16:9 ratio drop down screen & ceiling projector; smartboards

for each of the divided rooms and positioned to work for

whole room.

Facility PA system, independent audio system

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Acoustic materials (ceiling height = max. 12’ as high as

possible)

Painted gypsum board, abuse resistant gypsum board, abuse

resistant

Vinyl Composite Tile or equivalent

Furniture &

Equipment

• Mech shades on windows

• Conference type tables (on lockable wheels)



• Stacking chairs (on lockable wheels) & dollies to store them

• Sectional tables (on lockable wheels) easily re-configured

Environmental

Requirements

• Treat the room acoustically so external noise does not disrupt activities and

sound from the room does not disturb adjacent activities



Data Sheet: C.9; Activity Room-1 Storage


Function Storage space for activity rooms


Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Accessible from both neighboring activity rooms




Special

Requirements

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlet


shut off.

None

None

Standard Building System

Locked door

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed

Painted Gypsum board

Vinyl composite tile or equivalent

Furniture &

Equipment

Environmental

Requirements








Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1



Design Issues • Provide a high quality “air wall” partition to separate into two 800 sf rooms.



Special

Requirements



Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience wall outlets, more than standard amount



unoccupied periods.


None



None

CCTV with DVR



whole room.


Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:


possible)


resistant


Furniture &

Equipment

• Mecho shades on windows






Environmental

Requirements









Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1





Special

Requirements

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlet

Industrial LED

None

None


Locked door

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed



Furniture &

Equipment

Environmental

Requirements








Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1



Design Issues • Sound insulation, acoustics

Special

Requirements



Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System




unoccupied periods. Lighting system with motion sensor on 10

min shut off.


None



None

CCTV with DVR



whole room.


Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:


possible)


resistant


Furniture &

Equipment







Environmental

Requirements









Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1





Special

Requirements

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlet

Industrial LED

None

None


Locked door

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed



Furniture &

Equipment

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: C.14; Art Room


Function Instruction and self-directed use for drawing, painting, sculpture, silk screening,

pottery, ceramics, lapidary, photography, woodcarving ,etc.


Capacity 80

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Community circulation

• Activity Rooms

Design Issues • Provide a high quality “air wall” partition to separate into two 800 sf rooms.



• This is a multipurpose craft space, not for ceramics

Special

Requirements

• Sink/plumbing accommodates messy activities (ceramics etc); 36” wide x12”

deep sink (need large/deep sink, possibly 2 for ADA access)

• Floor is easily scrubbed/cleaned (Vinyl Composite tile acceptable); walls easily

cleaned/scrubbed to 5’ height


• Sinks to be provided in both halves of dividable room

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System




unoccupied periods. Possibly 2x2 lights spaced no closer than

10’ apart, recommend 35 foot candles at 3’ above floor.

Lighting system with motion sensor on 10 min shut off.


None


flow during unoccupied periods. Space must be provided with

dedicated exhaust fan and/or be kept under negative draft

pressure to prevent propagation of paint art supply odors

throughout facility.

None

CCTV with DVR



whole room.




Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:


possible)


resistant, vinyl or other cleanable material up to 5’ height

Vinyl composite tile or equivalent, easy to clean

Furniture &

Equipment




• Sectional tables (on lockable wheels) easily re-configured 12 easels

• 8 multipurpose tables

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: C.15; Art Room Storage


Function Storage space for the Art Room


Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Art Room



Special

Requirements

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlet


shut off.

None

None


Locked door

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed



Furniture &

Equipment

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: C.16; Family Play Area


Function Play area for children with space for parents to supervise


Capacity

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Easy access from entrance

• Convenient to public restrooms/family restroom

• Within line of sight of service points/desks

Design Issues • Provision for seating for children of different ages and adults who come with

the children

• Sight lines must be maintained for safety

• Playful design

• Shelving and furniture designed for child height and stimulation

• Multipurpose, durable furnishings

• Ample seating space

Special

Requirements

• Built-in shelving, abuse-resistant

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlets & power for electronic devices

General lighting & display lighting. Lighting system with

motion sensor on 10 min shut off.

Wi-Fi

None

General HVAC

None

Wall mounted outlet, high for TV

None

Facility PA system

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Acoustic materials, taller ceilings

Gypsum board, durable to 5’ height

Soft, cushioned, cleanable

Furniture &

Equipment

• Puzzles, theme mats, carpets, and infant and toddler furniture

• “soft play” equipment

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: C.17; Game Room


Function Self-directed games including pool, table tennis, table hockey, electronic arcade

games


Capacity 130

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Adjacent to & visible from community pre-function space

Design Issues • Maximize natural light and windows

• Does not need to be flexible/moveable

Special

Requirements

• Double doors to allow for moving of equipment

• Segregate pool tables in separate room to accommodate seniors while teens

are using the room

• Appropriate lighting for each game area/table

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Duplex outlets at 6’ OC around room

General room illumination/special over pool table etc. Lighting


Data outlets for electronic games

None

Consider using CO2 Sensor demand based ventilation

Security Cameras

Wall mounted screen

None

Facility PA system

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Acoustic, tall ceiling height = 12’

Durable finish at chair rail height. Abuse resistant drywall.

Vinyl Composite Tile or other durable

Furniture • Equipment to be decided during schematic design layout

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: C.18; Community Lounge


Function Comfortably furnished environment conducive to seniors and adults discussion

groups, carol clubs, reading or work area for parents waiting for children

participating in center activities.


Capacity 130

Number Req’d 1


• Located in high activity area

• Social Hall

• Senior Programs

Design Issues • Divisible in half with high quality “air wall” partition

• Double doors so that this room can be used in conjunction with the social hall

• Walls should accommodate hanging artwork

• Colors should help to create a warm, inviting environment

• Include a small kitchenette with counter/serving area and small fridge for

snacks, coffee, beverages, etc.

Special

Requirements

• Acoustically quiet environment

• Include a kitchen pass thru into this room

• Sink and faucet capable of filling large coffee urn. Provide supply and sewer

lines

• Include kitchenette

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Provide outlets at 6’ o.c. around room

General lighting as well as floor/table lamps, accent lighting.

Dimmable. Lighting system with motion sensor on 10 min shut

off.

WiFi and 4 data drops

None

Standard Building HVAC

Ability to control by users of the room. Provide deadband type

thermostat with min/max adjustments available to

maintenance staff

.

Security cameras

Provide CCTV, Drop down screen, projector

Sound Facility PA system, separate internal audio system

Finishes Ceiling: Acoustic, ceiling height = variable 9’-12’



Walls:

Floor:

Painted gypsum board, durable to chair rail height

Carpet tile, durable TARR 3.5 rating (consider ability to be

cleaned after spills)

Furniture &

Equipment

• TBD -

• Upholstered chairs

• Folding card tables

• Stacking chairs

• Sofas/love seats

• End tables

• Floor lamps

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: C.19; Community Lounge Storage


Function Storage space for community lounge


Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Community Lounge



Special

Requirements

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlet


shut off.

None

None


Locked door

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed



Furniture &

Equipment

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: C.22; Community Misc. Mechanical & Electrical


Function Space for additional mechanical and electrical units required for community

component


Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Adjacent to spaces serving

Design Issues

Special

Requirements

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlet


shut off.

None

None


minimum conditioned air. HVAC to meet code requirements:

Cooling for electrical equipment and freeze protection for

water/fluid lines are required.

Locked door

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed

CMU

Sealed concrete

Furniture &

Equipment

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: C.23; Community Misc. Storage


Function Storage space for community lounge


Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 1

Adjacencies • Community Lounge



Special

Requirements

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlet


shut off.

None

None


Locked door

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed



Furniture &

Equipment

Environmental

Requirements



Miscellaneous Space Data Sheets

The following pages contain space data sheets for miscellaneous building spaces.



Data Sheet: M.1; Custodial

Building Component: Varies (Shared)

Function Storage for cleaning supplies and equipment

Net Area (varies, see program summary)

Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 3

Adjacencies • Natatorium Component

• Fitness Component

• Community Component

Design Issues • Storage items: paper supplies, cleaning supplies, mops, light bulbs, buffer and

vacuum cleaner

Special

Requirements

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlets


shut off.

None

None

Exhaust to remove odors

None

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed

CMU; Ceramic tile around mop sink to min. of 4’ high

Epoxy with floor drain

Furniture &

Equipment

• Lockable cabinet to store operations and maintenance manuals

• Floor sink with hot and cold water

• Storage Shelving

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: M.2; Tele-data

Building Component: Varies (Shared)

Function Closet for tele-data equipment

Net Area (varies, see program summary)

Capacity N/A

Number Req’d 4

Adjacencies • Natatorium Component

• Fitness Component

• Community Component

• Administration Component

Design Issues

Special

Requirements

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlet


shut off.

None

None

Reduce heat from equipment. Dedicated and properly sized

cooling system. Preferably variable refrigerant.

None

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Exposed

CMU

Sealed concrete

Furniture &

Equipment

Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: M.3; Typical Men’s Restrooms

Building Component: Miscellaneous (Shared)

Function General restrooms for the building components


Capacity N/A

Number Req’d To be confirmed

Adjacencies • Circulation and Prefunction space

Design Issues • Restrooms should be easy to find and entrance doors visible from public area;

doorless airport style

Special

Requirements

• Bathroom dividers that are graffiti proof

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlets


10 min shut off.

None

None


None

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Gypsum Board, acoustic material

Ceramic Tile

Ceramic Tile


Environmental

Requirements



Data Sheet: M.4; Typical Women’s Restrooms

Building Component: Miscellaneous (Shared)

Function General restrooms for the building components


Capacity N/A

Number Req’d To be confirmed

Adjacencies • Circulation and Prefunction space

Design Issues • Restrooms should be easy to find and entrance doors visible from public area;

doorless airport style

Special

Requirements

• Bathroom dividers that are graffiti proof

Systems Power

Lighting

Computer/Data

Telephone

HVAC

Security

Cable TV

A/V equipment

Sound System

Convenience outlets


10 min shut off.

None

None


None

None

None

None

Finishes Ceiling:

Walls:

Floor:

Gypsum Board, acoustic material

Ceramic Tile

Ceramic Tile


Environmental

Requirements



Tables of Furniture, Equipment, Telephone, and Computer Requirements

Furniture Requirements

Not used

Equipment Requirements

Not used

South County Regional Recreation and Aquatic Center Program of Requirements


6 Functional Criteria for Site

Site requirements

Vehicular access

A drop-off loop will be provided at the end of Apple Avenue and service access will be provided

on Fenwick Lane. The drop-off will be covered under the scope of the residential buildings.

Mechanical equipment room access off of exterior should not be located above garage or loading

dock driveway entries.

Pedestrian access and safety

Pedestrians will access the site mainly from Second Avenue and the central courtyard. A

Pedestrian Impact Study will need to be completed. Bike stations should be located near the

facility.

Parking spaces and basis of calculation

On-site parking for SCRRAC visitors will not be provided. Visitors to the facility can utilize street

parking and the adjacent Cameron Street parking garage. An estimated total of 400 parking

spaces will be required for a combined Regional Recreation Center - 150 for the Community

Recreation Center components and 250 for the aquatics component. These numbers and their

potential impact by the urban location and ample pedestrian/bike access will need to be

confirmed in a future traffic study.

8 parking spaces shall be provided to lease for County employees.

Drop-off

Discussed in previous section.

Functional areas

The central Elizabeth Square courtyard will be operated by HOC but available to users of the

SCRRAC. The utilization of this space will be further defined during the Schematic/Design

Development phases.

Utilities

Utility meters will be provided with separate meters from the residential buildings.

Outdoor furniture and equipment

Outdoor furniture and equipment for the SCRRAC will be designed by A/E and will be purchased

as FF&E for the SCRRAC.

Landscaping and security (including fencing)

None required.

Exterior lighting



Any exterior fixtures mounted to the exterior walls of the SCRRAC will be under the SCRRAC

scope.

Exterior signage and wayfinding

Any exterior signage for the SCRRAC that is attached to the building will be a part of the SCRRAC

scope. Exterior signage to be provided along Second Avenue. A double-sided sign is to be

provided at Georgia Avenue and Cameron Street.

County standard monument sign with digital message board shall be provided on the site in

addition to large scale building signage on Second Avenue to “brand” or announce the SCRRAC

occupies the block. Signage should be readily readable by moving cars along Second Avenue

along with large scale signage at Apple Avenue drop-off.



7 Technical Design Requirements (supplement to Design Manual)

Definitions

In this document the term ‘Design Manual’ refers to the Montgomery County Manual for Planning,

Design and Construction of Sustainable Buildings, Department of General Services, latest edition.

General Goals

Crime Prevention and Security

The exterior of the facility and site shall be designed to prevent crime utilizing the guidelines in

Design Manual, Section H, Crime Prevention Through Environmental Design (CPTED). These

guidelines include natural surveillance, territorial reinforcement, natural access control and

target hardening. In addition, an electronic security system including intrusion detection, access

control and video surveillance is to be installed in the facility.

System Acceptance Testing and Commissioning

System acceptance testing and commissioning shall be in compliance with the owner’s project

requirements and design intent documents. The commissioning authority must prepare a written

commissioning plan that identifies the processes, procedures, methods, and documentation for

each phase of the commissioning process for all types of active and passive systems and

equipment installed from concept through post-occupancy. The completed commissioning plan,

including all appendices, must form the commissioning record turned over at the end of the

construction phase. The commissioning plan shall include but not be limited to the following

systems: structure; envelope; automated window treatments; audio visual; conveying; fire

suppression; plumbing; mechanical; electrical; communications; electronic safety and security;

exterior improvements; and utilities.

General Building Codes, Regulations, and Standards

Codes

General

The project must meet all applicable local, state, and national codes in force at the time of

permit submission and Notice to Proceed for A/E team. At the time this Program of

Requirements was written it includes, but may not be limited to:

• Accessibility: COMAR (latest version), 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, Fair

Housing Accessibility Guidelines

• Commercial Building: International Building Code with Montgomery County

Amendments, Maryland Building Rehabilitation Code, COMAR (latest version) and

Executive Regulations

• Commercial Fuel Gas: International Fuel Gas Code with Montgomery County

Amendments



• Commercial Mechanical: International Mechanical Code with Montgomery County

Amendments, ASME and ANSI for mechanical pressure parts and vessels

• Electrical: National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) with Montgomery County Amendments

• Energy Conservation: International Energy Conservation Code with Montgomery

County Amendments

• Sustainability: International Green Construction Code with Montgomery County

Amendments

• Fire Alarm: National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code (NFPA 72) with Montgomery

County Amendments, COMAR NFPA 72, State of Maryland Fire Prevention Code

• Life Safety: Life Safety Code (NFPA 101) with Montgomery County Amendments,

COMAR NFPA 101, State of Maryland Fire Prevention Code

• Plumbing & Gas: Washington Suburban Sanitary Commission (WSSC) Plumbing & Fuel

Gas Code

• Commercial Sprinkler: Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems (NFPA 13)

with Montgomery County Amendments, COMAR NFPA 13, State of Maryland Fire

Prevention Code

• Pools:

o Code of Maryland, Chapter 51, Swimming Pools

o Title 10, Department of Health and Hygiene, Subtitle 17 – Sanitation, Chapter

01 – Public Swimming Pools and Spas

o Executive Regulation 61-91, Manual on Public Swimming Pool Construction,

Dated 23 April 1992, From Department of Health

o COMAR 09.12.63

o Amusement Ride Safety, Business Regulation Article, Title 3, Annotated Code

of Maryland

o Executive Regulation 4-95AM, Manual on Public Swimming Pool Operation,

Dated 24 June 1995, From Department of Health

• Montgomery County: Montgomery County Manual for Planning, Design, and

Construction of Sustainable Buildings, Version 2010.7

Specialty

Each item of food service equipment shall comply with the latest edition of the following

as applicable to the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of the work at the time of

permit submission.



• Each manufactured item and major items of custom-fabricated work: provide National

Sanitation Foundation (NSF) "Seal of Approval".

• Electrical components and assemblies: provide either U.L. labeled products or, where

no labeling service is available, provide a complete index of the components used as

selected from the UL "Recognized Component Index".

• Gas-burning equipment: ANSI Z21-Series standards.

• Compressed gas cylinder connections: ANSI B57.1 and applicable standards of the

Compressed Gas Association for water connection air gaps and vacuum breakers

• Gas-fired equipment: AGA Approved, equipped to operate on the type of gas available,

and shall contain 100% automatic safety shut-off devices.

• Exhaust systems: NFPA 96 and NFPA 17.

• Fire extinguishing systems: NFPA 96 and UL 300.

• Ventilation for exhaust hoods over cooking appliances: UL 710 and NFPA 96.

• Steam generating and steam-heated equipment: provide ASME inspection, stamps,

and certification of registration with National Board.

• Electrical wiring and devices included with food service equipment: NEC Volume 5.

• Food service facilities: Code of Maryland Regulations COMAR 10.15.03

Regulations

The project must meet all applicable local, state, and national regulations in force at the time of

permit submission.

Other Authorities Having Jurisdiction

• MDE Maryland Department of the Environment

• M-NCPPC Maryland-National Capital Park and Planning Commission

• USACE US Army Corps of Engineers

• WSSC Washington Suburban Sanitary Commission

• WMATA Washington Metropolitan Area Transit Authority

• DOT Department of Transportation

• DPS Department of Permitting Services

Sustainability Regulations

The project is to be designed in accordance with Montgomery County Green Buildings Law,

Montgomery County Code, Chapter 8, Article 7, and must achieve a LEED Silver rating,

however, the project will strive to meet LEED Gold certification requirements.

The project will be third party reviewed and certified using the United States Green Building

Council (USGBC) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED) criteria. The LEED

building rating system uses seven categories in which projects can obtain credits to

achieve certification (Sustainable Sites, Water Efficiency, Energy & Atmosphere, Materials &



Resources, Indoor Environmental Quality and Innovation & Design Process, and Regional

Priority). The four levels of certification (from highest to lowest) are, Platinum, Gold, Silver

and Certified. The credit threshold for each level of certification varies for different rating

systems. To qualify for certification a project must meet certain prerequisite credits. The

number of additional credits required is dependent on the level of certification that the

project is seeking to attain.

Montgomery County, Maryland requires new construction over 10,000 sf to be LEED

certified at the Silver level. The most appropriate LEED system for new construction of a

Regional Recreation Center is currently LEED-New Construction (NC) version v4.

Design decisions shall be considered to take advantage of the local environment in an effort

to optimize energy efficiency and minimize negative impact on the site, especially with

regard to storm water. Interior materials and finishes shall be specified as “low-emitting” to

avoid potential negative impacts to human respiratory health and comfort. Solar orientation

and fenestration design is to explore the feasibility of large north and south facing windows,

clerestory windows and/or light ‘chases’ to bring in natural light while avoiding glare as well

as highlighting views to the exterior. Pervious surfaces are to be incorporated and

vegetated roof shall be considered as part of the storm water management efforts.

Methods of water reuse and recycling, especially from pools, are to be explored and

implemented where possible.

Accessibility Regulations

The new building and access to it shall be fully compliant with the 2010 ADA Standards for

Accessible Design. Provide an accessible “path of travel” from 2nd Avenue right-of-way to

the building entrance through the central plaza. From the building entrance into and

through the building, provide an accessible route to connect each floor and each

department. Special care shall be taken to ensure that all toilet rooms are fully and

universally accessible and proper door clearances to all rooms are provided.

Include construction tolerances within all accessible design solutions. All ADA criteria with a

range tolerance shall be designed to the middle of the tolerance range. All dimensions must

include the compounded tolerances required by all trades completing the component.

Cross slopes shall not be designed past 1.5 percent. Bathroom grab bars shall be longer

than the minimum required length. Bathroom stalls hall be at least 1" larger than the

minimums.

Facility to exceed standard threshold for accessible design where possible within

construction budget.

Standards

Utility Standards



All systems and components shall be designed in accordance with standards developed by

the following organizations, and in effect at the time of permit submission:

• Comcast

• Potomac Electric Power Company [Alleghany Power Company] [Potomac Edison

Power Company] (PEPCO)

• Verizon Communications

• Washington Gas

• Montgomery County Department of Technology Services

• Washington Suburban Sanitary Commission (WSSC)

Reference Standards

All systems and components shall be designed in accordance with the following standards in

effect at the time of permit submission:

• Design Manual - Montgomery County Manual for Design and Construction of

Sustainable Buildings – latest edition

• Sign Manual - Montgomery County Department of General Services Manual of

Exterior Sign Standards for County Facilities– latest edition

• Sign Guidelines - Montgomery County Department of General Services Manual of

Interior Sign Standards for County Facilities– latest edition

Industry Standards

Not used

Accreditation Standards

Not used

Building Structure (excluding foundations)

The SCRRAC program will be contained in a tall ground level story extending under an adjacent

residential tower and a landscaped plaza area between the two towers. The SCRRAC will be

supported by concrete framing for 3 levels of underground parking below.

Deflection Criteria

The structure will be designed to meet the requirements of the International Building Code with

Montgomery County Code Amendments. The structure will meet the deflection requirements of

IBC and the long term deflection requirements of ACI 318 as referenced in IBC.

Floor Live Loads:

• Residential 40 psf + 20psf partitions



• Public Space 100 psf

• Corridors 100 psf

• Storage (medium density) 125 psf

• Roof Load 30 psf

• Lobbies and Stairwells 100 psf

• Mechanical rooms (unless actual weight of

equipment is provided) 125 psf

• Plaza 100 psf

• Occupied Roof Areas 100 psf

• Design Live loads will be reduced as permitted by the Building Code

Superimposed Dead Loads:

• Concrete, masonry or brick walls actual weight of wall

• Exterior cladding or curtain wall actual weight of wall

• Plaza paving and soil actual weight of material

Wind Loads:

• Design wind speed (3-second gust) 115 mph

• Risk Category II

• Wind Exposure Category B

• Internal Pressure Coefficient +/- 0.18 (Enclosed)

• Building is not located within a wind-borne debris region

Seismic Loads:

• Seismic Site Classification: C

• Short Period Spectral Response Acceleration (SS) 0.119g

• 1 Second Spectral Acceleration (S1) 0.051g

• Site Coefficient (Fa) 1.60

• Site Coefficient (Fv) 2.40

• 0.2 Second Maximum Spectral Response (SMS) 0.191g

• 1.0 Second Maximum Spectral Response (SM1) 0.122g

• 0.2 Design Spectral Response Acceleration (SDS) 0.127g

• 1.0 Design Spectral Response Acceleration (SD1) 0.082g

• Seismic Design Category (SDC) A

Description of the General Structural Systems

Foundation

Foundations will not be covered under the scope of the SCRRAC.

Parking and Driving Surfaces: Below Grade and Elevated

Not used.

Occupied Areas: Slab on Grade



Not used.

Occupied Floors: Structural Floors

The structure will consist of cast-in-place reinforced concrete framing in the residential

tower, at the SCRRAC, at in the garage levels below grade. A cast-in-place concrete

structure offers the thinnest floor slab and consequently, the shortest floor to floor

heights of any structural system which is critical to maximize the number of residential

units given the building height limits. Cast in place concrete will achieve a 2 hour fire

rating without the need for spray-on fire proofing or intumescent paint, is well suited to

supporting heavy loads, and also has good vibration performance which is ideal for

structures supporting dancing, basketball, aerobics, or other similar activities.

Because of the SCRRAC programming below the towers and a desire for open space, an

investigation will be performed with a number of different column layouts to find a

balance between efficiency and slab spans in the tower structures and the number of

column transfers required above the SCRRAC.

A cast-in-place concrete system is well suited for an aquatic center because there is no

steel exposed to the corrosive environment associated with chemical laden water and

humidity typical of indoor pools. To ensure longevity of the structure, there are a number

of measures that can be employed to provide additional protection for the reinforcing

steel including; using corrosion inhibiting admixtures in the concrete mix, increasing the

concrete cover over the reinforcing steel, using epoxy coated or galvanized reinforcing

steel, and using fully encapsulated post-tensioning tendons – all are typical measure for

enhancing the corrosion resistance of concrete structures exposed to harsh environments.

The slabs above the pool will be post-tensioned and will therefore have reduced long term

deflections, very little cracking, and fewer entry points for corrosive elements to reach the

reinforcing steel. They will be the same 7” to 8” thick and will be integral with much

deeper concrete transfer girders where those are required. A uniform thickness transfer

slab will be investigated in lieu of individual transfer girders if there are an excessive

number of columns transferred above the SCRRAC.

The slabs supporting the SCRRAC program will be mild reinforced cast-in-place concrete

slabs due to the large number of steps, recesses, trench drains, and pool depressions

which make post-tensioning significantly more difficult and typically not feasible. The mild

reinforced slab will be covered with a hot fluid applied waterproofing on its surface and

there will be a concrete topping slab above the waterproofing for the pool deck. There

will be shotcrete applied outside of the waterproofing membrane to construct the walls of

the pools. The waterproofing will have the ability to bridge over minor concrete cracking

and prevent water from reaching the reinforcing steel in the slabs and beams. Because of

the waterproofing, additional corrosion protection measures for the concrete are not

required, but could be used if the owner would like additional redundancy.



All activity rooms and gyms must have the slabs analyzed for resonance and deflections

due to activities in the room. Floors shall not have a bouncy feel like in parking garages.

The parking levels will be framed with an 8” thick mild reinforced, two-way, flat slab

system with 6 ¼” deep drop panels. This system is typically the most cost effective system

for below grade construction because post-tensioning requires access at the slab edge to

stress the tendons after the concrete is cast. This project will have cast-in-place concrete

basement walls cast directly against drainage board and waterproofing applied to the face

of the sheeting and shoring which makes stressing at the edge of the slab impossible. To

pull all tendons to the interior of the structure would require stressing pockets or pour

strips which are costly and give water and deicing chemicals a pathway into the slab

increasing the likelihood of future corrosion and deterioration.

Exterior basement wall drainage board will be connected to through wall weeps that will

be connected to the under-slab drainage system.

The lateral system for the structures will be ordinary reinforced concrete shear walls

located at stairs and elevator cores.

Columns

Cast-in-place concrete columns will support the concrete framing. At the SCRRAC there is

a need for column free space at the Gymnasium, Social Hall, and at the Competition Pool.

There is also a desire to minimize columns in the natatorium, although some columns are

acceptable. To reconcile the column grid of the residential tower above and the SCRRAC

programming, a large number of transfer girders will be required. See section 1.1.2.1 for

more discussion of the transfer framing options.

Roof

The structure above the SCRRAC will typically be the cast-in-place post-tensioned transfer

level of the residential tower above. The portions of the SCRRAC between the two tower

structures will most likely consist of long span post-tensioned concrete beams and one-

way post-tensioned slabs supporting heavy loading associated with green roof,

landscaping swales, and possibly mechanical rooms. The surface of the slabs will be

sloped to drains. Any MEP items secured to the underside of the slab will be anchored to

hot dip galvanized steel plates cast into the concrete during the slab pour.

Façade

The building facades will be supported at each level by the structural slab edge. Long

term deflections at the slab edges are typically limited to 5/8” max vertically, but will be

designed to lower deflection requirements if façade materials dictate tighter

requirements. Brick or other masonry veneer systems will be supported on steel shelf

angles at each slab edge. Panelized systems and masonry veneer systems will have cold

formed metal stud back-up framing resisting lateral forces. Curtainwall systems will clear



span vertically between adjacent slab edges where they will anchor to embeds in the slab

edge.

Construction Materials

Steel Joists: N/A

Structural Steel: There will be miscellaneous structural steel for canopies, shade

structures, lintels at large openings, tall curtainwall bracing, or other miscellaneous

curtainwall locations. Significant amounts of structural steel framing are not anticipated

as part of the main structure.

Concrete: The majority of the structure will be cast-in-place concrete, either mild

reinforced or post-tensioned. Slabs will be 5000 psi concrete, columns will be 5000 psi to

7000 psi as required, and reinforced concrete shear walls will be 5000 psi to 7000 psi as

required.

Architecture

Building envelope (General)

The exterior materials for this building shall be durable, low maintenance and vandal resistant.

As such we would envision the use of masonry products mixed with metal panels and a high

percentage of curtain wall and glass storefront. Glass areas will be used to provide day lighting,

invite the public in as well as monitor activities. Thru the use of glass, the building will be easier

to supervise, secure and provide natural light for the users and staff.

The building envelope shall consist of exterior masonry bearing walls, thermally broken

aluminum windows with insulated glass and light colored roofing materials. Exterior walls shall

be designed to provide a thermal envelope utilizing CMU bearing walls, cavity insulation, either

rigid or spray foam, and an air and vapor barrier within the cavity on the warm side of the

insulation, and durable long lasting exterior materials. Exterior materials shall be low

maintenance and highly vandal resistant such as brick, metal, and simulated stone, suitable to

meet the function of the building and the aesthetics of the adjoining neighborhoods.

The facility’s composite envelope design must ensure prevention of natatorium/pool chlorine-

laden moisture seepage and migration to outside to prevent freezing in winter months. Project

A/E to provide calculation of saturation/condensation temperature within various layers of the

outside envelope wall.

Exterior Enclosure Construction

• The building is to be constructed of materials and systems proven to endure the

passage of time with an expected lifespan of 50 years minimum.

• All exterior building materials shall be factory finished and require no future

maintenance.

Rough Carpentry



Not used

Below grade waterproofing

• Provide sheet applied materials at levels above the known ground water table

indicated by the geotechnical report.

• Levels below the mean ground water level shall be evaluated for more robust

composite waterproofing systems such bentonite/KEE materials.

• Plaza decks over occupied space shall be considered waterproofing. Hot fluid

applied modified bitumen waterproofing on concrete with appropriate drainage

and thermal insulation layers is the preferred approach.

Air and Moisture Barriers

• Provide continuous vapor permeable air barrier systems utilizing fluid or sheet

applied primary materials, with a full palette of transition and detailing

accessories from the same manufacturers.

• Include moisture barrier at concrete slabs within wet atmospheres.

• The entire envelope (walls, ceilings, floors) must have a dew point/water vapor

migration analysis completed for each different construction type.

Thermal Barriers

• Provide continuous thermal insulation utilizing materials appropriate to the wall

elements to be insulated. Utilize continuous insulation outboard of the weather

resistant barrier in walls as much as possible.

• Preferred wall insulations include extruded polystyrene, rigid mineral wool, and

sprayed polyurethane foam.

• Utilize spray foam insulation to prevent thermal bridging at transitions; the use of

less durable fiberglass batt insulation is discouraged.

• Special provisions should be made for areas around the natatorium and pools.

Wall Claddings

• Masonry veneer with cavity wall and masonry back up are the preferred systems.

• Other wall claddings include insulated metal panels, fiber cement siding, terra

cotta rain screen systems, and composite metal panel systems.

Roofing

• Specify roof insulation thickness, not minimum R-values.

• Single penetration roof drains that combine overflow and primary roof drainage

into one assembly are preferred. Primary roof drains with overflow scuppers at

walls are also acceptable.



• Roof top equipment is to be minimized. All roof top equipment shall be screened

from view using screen walls or enclosed penthouses. MEP roof equipment for

SCRRAC will be located on residential tower roofs utilizing shared shafts with

residential. Screening will be provided for SCRRAC and residential equipment on

roof.

• Provide permanent guardrails at roof edges in accordance with MOSHA and OSHA

fall protection standards for maintenance of roof top equipment; avoid horizontal

railings such as cable railing that allow individuals to climb guardrails. Top of rails

shall be 43” in lieu of 42” to allow for construction tolerances; specify minimum

48” height for fall protection at heights exceeding two stories.

• Glass shall not be used for canopy roofs due to inability to maintain a clean

appearance.

• Vegetated roofing systems will be used as a part of stormwater management

requirements

• The roofing steel structure and girders exposed to natatorium environment must

be protected against paint layer(s) peeling off and exposing bare steel to

natatorium environment.

Fenestration

• Thermally broken aluminum framed storefront or curtain wall system

• Fixed windows shall be provided regardless of occupancy or building use

• Unit Skylights shall meet the minimum requirements of AAMA Performance Class

CW 60.

Glazing:

• Consider less expensive glazing where personal comfort is not required

• Avoid reflective glass that may contribute to a higher incidence of bird collisions.

Doors:

• Heavy duty automatic sliding doors with breakout for emergency at all primary

and secondary entrances – ability to lock down and/or use with controlled access

• Storefront doors in aluminum frames at public exit doors

• Hollow metal in hollow metal frames at utility spaces

Hardware:

• Continuous stainless steel hinges

• Provide hardware resistant to corrosive wet atmospheres in Natatorium area



Interiors

Materials and Systems

Metal railings

• Horizontal railings other than handrails and top rails at guardrails are not

allowed; these pose a risk in terms of climbing.

• When dimensioning handrails at stairs, pay particular attention to Executive

Regulations for required distance between face of wall and handrail. Coordinate

with maximum amount IBC allows railings to project into stair and adjust width

of stair and rail profile accordingly.

Architectural woodwork, cabinetry and countertops

• All millwork shall be custom fabricated, finished and installed in accordance with

Premium-grade Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS).

• All cabinets shall be vertical grade plastic laminate with plastic laminate edge

banding. Wood veneer is not allowed. Cabinet and drawer faces in wood-grain

laminates shall follow AWS Premium standards for book matched, center balance

matched in a sequenced set with continuous match where interrupted

perpendicular to the grain, unless agreed otherwise by DGS.

• Cabinet doors shall have institutional grade hinges (European vs. offset barrel

type in all but perhaps highly utilitarian spaces), and drawers shall have heavy

duty glides.

• Melamine (low pressure laminate) will be allowed on vertical interior surfaces of

cabinets, however all horizontal surfaces shall be plastic laminate. Cabinet

materials shall be selected carefully to coordinate with standard (or custom)

melamine colors and edge banding.

• Countertops shall be solid surface or engineered stone material at all general and

work areas (including pantries, lavatories, work counters, transaction ledges,

etc.). Stainless steel counters are required on both sides of commercial grade

ranges and shall have continuous turned-up edge adjacent to range as well as

continuous full-height backsplash. Plastic laminate or recycled material

countertops will be allowed in very limited areas and only with express

permission by DGS. Countertop edge shall be square: corners may be slightly

eased on solid surface and stainless steel tops.

• Window sills shall be solid surface or engineered stone material.

• Storage in non-kitchen spaces must have at least one of each type of storage

within the reach range but it is permissible to provide additional storage outside

the reach range. Sinks in these spaces must have knee and toe space.



Pantry/kitchen wall and base cabinets shall be provided with 50 percent of

storage, and cabinet pulls serving them, between 15 inches minimum to 48

inches maximum AFF. Total shelf and drawer space shall be measured along

front of shelf or drawer and shall be within the reach range. Endeavor to provide

4’-6” minimum of linear storage ideally within a minimum of one base cabinet

shelf positioned at 15 ½” AFF.

Firestopping

Firestopping will be provided as required by code.

Doors and Frames

Refer to space data sheets in Chapter 5 for specific application, location and assemblies.

Hardware:

Provide hardware resistant to wet atmospheres in Natatorium area. Refer to space data

sheets in Chapter 5 for specific application, location and assemblies.

Partitions:


Glazing


Ceilings:

Ceiling types include acoustical ceiling tile, gypsum board, moisture-resistant gypsum

board, feature elements (wood, etc.) and exposed.

Floor Finishes:

Floor finishes include ceramic or porcelain tile, resilient flooring, wood flooring, athletic

rubber, and carpet. All flooring materials to be durable. See space data sheets in Section 5

for information on slip-resistant qualities and locations of flooring types.

Wall Finishes:

Wall finishes to be painted gypsum board, painted concrete masonry units, ceramic tile,

and feature elements (wood, etc.). Paints and coatings to be high quality latex paint, with

scrubbable qualities in public areas. Where gypsum wall board is used in public spaces, it

must be abuse resistant drywall up to 8 feet above the floor.

Natatorium Finishes:

Materials in pool areas and directly adjacent must be anticorrosive. Structure rebar must

be epoxy coated to avoid spalling of concrete. Building structure must be designed for

deflections associated with draining and filling the pool. Provide the specific deflection

criteria for floors, walls and columns during both conditions. AE must indicate coatings

must be designed to avoid peeling, performance requirements to be defined during

design.



Specialties, Equipment & Furnishings

Specialties

Visual Display Surfaces

Not used

Display, Directories, Signage and Wayfinding

All signage must be provided in accordance with the DGS Manual of Exterior Sign

Standards for County Facilities and the to-be-published Interior Signage Standards for

County Facilities.

Toilet Compartments

Design shall be floor-mounted, overhead-braced. Partitions in locker rooms serving the

pool should be HPDE – metal or phenolic are prohibited.

Operable Partitions:

Electrically operated, vertical, acoustical panel partitions with STC of not less than 51.

System including structural support shall be complete with all hardware, lifting

equipment, safety equipment and testing.

Toilet Accessories

All fixtures within the Natatorium to be able to withstand a wet atmosphere.

Lockers and Benches

Benches within locker room to be centered on floor and not attached to lockers.

Flagpoles

Not used

Equipment

Maintenance Equipment Requirements

Mechanical spaces not on grade to have double doors to exterior with material hoist

where required. Material hoist will be retractable from wall and hidden from view when

not in use.

Residential Kitchen Appliances, Food Cooking Equipment, Ice Machines

Not used

Residential Laundry Appliances

Not used

Audio Video Equipment

See space data sheets in Section 5 for audio visual requirements for each space.

Athletic and Recreational Equipment



Department of recreation to provide fitness equipment for exercise rooms.

Food Service Equipment

Commercial appliances will be provided in the Kitchen, to be determined during

Schematic Design.

Furnishings

Window Treatment

All exterior windows to be provided with roller shades and appropriate housings such as

pocket recessed in ceiling or surface mounted with fascia.

Furnishings and Accessories (clocks, waste receptacles)

Clocks to be provided as part of base contract. Waste receptacles to be provided in FF&E.

Entrance mats

Provide entrance mat systems at all primary and secondary facility entrances and building

entrances from exterior or vehicle zones such as apparatus bay(s) and parking structures.

Furniture

To be provided as FF&E.

Site Furnishings

Basebuilding site furnishings will be provided by HOC. Exterior patio furniture to be

provided by SCRRAC.

Special Construction and Conveying Equipment

Special Construction – Natatorium Design

Competition Pool

The 25-meter x 25-yard pool will accommodate competitive swimming; 10 competition

lanes at 25 meters and 11 cross lanes at 25 yards for competition or fitness. This pool will

also be used for swimming instruction as well as recreational and fitness swimming. To

satisfy the variety of program requirements of the SCRRAC, multiple simultaneous uses

must be scheduled at different times throughout the day. For example, several lanes can

be available for lap swimming at the same time as diving or other deep water activities, or

the lanes may be divided to allow some lap swimming while swim instruction is underway.

If a dual swim meet is taking place all other activities in this pool will be suspended.

Consideration must be given to a pool scheduling, to provide significant flexibility in

program use.

The lane configurations must conform to US Swimming and Diving and local health codes.

The dimensions of the Main Pool shall be:



• Length – 82’-0 1/4' = 25 meter course with wired connections for timing

touch pads at one end.

• Width - 75’ = 25 yard course with timing touch pads at one end.

• Depth- 6' at the shallow end, sloping to 13' at deep end.

• Receded toe ledge at 40” depth around entire pool

ADA stairs into the shallow end of the completion pool shall be an area approximately 4’-

0” X 5’-0” outside the rectangle of the recreation pool with access into the pool located so

as not to interfere with the ends of the competition lanes.

Lanes - Provide the following:

• Ten (10) racing lanes 25 yards long with quelling lane line buffers on the

outside walls.

• Diving well located at the end of the 25 yard lanes.

• Starting blocks at the end of the 25 yard lanes at the diving well to allow

starts off starting blocks in deep water.

• Fitness lanes 25 meters long across the 25 yard lanes.

• Recessed rope anchors and non-slip targets for lanes in both directions.

• Allow for backstroke pennants across the width of pool at both ends in

both directions allowing for all possible swim courses.

Diving Area:

The diving area will be used for diving training and competition as well as recreational

swimming, non-competitive training (Fire & Rescue), water polo, synchronized swimming,

scuba, water safety instruction, deep water running,. Ceilings must conform to US Diving

specifications regarding diving apparatus.

• Provide (2) 1 meter and (2) 3 meter springboards.

• Structural support for diving equipment should be as unobtrusive as

possible to allow for good deck circulation around starting blocks.

• Springboards should be equal to Arcadia Products Maxiflex B or Durafirm

with short stands on concrete bases or platform.

• Provide space on the main pool deck for dive team dry land drills and

trampoline area.

• Provide surface agitators under each diving board so divers can see water

surface.



Swimming Pool Gutters:

• Overflow pool gutters should be a prefabricated stainless steel overflow

system with a handhold and grate over the gutter trough. Side gutters

should have rollout profile. The end gutters should have a fully recessed

trough. The gutter system should include multiple converters, return line

channel and rapid water level recovery system.

• An “Evacuator” type air exhaust system shall be incorporated into the

gutter system.

The interior finish of the pool should be either ceramic tile or a combination of Quartz

plaster and ceramic tile, with markings in ceramic tile. Ceramic tile is the most desirable

system, because of the greater lifecycle compared to the quartz plaster. A complete tile

interior is considered the best finish because of its durability and appearance.

Miscellaneous Equipment and Requirements:

• Recessed pool ladders with non-slip treads and pretzel bend grab rails.

• The deck should be entirely surfaced with non-skid tile.

• Removable therapeutic stairs for the main pool, one in deep water and one in

shallow water.

• Mechanical lifts for assisting persons with disabilities access the pools.

• Portable stainless steel guard chairs with non-slip treads, as per code.

• Complete electronic timing system including automatic scoreboard with a I0-

lane readout on wall behind starting end, touch pads, console, and starter, etc.

• Recessed toe ledge at the 40" depth in deep water.

• Built-in stairs at shallow end, as noted in 1. above.

• Lane rope reels and lane lines - all courses.

• Approved rescue tubes for each guard stand.

• Two backboards with straps.

• Safety line of ¾ inch synthetic rope with floats and float keepers for each

transition.

• Pool vacuum system that operates off recirculation pumps.

• 24’ foot telescoping aluminum commercial grade vacuum poles (3 reg.).

• Fully automatic pool bottom vacuum cleaner.

• Portable electric vacuum system.



Provide the following clocks: Very large time-of-day clocks on the natatorium walls that

can be easily seen by all users, Electric pace clocks for lap swimmers in all swim courses

located on the pool walls approximately 7 feet high and 15 ft. from each end of the pool.

Leisure Pool

The leisure pool complements the main pool so that all patrons including senior citizens,

people with disabilities and children not comfortable in the main pool have a warm water,

shallow recreation space.

The free-form water area dimensions and configuration should be determined in design.

The pool shall have a beached zero-entry, in a free form configuration with a maximum

depth of 3.5 feet.

Broad shallow steps with appropriate grab rails and railings should be provided with

treads at least 18" deep and risers approximately 8" high. Edges of treads must be clearly

marked.

Provide views and access to the outside, natural lighting, interior landscaping, graphics,

and interesting tile work. Consider also the use of cascades or fountains. Include a quiet

pool area for infants.

The pool and deck should be entirely surfaced with non-skid tile.

An “Evacuator” type air exhaust shall be incorporated into the gutter system.

The pool shall have a separate filter system and temperature control.

Continuous perimeter stainless steel radius deck level gutters should be used.

This provides the water surface in the leisure pool to be flush with the surrounding deck.

Provides an attractive and inviting appearance. Provide tile benches on the pool deck that

surrounds the leisure pool. Provide deck space for instruction of small groups.

Provide recessed hose bibs, one of which should have hot water, with anti-scalding

device.

Include tile graphics for pool floor and underwater benches.

Provide interactive water features such as kiddie slides, water umbrellas, tumble buckets,

etc.

Therapy Pool

The “therapy” pool is a separate tank of relatively warm water that can be used for

aerobics, exercise, stretching, and various types of aquatic therapy. This pool will have a

separate filter system to allow independent operation and temperature control. The

“Therapy” pool provides a safe and effective medium to exercise for individuals that may

not be able to tolerate the usual treatment/movements 'on land'. In water exercise offers



hydrostatic pressure to enable strengthening in a pain free environment; improves ability

to balance; creates the ability to move stiff joints through greater ranges of motion.

Accessories and exercise aides in the therapy pool may include:

• An underwater bench at the shallower areas;

• Additional anchors (sleeves) in the pool floor that allow alternate locations of the

exercise bars;

• Removable exercise bars/stands

Spa

Spas should be ADA accessible by built-in transfer wall.

Spa pools may be nested with the leisure pool and therapy pools.

Incorporate outside views and if possible, natural lighting, interior landscaping, and

graphics.

These pools may also be on a different level from the main pool and visually open to the

main pool volume.

Provide bench jets at different heights or possibly rotating jets.

Water temperature should range from 100°F to 104°F.

The hydrotherapy pool, walls, and deck should be entirely tiled. (See Main Pool)

Provide a gravity drain.

Provide a connection to the leisure pool for rapid refilling.

Provide towel buttons and tiled benches near each pool.

The spas will have a separate filter system.

Purification Systems

Competition pool and leisure pool:

• Rapid sand filters shall be used

• An “Evacuator” type air exhaust system shall be incorporated into the gutter

system.

Spa and Therapy Pool:

• Sand filters with skimmers.

• An “Evacuator” type air exhaust system mounted in the deck trench drain should

be considered.



• Turnover rate for the Therapy pool: Minimum 4 hour turnover rate. Turnover rate

of 2.5 to 3 hours preferred.

• Turnover rate for the Spa shall be 15 minutes.

All pools shall have UV water disinfectant purification systems.

All pump motors shall have variable frequency drives.

Chemical treatment system components:

• Use of liquid chlorine or pellets possible for spas.

• Chemical controller.

• CO2 pH feed system.

Conveying Equipment

Vertical Circulation

The SCRRAC shall have circulation separated from the residential program. The residents shall

not have direct access into the facility. All elevators and stairs shall be separate. Egress only

stairs may be shared with alarmed egress and card control access to ensure complete separation

of circulation. There shall be at least 1 vertical stair connecting all floors of the SCRRAC for

internal circulation and shall be sized to accommodate occupant loading and an additional stair

to connect lobby to 2nd floor. All stair doors shared between SCRRAC and residential program

shall have alarms and cameras monitored by County.

A minimum of 2 paired elevators must serve all levels of the SCRRAC. They shall not be used by

the residential component of the building. Elevators must be sized to accommodate occupant

loads by a vertical transportation consultant. The service elevator can be shared with the

residential component. The service elevator shall be able to accommodate 8' long stacked table

carts. All elevators shall have card readers in the cabs and at each floor with the capability to

lock out individual floors electronically by staff (not an elevator mechanic). Elevators shall not be

machine room less variety. Service elevator shall serve any mechanical mezzanine spaces.

Service elevator should be up 1-4" above the natatorium level so water spills do not flow down

hallway into service elevator shaft

Fire Suppression

Provide complete fire protection systems meeting the requirements of NFPA, IBC, State of Maryland

and Montgomery County Codes. Provide a fire protection system for the Rec Center facility that is

separate from the systems for the adjoining Elizabeth House III and future Elizabeth House IV

buildings.

Pipe

Sprinkler piping: Piping shall be Schedule 40 and Schedule 10 black steel, as required, (depending

on size) with cast iron screwed, steel butt welded or mechanical couplings, or copper pipe with



solder joints. Dry pipe sprinkler piping shall be Schedule 40 and Schedule 10, galvanized, as

required, for corrosion resistance

Sprinklers

Provide a combined standpipe/automatic sprinkler system for the Rec Center facility. The system

shall be hydraulically designed per NFPA 13. Systems not exposed to freezing shall be wet pipe.

Sprinkler systems shall be fed from standpipe connections at each floor level.

Areas of the facility exposed to freezing and requiring sprinklers shall be served by dry-pipe

sprinkler systems.

Sprinkler systems shall be designed for the following hazards:

o Office areas, lobbies, common Public spaces and corridors: Light hazard.

o Equipment, storage and similar rooms: Ordinary Hazard

o Pool area: Ordinary Hazard

Sprinkler heads in lobbies, corridors and similar public areas shall be concealed type, white finish.

Sprinkler heads in mechanical rooms and areas without ceilings and no corrosive atmosphere

shall be upright brass finish.

Sprinkler heads within the pool area, including the pool equipment room shall be of corrosion

resistant materials.

Standpipe systems

Standpipes shall conform to NFPA 14, and will be provided in each stair tower with 2 ½ inch

pressure regulating fire hose valves and sprinkler floor control valve assemblies at each

intermediate floor landing. Piping will be schedule 40 or schedule 10 steel (depending on size)

with welded, screwed or mechanical coupled joints.

The standpipes shall be interconnected per NFPA 14. This requirement shall be confirmed with

the Fire Marshal before implementation.

Fire Department Connections

Provide a fire department connection for the facility. The location of the connection shall be

coordinated with the Fire Marshal.

Fire Pump / Jockey Pump

Provide a single, electric, horizontal split-case fire pump for the Rec Center facility conforming to

NFPA 20 to supplement city pressure. The fire pump shall have electric motor drive, centrifugal,

single stage with factory assembled controller with automatic transfer switch. Fire pump starter

shall be of the reduced voltage type. Provide a jockey pump with factory assembled controller

for each fire pump.



A water service room is required to accommodate the fire/jockey pump for the facility. The

water service room shall contain the reduced pressure backflow preventer and in-line check

valve on the incoming (8”) eight inch fire service main. The fire pump will require a test manifold

at grade, the exact location to be determined.



Plumbing

General

The plumbing systems shall be developed in concert with the engineering solutions developed for the

whole complex and shall be coordinated with the systems serving the tower and garage spaces.

With respect to the Aquatics area, the plumbing solutions developed for the Germantown Indoor

Swim Center are to be considered as general design guidance as to the design intent for this facility.

With respect to the Recreation areas, the plumbing solutions developed for the North Potomac

Community Recreation Center are to be considered general design guidance as to the design intent for

this facility.

All exposed piping shall be color code painted according to the County's standard color system.

Sanitary Drainage and Vent

A new sanitary drainage system serving the new plumbing fixtures shall be installed. The sanitary

system will receive waste from all plumbing fixtures in the facility and the Pool Backwash System.

All sanitary waste and vent piping serving the pool area, subject to the pool chemicals and pool

water and below slab-on-grade, shall be schedule 40 solid wall PVC. The sanitary waste and vent

piping serving the toilet areas and other areas not affected by the pool chemicals and in a return

air plenum condition shall be cast iron hubless piping.

Storm Water Drainage

A new storm water drain line will be brought to a point 5'-0" from the building exterior wall

(under another Division). At this point and under this Division, connections will be made to the

drainage line and same will be extended into the facility for distribution. The storm system will

receive water from the roof and water drained from the pool deck and from the pool equipment

room. A/E to explore ways to use the pool water and water treatment flushing in a "green" way

to save water. These options should be explored in schematic design based on pool water being

expelled annually.

Domestic Cold Water

Water Service

A domestic water service main will be routed to the facility. The main will be metered separately

with a WSSC meter. The main will serve the pool equipment, pool water make-up and all

associated plumbing fixtures for the facility.

The fill line to the pool will be sized to fill the pool within two (2) days.

Hot and cold water will be extended to and serve the plumbing fixtures and equipment as

required. All domestic water piping will be copper Type L with wrought copper fittings and

lead-free 95-5 solder. All water piping shall be insulated with the exception of non-handicapped

final branch run-outs for connection to fixtures/equipment.



Backflow preventers and vacuum breakers will be provided to prevent back siphonage and

contamination of the potable water system.

Freezeproof wall hydrants shall be located in areas subject to freezing and hose bibbs will be

provided within the pool areas and other areas of the facility as required for washdown and

maintenance.

Domestic Hot Water with Recirculation

Domestic Hot water will be provided with gas fired storage tank type heaters manifolded

together such that if one water heater fails, the remaining heater will have the capacity to

operate 100% of the demand. The domestic hot water piping system will be a circulating system

with pumps.

Plumbing Fixtures

All plumbing fixtures are to be included. Fixtures shall be water-conserving type unless noted

otherwise, and shall be good commercial grade white vitreous china, of institutional quality. All

flushing valves shall be battery operated sensor type, for hands free operation.

Toilet carriers must be minimum 500 lb capacity. All shutoffs must be easily accessible with ball

valves. Access doors shall be located architecturally inside of stalls or above the ceilings (eye

level access doors at the urinals/sinks). Riser diagram shall clearly indicate additional piping

required to properly mount valves and water hammer arrestors.

Natural Gas

Gas service will be provided to the facility to serve pool water heating equipment, domestic

water heating equipment and select HVAC equipment. The piping will be schedule 40 black steel

with corrosion resistant paint.

Mechanical

General

This section has been covered under HVAC.

Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning (HVAC)

General

The HVAC system shall be developed in concert with the engineering solutions developed for the

whole complex and shall be coordinated with the systems serving the tower and garage spaces.

Mechanical and electrical systems shall be reasonably separated from the residential buildings to

the greatest extent possible.

With respect to the Aquatics area, the HVAC solutions developed for the Germantown Indoor

Swim Center are to be considered as general design guidance as to the design intent for this

facility. Notable systems from the Germantown Indoor Swim Center to be implemented at this

location include:

• Dedicated pool dehumidification air handling units.



• Energy recovery units as deemed necessary for proper operation of the system as well as

to meet sustainability requirements.

• Natural gas fired boilers for the heating system.

• Appropriate ventilation fans for boiler rooms, chemical storage, pool filter rooms, as well

as, other utility spaces.

• Waterside shell and tube heat exchangers.

• Pumps for hot water heating and domestic water heating, pool water pumping and

chilled water.

• Air handling units as required for administrative spaces.

• Air separators for the hot water system.

• Expansion tanks for the hot water system.

• Water treatment systems for hot water system.

• Water treatment systems for the chilled water system.

• Heat rejection from dedicated air cooled chillers.

• Chilled water air separators.

• Chiller water expansion tanks.

• Piping connectivity to the pool temperature regulation systems by heat exchangers

With respect to the Recreation areas, The HVAC solutions developed for the North Potomac

Community Recreation Center are to be considered general design guidance as to the design

intent for this facility.

Notable systems include:

• Air handling units serving the community and recreation spaces.

• Energy recovery units as required for proper operation of the areas plus sustainability

requirements.

• Appropriate ductwork distribution by a VAV system or similar.

• General and kitchen exhaust as required for the program.

• Dedicated HVAC systems for the gymnasium and other unique zones.

The entire facility shall be provided with the proper heating, cooling, ventilation, and automatic

temperature control/energy management systems to create the appropriate thermal

environment. The HVAC systems shall control and maintain indoor air temperature, humidity

levels, clean and odor free indoor air; provide required outdoor ventilation rates and perform

within the noise levels as required by applicable codes, standards and regulations.

HVAC system design, equipment selection and energy conservation shall meet the requirements

of the current County adopted edition of ICC International Mechanical Code, ICC International

Fuel Gas Code, and ICC International Energy Conservation Code; also the American Society of

Heating, Refrigeration and Air-conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Standards, Sheet Metal and Air

Conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACNA), the Montgomery County Manual for

Planning, Design, and Construction Of Sustainable Buildings, and other accepted authorities

including the manufacturers recommendations for installation and service clearances. The major

design factors for the Rec Center and Swimming Pool areas mechanical equipment are reliability,

flexibility, efficiency, and serviceability. Use an integrated approach that minimizes energy

consumption and optimizes life cycle cost. Use a practical combination of energy conserving



building envelope technologies, energy efficient lighting, occupant sensing controls, variable

frequency drives for motors and exhaust fans, and high efficiency HVAC systems to achieve this

goal. Incorporate renewable energy principles where they are life-cycle-cost effective.

The building shall be provided with a state of the art DDC (Direct Digital Control) system with

advanced temperature control technology; and building automation system (BAS) consisting of a

central computer (PC) to provide access to all control functions and set points. BAS systems shall

be compatible with and tie back to the County central maintenance office for monitoring and

control.

The HVAC system design shall consider issues related to indoor air quality, including location of

air intakes and exhausts, humidity control, air filtration and special circumstances related to the

treatment and handling of hazardous substances for buildings. Where feasible the system shall

incorporate redundancy provisions. Where multiple fans are provided, the system may be sized

such that failure of one fan will still allow the system to perform at approximately 50% capacity.

The HVAC system shall be metered separately.

Any MEP/Telcom/utility spaces sitting on PT decking must have a warning sign at 3' to 10' O.C.

around the room warning not to drill into the deck. The sign should have text in English and

Spanish. The text would be " Warning: Slab structure is post-tensioned concrete! Do not drill or

cut holes in structure without written approval by owner's structural engineer!"

All exposed piping shall be color code painted according to the County's standard color system.

Design Parameters and Selection Criteria

Outdoor air design criteria must be based on weather data tabulated in the latest edition of the

ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals: winter design conditions must be based on the 99.6 percent

column dry bulb temperature; summer design conditions for sensible cooling load calculations

must be based on the 0.4 percent column dry bulb temperature, with its mean coincident wet

bulb temperature; and design conditions for the summer ventilation load, cooling tower

selection, and all dehumidification load calculations must be based on the 0.4 percent dew point,

with its mean coincident dry bulb temperature. Dry and wet bulb design parameters need to be

confirmed with the County in the design stage.

The selection of the HVAC equipment and systems must include a Life Cycle Cost Analysis (LCCA)

of the key components with minimal energy consumption. At least three different systems shall

be evaluated. The designing team should come-up with the list of systems that are appropriate to

the building and recommend three systems that have to be analyzed; however the County

(through internal meeting among different divisions) makes the final decision into which three

systems to be evaluated. Based upon the results of the life cycle cost analysis, the design team

recommend a system; but then again the County has to make the final decision based on the

provided LCC analysis and recommendation as well as subsequent internal discussion utilizing the



established “Selection Matrix” that accounts not only the quantifiable criteria but also the

unquantifiable once like the ease of maintenance etc.

The following systems may be considered for the LCC evaluation: a 4-pipe central plant, a

geothermal system (with multi-stock VMEII) supplying chilled and hot water, with VAV air

handling units; central water cooled-magnetic bearing centrifugal chiller and condensing boiler

system with VAV air handling units; geothermal with water source VRF system; chilled beam

system coupled with a hybrid geothermal system; etc.

Energy Conservation

Where outdoor air requirements are high, the use of energy recovery equipment shall be

considered in accordance to code requirements. A/E team to provide energy report analysis.

Mechanical Equipment Room (MER) Design

Mechanical rooms shall be of sufficient size to provide the HVAC equipment code required and

manufacturer's recommended clearances for maintenance and servicing. The layout of

equipment within an MER shall allow access to all equipment components, including space to

pull tubes for converters, chillers, and air-handling unit coils. A minimum of 3 feet is required for

access to filters, dampers, and valves and as a separation between equipment. All MERs shall be

provided with adequate ventilation and temperature control designed to prevent heat buildup.

The layout of the various systems piping shall include space allowances for pressure and

temperature gauges at a convenient location for ease of viewing and replacement.

The mechanical equipment shall not be installed above ceilings. Where this condition is

unavoidable, auxiliary drain pans shall be provided for all equipment with cooling coils. Auxiliary

drain pans shall be independently piped to drains, with ball valve in drain line and safety/alarm

switch in auxiliary drain pan to shut off unit. Auxiliary drain pans shall be independently

supported. Equipment installed above ceilings, such as VAVs, Fan Powered Terminal devices and

fan coils, shall be located to allow access for maintenance and equipment removal/replacement.

Where units are installed in concealed locations, access panels shall be located and sized to allow

for full service and equipment removal. The location of access panels shall be coordinated with

the lighting fixtures and other ceiling mounted devices.

MERs shall have a sufficient number of floor drains to prevent any standing water on the floor.

Floors shall be pitched toward floor drains. Floor drains shall be connected to the sanitary sewer

system. Contractor shall coordinate final locations of floor drains with MER layout incorporating

dimensions and clearances of equipment to be installed.

Building Heating and Cooling Systems

The recreation center, including the swimming pool areas, shall be provided with a dedicated 4-

pipe heating and cooling system. Heating and cooling system along with metering shall be

completely separate from the residential tower systems.



Swimming pool areas shall be provided with dedicated air-side systems. The systems shall

include provisions to dehumidify the air in the summer months and maintain a 85°F and 55% RH

set-point. A pool surface air evacuation system shall be used to minimize the effect of chlorine.

All air extraction shall be completed at the deck level. Ancillary areas shall be served by a

variable flow energy recovery unit.

Hydronic Hot Water Systems

The building shall be heated by means of a hot water circulating system servicing hot water

heating coils located in air handling units, room terminal control units, baseboard radiation, and

unit heaters. Design systems for the maximum temperature differential to improve equipment

efficiency and reduce pumping energy. The heating water pump shall utilize a variable frequency

drive to vary pump speed based on the system's differential pressure requirement. The system

differential pressure operating setpoint shall be automatically reset based on analyzing all control

valve positions. Specify high-efficiency pumps with high-efficiency (NEMA Premium) motors. The

heating water loop supply temperature shall be reset based on outside air temperature.

Constant hot water circulation by means of centrifugal in-line type circulating pumps shall

provide the necessary freeze protection of air handling unit preheat coils. An outside air

motorized damper shall be included to close the intake in the event of low temperature and

freezing conditions. A redundant circulating pump shall serve as a back-up to the lead circulating

pumps.

Heating water pumps shall be trimmed with flexible connectors, suction diffusers (strainers for

in-line pumps), multipurpose valves, isolation valves, pressure gauges and flow meters.

Water expansion and air removal devices shall be provided in the heating water system. Water

pressure regulators located downstream of backflow preventers shall provide the make-up water

requirements. All makeup water shall be metered and monitored through the EMS.

Chemical treatment systems shall be provided for the hot water circulating system.

Hot water heating system piping shall be schedule 40 black steel and insulated in accordance

with ASHRAE Standards.

Hot water heating system shall be connected to the pool water heating system by using shell and

tube heat exchangers and controlled by the EMS. Heat exchangers shall be sized to heat the pool

water with both summer setback heating hot water supply temperatures of 110 degrees

Fahrenheit and for designated time period of 180 degrees Fahrenheit for initial pool fill and heat

up only.

Boilers

Boiler shall be designed, tested, and installed per ASME CSD-1 (Controls and Safety Devices) and

ASME BPVC (Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code). The boiler shall meet the requirements of the UL

795, ANSI Z83.3, and ASME CSD. Provide multiple (quantity to be determined by system size) high

efficiency (95% efficiency) variable flow condensing type fire tube hot water boilers (i.e.,



Viessmann, Lochinvar, Cleaver Brooks Clearfire) sized equally to provide 50% of the total heating

capacity. The boiler selection shall be optimized to obtain high efficiency at low return water

temperature. The hot water temperature differential (supply minus return temperature) shall be

optimized (30-40 F) to gain maximum energy advantage. Higher water temperature difference

will result in less water flow, smaller pipe sizes and reduced pumping power consumption. When

using BACnet communication protocol, use the ASHRAE 135 protocol without gateways to

interface with the BACnet Direct Digital Control System Controls that reset boiler output

depending on outside temperature or heating demand shall be part of each installation. Provide

stainless steel heat exchanger combustion chamber.

Project MEP to be required to calculate, analyze and submit the building heating load, size and

select the type and quantity of the boilers including the prevalent efficient mode of operation

and margin of excess capacity. MEP to further consult County Facilities Management prior to

final selection of the boiler (brand).

Chilled Water System

A water-cooled chilled water system with open condenser water loop and cooling towers

oversized by 30% to maximize efficiency shall be provided to serve the Rec Center equipment.

Cooling towers, heat exchangers and pumps must offer redundancy to clean for annual

maintenance while maintaining facility operation. Modular versus magnetic bearing centrifugal

type chillers shall be considered, depending upon equipment size, location, and construction

costs. The chilled water system shall be sized to provide 46-degree F supply water.

Hydronic Energy Recovery System

A water-to-water energy recovery heat pump shall be provided to serve the Rec Center

equipment. The heat pump shall be sized to match the base heating load of the Rec Center and

simultaneously produce chilled water and heating hot water. The heating hot water shall be

used as the first stage of heating prior to the boiler plant.

Air Handling Units

Pool dehumidification units shall be specified with double wall 2” thick insulated housing. There

shall be a maximum 1% leakage on the casing. The interior casing and all exposed components to

pool air shall be aluminum construction. Provide heresite coated AHRI 430 certified fans and

AHRI certified coils. Fans shall be direct drive and in array arrangement with dedicated variable

frequency drive for each fan. No fan belts allowed in airstream. Provide aluminum air-to-air

fixed plate heat exchanger (heat wheel is not allowed) and face-and-bypass dampers. Provide

aluminum, positive draining condensate drain pan. Cooling, heating and dehumidification shall be

provided by recreation center chilled water and heating hot water plants. Compressors within

pool dehumidification units and proprietary controls are not allowed. Variable air volume air

handling systems shall be designed with a minimum outside air duct/control damper and a

maximum (100% economizer/purge) outside air duct/control damper. The minimum outside air

duct shall be sized for the minimum system outside air cfm and shall be provided with an air flow



measuring device for verifying outside air flow rate. Pool dehumidification units shall have built

up controls by the BAS controls vendor to meet specifications, which includes schedule or

operator manual control of purge cycle and contact sensors at the window mullions to monitor

condensing temperatures and limit humidity.

Recreation center air-handling type central equipment is to be specified with double wall 2” thick

insulated housing. There shall be a maximum 1% leakage on the casing. Provide AHRI 430

certified fans and AHRI certified coils. Fans shall be direct drive. Provide air-to-air fixed plate

heat exchangers (energy wheel will be considered if space limitations). Provide stainless steel,

positive draining condensate drain pan. Variable Air Volume air handling systems shall be

designed with a minimum outside air duct/control damper and a maximum (100% economizer)

outside air duct/control damper. The minimum outside air duct shall be sized for the minimum

system outside air cfm and shall be provided with an air flow measuring device for verifying

outside air flow rate.

Air handling unit controls shall be employed to sequence the outside air damper and return

dampers to maintain the minimum outside air flow rate. In most cases, vane-axial and backward-

curved centrifugal fans are the most efficient AHU fan choice. Consider the rated acoustical

properties, space limitations, inlet and outlet conditions, and air quantities/pressure

requirements of the fan before identifying the best fan for the application. Air-handling unit/coil

designs must ensure that conditioned space temperatures and humidity levels are within an

acceptable range, per programmed requirements. Equipment and other obstructions in the air

stream must be located sufficiently downstream of the coil so that it will not come in contact

with the water droplet carryover. Cooling coils must be selected at or below 450 fpm face

velocity. Specify air filtration equipment in accordance with program requirements. Where

program does not address air filtration, filtration efficiency for air handling systems serving

occupied spaces should be a combination of 30 percent efficient prefilter(s) and 85 percent

efficient final filter(s) as determined by the dust spot test specified in ASHRAE Standard 52.

AHU's to be equipped with stainless steel drip pans and have double drainage slope.

Duct Work

The supply, return and outside air ductwork shall be fabricated of galvanized steel, aluminum, or

stainless steel depending upon applications, in compliance with SMACNA and ASHRAE

Standards. Gauge of ductwork shall be determined by SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction

Standards – Metal and Flexible” based on indicated static-pressure class. Medium pressure

supply ductwork connected to air-handling units shall be 4” pressure class, SMACNA seal class A,

SMACNA leakage class 6 for rectangular ductwork and SMACNA leakage class 3 for round and flat

oval ductwork. Medium pressure return and exhaust ductwork connected to air-handling units

shall be 3” pressure class, SMACNA seal class B, SMACNA leakage class 12 for rectangular

ductwork and SMACNA leakage class 6 for round and flat oval ductwork. Low pressure supply,

return and exhaust ductwork connected to fans and terminal units, shall be 2” pressure class,

SMACNA seal class C, SMACNA leakage class 24 for rectangular ductwork and SMACNA leakage



class 12 for round and flat oval ductwork. The use of fiberglass duct board for duct construction

or exposed fiberglass duct liner is prohibited. All exposed (visible in space) ductwork in the

occupied conditioned spaces shall be designed and fabricated from double-wall, oval, or round

ductwork with galvanized outer shell and non-perforated, galvanized, inner lining with an

insulation between the two walls.

Supply and return air distribution systems must be fully ducted to the spaces that are served. A

duct leakage test shall be performed on all pressure duct systems prior to being insulated in

order to determine the integrity of the duct. Run ducts as straight as possible to reduce pressure

drop, noise, and first costs. Use standard length straight ducts and minimize both the number of

transitions and of joints. Also use smooth curved elbows as much as possible. Elbows, tees or

dampers create turbulent and distortion in the air flow. A straight length of 5-10 times of the

duct width is recommended to smooth out the flow before the next fitting or terminal. Specify

sheet metal inlets to VAV boxes; do not use flex duct.

Use insulated flexible duct only for connections to air distribution devices to adapt to minor

offsets. Flexible duct shall be UL 181 Class 1 listed and per SMACNA duct construction standards

with a maximum length of flexible ductwork shall be 6 feet.

Natatorium spaces to have aluminum ductwork. Galvanized ductwork is prohibited in these

areas.

Provide manual volume dampers in each branch take-off from the main duct and at run outs to

diffusers and grilles of supply, return and exhaust ductwork to control air quantity. The volume

damper assemblies shall incorporate a positive locking mechanism with a stand-off bracket.

Dampers shall conform to SMACNA duct construction standards and shall be seal class "A"

construction.

Ensure positive pressure in all areas except in toilets and locker rooms, etc. by allowing a

minimum of 10 percent positive pressure of the AHU supply air within the space served. Show

CFM values on all supply and return air openings so that the system can be properly balanced.

VAV Boxes

Provide pressure-independent type variable air volume units rated per AHRI 880, where

applicable. Boxes shall not be allowed to fully shut-off. Boxes may be of the series fan powered

type. Provide each box with a heating coil unless not required by space reheat or

heating. Provide electronic controls.

VAV's must be equipped with HW coils for reheat, if needed. No electrical reheat coils are

allowed.

Air Delivery Devices

Where ceiling diffusers or booted-plenum slots are selected, these must be specifically designed

for VAV air distribution. The locations of the air delivery devices and the ranges of their outlet

airflow rates must be selected to ensure that the air diffusion performance index (ADPI) values



remain above 80 percent during all full load and part-load conditions, and below the specified

noise level to achieve the background noise criteria, in accordance with the test procedures

specified in Appendix A of ASHRAE Standard 113. Adequate space ventilation requires that the

selected diffusers effectively mix the total air in the room with the supplied conditioned air that

contains adequate ventilation air.

The top panel of the both the supply air diffusers and the return air grilles above the ceiling shall

be fully insulated to prevent condensation. The use of perforated type diffusers for supply air is

prohibited.

Building Management Systems

Provide a Direct Digital Control (DDC) Building Management System (BMS), with an open BACnet

communication protocol in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 135, that monitor and control the

HVAC, plumbing, electrical and other systems. The BMS shall be provided with a local and remote

BMS Man Machine Interface (MMI). System Database shall host on a server and use the

internet/County Ethernet to remotely view system graphics and monitor, control, and configure

HVAC system and its properties. The control system shall be web-based and capable of being

controlled remotely.

The control system shall be modular in layout and capable of controlling HVAC equipment locally.

The control system shall be Siemens.

Vibration & Sound Control

Noise levels due to air conditioning unit fan, ventilating equipment, ducts, grilles, diffusers and

air system pressure reducing devices shall conform to the RC Noise Rating Procedure outlined in

the latest edition of the ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook. Should the air conditioning

equipment noise levels exceed those listed above, other methods of reducing the noise levels

shall be entertained and require approval by the County. Exterior installed air-cooled chillers,

emergency generators, pumps, cooling towers and accessories shall be designed so that the

noise levels do not exceed the County’s noise Ordinances, noise recommendation of 55 dBA at

the property line.

Proximity of project and urban environment and adjacent residential buildings to be taken into

consideration during design to reduce noise levels.

HVAC Commissioning

Commission the HVAC systems per ASHRE Guideline 0-2005, Commissioning Process; ASHRE

Guideline 1.1-2007 HVAC Commissioning; ASHRE Standard 202-2013, Commissioning Process for

Buildings and Systems; and LEED enhance commissioning requirements. An independent

Commissioning Authority shall be hired. The CxA shall have the following minimum experiences:

registered professional engineers in the State of Maryland; minimum ten years of commissioning

experience; commissioning certification (like, CCP, CPMP, CCF, CCxA, CBCP, QCxP, BSCC, CxM,



etc); and acted as the principal CxA for at least three (3) projects of similar type building pursuing

LEED silver certification or above.

Electrical

General Systems Scope

The electrical system shall be developed in concert with the engineering solutions developed for

the whole complex and shall be coordinated with the systems serving the tower and garage

spaces. Mechanical and electrical systems shall be reasonably separated from the residential

buildings to the greatest extent possible.

With respect to the Aquatics area, the electrical solutions developed for the Germantown Indoor

Swim Center are to be considered as general design guidance as to the design intent for this

facility.

With respect to the Recreation areas, the electrical solutions developed for the North Potomac

Community Recreation Center are to be considered general design guidance as to the design

intent for this facility.

Any MEP/Telcom/utility spaces sitting on PT decking must have a warning sign at 3' to 10' O.C.

around the room warning not to drill into the deck. The sign should have text in English and

Spanish. The text would be " Warning: Slab structure is post-tensioned concrete! Do not drill or

cut holes in structure without written approval by owner's structural engineer!"

A complete electrical, communication, & security systems design must be provided for the

facility. As minimum each system work scope must include the following:

Electrical Systems

Electrical systems basis of design must include normal & emergency power; lightning

protection system; transient-voltage surge-suppression (TVSS) systems; grounding &

bonding systems; identification for all electrical systems; overcurrent protective device

coordination study; lighting systems (interior & exterior including lighting control),

primary & secondary conduit feeds & routing; wiring, transformers, switchboard,

panelboards, motor controllers, electricity metering & smart sub-metering, wiring devices,

enclosed switches & circuit breakers, engine generator set, automatic transfer switches,

electrical systems commissioning, initial & final design calculations of the system.

The design of the electrical systems must be in concert with the architectural, mechanical,

and other systems designs. It must create spaces that are functional, flexible, energy-

efficient, safe, and responsive to the needs of the facility. The electrical systems must be

designed in total to be simple, reliable, durable and maintainable.

The project MEP to study and review the overall and LCC cost savings of 480V vs 227/110V

systems and equipment. Facility Management study results and experience indicate great

savings in initial, O&M costs.



Communication Systems

Communication systems basis of design must include telephone/data, Cable TV, fiber net,

public address, radio antenna, building communications cabling systems, equipment

Identifications, grounding & bonding, signal control wiring & conduits, raceways & boxes,

wiring, commissioning of communication systems, & all other requirements to complete

the entire project. Cell phone boosters to be provided throughout facility.

Electronic Safety and Security Systems

Electronic safety & security systems basis of design must include card access control,

intrusion, CCTV, fire alarm, equipment Identifications, grounding & bonding,

commissioning, conductor and cable requirements for the entire project. Security system

to be on emergency power.

Electric Service

Provide underground incoming utility service terminated as close as possible to the

facility. Incoming underground utility service must be in concrete encased, 4” schedule 40

PVC conduits. Delivery of a utility system condition assessment report must be provided at

the early stage of the project design. This assessment should include a description the

utility system availability.

Systems and Building Commissioning

Systems commissioning must be provided to ensure the reliability of the system

equipment and the operation of facility in accordance with the design intent &

construction documents. The system commissioning scope must include documentation,

equipment startups, verification procedures, functional performance tests, validation,

certification, and training. At a minimum, commissioning for the following equipment and

systems must be included in the basis of design.

� Continuity and grounding of incoming utility service conductors

� Transformers, Switchboards, and Circuit Breakers

� Feeders and branch circuits

� AC Motors and Starters

� Distribution & Branch Circuit Panelboards

� Lighting System

� lighting control system

� sensors

� lighting level verification

� Lightning Protection Systems

� Grounding Equipment & Building Grounding System

� Elevator Systems & recall

� Equipment Monitoring Systems

� Fire Alarm Equipment/Fire Alarm Equipment Monitoring System

� Security System & signaling



� Emergency System

� Engine-Generator Sets

� switchgear/switchboard

� Automatic Transfer Switches

� Fuel systems (storage tanks, day tanks, pumps, valves)

� Annunciation

� Grounding and Bonding

� Engine alarms

� Cooling system

� Batteries

� Control and engine start wiring

� Communication systems.

� Thermal scanning of the installed feeders, transformers, panels, circuit breakers,

generator and automatic transfer switches.

� Provide annual programmed maintenance schedule for all panels, circuit breakers,

generator and automatic transfer switches (tightening of lugs) and visual inspection

of main service conductors for the main electrical feeds, transformers,

switchgear/switchboard, circuit breakers, panelboards, engine-generator &

automatic transfer switches.

Electrical Distribution

Provide a complete electrical system design for the entire facility. The system design must

consist of all necessary normal and emergency electrical support for the entire facility in

accordance with current codes & general engineering practice. The systems design must

be prepared with proper system operation, reliability, economic feasibility and adequacy

rating in mind to satisfy the owner and user needs. The distribution equipment must be

circuit breaker type utilizing copper bus and conductors, and must be based upon the 480-

volt or 208- volt, three-phase, four wire, grounded wye configuration. Provide complete

plans and specifications. The system equipment must be designed with a minimum 20%

spare capacity and 20% spare space to accommodate future load growth.

The electrical distribution system must be provided by an underground, concrete encased,

480/277 volt, three phase, four wire service from the utility transformer to main

switchboard located in the main electrical room. From the main electric room, the service

will be distributed to panelboards throughout the building. The main switchboard must

contain molded case, electronic-trip circuit breakers, Owner-metering equipment, and

surge protection. Dry-type transformers must be provided to supply 208/120 volt, three

phase, four wire panelboards. Panelboard bus and transformers windings must be copper.

All panels must be strategically located throughout the building to minimize voltage drop

on branch circuits. General lighting and mechanical equipment must be served from

480/277 volts. Receptacles and other equipment must be served from 208/120 volts.

Provide panelboards with 200% rated neutral busses and surge suppression devices for

receptacle loads, communication, security & HVAC control loads. These panelboards must



be served by K-13 rated, energy efficient type transformers. All circuits fed from these

panels must be equipped with a dedicated neutral conductor to reduce the effects of

harmonics caused by non-linear loads. Provide distribution to panelboards arranged for

separation of power, lighting, mechanical, & elevator equipment loads. Sub-metering is

required separately for each power, lighting, and mechanical systems.

Individual motor starters with appropriate enclosures must be provided to serve remote

mechanical equipment.

Insure all HVAC control equipment & low signal systems are provided with power and

conduit.

All electrical systems for the community center/natatorium are to be completely separate

from the electrical system serving other building areas. All electrical equipment in the

pool environment needs to be rated for corrosive environment.

Emergency power systems

Provide a complete natural gas emergency generator set with automatic transfer switches

designed for the life safety loads of the entire facility.

The generator set must be sized for full load operation of the emergency/standby load plus a

minimum 20% spare capacity to accommodate future emergency loads. The emergency system

also must be capable of sustaining operation of all electrical, communication, HVAC, & security

system loads for designated shelter in place areas for a minimum 72 hours period during which

the electric utility source is not available. The emergency power system must have full capacity &

rating that supplies all equipment required to be operational at the same time. The emergency

generator set features and accessories design must include engine generator set, radiator,

integral base tank or remote storage tank, fuel pumping, starting & battery charger, remote

control switches, sensors, critical muffler, remote annunciator, vibration isolators, automatic

transfer switches, enclosed circuit breakers, switches, wires & conduits, generator control signals,

grounding, testing, & all other components detailed on the plans and in the specifications and

required for a fully operational emergency power systems. The packaged design must comply

with UL 2200 & NFPA 70. The generator will be located inside the building on a parking level. The

County must approve the proposed manufacturer list.

Multiple transfer switches must be provided to separate life safety loads from the optional

standby loads, per the NEC, as well as to stagger the loads to minimize the generator size

required. A dedicated electrical room must be provided for the automatic transfer switches and

related distribution equipment.

Low Voltage Wires and Cables

Provide a complete design for low voltage wires and cables for the entire facility. Wiring for low

voltage power distribution as basis of design must be provided as follows:



o All conductors for the building, without exception, must be copper, single conductor type

with minimum 98% conductivity, type THHN/THWN, XHHN or XHHN-2 with 600V insulation

and must be 75 degree C minimum temperature rating. Use wires & cables throughout the

design suitable for the temperature, conditions and location where indicated.

o Use no wire smaller than #12 AWG, rated at 600 volts, for power & lighting circuits and no

smaller than #14 AWG for control wiring, unless otherwise noted.

o Where length of branch circuit homerun exceeds 100 feet for 277 volt or 50 feet for 120 volt

circuits; use #10 AWG minimum for homerun, and #12 AWG minimum between devices. If

length of homerun exceeds 100 feet, increase conductor size to prevent voltage drop to last

outlet from exceeding 2%. No reduction in wire sizes based on ampacity or other reason

will be permitted.

o Use of MC, AC or BX cables at any time is prohibited.

Raceways and Wiring

Provide a complete raceway and wiring system for the entire facility. Basis of design for

galvanized steel raceways & conduits for all distribution use must be as follows:

� Rigid galvanized steel conduit (RGS) must conform to UL 6 and ANSI C80.1.

� Rigid intermediate steel conduit (IMC) must conform to UL 1242 and ANSI C80.6.

� Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) must conform to UL 797 and ANSI C80.3. EMT is

only permitted for use with cable rated 600 or less.

� Flexible galvanized steel conduit must conform to UL 1.

� Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit must conform to UL 360.

� PVC schedule 40 or 80 for underground ducts must conform to UL 651 and UL 651A,

heavy wall PVC or high density polyethylene (PE).

All power, lighting, HVAC controls, communication signals, security, including, fire alarm,

audio & video signals, public address systems must be provided in conduit. Conduit must

be hot dipped galvanized inside & out including threads. For power, the minimum

allowable conduit size is 3/4 inch, except for conduit for exterior homeruns, which is 1

inch minimum. Minimum size for conduit for communications systems is 1 inch.

Grounding & Bonding

Provide complete grounding & bonding for electrical, communication, low voltage signal,

water main, building structure, & equipment systems. The grounding & bonding system

shall include, but is not limited to, ground rods, electrodes, bonding, copper ground

conductors & bus, equipment grounding, communication systems grounding, generator &

transformer grounding, lightning protection, ground test well, system & equipment

testing verifications. System grounding design components must be shown on the plans &



specify on specification as required for a fully operational grounding system. The main size

#4/0 AWG conductors must be used for bonding all systems to include but not limited to:

Metallic main water systems, main electric services, main telephone systems, building

structure and lightning protections. For communication, security, antenna signal

equipment frame & other signal equipment, grounding conductor must not be smaller

than #6 AWG. The building grounding system resistance must not exceed 5 ohms.

Grounding must be augmented with multiple grounding electrodes to achieve stated

resistance requirements. All feeders & branch circuits must include equipment grounding

green conductor.

Some exercise equipment in the fitness area will require individual circuits without shared

grounds.

Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS)

Provide transient-voltage surge-suppression (TVSS) device & high-frequency filter system

for the main electrical service-entrance equipment & all panelboards that feeds

computers, communications, security, & other non-linear & high-harmonics loads. The

specified system must provide effective high energy surge current diversion & be suitable

for application In ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category A, B, and C3 environments as tested by

ANSI/IEEEC62.11-C62.45. All power transformers to be made of copper primary and

secondary coils. No Aluminum windings are allowed.

Lighting

A fully integrated interior & exterior lighting system must be provided. The lighting system

throughout the facility shall primarily utilize LED lamps where ever practical. Fluorescent T8 and

T5 lamps with electronic ballasts having a total harmonic distortion (THD) of less than 10% with

85 or better CRI shall be utilized where LED light is not provided. Lighting design must include

high-efficiency lamps, electronic ballasts, photoelectric/daylight (dimming) controls, occupancy

sensors/timers, luminaires, emergency lighting, exit lights, multi-level switching for individual

tasks/large floors, branch circuit wiring, conduits, and all other components required for a fully

operational lighting system. Efficient light sources must be selected to minimize energy usage,

while keeping lighting levels adequate for the tasks being performed in the space at all perimeter

areas. A lighting control system must be provided, including controls based on occupancy &

daylight sensors to minimize energy consumption. Lighting system must be designed to provide

an energy efficient system with minimum maintenance and a safe, well-lit environment

appropriate for a public safety facility at all perimeter areas.

Light fixtures in natatorium are not to be placed over the pool, or if so, must be easily accessible.

Photometric calculations must be provided for review.

Lighting control: Lighting control must generally be by motion sensor in individual spaces. In

general, all occupied spaces must have multi-level control of lighting, either switched for

inboard/outboard lamp control per fixture or by row. Switches must typically be located in areas



under users control in mind. Daylight harvesting must be provided where applicable, with

photocell control of electronic dimming fluorescent ballasts. The lighting controls for the building

must be integrated with the County’s Siemens system. All lighting must be designed to meet

current Energy Star conservation ratings and project LEED requirements. All interior & exterior

lighting must be LED or energy efficient fluorescent lighting, with occupancy sensors, day-lighting

sensors, manual over-ride and automatic shut-off during vacancy where applicable.

Interior Lighting: Interior spaces must be provided with daylight where possible. Lighting power

density must be based upon current Energy Code, Green Construction Code, and project LEED

requirements. All individual spaces to have lighting controls with occupancy sensor set to 10

minute shut off.

Emergency Lighting: Emergency lighting fixtures will be connected to the Emergency generator

and must be provided for all spaces for continuous illumination during power transfer upon

power failure. Exit signs must have LED sources for minimum power consumption and must

meet the NFPA requirements for color and visibility.

Emergency lighting is to be provided for all paths of egress (interior and exterior), restrooms and

other spaces as required by code. LED array exit signs, as well as interior corridor night security

lighting, are also to be included.

Exterior lighting: Exterior lighting must be provided to enhance the safety and security around

the building, the parking areas, and its occupants. Adequate lighting for areas where security

cameras are located is to be provided to allow for high quality video images. Site lighting must be

LED or metal halide high cutoff type luminaires. The LED lighting must be assessed for cost.

Exterior lighting must be controlled via photocells, automatic timers with controls, and an

override system. The exterior lighting under SCRRAC scope must be tied to the county’s energy

management system. All lighting must be designed to meet current Energy Code, Green

Construction Code, and project LEED requirements. Exterior lighting fixtures must be rated for

wet locations and be Dark-Sky compliant.

All light systems must be designed to provide adequate levels of illumination, avoid color

distortion, have ease of maintenance and resistance to vandalism. The quantity of lamp types

must be minimized for maintenance purposes and storage. The light systems must have

instantaneous start-up with programmed-start electronic ballasts for long-life. All lighting

fixtures must have tamper-proof hardware. Requirements if Facility is to be used as Emergency

Shelter

The recreation center portion of the project shall be used as an emergency shelter. The

requirements would be as follows:

1. All of the recreation, front desk, main lobby, café would be on standby generator. All

systems in these areas would be fully functional (MEP, IT systems, etc.)

2. The aquatic center would not be on standby generator.



3. The Emergency Shelter generator would be powered by natural gas.

4. Emergency shelter does NOT have to be Category IV compliant.

Life safety generator to comply with Code requirements and is assumed to be diesel. Emergency

shelter generator must be a separate generator from the life safety generator and it will be

powered by natural gas. It must be capable of running continuously for two weeks.

Communication Systems

Building operations for facility will be controlled off-site.

Coordination is required between Network Services and Design Team during interior design phase of

Architectural Design Phase. Coordination is required to phase the construction of the SCRRAC and the

HOCC construction on the site. MDF needs to be specified during the interior design phase once the IT

footprint of the project is determined. MOU is required with HOC determining how costs are

apportioned between the HOCC and Montgomery County Government. All IT systems need to be

identified to determine what network connectivity is required: Public Safety Radio coverage, AV,

paging, mass-notification and Wi-Fi.

Provide complete communication systems design for multi-agency facility. Provisions for

communication systems as base of design must include voice/data, fiber net, & CATV service entrance

provisions conduits, boxes, outlets, risers, raceways, grounding & bonding, structured cable plant,

telephone/data cabling/raceways, cable television cabling/raceways, FiberNet backbone &

cabling/raceways, patch pane, master antenna/cable television, audio/visual, public address systems,

& other future signal components requirements requires for a complete system. The

telecommunications infrastructure must be designed in compliance with latest ANSI/TIA/EIA-569

standards. Communications subsystem design must insure that pertinent data & information are

transferred from point of origin to point where appropriate actions can be taken. Power provisioning

and protection are critical elements in the operation of the IT infrastructure. This requirement needs

to be fully addressed during interior design planning.

Voice/Data: Voice/data systems infrastructure must be proved to sport the commination system

throughout the facility. The Montgomery County standard for in-building structured cable systems is

Passive Optical LAN (POL). All IT services will be delivered over the POL. Based on design requirements

developed during the interior design phase, CAT 6 copper cable may be used where that is a better

choice based on the environment. In such cases the appropriate ONT will be specified in the network

design. The system must provide all components for a complete operable LAN. All voice & data needs

to be run in conduit. All outlet boxes supporting voice/data jacks must be double-gang 4 x 4 inch

square by 3.00 inch deep minimum galvanized steel boxes. Each box must be served by one 1"

conduit. Two hour fire stopping must be provided at all penetrations including cable sleeves. VoIP

telephony is an application on the IP data network. Analog phone lines will be delivered over the POL.

Wall area outlets (WAO) must be provided in locations based on the furniture layout for each

space. The exact quantities & locations of data cable outlets must be coordinated with each user’s

need in mind.



CATV: Cable TV distribution system cabling will be provided over the POL. Wiring and cable plans shall

provide for cable television capability to the lounge, conference room, & office areas where required

by users. Space & power (dedicated receptacle) will be provided at the head-end location for the local

cable provider's distribution equipment.

Public Address System: Provide a complete public address (PA) system that reaches all parts of the

facility side of the building, either through the telephone system or an independent system, if

necessary. The public address system must be capable of announcing or not announcing in targeted

areas of the building & on each floor (for example not announcing in meeting rooms while meetings

are in progress or specific announcements just for the fire command program room). The system must

interface with the Fire Alarm/Mass Notification & Security System. All rooms with PA system must

have a hearing-impaired loop installed in the floor.

Wi-Fi: Wireless access points must be provided throughout the building for seamless connectivity. The

wireless network design must be based on the latest IEEE 802.11ac standard. The Wi-Fi network must

be an integral part of the Montgomery County data/voice network providing MCGUEST access for

visitors to the SSCRC.

Public Safety Radio Systems: The project must include provisions for an inside antenna to insure

proper coverage inside the building of 800MHz required for the public safety radio system. The radio

system provisions include Bi-Directional Amplifiers (BDAs) to amplify or repeat outside radio signals

(800MHz) or other signals & to rebroadcast them inside the building. Provisions must be made on the

roof of the facility for supporting antennas. The main panel must be located within the building’s Main

IT room. All conduit & wiring elements must be included. A effort should be made early in the

consideration of this element in the project to determine if the BDA signal may be delivered over the

POL.

The minimum standards for telecommunications/ data/wiring closets & related infrastructure

requirements as base designs are outlined in the attached DTS IT Requirements. The County has its

own FiberNet system which is a County-wide broadband fiber optic network. Entrance facilities must

be provided in the site plan for FiberNet to gain access to the building. A 4” conduit needs to be

coordinated with the FiberNet construction team. The conduit should be built to the property and

terminated in the MDF.

Telecommunication Grounding Backbone: Telecommunication grounding backbone must be provided

with #4/0 AWG from the main telecom room to the main building ground connection. Computer

grade power including transient voltage surge protection (TVSS) & back-up power must be provided.

An uninterruptable power supply (UPS) must be provided in each telecom rack. Power requirements

for the POL will be determined during the interior design phase. It is anticipated that a DC power plant

will be required to provide power to the POL. A dedicated computer grade power panel, with TVSS

must be provided to serve computer & sensitive electronic equipment loads. Additional dedicated 120

volt, 20 amp circuits must be provided to other rack & wall mounted equipment and well as spare

dedicated wall mounted quad receptacles for future loads. If available stand-by generator power



should be provided for telecom racks & telecom room lighting. A minimum of 50 foot-candles of

lighting measured 3 feet above the floor must be provided.

Electronic Safety and Security Systems

In conjunction with the County’s security vendor, EAI, rough-ins & provisions for the following systems

must be provided. Provide a complete integrated electronic safety & security systems. The systems as

base design must consist of security conduits & conductors, equipment power requirements which

include a full range of interior & exterior point protection devices such as, access control devices,

Intrusion, closed-circuit television (CCTV) & fire alarm, alarm signal data communications, alarm

reporting & monitoring control systems. The system must be designed to provide operational

flexibility, reliable performance, & must be modular, allowing for future incremental expansion or

modification of inputs, outputs, & remote control systems. Integrated system capabilities must consist

of with the county security systems. Access control & an alarm system must be provided at the front

door & at all exits. Security cameras are also required for complete perimeter security. All security

systems must be tie into central control at the existing EOB building.

Any MEP/Telcom/utility spaces sitting on PT decking must have a warning sign at 3' to 10' O.C. around

the room warning not to drill into the deck. The sign should have text in English and Spanish. The text

would be " Warning: Slab structure is post-tensioned concrete! Do not drill or cut holes in structure

without written approval by owner's structural engineer!"

Security Communications

A detention grade intercom system must be provided for communication between Control Stations

and controlled door locations to assist in control decision making. Security System annunciation must

be provided at the main entrance & via the DDC system. The DDC system must display alarm activity,

acknowledge alarms, set/rest output points, issue override commands, unlock/lock doors, set

time/date and execute all system events. The security system must send signals to the county security

office, similar to the fire alarm system. All wiring for the electronic safety and security systems must

be in conduit

Access Control System

Access control must be provided by means of electric locks and proximity type card readers.

These must be provided on all entrances to staff areas, both interior & exterior. The access

control system must be compatible with the county security system. Card readers must also be

provide for non-public areas, including the elevator, limited access & high security areas that is

determine by the user, integrated into the computerized identification cards utilized by the staff.

Intrusion Detection System

The intrusion detection system must include exterior door contacts & passive infrared detectors.

The system must be sub-zoned to allow limited or full access to the building. Panic buttons must

also be provided at the control desk & as directed by the owner. System keypads must be



provided at the control desk & entry areas. The intrusion detection system must be integrated

into the Montgomery County System, compatible with the Security Command Center

hardware/software.

CCTV System

The CCTV subsystem must provide visual assessment of ESSS alarms. It must include interface to

ESSS for control of camera call up to monitors, pan-tilt-zoom control & video recording based on

alarm event triggers. Video surveillance must be employed to electronically display & record

areas that are particularly strategic, unobservable, or sensitive. The system must use Internet

Protocol (IP) cameras & must use network video recorders to digitally record the video. Video

must be viewed on monitors in the Central Control room. Integration of the system must include

the means to associate ESSS archived alarm events with recorded video site & interfacing to the

Montgomery County Executive Office Building (EOB) security desk.

Fire Alarm System

Addressable Fire Alarm System with mass notification must be provide for the entire multi-

agency facility for safety & alarm warning events to comply with the local building code, National

Fire Protection Association, the Americans with Disabilities Act & Life safety code requirements.

As minimum the system design must utilize alarm detection devices such as, smoke, heat & duct

detectors, voice, tone & visual alarm speakers, pull stations, fire command station, firefighter's

telephone system, auxiliary devices, visual audio devices, strobes, software & devices to control,

process, integrate, & annunciate ESSS data at site & at the EOB security desk location, sprinkler

head, fire pump, & fire protection valve supervision & flow switch monitoring, HVAC &

equipment monitoring requirements, door & HVAC system control/override system, & elevator

recall interface, security access control/override, & all other components it is required for a fully

operational fire alarm system of facility. The fire alarm system must be tied into the County

central monitoring system. This connection must include all work (surge suppression devices,

conduit & wiring, control modules, programming, hardware & software device interface

compatibility etc. to tie into the existing Siemens system via dedicated (dry) telephone line. All

subsystem designs must insure continuous operation & connectivity of the entire ESSS. Power,

wiring, & conduits must be provide to all subsystem components & must insure continuous

operation & connectivity of the entire ESSS.

Power

Power outlets and equipment power connections shall be provided throughout the facility to

serve all proposed equipment, including furnished equipment, and to allow for future

reconfiguration of equipment layout. The use of metal-clad, type MC, AC or SO wire is not

allowed and all wiring above permanent ceilings or in walls must be in conduit. Feeders and

branch circuits may not be exposed and all conductors must be concealed except in mechanical,

electrical and storage areas

Communications



Audio-Video (including instructional technology, electronic digital, audio loop, public

address, paging, antenna systems, etc.)

7.1.9.3 – Instructional Technology

Instructional technologies will include interactive whiteboards, video projectors, and

sound enhancement systems.

Enhanced instructional technologies and audio-video systems will be provided in the

Conference / Meeting Rooms and Classrooms.

A Teleconference system will be provided in selected spaces. Also a

separate\different teleconference system that could be used with various web

applications (ie. Skype) will be provided in typical instructional spaces.

Provisions for ceiling mounted video projectors will be made in the majority of

instructional areas. Certain selected areas will be provided with large flat screen displays.

The location and design will be based on the video projector will be determined as the

design develops.

Each instructional and office area will be provided with power receptacles, data drops and

wireless access points.

The location and size of projections screens will be coordinated with locations of

interactive whiteboards, and selected as the design develops.

Sound enhancements systems will be provided at each location receiving a video projector

with provisions for future instructor’s microphone. Where an area contains a local sound

system, the projector sound will connect to the local sound system.

Appropriate assisting listening technology systems are required in all assembly spaces.

The exact type, quantity and location of instruction technology equipment will be

coordinated as the design develops.

Verizon and or Comcast cable television feeds will be provided to the new

telecommunications room in the new complex. A video cabling system will be provided in

instructional, conference and meeting room spaces.

The video system will be star wired from the telecommunications room for interactive 2-

way distribution and will consist of broad-band coaxial cabling (RG-11u and RG-6u). All

components required for distribution and signal integrity, such as splitters, taps, and line

amplifiers will be included.

A video distribution will be provided to allow for incoming cable feed as well as provisions

for streaming video over the data network.



Provisions for a streaming video system will be provided. This central equipment rack will

be wired such that video equipment may be accessed via the computer network system

form the instructional areas.

Provisions for ceiling mounted video projectors will be made in each classroom and

instructional area.

Provisions for wall mounted large flat screen video monitors will be made in each

classroom and instructional area.

Digital Signage will be provided at selected locations in the building. For example a large

digital signage at each entrance that could display a map of the building and daily events.

Master Clock System

Master clock system to be provided. Rooms to be identified during design.

Electronic surveillance

Video surveillance will be provided through-out the building. Cameras will also be located

outside the building for coverage of the building exterior and parking lot. Cameras will be IP

based, with data network connections to a dedicated patch panel in the MDF. Fixed cameras will

be generally provided, with pan-tilt-zoom cameras in select exterior locations. Video surveillance

information will be sent to a network video recorder. The security cameras will be concealed by

tamper-proof covers.

Video Surveillance

Video surveillance will be employed to electronically display and record areas that are

particularly strategic, unobservable, or sensitive.

The system will use Internet Protocol (IP) cameras and will use network video recorders to

digitally record the video. Video will be viewed on monitors in the Central Control room.

The installation of MCPD evidentiary recording system will be provided for the Interview

Room in the Police CPU.

Perimeter Security and Lighting

Video Surveillance shall be provided to provide coverage of exterior entrances, vehicle

sally port, and staff and public parking lots. Adequate lighting for these areas will be

provided to ensure a safe environment, and to allow for high quality video surveillance.

Staff Security

Hard-wired staff duress buttons will be located at front desk in Main Lobby. These

buttons will activate an alarm at the Central Control room to allow for proper response.

Fire detection and alarm

Fire Alarm System: The fire alarm system for the SCRRAC shall be a separate system, but shall

provide annunciation as required by Code and County requirements to the fire alarm systems for



Elizabeth House III, Elizabeth House IV, and Alexander House. A complete, fully addressable fire

alarm system with mass notification shall be provided for the entire facility to comply with life

safety code requirements. The fire alarm system shall utilize speakers, horns and strobes, pull

stations, smoke, heat and duct detectors, sprinkler flow and temper switches, equipment

monitoring requirements, elevator recall interface, auxiliary device, etc., throughout facility. The

system must be designed to comply with the local building code, National Fire Protection

Association, the Americans with Disabilities Act and life safety code. The fire alarm system must

be tied into the County central monitoring system. This connection must include all work (surge

suppression devices, conduit and wiring, control modules, programming, device interface

compatibility etc.) to tie into the existing Siemens system via dedicated (dry) telephone line.

Fire Detection and Alarm System

A fire alarm system is required for D and C occupancy [LSC §22.3.4.1; IBC §907.2.6.3].

All wiring for the fire alarm system must be in conduit.

An addressable fire alarm system is required.

A complete state-of-the-art, addressable Fire Alarm System with a graphic annunciator

panel at the main entrance will be provided. The system shall include Emergency Voice

Alarm Communications.

The system shall integrate with the Direct Digital Control (DDC) system, as well as the

County’s Siemens energy management system (EMS) for annunciation at the county

security office. The fire alarm system shall annunciate to the DDC and EMS system by

device, in lieu of general alarm/trouble/supervisory signal notification.

An 800Mhz broadband distribution amplification system will be provided for the building

per NFPA 2.

Site

Earthwork

Earthwork and foundations will not be covered under the scope of the SCRRAC.

Exterior Improvements

Fire department access

Fire department access will be provided as planned for the Elizabeth Square development,

to be reviewed for coordination with future SCRRAC design plans. Access to the pool deck

and main building lobby will be discussed in future design phases.

Utilities

Utilities for the SCRRAC to be provided with separate meters from the residential buildings.



8 Selected Site Characteristics

Location, size, and surroundings

Location and size

The Elizabeth Square redevelopment is bounded by the; 8500 Block of 2nd Avenue (to the East),

1400 Block of Fenwick Lane (to the North), 1300 Block of Apple Avenue (to the South) and Metrorail

Redline (to the West). The Capital Crescent Commuter Bike Trail will run parallel to the Metro

across the site in an easement. The Silver Spring Metro Station is located approximately 750’ to

the south.

The existing site is comprised of (5) lots with a combined net lot area of ±2.68 acres. An

Abandonment Application is pending for a small portion of Fenwick Lane; upon completion of the

Abandonment the combined net lot area will increase to ±2.84 acres; and will be combined in to

(1) record lot subject to (5) Ownership Units and associated Condominium Plats.

Surroundings

The Elizabeth Square block is surrounded by various retail establishments, new multifamily

housing, townhomes, the District Court, the Cameron Street public parking garage, and railroad

tracks.

Access, transportation, and ROW

Vehicular Access

This item is covered in the Functional Criteria for Site section.

Pedestrian Access

This item was covered in previous sections.

Transportation

This item has been covered in previous sections

Underground Transportation

While the Metrorail (Redline) is a surface rail in the area adjacent to the Elizabeth Square

redevelopment, significant coordination has been undertaken and is an ongoing effort.

Coordination today has involved the Elizabeth House III (HOC) adjacencies and effects with

the MTA / MCDOT Purple Line P3 Partnership and the Capital Crescent Commuter Bike

Trail. As a part of this ongoing efforts MCDOT has been coordinating with WMATA related

to right of entry within the Metro right-of-way, while MTA has been dealing with the JDAC

elements. Preliminary Zone of Influence analysis has been prepared and no impacts are

currently noted from the Elizabeth House III building.

Easements

The (5) ownership units with the Elizabeth Square redevelopment will each be subject to

reciprocal easements including but not limited to; Access, Ingress, Egress, Service, Utility,



Stormwater, Temporary Construction, Sheeting & Shoring, Tieback, Underpinning, Crane Swing

and Maintenance.

Apple Avenue Public Improvement Easement; Capital Crescent Commuter Bike Trail (surface

easement only) and Franchise Utilities.

ROW

The Elizabeth Square redevelopment will provide a both a small area of right-of-way dedication,

as well as, a Public Improvement Easement to Apple Avenue near its western terminus.

Additionally, a surface easement will be provided for The Capital Crescent Commuter Bike Trail

running parallel to the Metrorail.

The proposed Abandonment is approximately 9,660 sf of right-of-way; which functionally

removed from service in the early 1970’s; and is located at the corner of 2nd Avenue and

Fenwick Lane.

Jurisdiction and Zoning

Jurisdiction

The Elizabeth Square redevelopment currently has the following Approvals; Project Plan,

Preliminary Plan; Alexander House Site Plan (B), Elizabeth House III, Preliminary and Final Forest

Conservation; Stormwater Management Concept and Development Plans.

Abandonment and inclusion of the SCRRAC will require the Elizabeth Square redevelopment to

file; Sketch Plan (in place of the Project Plan), Amended Preliminary Plan; Site Plan (including,

amendment to Alexander House Site Plan (B), amendment to Elizabeth House III), Amended Final

Forest Conservation; Stormwater Management Reconfirmation Plan.

Zoning

The Elizabeth Square redevelopment is located with the Silver Spring Master Plan area. The

October 2014 zoning rewrite, remapped the properties from CBD to CR, with the block being split

between CR-3.0, C-2.0, R-2.75, H90 T and CR-5.0, C4, R-4.75, H145 T; CR-5.0 is the predominate

zone.

Topography and natural features

Apple Avenue is an existing ridgeline resulting in the Elizabeth Square redevelopment site draining

north towards Fenwick Lane. The site slope approximately 20’ to its low point at the western

terminus of Fenwick Lane.

The Elizabeth Square redevelopment has an Approved Preliminary Forest Conservation Plan (Final

Forest Conservation signature pending); there are no on-site forest area, afforestation will be satisfied

by a fee-in-lieu payment. Additionally, there are (3) specimen tree on-site mitigations required.

Geotechnical Information

A geotechnical investigation has been performed by ECS Mid-Atlantic, LLC. The report titled,

Subsurface Exploration and Geotechnical Engineering Analysis, Elizabeth House, Silver Spring,



Maryland, dated August 5, 2014 was provided for our use. The report indicates that weathered rock

with an allowable bearing capacity of 20,000 psf was encountered within approximately 5 feet of the

proposed lowest garage level elevation. ECS recommends a foundation system consisting of shallow

spread footings bearing on the weathered rock layer. All foundations for the building will be paid for

and provided by HOC.

Wetlands and streams

There are no wetlands or streams located on this site.

Drainage and storm water management

There are existing storm drain lines located in Second Avenue, as well as, Fenwick Lane; the existing

closed system continues north within the Third Avenue (paper right-of-way).

The Elizabeth Square redevelopment has both an approved Stormwater Management Concept and

Development Plans. Based on a combination of Intensive Green roofs, Bioretention Boxes and

Suspended Pavement Micro-Bio (Silva Cells) the site was able to meet its full 1.8” target.

Availability of utilities and names of companies

Not used

Availability of fiber optic line

The site has access to the County’s Fiber Net fiber-optic network.

http://www.montgomerycountymd.gov/dts/fibernet.html

Historical aspects

Not used

Environmental assessment

Not used

Anticipated traffic impact

A traffic impact study will be completed by HOC in future design phases.

Pedestrian safety

As a part of the Elizabeth Square redevelopment amended entitlement filings a pedestrian access

route analysis will be performed along anticipated routed from the Montgomery County Cameron

Street Parking Garage to each of the primary points of entrance from each of the buildings.

Other aspects of the site

A sound study will be completed by HOC in future design phases. Sound attenuation must be

provided for all programs adjacent to the train tracks.



A. Appendices

Cost Categories

A.1.1 Requirements

The A/E is required to provide for, coordinate, and (in most cases) specify components of all

systems, furniture, furnishings and equipment listed in this POR within the allotted project funds.

An item will be included within the CCAP budget (i.e. in the construction documents), within the

FF&E allowance, or will be provided by others as defined below. Any adjustment to this schedule

will be made at the end of the design development phase. All system components shall be

included on construction documents regardless of cost source for complete coordination.

A.1.2 Items to be included in CCAP budget (in Construction Documents):

• General Construction including anything in the POR that isn’t identified to be

provided by another source;

• All items permanently affixed to the wall, ceiling, floor or structure including lockers,

benches, bulletin boards, white boards, hanging and mounting systems, projection

screens, flat screen TVs or displays, ceiling-mounted projectors, window treatments,

and display units;

• All custom millwork, cabinetry, and built-ins including shelving, cabinets and

countertops;

• Communications equipment, cabling and devices, power, conduit, junction boxes,

wiring for all information technology service lines, servers, systems and devices

including commissioning;

• Electronic security and monitoring systems including surveillance cameras,

monitors, buzzers, and electronic locking devices, with the exception of access

control devices (card readers) and associated wiring which shall be provided by

County vendor. Include power to necessary conduit and junction boxes for all

access control and radio frequency identification (RFID) devices;

• Components of access control and security monitoring systems all components

other than wiring and devices identified to be provided by County vendor below

which includes but is not limited to: electronic hardware components (strike,

lockset, hinge, etc.), power, conduit, junction boxes, ring and string for all security

system servers, systems and devices;

• Power, conduit, junction boxes, wiring and equipment (complete system) for all bi-

directional amplification (BDA) communication systems including public safety radio

frequency;

• Power to all systems furniture workstations;



• Toilet accessories including all standard items and baby changing station;

• Utility shelving and built-in employee mail box units;

• Appliances and plumbing fixtures including refrigerators, dishwashers, cooking

equipment, microwave ovens, sinks, and electric water coolers;

• Site, building and room signage including wayfinding, directories and displays; and

• Fixed artwork integral to the building construction and finishes, or structural and

lighting accommodations where required for artwork provided by the County.

A.1.3 Items to be included in Furniture/FF&E allowance (not in Construction Documents):

• New loose furniture, including chairs, tables, desks, workstations (powered and non-

powered), shelves, storage components, freestanding benches, special children’s

area fixtures, easels, floor mats, and floor cushions;

• High-density filing systems;

• Carts for audiovisual equipment and podiums/lecterns

• All SCRRAC equipment items will be purchased by the Department of Recreation.

A.1.4 Items to be coordinated by County agencies and provided by County vendors (not in

Construction Documents):

o FiberNet;

o Wireless internet service, wiring and devices;

o Cable TV service, wiring and devices;

o Access control system (card readers, access cards, motion sensors, electronic door release

buttons and door contacts, etc.), security monitoring system (cameras, monitors, computer

hardware, and software), wiring for all security system servers, systems and devices;

o Bi-directional amplification radio systems;

o Relocation of existing furniture and other items designated to be reused;

o Hanging or freestanding artwork;

o Office equipment including PCs, copiers, printers, fax machines, cash registers, safes, and

specialty equipment that works with existing systems to be relocated such as barcode

scanners; and

o Vending machines, coffee burners



Space Plan Layouts

The following pages contain space plan layouts for some of the major program spaces.



A.2.1 Space Plan: P.1; Competition Pool (N.2)


Typical Plan Scale: 1/16” = 1’ Note: Drawings are for illustration purposes only. They do not represent final configurations.



A.2.2 Space Plan: P.2; Therapy Pool (N.5)



2,000 SF



A.2.3 Space Plan: P.3; First Aid (N.9)





A.2.4 Space Plan: P.4; Family Changing Area (N.18)

Building Component: Natatorium




A.2.5 Space Plan: P.5; Pump/Filter Room (N.22)

Building Component: Natatorium




A.2.6 Space Plan: P.6; Gymnasium – Ideal Layout (F.2)

Building Component: Fitness




A.2.7 Space Plan: P.7; Gymnasium – Minimum Layout (F.2)





A.2.8 Space Plan: P.8; Cardio/Weight/Stretch Room (P.8)





A.2.9 Space Plan: P.9; Social Hall (C.2)





A.2.10 Space Plan: P.10; Kitchen (C.6)

Building Component: Community




A.2.11 Space Plan: P.11; Community Lounge (C.18)





A.2.12 Space Plan: P.12; Typical Activity Room





A.2.13 Space Plan: P.13; Art Room (C.14)





A.2.14 Space Plan: P.14; Family Play Area (C.16)





A.2.15 Space Plan: P.15; Game Room (C.17)





Site Test Fit Diagram

The following are sample test fit diagrams of the program discussed in this POR into the site. These are

for example and representation purposes only and will change as the design progresses.

A.3.1 SCRRAC Phase I

Diagrams are provided for levels Plaza, and Second, and B1.

FIGURE 1: PHASE I – PLAZA LEVEL PLAN



FIGURE 2: PHASE I – B1 LEVEL PLAN



FIGURE 3: PHASE I – SECOND LEVEL PLAN



A.3.2 SCRRAC Phase II

Plans are provided for Phase II at levels Plaza, Second, and B1.

FIGURE 4: PHASE II - PLAZA LEVEL PLAN



FIGURE 5: PHASE II – B1 LEVEL PLAN



FIGURE 6: PHASE II – SECOND LEVEL PLAN



A.3.3 SCRRAC Section Diagram

FIGURE 7: PHASE II – SECTION DIAGRAM THROUGH COMPLETED SCRRAC



A.3.4 Elizabeth Square and SCRRAC 3D Diagrams

FIGURE 8: ELIZABETH SQUARE AND SCRRAC 3D DIAGRAMS



Sample Space Planning Precedent

The following is an example of a precedent project, Germantown Indoor Aquatics Center, and its

square footage and grossing factors.

A.4.1 NSF Diagrams

Below are the plans from Germantown Indoor Aquatic Center. The total net square feet for each

space is shown, with circulation areas in blue and program areas in red.

Figure 1: Germantown Indoor Aquatic Center – First Floor Plan



Figure 2: Germantown Indoor Aquatic Center – Ground Floor Plan



Figure 3: Germantown Indoor Aquatic Center – Mechanical Floor Plan



A.4.2 GSF Diagrams

Below are diagrams of each level with the highlighted floor area used to tally total gross square

feet for the facility.

Figure 2: GSF Factor Diagrams

A.4.3 Grossing Factor Analysis Table

The following is a table totaling the NSF and GSF for the Germantown facility with the resultant

grossing factor.



Not Used



Lessons Learned

This section incorporates “lessons learned” from Montgomery County on other projects.

A.6.1 Main Lobby

A.6.1.1 Design

• Method to handle guests arriving for spectator or program events vs. paying

SCRRAC customers.

• Tall and/or vaulted lobby spaces need to be heated/cooled correctly. This is a

problem in other facilities.

A.6.2 Administration

A.6.2.1 Offices

Include flexible/additional space for immediate office growth not anticipated in design.

A.6.3 Natatorium

A.6.3.1 Equipment

• All equipment, fixtures, hardware, etc. to be able to withstand wet atmosphere,

including sound announcement equipment.

• Provide regular chlorinators as back-ups to solution feeders

• Provide emergency alarms in special needs changing rooms

• Provide emergency shutoff buttons for hot tubs

• Provide latching/locking gates for stairs to slides and platforms that can be

latched open or closed

• Guard chairs should include standing platforms

• If the facility plays host to a multitude of RMSC meets, an in-ground Colorado

system setup would make setup more convenient timing devices wire into pool

structure

• Provide separate chlorine solution feeder for each pool.

• In design coordinate position of diving boards and lap lanes. Design should create

a “diving well” to maximize lap lanes.

• Chair lifts for ADA access should be carefully coordinated.

• Steps built into areas where they are needed, rather than removable stairs (which

always break and are a hazard for staff to get in and out).

• Pool heaters for separate pools need evaluation.

• No dual pumps for hot tub jets. These are prone to problems.



• Provide guard office with clear view of entire swimming area.

• Provide ability to remove and replace HVAC system/water treatment without

building destruction.

A.6.3.2 Finishes

• Germantown Indoor Aquatic Center included paint specifications that failed due

to the wet atmosphere. Paint within the SCRRAC natatorium is to be of the correct

specification for a wet atmosphere, and installed with the correct preparation. It

is to be stored correctly and micro repairs are to be completed correctly.

• Large deck tiles are slippery, provide maximum 1” size tiles on all tile floors.

• Provide as much noise control as possible.

A.6.4 Fitness

A.6.4.1 Design

• Windows in gymnasium should be properly shaded or tinted to avoid glare.

Maintenance for shades is limited so tinted or screening preferred.

A.6.5 Community

None provided.

A.6.6 Miscellaneous

A.6.6.1 Design

• Unreachable/unwashable windows must be avoided

• Light fixtures must start immediately after electrical service interruption

• Ensure full Wi-Fi and cell reception throughout facility. This is in direct response to

the Executive Auditor’s report on the Flower Branch shelter communication

problems.

• The loop system is preferred user choice for assisted listening in assembly spaces

to meet ADA requirements. Ceiling installed loops do not work well.

• Ensure that design/installation of any PA/sound systems are completed by an

audio consultant who specialized in that type of work.

• Boilers installed at GISC are problematic (Fulton Pulse Park). Other

solutions/manufacturers should be evaluated.

• Use wider benches in locker rooms, if possible, to accommodate families and

children.

• Do not put the control room for the elevator in the women’s restroom. Do not put

access to mechanical spaces inside of restrooms.



• Provide clear sight lines without hidden coves or nooks.

• All plumbing valves and MEP maintenance must be easily accessible.



Reference Specification

Refer to the following pages for reference specification section 27-1000 “Telecommunications

Structured Cabling.”

Facility Market Analysis

Refer to the following pages for a Facility Market Analysis for the SCRRAC.


April 2017 Appendix A.7 1 of 33

SECTION 27 10 00 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS STRUCTURED CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this

Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. UTP cabling.

2. 50/125-micrometer optical fiber cabling.

3. Multi-pair copper cable

4. Coaxial cable (radio frequency video).

5. Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects.

6. Telecommunications outlet/connectors.

7. Passive Optical Splitters

8. Cable management system.

9. Cabling identification products.

10. Backboards.

11. Telecommunications equipment racks and cabinets.

12. Telecommunications service entrance pathways.

13. Grounding.

14. Pathways.

15. Telecommunications mounting elements.

16. Multiuser telecommunications outlet assemblies.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 27 05 26 “Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems for

voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices.

2. Division 27 05 28.36 “Cable Trays for Communications Systems" for voice and

data cabling associated with system panels and devices.

C. Bidding Requirements:

1. Bidder shall submit complete detailed proposals with line item cost

representation for components and associated installation labor. Lump sum

bids will not be accepted.

2. Bidders shall include as part of the bid response the following items:

a. Installation schedule with proposed manpower assignments.

b. Resumes for project manager and lead technician for this project.

c. BICSI RCDD certificate and registration number.

3. Bidders shall review associated electrical, telecommunications infrastructure

drawings to verify that necessary conduit and floor boxes will be provided by

others. Bidders shall understand and coordinate shared infrastructure locations



for telecommunications outlets. The Owner will provide no additional

infrastructure to support the telecommunications cabling systems Inside Plant

(ISP) and Outside Plant (OSP). Any discrepancies with the identified

infrastructure to support these systems should be questioned in the form of a

request for information (RFI) during the bidding process. Be responsible for any

additional infrastructure requirements after receipt of contract for this project.

Unless specifically stated, no wiremold-style or surface mounted raceways shall

be approved on this project.

4. Unspecified Equipment and Material: Any item of equipment or material not

specifically addressed on the drawings or in this document and required to

provide complete and functional Structured Cabling System shall be provided in

a level of quality consistent with other specified items.

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS USED

# Abbreviation Description

1 10Gig 10-Gig Active Ethernet

2 10GPON 10-Gigabit Symmetrical Passive Optical Network

3 A/V Audio Visual

4 AC Alternating Current

5 ADN Area Distribution Node

6 APC Angled Physical Contact

7 BICSI Building Industry Consulting Services International

8 DC Direct Current

9 DTS Department of Technology Services

10 EF Entrance Facility

11 ER Equipment Room

12 ETSD Enterprise Telecommunications Division

13 EUB End User Building

14 Gbe Gigabit Ethernet

15 GPON Gigabit Passive Optical Network

16 ID Intermediate Distribution Frame

17 IDC Insulation Displacement Connector

18 ISP Inside Plant Wiring

19 ITu International Telecommunications Union

20 JHA Jurisdiction Having Authority

21 LAN Local Area Network

22 MCN Main Core Node

23 MDF Main Distribution Frame

24 NS Network Services

25 ODN Optical Distribution Network

26 OLT Optical Line Terminal

27 ONT Optical Network Terminal

28 OSP Outside Plant Wiring

29 PDS Protective Distribution System

30 PDU Power Distribution Unit (ONT Remote Powering)

31 PoE Power over Ethernet, 15.4W

32 PoE+ Power over Ethernet Plus; 25.5W



33 POL Passive Optical LAN (aka Passive Optical Network: PON)

34 RCDD Registered Communications Distribution Designer

35 RU Rack Unit

36 SFP Small Form Pluggable

37 SMF Single Mode Fiber

38 TDMM BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual

39 TR Telecommunications Room

40 UPC Ultra Physical Contact

41 WAO Work Area Outlet

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Provide a complete and functioning Structured Cabling System inclusive of all

hardware, software and training to meet or exceed the performance features outlined in this document. The standard for all Structured Cabling Systems in Montgomery County is based on the deployment of Passive Optical LAN (POL) for Information and Communications Systems. How this standard is implemented depends upon the needs of the County including the cost tradeoff between an active or passive network. In many cases the County will decide to install a hybrid infrastructure composed of active, passive and wireless elements. This document presents standards for both active and passive technologies as if both were being installed together in a complementary manner. It is the responsibility of the Design Team to select the appropriate mix of technologies and to document how these will work together in the bid documents. Guidance in making these decisions will be provided by the Department of Technology Services in conjunction with the project stakeholders in the form of a Basis of Design (BOD) document. The BOD will be developed as a companion document to the Program of Requirements (POR) so that it may be included in the materials given to the architectural firm preparing the bid package.

B. Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals between the telecommunications outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-connect located in the communications equipment room. This cabling and its connecting hardware are called "permanent link," a term that is used in the testing protocols. 1. TIA/EIA-568-B.1 requires that a minimum of two telecommunications

outlet/connectors be installed for each work area. 2. Horizontal cabling shall contain no more than one transition point or

consolidation point between the horizontal cross-connect and the telecommunications outlet/connector.

3. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling. 4. Optical splitters shall be installed as part of the optical fiber cabling permanent

link and included in all permanent link test reports.

C. A work area is approximately 100 sq. ft., and includes the components that extend from the telecommunications outlet/connectors to the station equipment.

D. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length for Category rated copper cabling is 295 feet. This maximum allowable length does not include an allowance for the



length of 16 feet to the workstation equipment. The maximum allowable length does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet in the horizontal cross-connect.

E. Backbone cabling system shall provide interconnections between communications ERs, MDFs, and EFs in the telecommunications cabling system structure. Cabling system consists of backbone cables, intermediate and main cross-connects, mechanical terminations, and patch cords or jumpers used for backbone-to-backbone cross-connection and backbone to zone cross-connection points.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General Performance: The cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA/EIA-568-B.1, when tested according to test procedures of this standard.

1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with requirements of Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Submittal data is to be submitted in a three ring binder, a continuous spiral binder, or

plastic binding that allows the booklet to lie flat while open. Each booklet shall contain the below in the following order: 1. Cover Sheet (including name of supplying contractor, project name, and project

manager contact information) 2. Detailed List of Materials

a. Include a catalog sheet per product of equipment listed in the Detailed Bill of Materials, in the exact order as the Detailed Bill of Materials. Each catalog sheet shall describe mechanical, electrical and functional equipment specifications. The catalog sheet must also include a image of the product. Photocopy duplications of the manufacturer’s original equipment catalog sheets will be allowed as long as they provide adequate clarity of both the printed word and graphics/pictures. If more than one product is shown on the catalog sheet the intended product must be denoted by either an arrow or highlight.

3. Authorized Distribution/Reseller Certificate a. Recently dated (within one year from submittal date) support letter from

manufacturer stating that the supplying contractor is an Authorized Distributor of the product being supplied.

4. Prequalification Warrantee a. Recently dated (within one year from submittal date) support letter from

manufacturer stating that the supplying contractor is Authorized to obtain for the owner the Special Warranty for Cabling System and the Special Warranty for System Assurance.

5. Prequalification Certificate a. Copy of the installing technician(s) certificate of completion from the

manufacturer’s training school for the equipment being provided.

C. Shop Drawings are to be submitted on project standard full size and bound. Each shop drawing set is to include the below in the following order: 1. Title Sheet.



a. Containing, at a minimum, a list of all drawings in the set and a symbols legend defining each symbol used in the package.

2. Riser Diagram. a. Show the relationship of TR’s, the pathway between them, and cable

connectivity to be installed. 3. Video/CATV System Engineering

a. Depict device location by room number and device type. Delineate cable types and cable pathway for both riser and horizontal distribution. Calculate db loss and outline levels for each splitter, tap, amplifier, and outlet.

4. Telecommunications Room Details. a. Plan Details of infrastructure and room fittings with clearances, Elevation

Details of wall fields and rack details showing the relationship of rack mounted elements inclusive of Owner provided equipment (labeled as such).

5. Typical Outlet Details. a. Detail each typical outlet type to be installed. Include manufacturer specific

plates, jacks, and an example of labeling. Note on the drawing the typical application of each outlet type, for example; standard office, computer lab, ceiling mounted wireless access location, etc.

6. Floor Plans. a. Show planned location for all elements and cable routing. Drawings should

be at project standard scale clearly legible. Include outlet port numbers for each outlet.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on

staff. 1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and Cabling

Administration Drawings by an RCDD. 2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of

Level 2 Installer and manufactures certified installer, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site. One half of remainder of the crew shall be at a minimum Registered Technicians by manufacture as part of their Certified Installer Program.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Installing company shall be certified by manufactures in aspects of design, installation and testing of optical and Category 6 metallic premise distribution systems, be a manufactures Value Added Reseller (VAR) in good standing and have a minimum of five (5) years’ experience on similar Structured Cabling Systems (SCS). Have a Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) on staff.

E. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.



F. Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial

Buildings, 2002 ANSI/TIA/EIA – 606

G. Grounding: Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

H. NFPA 70 – National Electric Code, 2005

I. BICSI – TDMM, 13th Edition, 2014

J. NEMA – VE-1 – Metal Cable Tray Systems, 2002

K. NEMA – VE-2 – Metal Cable Tray Installation Guidelines, 2001

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials

until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install equipment frames and ladder racking until spaces are enclosed, secured and weather tight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and work above ceilings is complete.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of communications equipment with Owner's ETSD Network Services. Coordinate service entrance arrangement with local exchange carrier for public utilities and CATV providers. Coordinate service entrance arrangement with Program Manager for County’s FiberNet Wide Area Network. 1. Meet jointly with DTS/ETSD/Network Services, local exchange carrier

representatives, and Owner to exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation interfaces.

2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute them to other participants.

3. Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch panels in equipment rooms to accommodate and optimize arrangement and space requirements of telephone switch and LAN equipment.

4. Adjust arrangements and locations of equipment with distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch panels of cabling systems of other communications, electronic safety and security, and related systems that share space in the equipment room.

B. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with Owner's design team and DTS/ETSD/Network Services.

C. Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with location of power receptacles at each work area.



D. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of communications equipment requiring electrical power to operate

1.10 EXTRA POL MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with

protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Patch-Panel Units: The greater of one (1) or 10% of total quantity of each type. 2. Zone Box Units: The greater of one (1) or 10% of total quantity of each type. 3. Connecting Blocks: The greater of one (1) or 10% of total quantity of each

type. 4. Device Plates: The greatest of ten (10) or 2% of total quantity of each type. 5. OLT PON Cards: 1 spare card per OLT chassis 6. OLT Switch Fabric Cards: 1 spare card per 10 OLTs, or a single card for under

10 OLTs 7. ONTs: the greatest of 15 or 2% of the total quantity of each ONT type. 8. Optical Patch Cords: the greatest of ten (10) or 1% of the total quantity of each

length.

1.11 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Cabling System: Manufactures warranty shall ensure against

product defects; that approved cabling components exceed the specifications of TIA/EIA 568B, TIA/EIA 568B-5 and ISO/IEC IS 11801. The warranty shall apply to passive SCS components. 1. Warranty Period: 25 year Cabling System from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty for Passive Optical LAN system: Manufactures warranty shall

ensure against product defects and provide maintenance release software upgrades. Warranty shall include advanced order replacement of electronics OLT and ONT components and sub-components, and be provided with 24x7x365 technical assistance center access directly from the manufacturer. On-site support from the manufacturer shall be a 24-hour response time for deemed ‘critical outages’ impacting greater than 10% of the system install base or as necessary by the manufacturer. 1. Warranty Period: one (1) year electronics warranty from date of substantial

completion with options delivered for two (2), three (3) and five (5) year terms in the base bid.

2 PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

the manufacturers specified or as approved equal by the owner.

2.2 PATHWAYS

A. General Requirements: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.



B. Cable Support: NRTL labeled. Cable support brackets in Telecommunications Rooms shall be designed to prevent degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable.

C. Provide bend limiters, if not built into the cable support, to maintain cable type bend radius whenever cable exists pathways or makes transition between two pathways.

D. Non-continuous cable supports shall be used in any area above the finished ceiling where cable tray is not available.

E. Non-continuous cable (J-Hooks/Arlington Loops) supports 1. Cable Support: NRTL labeled for support of Category rated and optical fiber

cabling, designed to prevent degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable.

2. Non-continuous cable supports shall provide a bearing surface of sufficient width to comply with required bend radii of high-performance cables; cULus Listed.

3. Non-continuous cable supports shall have flared edges to prevent damage while installing cables.

4. Non-continuous cable supports sized 1 5/16” and larger shall have a cable retainer strap to provide containment of cables within the hanger. The cable retainer strap shall be removable and reusable and be suitable for use in air handling spaces.

5. Non-continuous cable supports shall have an electro-galvanized or G60 finish and shall be rated for indoor use in non-corrosive environments.

6. Non-continuous cable supports shall be ERICO CableCatTM J-hook series CAT12, CAT21, CAT32, CAT64, CAT21SS, CAT32SS, CAT64SS; CAT-CMTM Double J- Hook CAT100CM; CAT-CMTM U-hook series CAT200CMLN, CAT300CMLN; and CAT-CMTM retainer CATRT200CM, CATRT300CM or approved equal.

F. Multi-tiered non-continuous cable support assemblies 1. Multi-tiered non-continuous cable support assemblies shall be used where

separate cabling compartments are required. Assemblies may be factory assembled or assembled from pre-packaged kits. Assemblies shall consist of a steel angled hanger bracket holding up to six non-continuous cable supports, rated for indoor use in non-corrosive environments; cULus Listed.

2. If required, the multi-tier support bracket may be assembled to manufacturer recommended specialty fasteners including beam clamps, flange clips, C and Z purlin clips.

3. The multi-tiered support bracket shall consist of ERICO CADDY CATHBA and CableCatTM J-Hooks with screws; or approved equal.

G. Non-continuous cable support assemblies from drop wire/ceiling

1. Fastener to wire/rod with one non-continuous cable support, factory or jobsite assembled; rated for indoor use in non-corrosive environments; cULus Listed.

2. Acceptable products: ERICO CADDY CAT124Z34, CAT126Z34, CAT214Z34, CAT216Z34, CAT324Z34 or CAT326Z34; or approved equal.

H. Non-continuous cable support assemblies from beam, flange

1. Fastener to beam or flange with one non-continuous cable support, factory or jobsite assembled; rated for indoor use in non-corrosive environments; cULus Listed.



2. Acceptable products: ERICO CableCatTM J-hook series CAT12, CAT21, CAT32, CAT64 with CADDY beam clamps and CADDY flange clips; or approved equal.

I. Non-continuous cable support assemblies from wall, concrete, or joist 1. Fastener to wall, concrete, or joist with one non-continuous cable support,

factory or jobsite assembled; rated for indoor use in non-corrosive environments, cULus listed.

2. Acceptable products: ERICO CableCatTM J-hook series CAT12, CAT21, CAT32, CAT64, with CADDY angle bracket; or approved equal

2.3 CONDUITS AND BOXES

A. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Raceways

and Boxes." Flexible metal conduit shall not be used.

B. No run of conduit shall exceed 100-feet or contain more than 180-degrees in bends and sweeps without an appropriately sized pull box being inserted.

2.4 UTP CABLE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Mohawk; a division of Belden CDT. 2. Superior Essex Inc. 3. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd. 4. Hubbell Premise wire 5. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 6. Molex

B. Description: 100-ohm, 4-pair UTP, covered with a blue thermoplastic jacket.

1. 1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 6. 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as

complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP, complying with NFPA 262.

2.5 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provided products by one

of the following available manufacturers that may be incorporated into the Work includes, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Belden 2. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect 3. Corning Optical Cables 4. Molex 5. Approved equal



B. Description: Plenum Rated Simplex or 2-strand Singlemode, nonconductive, Optical Fiber cable. 1. Comply with ICEA S-87-640for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with ICEA S-83-596 for mechanical properties. 4. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3 for performance specifications. 5. Comply with TIA/EIA-492AAAA-B for detailed specifications. 6. Comply with low-bend radius guidelines of between 5mm and 8mm 7. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as

complying with UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. General Purpose, Nonconductive: Type OFN or OFNG[, or OFNR, OFNP]. b. Plenum Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNP, complying with NFPA 262. c. Riser Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNR, complying with UL 1666. d. General Purpose, Conductive: Type OFC or OFCG. e. Plenum Rated, Conductive: Type OFCP, complying with NFPA 262. f. Riser Rated, Conductive: Type OFCR, complying with UL 1666.

8. Maximum Attenuation: 3.50 dB/km at 850 nm; 1.5 dB/km at 1300 nm. 9. Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 200 MHz-km at 850 nm; 500 MHz-km at 1300 nm. 10. Jacket:

a. Jacket Color: Yellow for Single Mode Fiber (SMF)

2.6 LOW-VOLTAGE REMOTE POL/ONT POWERING CABLE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provided products by one of the following available manufacturers that may be incorporated into the Work includes, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Belden 2. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect 3. Panduit 4. Leviton 5. Molex 6. Approved equal

B. Description: Low voltage copper pair cabling for ONT remote powering covered with thermoplastic jacketing: 1. Be available in 16AWG, 18AWG, 20AWG and 22AWG pairs. 2. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as

complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP, complying with NFPA 262.

2.7 OPTICAL FIBER AND LOW-VOLTAGE REMOTE POL/ONT POWERING

HYBRID CABLE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provided products by one of the following available manufacturers that may be incorporated into the Work includes, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Belden 2. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect 3. Corning Optical Cables 4. OCC



5. Approved equal

B. Description: Low voltage copper pair cabling for POL/ONT remote powering covered with yellow thermoplastic jacketing and bundled with a simplex or duplex single mode optical fiber: 1. Be available in 16AWG, 18AWG, 20AWG and 22AWG pairs. 2. Be provided with either a single or duplex SM28e optical fiber cable 3. Comply with ICEA S-87-640for mechanical properties 4. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3 for performance specifications. 5. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, copper pair information, and aggregate

length at regular intervals not to exceed 40 inches. 6. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3 for performance specifications 7. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as

complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. Plenum Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFCP, complying with NFPA 262

2.8 UTP CABLE HARDWARE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Hubbell Premise Wiring. 2. Leviton Voice & Data Division. 3. Belden 4. Panduit Corp. 5. Molex 6. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd. 7. Approved equal

B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-

B.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher.

C. Data Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables. All patch panels shall be 24 or 48 port. 1. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair UTP cable indicated

conductor group of indicated cables, plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria.

D. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, eight-position eight conductor modular receptacle units with integral IDC-type terminals. 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 6.

E. Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair cables in 3’-20’ in length; terminated with

eight-position modular plug at each end. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure specified category performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging.



1. TR location: Provide one (1) patch cord to match cable and Jack Assembly category rating per port on the patch panel for rack mounted ONT to horizontal cable cross connection.

2. Floor outlet locations: Provide one (1) ten foot modular patch cord to match cable and Jack Assembly category rating per eight-position eight conductor modular receptacle being fed from a rack mounted ONT.

3. ONT outlet locations: Provide one (1) ten foot modular patch cord to match two (2) active connections per desk/cubicle being served from each ONT, or a single patch cord when an ONT is servicing an ancillary device (camera, wall phone, courtesy area, BMS, elevator connection, etc)

2.9 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Belden 2. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect 3. Corning Optical Cables 4. Molex 5. Approved equal

B. Cross-Connects and Patch Panels: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered,

simplex and duplex cable connectors. 1. Number of Connectors per Field: One for each fiber of cable or cables

assigned to field, plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria.

2. Fiber Optic enclosures shall be available as rack mountable with accommodations for splice trays.

3. Fiber Optic enclosures shall be available as wall mountable with accommodations for splice trays

4. Fusion splice tray as needed for transition point and factory terminated pigtails. 5. SC-APC Duplex 12 fibers coupler panels shall be used for Single mode fiber. 6. Size fiber enclosure for 25% percent spare capacity.

C. Patch Cords: Factory-made, single-fiber cables in one (1) meter lengths. Supply one (1) SC-APC to SC-APC for all termination points in the passive optical splitter to horizontal WAO station cable per ONT and sparing as defined under Section 1.10A.8.

D. Patch Cords: Factory-made, single-fiber single mode cables in three (3) meter lengths. Supply two (2) SC-APC to SC-APC cables for all termination points in the backbone to passive optical splitter cable permanent link per PON splitter and sparing as defined under Section 1.10A.8. LC patch cords may be utilized when high density adapter panels are utilized.

E. Cable Connecting Hardware: 1. Comply with Optical Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS)

specifications of TIA/EIA-604-2, TIA/EIA-604-3-A, and TIA/EIA-604-12. Comply with TIA/EIA- 568-B.3.



2. Singlemode connector type SC-APC. 3. Connectors for Singlemode shall be factory field installation via fusion splicing

F. Passive Optical Splitters 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3. 2. Be available as either single or dual fiber inputs. 3. Be available as either 1RU rack mounted or cassette based splitters 4. Provide interface inputs and outputs as SC or LC connectors.

2.10 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTORS

A. Jacks: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-position modular.

Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

B. Optical Jacks: Single Mode Connector type SC/APC at all optical workstation outlets.

C. Workstation Outlets: Provide connector assemblies mounted in single or multi-gang faceplates as shown on contract drawings. 1. Plastic Faceplate: High-impact plastic. Coordinate color with Division 16

Section "Wiring Devices." 2. For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of UTP, optical

fiber, and coaxial work area cords. 3. Legend: Machine printed, desi-window mounted,

a. Adhesive “sticky-back” labels are not permissible. D. Horizontal Copper Cabling for Wireless Access Points

1. Comply with TIA-162-A 2. With the following exceptions:

a. Horizontal cabling for wireless access points should be two Category 6a as specified in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 or two-fiber OM3 or higher mm, as specified in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3.

b. A 15 foot service loop shall be coiled in the channel to allow for movement of the access point to improve coverage;

c. Power Over Ethernet Plus will be used to power access points

2.11 INNERDUCT

A. OSP applications 1. Description: Corrugated High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) 1 ¼ inch Orange in

color with factory installed pull tape. Manufactured by Carlon or approved equal.

2. Splices shall only be at Maintenance Hole locations if necessary. No splices shall be allowed in conduit.

3. Use PIC1 Nonmetallic internal coupling to join sections as needed.

B. ISP Backbone Applications 1. Description: Plenum-gard 1 ¼ inch Orange or White in color with factory

installed pull tape. Manufactured by Carlon or approved equal. 2. Splices shall only be in SEF or TR/MC/HC locations if necessary. No splices

shall be allowed in conduit. 3. Use manufacturer approved nonmetallic internal coupling to join sections.



4. Use manufacturer approved nonmetallic internal coupling to join sections. 5. Alternatively, plenum rated armored optical fiber cabling shall be permissible in

the riser to eliminate innerduct requirements.

2.12 FIRE STOP CABLE PASS-THRU SLEEVES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are limited to, the following: 1. Basis of design: Specified Technologies Inc. 2. Approved equal by:

a. 3M Corporation. b. Hilti Corporation. c. Wiremold- Legrand Corporation.

B. Fire Rated Cable Pathways: STI EZ-PATH Brand device modules comprised of steel

raceway with intumescent foam pads allowing 0 to 100 percent cable fill, the following products are acceptable: 1. Specified Technologies Inc. (STI) EZ-PATH Series 44 Fire Rated Pathway 2. Specified Technologies Inc. (STI) EZ-PATH Series 33 Fire Rated Pathway

C. EZ-path series 44 wall sleeves in Telecommunications rooms shall be quantity as shown on contract drawings.

D. Horizontal cable pathway locations greater than 20 cables fire stop sleeves shall be STI EZ-Path series 33.

E. Horizontal cable pathway locations fewer than 20 cables EMT sleeve with UL listed system for firestopping is acceptable. Caulks and sealants shall be as manufactured by STI, 3M, Nelson, or approved equivalent.

F. Fill ratio for fire stop EMT sleeves is based on a not to exceed 40% fill capacity.

2.13 GROUNDING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 27 Section "Grounding and Bonding" for grounding conductors and connectors.

B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A

2.14 ER LADDER RACK, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES

A. Ladder Rack (Universal Cable Runway) for Equipment Rooms only 1. Ladder rack shall be manufactured from 3/8” wide by 1-1/2” high tubular steel

with .065” wall thickness. 2. Ladder rack (side stringers) will be 9’-11½” long. Cross members will be welded

in between stringers on 12” centers beginning 5-3/4” from one end so that there are 10 cross members per ladder rack. There will be 10-1/2” of open space in between each cross member.



3. Ladder rack will be delivered individually boxed, and available in the multiple widths.

4. Finish shall be epoxy-polyester hybrid powder coat (paint) black in color. 5. Design Make: Chatsworth Products, Inc. (CPI), Universal Cable Runway: Part

Number 10250-712, Universal Cable Runway, 12” Wide, Black 10250-718, Universal Cable Runway, 18” Wide, Black or approved equal.

6. Design Make: Chatsworth Products, Inc. (CPI), Universal Cable Runway: Part Number 10250-724, Universal Cable Runway, 24” Wide, Black placed in vertical positions or approved equal

B. Ladder Rack Splices

1. Splice kits will provide a method of mechanically connecting ladder rack sections and turns together end-to-end or side-to-end to form a continuous pathway for cables.

2. Grounding kits will provide a method of bonding ladder rack sections and turns together that is independent of the pathway splices. The grounding kit should be constructed of UL Listed components. The preferred solution is a #6 AWG green insulated stranded copper conductor connected on both ends to ladder rack using two-hole compression lugs and stainless steel hardware.

3. Splices (splice plates) will be manufactured from steel. Splice, grounding and insulator bar kits will include installation hardware.

4. Finish (of splice plates and hardware) shall be zinc plate in the color(s) specified below. Colors are applied as a chem. film over the zinc plate.

5. Design Make: Chatsworth Products, Inc. (CPI), Cable Runway Splices or approved equal.

C. Ladder Rack Supports

1. Supports will be sized to match the width of the ladder rack that is supported. Some supports will work with all widths of ladder rack.

2. Each support will include a means of securing ladder rack to the support. 3. Supports will be manufactured from steel or aluminum. 4. Finish shall be epoxy-polyester hybrid powder coat (paint) in the color(s)

specified below or zinc plate with a gold chem. finish specified gold. Included hardware shall be zinc plated with a gold chem. finish.

5. Design Make: Chatsworth Products, Inc. (CPI), Cable Runway Supports or approved equal.

D. Ladder Rack Accessories 1. Cable straps used for attaching cable bundles to the ladder rack cross

members must be reusable with a hook and loop-style closure, at least ¾” wide, and sized for cable bundles that are 2”, 3” or 4” in diameter. Permanent tie-wraps are not permitted.

2. Cable retaining posts used to keep cable from falling off of the side of the ladder rack shall be manufactured from 1” by ½” tubular steel with .065” wall thickness. Cable retaining posts will be 8” high and will attach to the side stringer of the ladder rack with included hardware. The top of the cable retaining posts will be fitted with a rubberized end cap to protect cables.

3. End caps used to cover the ends of ladder rack will be manufactured from a black fire- retardant rubberized material. End caps will be sized for 3/8” wide by 1-1/2” high side stingers and will be sold in pairs.



4. End closing kits used to cover the end of ladder rack will be manufactured from 3/8” wide by 1-1/2” high tubular steel with .065” wall thickness. Kits will consist of a bar cut to match the width of the ladder rack and the hardware required to attach the bar to the end of a length of ladder rack.

5. Radius drops used to create a radius to form cables over as the cables exit or enter the ladder rack will be manufactured from aluminum extrusion. The extrusion will be formed in a 90° arc with a minimum bend radius of 3”. Radius drops will attach to either the side stringer or the cross member of the ladder rack using a clevis pin. Radius drops will include 1-1/2” high cable spools that attach to the top of the radius drop to guide cables.

6. Movable cross members used to support cross member radius drops in between welded cross members on ladder rack will be manufactured from 3/8” by 1-1/2” aluminum bar. Movable cross members will attach to ladder rack at the side stringers with included hardware so that the location of the movable cross member can be adjusted. Moveable cross member will support a cross member radius drop.

7. Cable spools used to separate ladder rack into multiple cable pathways will be made from a black flame retardant ABS. Cable spools will attach to the cross members with a clip that allows the width of the ladder rack to be divided into any proportion. The spools will be 3.94” tall, with a 1.94” diameter top, and a body that tapers from .88” (diameter) at the top to .62” (diameter) at the bottom.

8. Auxiliary support brackets used to support cables that should be physically separated from the cables in the ladder rack will be made from 1/8” x 1” steel bar. The bracket will be L-shaped and will attach to the side stringer of the ladder rack. The bracket will hang below the ladder rack a minimum of 4”. The bracket support surface will be 4” long. The bracket will be zinc plated with a gold chem. finish.

9. Touch-up paint used on ladder rack and ladder rack system components will be color- matched to the finish on the ladder rack or component. A spray on and brush on option will be available.

10. Unless otherwise noted, finish on all metal components shall be epoxy-polyester hybrid powder coat (paint) black in color. Hardware will be zinc plated with a gold chem. finish.

11. Design Make: Chatsworth Products, Inc. (CPI), Cable Runway Accessories or approved equal.

2.15 ER & TR BACKBOARDS

A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches A-C Grade.

1. Provide materials that comply with performance requirements in AWPA C27. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Use treatment for which chemical manufacturer publishes physical properties of treated wood after exposure to elevated temperatures, when tested by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5516, for plywood.

B. All 4 walls of an ER shall be covered with rigidly fixed 3/4 inch A-C plywood with the

A grade side facing outward. The plywood shall be void free and extend from 6



inches above the finished floor (AFF) to 102 inches AFF and capable of supporting the attached equipment.

C. When a TR is used, a design specified wall shall be covered with rigidly fixed 3/4 inch A-C plywood with the A grade side facing outward. The plywood shall be void free and extend from 6 inches above the finished floor (AFF) to 102 inches AFF and capable of supporting the attached equipment.

D. Comply with requirements in Division 09 Section “Paints and Coatings" for fire-retardant plywood.

2.16 EQUIPMENT RELAY RACKS & FRAMES

A. Free Standing Relay Racks for ERs and large TRs when used: 1. Racks shall be manufactured from aluminum and/or steel extrusions. 2. Each rack will have two L-shaped top angles, two L-shaped base angles and

two C- shaped equipment-mounting channels. The rack will assemble with bolt hardware. Equipment-mounting channels will be threaded for easy assembly. The base angles will be pre-punched for attachment to the floor.

3. Equipment mounting channels will be 3” deep and punched on the front and rear flange with the EIA-310-D Universal hole pattern to provide 45 rack-mount spaces for equipment. Each mounting space will be marked and numbered on the mounting channel.

4. When assembled with top and bottom angles, equipment-mounting channels will be spaced to allow attachment of 19” EIA rack-mount equipment. Attachment points will be threaded with 12-24 roll-formed threads. The rack will include assembly and equipment- mounting hardware. Each rack will include 50 each combination pan head, pilot point mounting screws.

5. The assembled rack will measure 7’ (84”) high, 20.3” wide and 15” deep. The sides (webs) of the equipment-mounting channels will be punched to allow attachment of vertical cable managers along the sides of the rack or for rack-to-rack baying.

6. The rack will be rated for 1,500 lb. of equipment. 7. The rack will be UL Listed. 8. Finish shall be epoxy-polyester hybrid powder coat black in color.

B. Wall Mounted Telecommunications Equipment Rack for TRs when used:

1. Rack shall be manufactured from aluminum and/or steel extrusions. 2. Equipment mounting rack rails will be set back 4” to accommodate cable

managers. Accommodations shall be available for rear rack rails. 3. When assembled, the center section will swing open to allow for front and rear

access to equipment and cabling. 4. Rack shall feature a wall-mounted back pan, to include ½”, 2”, and 3” electrical

knockouts for conduit connections, as well as a 12-1/2” x 12-1/2” cutout for electrical pull-box.

5. Rack shall include top and bottom side vents, capable of accommodating cooling kits.

6. The assembled rack will measure between 20” and 30” deep, and shall feature between 12 and 18 useable RUs.

7. The rack will be rated for 200 pounds of equipment.



8. The rack will be UL Listed. 9. The rack shall be grounded per requirements in Division 27 Section "Grounding

and Bonding" for grounding conductors and connectors. 10. Finish shall be epoxy-polyester hybrid powder coat black in color.

2.17 POL POWER STRIPS

A. Each ER equipment rack or TR wall mounted equipment rack supporting remote ONT powering is to contain a rack mounted power distribution panel that is to occupy the first rack space in each rack.

B. Power strips shall be connected either to building generator and UPS power, or to an appropriately sized UPS that will provide 4-hours of system run-time for the POL OLT, rack mounted ONTs, or remote ONT powering N+1 power source feeding a zone or direct ONT horizontal drop cables.

2.18 POL ZONE ENCLOSURE REQUIREMENTS A. Zone enclosures shall be provided to support horizontal ONT drop cable assemblies

to passive optical splitter output connectivity: 1. Shall be available in 2’x2’ configurations to allow for installation in the

suspended ceiling grid system. 2. Shall be provided with supports for threaded rod or hanger wire supports. 3. Shall be capable of being mounted on or within a wall environment. 4. Shall be capable of being mounted under a raised floor environment. 5. Zone enclosure back pan and side panels, to include ½”, ¾”, 1” and 2” electrical

knockouts for conduit connections, as well as a 12-1/2” x 12-1/2” cutout for electrical pull-box.

6. Shall provide optical connector module support in various configurations: a. The zone box shall provide up to 12 adapter panel inserts to support

i) 12-fiber or 24-fiber SC bulkhead panels ii) Cassette based passive optical splitters iii) Cassette based ONT remote PDU rate limiting modules

b. The zone box shall provide up to 4-RUs of space for rack mounting of equipment, to include i) Fiber optic rack mounted patch panels for both adapter panels and

cassette based splitters ii) Fiber optic rack mounted splitters iii) Rack mounted ONT remote PDU rate limiting modules

7. Shall provide for integrated cable management of the optical slack loops and maintaining the proper bend radii of the cables.

8. When utilizing remote ONT powering from a non-rate limited 100VA bulk power source, shall be fed with ¾” or 1” EMT conduit from the power source room location and grounded.

9. Be UL listed to permit for the installation of an optional ONT within the enclosure.

10. Finish shall be epoxy-polyester hybrid powder coat white in color. 11. Be provided with a locking latch mechanism capable of being key-locked, white

in color.



12. Be available with recess door configurations allowing for a false ceiling tile to be adhered to the box entry.

2.19 REMOTE POL/ONT POWERING SOURCES & POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS (PDU)

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are limited to, the following: 1. Corning Optical Cable PDU or ICU 2. Alpha eLimiter Line 3. Tellabs ODH/PDH 4. N-Lightened Networks. 5. Dongah Elecom

B. PDUs shall be available to support remote ONT powering from a TR or zone enclosure. 1. PDU in the TR shall support 100VA NEC compliant rate limiting for Article 725

of the NEC (Class 2 Circuits) and GR-1089-CORE compliance 2. PDU shall be a UL listed and supported device 3. PDUs fed from bulk DC power shall utilize an N+1 AC-DC rectifier source. 4. PDUs that integrate the power conversion shall be available with either a single

or dual AC input source for redundancy. 5. Single RU PDUs shall support powering of the ONT in multiple scenarios:

a. TR based ONT powering: i) Shall provide up to 32 rate-limited outputs in increments of eight (8)

outputs. ii) Outputs shall support 18AWG, 20AWG and 22AWG cable pairs when

utilizing quick-disconnect mate-and-lock or “Phoenix” style connectors. iii) Outputs shall support cable gauges of 22AWG or 24AWG when using an

RJ45 8-pin/8-conductor connector type. iv) PDUs in a ER/TR deployment option do not require conduit for the non-

rate limited input DC power source. b. Zone based ONT powering:

i) Shall provide up to 32 rate-limited outputs in a modular manner in increments of eight (8).

ii) Outputs shall support 18AWG, 20AWG and 22AWG cable pairs when utilizing quick-disconnect mate-and-lock or “Phoenix” style connectors.

iii) Outputs shall support cable gauges of 22AWG or 24AWG when using an RJ45 8-pin/8-conductor connector type.

iv) PDUs in a zone based deployment option require conduit for the non-rate limited input from the DC power source or armored cable.

v) It is recommended that multiple, higher-gauge copper power pairs be utilized to feed multiple inputs on a PDU or be bonded together of no more than 16AWG per conductor.

C. ONT Remote Powering sources can be either a bulk DC power plant, or integrated AC power into the PDU based on the application.



1. PDUs fed from bulk DC power shall utilize an N+1 AC-DC rectifier source capable of outputting at 56Vdc to the PDU to accommodate for voltage drop over distance based on cable gauge.

2. The source power shall be sized to support a minimum of .625A@48Vdc receive

power to the ONT and a maximum of 1.5A@48Vdc at the ONT for future growth via additional rectifier modules.

3. AC powered PDU units shall be provided with redundant 10A electrical circuits fed from separate breaker panels in the ER/TR.

4. AC plug types shall be coordinated with the powering source manufacturer with the common basis of design being a C19 male plug on the source.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 ENTRANCE FACILITIES

A. Coordinate backbone cabling with the protectors and demarcation point provided by communications service provider.

B. Contact telecommunications service provider and arrange for installation of demarcation point, protected entrance terminals, and a housing when so directed by service provider.

C. Install pathways complying with recommendations in TIA/EIA-569-A, "Entrance Facilities" Article. 1. Install entrance pathway complying with Division 16 Section "Raceways and

Boxes."

3.2 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS A. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of

bends between pull points.

B. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceways and Boxes" for installation of conduits and wireways.

C. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.

D. Pathway Installation in Communications Equipment Rooms:

1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard where a single piece of plywood is installed, or in the corner of room where multiple sheets of plywood are installed around perimeter walls of room.

2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions.

3. Secure conduits to backboard when entering room from overhead. 4. Extend conduits 3 inches (76 mm) above finished floor. 5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding

conductor to TGB/TMGB.

3.3 NON-CONTINUOUS CABLE SUPPORTS



A. Installation and configuration shall conform to the requirements of the current

revision levels of ANSI/ EIA/TIA Standards 568 & 569, NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code), applicable local codes, and to the manufacturer’s installation instructions.

B. Do not exceed load ratings specified by manufacturer.

C. Adjustable non-continuous support sling shall have a static load limit of 100 lbs.

D. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for allowable fill capacity for each size non- continuous cable support.

3.4 WIRING METHODS

A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways, J hooks, and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and cables accessible ceilings, walls, and floors except in unfinished spaces.

B. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.

D. Comply with BICSI TDMM for layout and installation of communications equipment rooms.

E. Provide equipment frames and ladder racking as outlined in telecommunications series drawings.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF CABLES

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Current Edition, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. 4. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make

terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels.

5. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

6. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.

7. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in



BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

9. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before de-reeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating.

10. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot long service loop on each end of cable.

11. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, current edition, "Pulling Cable." Section. Monitor cable pull tensions.

C. UTP Cable Installation:

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. 2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to

maintain cable geometry. 3. Terminate patch panels and outlets to a pin/pair assignment as directed by

owner.

D. UTP Cat 6 Patch Cords 1. Provide modular cords required to connect LAN switches to modular jacks on cross connect panel shall be furnished as part of this solicitation. Quantities should be equal to the total number of network outlets. At the Patch panel location provide patch cable lengths as needed for a neat installation utilizing vertical wire managers. At the user outlets provide 10 foot patch cables for each 8 pin modular connector

E. Open-Cable Installation: 1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications

spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. 2. Suspend UTP cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches above

ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches apart. 3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes,

ducts, or other potentially damaging items.

F. Installation of Cable Routed Exposed under Raised Floors: 1. Install plenum-rated cable only. 2. Install cabling after the flooring system has been installed in raised floor areas. 3. Coil cable 10 feet long not less than 12 inches in diameter below each feed

point.

G. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.

H. Optical Fiber Cable Installation: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3. 2. Cable may be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack, zone enclosure

or cabinet mounted. 3. Fiber shall be installed in innerduct within conduits unless armored. 4. Bend insensitive fiber shall be utilized for all horizontal WAO station drop

assemblies to eliminate conduit, innerduct or other protection requirements.



5. Multiple fibers shall be pulled in the same innerduct whenever possible. 6. Fiber shall be installed in one continuous piece. 7. Any excess fiber shall be coiled neatly and secured to a wall above the plywood

backboard so it is out of the way of normal traffic and is not subject to unusual flexing.

I. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.

2. Separation between open Category rated copper cables or Category rated cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches.

3. Separation between Category rated communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.

4. Separation between Category rated communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.

5. Separation between Category rated communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches.

6. Separation between Category rated communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches.

7. Separation for optical fiber cabling from electrical sources shall not be of concern, however attempts shall be made to accommodate separate pathways for optical components.

3.6 INSTALLATION TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOMS

A. Bundle, lace, and train conductors and cables to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

B. Bond the shield of any shielded cable to the grounding bus bar in communications

rooms and spaces.

C. Backboards: Install backboards with 96-inch dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets tightly, and form smooth gap-free corners and joints.

D. Free Standing Relay Racks



1. Assemble relay racks according to manufacturer’s instructions. Verify that equipment mounting rails are sized properly for rack-mount equipment before attaching the rack to the floor.

2. All racks must be attached to the floor in four places using appropriate floor mounting anchors. When placed over a raised floor, threaded rods should pass through the raised floor tile and be secured in the structural floor below.

3. Racks shall be grounded to the TGB using appropriate hardware. The ground will meet local code requirements and will be approved by the JHA.

4. Ladder rack shall be attached to the top of the racks/cabinets to deliver cables to the rack. The rack should not be drilled to attach ladder rack. Use appropriate hardware from the ladder rack manufacturer.

5. The equipment load should be evenly distributed and uniform on the rack/cabinets. Place large and heavy equipment towards the bottom of the racks/cabinets. Secure all equipment to the racks/cabinets with equipment mounting screws.

E. Wall Mounted Equipment Cabinets

1. Assemble cabinet according to manufacturer’s instructions. Verify that equipment mounting rails are sized properly for rack-mount equipment before attaching the rack to the wall.

2. All racks must be attached to the wall using appropriate wall mounting anchors. 3. Cabinets shall be grounded to the TGB using appropriate hardware when

supporting electrical components (remote ONT power sources or rack mounted ONTs) or copper cable terminations. The ground will meet local code requirements and will be approved by the JHA.

4. The equipment load should be evenly distributed and uniform on the rack/cabinets. Place large and heavy equipment towards the bottom of the racks/cabinets. Secure all equipment to the racks/cabinets with equipment mounting screws.

F. Ladder Rack 1. Provide all components of the ladder rack system (ladder rack, turns, splices,

supports, and accessories) from a single manufacturer. 2. Ladder rack shall be installed with side stringers facing down so that the ladder

forms an inverted U-shape and so that welds between the stringers (sides) and cross members (middle) face away from cables.

3. Ladder rack shall be secured to the structural ceiling, building truss system, wall, floor or the tops of equipment racks and/or cabinets using the manufacturer’s recommended supports and appropriate installation hardware and methods as defined by local code or the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ).

4. Ladder rack splices will be made in mid-span, not over a support, with the manufacturer’s recommended splice hardware.

5. Ladder rack shall be supported every 5’ or less in accordance with TIA-569-B. Ladder rack shall be supported within 2’ of every splice and within 2’ on both/all sides of every intersection. Support ladder rack within 2’ on both sides of every change in elevation. Support ladder rack every 2’ when attached vertically to a wall.

6. Heavy-duty splices are recommended for ladder rack in excess of 18” width (18” wide ladder rack). Heavy-duty splices are required for any splice formed in the vertical orientation including changes in elevation formed using vertical-to-



horizontal 90° turns or horizontal-to-vertical 90° turns. Use heavy-duty splices to secure all overhead turns to the overhead horizontal pathway(s).

7. When the pathway is overhead, ladder rack shall be installed with a minimum clearance of 12” above the ladder rack. Leave a minimum of 12” in between ladder rack and ceiling/building truss structure. Leave a minimum of 3” in between ladder rack and the tops of equipment racks and/or cabinets. Multiple tiers of ladder rack shall be installed with a minimum clearance of 12” in between each tier of ladder rack. When located above an acoustical drop ceiling, leave a minimum of 3” clearance between the top of the drop ceiling tiles and the bottom of the ladder rack.

8. When installed under a raised floor, ladder rack shall be installed with a minimum 3” clearance between the top of the ladder rack and the bottom of the floor tiles or floor system stringers, whichever is lower in elevation. Maintain a 3” clearance between ladder racks wherever ladder racks cross.

9. Within each telecommunications room, ladder rack should be bonded together, electrically continuous, and bonded to the TGB, unless otherwise noted in the specifications and contract documents. Ladder rack and turns shall be bonded across each splice with a bonding kit. Ladder rack shall be bonded to the Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB) using an approved ground lug on the ladder rack and a minimum #6 grounding wire or as recommended by the JHA. Remove paint from the ladder rack where bonding/ground lugs contact the ladder rack so that the lug will contact bare metal. Use antioxidant joint compound in between the bare metal on the ladder rack and ground lug. Use antioxidant joint compound in between the bus bar and the ground lug. Verify continuity through the bonds at splices and intersections between individual ladder rack sections and turns and through the bond to the TGB.

10. Actual cable fill for ladder rack equipped with cable retaining posts will not exceed 6” in height.

11. The combined weight of cables within the ladder rack will not exceed the stated load capacity of the ladder rack as stated in the manufacturer’s product specifications or load/design tables.

12. Cables (cable bundles) will be secured to the cross members of ladder rack with ¾” wide reusable straps. Straps are not required when ladder rack is equipped with cable retaining posts.

13. Add 8” high cable retaining posts to the open sides of ladder rack when cable fill exceeds 2” in height or when cable bundles cannot be secured directly to the ladder rack cross members with a strap. Cable fill within any ladder rack should not exceed 6” in height.

14. When a single ladder rack supports different types of cable media, the cable media will be separated within the pathway by cable spools that attach to the cross members on the ladder rack. Treat each type of cable media and divided area of the ladder rack separately when determining cable fill limits.

15. Use a radius drop to guide cables wherever cable exits overhead ladder rack to access a rack, frame, cabinet or wall-mounted rack, cabinet or termination field. If necessary, provide a moveable cross member also to attach and align the radius drop in between the welded cross members of a ladder rack.

16. Cover the exposed ends of cable runway that do not terminate against a wall, the floor or the ceiling with end caps or an end closing kit.

17. Use auxiliary support brackets that attach to the side stringer of the ladder rack to support interconnect cabling (patch cords, equipment cords, jumper cords)



that is routed between racks using the ladder rack. Auxiliary support brackets can be used to support other conductors that should be physically separated from cables within the ladder rack as defined by local code or the JHA.

18. Whenever possible, maintain a 2’ separation between ladder rack used for communications cables and pathways for other utilities or building services.

19. Provide touch-up paint color-matched to the finish on the ladder rack and correct any minor cosmetic damage (chips, small scratches, etc.) resulting from normal handling during the installation process prior to delivery. If a component is cosmetically damaged to the extent that correction in the field is obvious against the factory finish, the component will be replaced with a new component finished from the factory. If a component is physically damaged due to mishandling or modification during the installation process, it shall not be used as part of the ladder rack system.

20. The quantity of cables within the ladder rack will not exceed a whole number value equal to 50% of the interior area of the ladder rack divided by the cross-sectional area of the cable. The interior area of ladder rack will be considered to be the width of the ladder rack multiplied by a height of 2”, unless cable retaining posts are added to the ladder rack. The interior area of ladder rack equipped with cable retaining posts will be considered to be the width of the ladder rack multiplied by a height of 6”. Actual cable fill for ladder rack that is not equipped with cable retaining posts will not exceed 2” in height.

G. Horizontal Cable Managers

1. When more than one horizontal cable manager is used on a rack/cabinet or group of racks/cabinets, use the same make, and style of cable manager on the rack/cabinet or racks/cabinets.

2. The color of the racks and cable managers must match. 3. Attach horizontal cable managers to the rack/cabinet with four screws

according to the manufacturer’s installation instructions. Each cable manager should be centered within the allocated rack-mount space (RMU).

4. Horizontal managers will be located so that the number of ports (cables) they support will not exceed the cable fill capacity of the cable manager.

5. Covers should be attached to the cable manager and in the closed position after cabling is complete.

H. FIRESTOPPING

1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." 2. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems in accordance with

Performance Criteria and in accordance with the conditions of testing and classification as specified in the published design.

3. Install modular floor grid system in Telecommunications Rooms as shown on contract drawings.

4. Install EMT sleeve where horizontal cables penetrate a fire or smoke rated wall. 5. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for

installation of firestopping products. 6. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping." 7. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article. 8. Any penetrations created for the passage of telecommunications which remains

vacant at the completion of the installation shall be fire stopped.



3.7 GROUNDING

A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.

B. Comply with requirements in division 27 05 26 “Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems” for grounding conductors and connectors.

C. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 8 AWG equipment grounding conductor.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."

B. B. Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.

C. C. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an AutoCad electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project.

D. D. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, backbone pathways and cables, entrance pathways and cables, terminal hardware and positions, horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding conductors. Follow convention of TIA/EIA-606-A. Furnish AutoCad - latest version -electronic record of all drawings.

E. Cable and Wire Identification: 1. Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination, where it is accessible in a

cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated. 2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be

numbered at device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or cabinet.

3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at intervals not exceeding 15 feet.

4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel for remote ONT power low voltage copper pairs a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips, and

identify each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building- mounted device shall be identified with name and number of particular device as shown.

b. Each low voltage copper pair shall designate the closet/rack/zone number and binding position on both ends of the pair.

5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice



and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service.

F. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color

that contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA-606-A. 1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flex as cables are bent.

3.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Factory test UTP and optical fiber cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

B. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2.

C. Factory test multimode optical fiber cables according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A and

TIA/EIA-568- B.3.

D. Factory-sweep test coaxial cables at frequencies from 5 MHz to 1 GHz. Sweep test shall test the frequency response, or attenuation over frequency, of a cable by generating a voltage whose frequency is varied through the specified frequency range and graphing the results.

E. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.10 12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Visually inspect UTP, multi-pair copper and optical fiber cable jacket materials

for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

2. Visually confirm cable category marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and patch panels.

3. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.

4. Test UTP copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross-connection. a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-

568- B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

5. Optical Fiber Cable Tests:



a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568- B.1. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

b. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests: i) Horizontal and singlemode ISP backbone link measurements: Test at

1310 and 1490 nm in 1 direction for power test results. ii) Singlemode OSP backbone link measurements: Test at 1310 and 1490

nm according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A, Method B, One Reference Jumper and OTDR testing.

iii) Attenuation test results for the entire channel link (OLT to ONT WAO fiber) shall not exceed 28dB and include the passive optical splitter.

6. Optical Fiber Cable Performance Tests: Perform optical fiber end-to-end link tests according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.3.

7. Remote ONT DC powering cabling shall be tested for continuity from WAO point to either the PDU point in the zone/terminal box location or back to the closet power source. Any remote ONT powering cables that fail a continuity test shall be replaced prior to system turn up.

8. Remote ONT DC powering shall be commissioned and tested with a DC power meter to receive within ranges of 44-52Vdc at the ONT with a commissioned bulk DC power source. a. Cables terminated into a Phoenix-style connector shall be tested on the

output terminals. b. Cables terminated into RJ45 8P8C connectors shall utilize a breakout

adapter that bonds the appropriate positive and return pairs together prior to testing.

C. Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a

summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.

D. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

3.11 CLEANING

A. At the completion of the System, restore aspects of the project site to its former condition. Remove daily waste and excess materials, rubbish debris, tools and equipment resulting from or used in the services provided under this Contract. Remove trash from all work areas. Do not use dumpsters or trash disposal without prior approval.

SECTION 27 21 00 – POL TELECOMMUNICATIONS DATA COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT

1 PART 1



1.1 POL GENERAL GUIDELINES

A. This Section defines the general design requirements for a uniform Data

Communications Network Infrastructure that shall be followed for a Passive Optical

LAN. This subsection is relevant when the decision is made to deploy POL.

Otherwise, all applicable standards are those for an active Cat 6 active Ethernet

network.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCES

A. All equipment shall be UL listed.

B. All Passive Optical LAN equipment shall be compliant with ITU G.984.x requirements and have support for ITU G.987.x offerings.

C. The OLT components and ONT shall support the ITU G.984 OMCI specifications.

D. The OLT and subcomponent optics must support a 30km distance reach per the ITU G.984.6 standard.

1.3 GENERAL

A. Each facility or end user building shall be provided with a local area network (LAN)

B. Any facilities being upgraded shall be brought up to the requirements and levels specified herein.

C. Buildings shall be designed as to minimize the quantity or ERs and subordinate TRs and to centralize as much of the Passive Optical LAN Equipment as possible.

D. Whenever possible, the POL OLT chassis shall be located in a remote distribution building with a secondary chassis for maximum fault tolerance located at another node. When not possible, OLT chassis shall be located as geographically diverse from each other as possible. This may include: 1. OLT chassis placed on low and high floors within a single building. 2. OLT chassis placed in alternate data centers within the same floor. 3. OLT chassis placed within differing racks and rows of racks when placed within

the same data center.

E. Network applications that shall be designed for the POL shall include at a minimum the following: 1. Access Control Management Systems (ACMS) 2. Analog voice circuits (POTS) 3. Building Automation Systems 4. Clock systems 5. Coaxial C/MATV networks 6. Data networks 7. Intrusion Detection Systems (IDS)



8. IP Surveillance systems 9. IPTV 10. Patient Entertainment and Education systems 11. Point of Sales (PoS) systems 12. Real Time Location Systems (RTLS) 13. Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) systems 14. Video Teleconferencing (VTC) systems 15. Wireless (802.11 family) controller systems and endpoints 16. Paging systems 17. Mass notification systems 18. Distributed Antennae Systems (DAS)

1.4 POL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. Equipment must be environmentally hardened to support 40 to +149°F

B. Shall support Class B+ optics (28 dB optical loss budget) as defined in the ITU

standards.

C. POL module shall support field replaceable GPON SFP modules to minimize

downtime.

D. POL equipment shall support redundant OLT Processor.

E. POL equipment shall support redundant OLT Processor and Timing modules.

F. POL OLT shall provide a fully redundant backplane for all communications from the

switching units to the GPON cards with a minimum of 640Gbps backplane with current cards, and capability for a 2.5Tbps overall redundant backplane.

G. POL OLT shall support layer-2 bridging functionality.

H. POL OLT shall support up to 40 Gigabit aggregate of uplink capacity composed of four (4) 10 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces to facilitate high bandwidth ether-channels for uplink for larger chassis based platforms supporting greater than 512 ONTs.

I. POL OLT shall support concurrent use of 10 Gigabit and 1 Gigabit Ethernet uplinks.

J. POL OLT shall support full Link Aggregation configuration of uplink interfaces.

K. POL OLT shall support Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) for redundancy on 1G and 10G network uplinks

L. POL OLT shall support Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) for redundancy on 1G and 10G network uplinks

M. POL OLT shall be available in either a 23-inch or 19-inch high density chassis.

N. The POL platform shall support the following network protocols and services:



1. Ethernet Link Aggregation Group (LAG), Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) for Dual Homing, and Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP).

2. Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) for multiple concurrent Dual Homing paths from the OLT.

3. Industry standard Ethernet Bridging as defined in 802.1D 4. Multiple VLAN per end user Ethernet interface including VLAN translation,

trunking, and termination. 5. IEEE 802.1q Priority Tag. 6. IEEE 802.1p Q-Tag. 7. VLAN Group provisioning (multiple end-user interface/service into a common

VLAN Group). 8. Each VLAN Group shall support provisioning of Ethernet Bridging and Private

VLAN on a per port basis. 9. Service-based Quality of Service (QoS) for each service VLAN using 802.1p

and DSCP markings for both upstream and downstream traffic. 10. IPv4 and IPv6 concurrently with all network and security features supported. 11. QoS through a combination of ingress policing, queue management, scheduling

and shaping at the user service level. 12. Service level traffic prioritization support combination of Round Robin (RR), and

Strict Priority (SP) queuing. 13. Private VLAN 14. Multiple service QoS on each end user Ethernet interface. 15. RSTP loop detection and redundancy on the ONT end user network ports. 16. ITU G.984.x compliant “Type-B PON Protection” schemas, allowing for a 2-

input PON splitter to be dual homed to geographically diverse OLT locations without requiring the ONTs to be re-provisioned or any services lost. PON Protection shall provide capability for sub 5-second of system restoration.

17. Layer2 (Ethernet), Layer 3 (IP), Layer 4 (TCP/UDP) Access Control Lists (ACL). 18. Multiple ACL filter profiles attached to each end user interface and service. 19. Limiting the number of IP addresses to each user port 20. Sticky MAC address for port security function. 21. 802.1x authentication for port control. 22. Dynamic VLAN. 23. Network Access Control (NAC) integration for automatic ONT user port

configuration based upon Active Directory/LDAP, 802.1x or CAC/smart card credentials.

24. MAC Bypass (MAB) 25. Link Layer Data Protocol (LLDP) for automatic provisioning of VoIP phones,

E911, and MED/Inventory services as well as power negotiations. 26. Guest VLAN functions via RADIUS/802.1x authentication. 27. RADIUS interface on OLT. 28. SYSLOG integration and monitoring. 29. DHCP Option 82. 30. ONT Range Locking to prohibit tampering with the ONTs. 31. Support for POL Threshold Crossing Alarms to provide full PON utilization

statistics and alarming based on certain percent utilization of a PON link and SNMP alarm notification.



32. POL System shall not store any user data (VLANS, IPs, MACs, etc) at the ONT and shall not have any user interface (CLI, web, serial) at the ONT to permit for user login and configuration of the ONT that could result in data breaches.

O. All ONT port shall support 10/100/1000-BaseT interfaces.

P. All ONT ports shall support PoE and/or PoE+ across all ports.

Q. All non-closet based ONTs shall be natively 48Vdc powered, permitting for remote ONT powering.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. The Local Area Network Electronics and software shall be fully warranted for three

(3) years from date of substantial completion by the contractor and manufacturer. If

any defects are found within this warranty period, the defective system component

shall be replaced at no extra cost to the Owner for parts or labor. Provide a

statement of this warranty with the O&M manuals and to the Director of IT. Make

available a service contract offering continuing factory authorized service of this

system after the initial warranty period.

- 1 -

NRPA Facility Market Report:

Community Profile

Analysis of

South County Regional Recreation Center 8580 2ND AVE

SILVER SPRING, MD 20910 Park and recreation agencies offer a diverse set of parks, facilities, and program activities to meet the

needs of their communities. But the offerings that work well for one agency, or even one part of an

agency’s service area, may not be the best fit elsewhere. As a result, park and recreation professionals

seek information and insights that empower them to make decisions on the optimal program and

service offerings for their communities.

In your hands is the NRPA Facility Market Report for the South County Regional Recreation Center. This

report offers an array of data that provides your agency with a greater understanding of the residents

served by the facility, with a particular focus on their habits and interests.

Key Findings About the South County Regional Recreation Center:

960,146 Number of residents living within a 20-minute drive of the facility per Census 2010

35.9 Median age of residents living within a 20-minute drive of the facility per Census 2010

25.0% Percentage of adult population living within a 20-minute drive of the facility that exercise at least seven hours per week

April 2017SOUTH COUNTY REGIONAL RECREATION AND AQUATIC CENTER

Program of Requirements - Appendix A.8 1 of 7

- 2 -

Figure 1: Map of 10-, 15- and 20-Minute Drives from the Facility

Figure 1 illustrates the physical accessibility, in terms of driving times, of the South County Regional

Recreation Center. The highlighted areas show the driving times to the facility, broken down into 10-

(brown), 15- (green) and 20- (blue) minute estimated drive time intervals. Although usage and

constituent population will vary by the facility type, the 20-minute drive time area is presented as a

general guideline on the size of the population most likely to visit the facility. That is, those residing

within the area shaded blue may represent the most likely users of common facilities such as recreation

and community centers, athletic fields, playgrounds, tennis courts, senior centers and aquatic facilities.



- 3 -

About the Residents Who Live Within a 20-Minute Drive of the Facility

Figure 2: 2010 Census Data and 2016 & 2021 Forecast Data of People Residing

Within a 20-Minute Drive of the Facility

Summary Census 2010 2016 Forecast 2021 Forecast

Population 960,146 1,018,485 1,078,675

Households 367,958 385,487 406,733

Families 212,516 219,947 230,335

Average Household Size 2.53 2.57 2.58

Owner Occupied Homes 204,113 203,493 213,688

Renter Occupied Homes 163,845 181,994 193,045

Median Age 35.9 36.9 37.7

Median Household Income $83,269 $92,994

Race and Ethnicity Census

2010

2016

Forecast

2021

Forecast

Number Percent Number Percent Number Percent White Alone 460,529 48.0% 471,884 46.3% 486,795 45.1% Black Alone 273,879 28.5% 276,152 27.1% 279,434 25.9% American Indian Alone 4,771 0.5% 5,124 0.5% 5,550 0.5% Asian Alone 82,940 8.6% 96,464 9.5% 108,757 10.1% Pacific Islander Alone 680 0.1% 740 0.1% 792 0.1% Some Other Race Alone 98,954 10.3% 122,593 12.0% 145,211 13.5%

Two or More Races 38,393 4.0% 45,527 4.5% 52,136 4.8% Hispanic Origin (Any Race)

198,567 20.7% 247,165 24.3% 295,253 27.4%

Figure 2 summarizes Census data of the residents living within a 20-minute drive of the facility, including

population, household formation and home ownership status. The 2010 data represents actual U.S.

Census data, while the 2016 and 2021 figures are projections developed by Esri. The projections are

based on forecasts for births, deaths, international and domestic migration and other factors that

influence population shifts. These projections, which naturally are subject to revision, assist your agency

in its planning of future programming at the facility over the coming years.



- 4 -

Figure 3: Forecasted Age Trends of People Residing Within a 20-Minute Drive

of the Facility

Figure 4: Census 2010 Data and Forecasted Age Trends of People Residing


Census 2010 2016 Forecast 2021 Forecast

Population by Age Number Percent Number Percent Number Percent

0 - 4 60,910 6.3% 58,943 5.8% 61,411 5.7%

5 - 9 54,017 5.6% 59,812 5.9% 58,836 5.5%

10 - 14 51,041 5.3% 56,985 5.6% 59,951 5.6%

15 - 19 60,047 6.3% 62,092 6.1% 63,537 5.9%

20 - 24 77,683 8.1% 75,044 7.4% 73,780 6.8%

25 - 34 164,193 17.1% 169,112 16.6% 177,555 16.5%

35 - 44 136,204 14.2% 141,168 13.9% 155,178 14.4%

45 - 54 131,475 13.7% 129,930 12.8% 130,888 12.1%

55 - 64 108,185 11.3% 122,180 12.0% 127,417 11.8%

65 - 74 59,455 6.2% 80,061 7.9% 97,080 9.0%

75 - 84 37,490 3.9% 41,089 4.0% 49,449 4.6%

85+ 19,447 2.0% 22,068 2.2% 23,593 2.2%

Figures 3 and 4 provide an age distribution of the population living with a 20-minute drive of the facility

by age groups, as reported in United States Census and American Community Survey (ACS) data.

Note that the age ranges are not of equal size. The age groups ranging from birth to 24 years old are

grouped into five-year increments, ages 25 to 84 are grouped into 10-year increments and individuals 85

years and older are placed into a single age group.

From a recreation programming and planning perspective, the classification of youth and young adults

into small age groups aid your agency with programing decisions for children and young adults. Whereas

adults within a 10-year age range (e.g., ages 35 to 44) may likely share similar recreation interests, the

similarly large size age groups may not make as much sense for children and young adults. For example,

recreation interests of 5 year olds have few similarities of those of 15 year olds. Hence, the five-year age

ranges for the younger age groupings provide your agency with more valuable insights about the

relative size of the youth population when considering their recreation needs.

2016

2021

Population by AgePopulation by Age

Perc

ent

16

14

12

10

8

6

4

2

00-4 5-9 10-14 15-19 20-24 25-34 35-44 45-54 55-64 65-74 75-84 85+



- 5 -

Personal Interests, Activities and Spending Habits

Figures 5 - 8 summarize the personal interests, activities and spending habits of residents living within a

20-minute drive of the facility. These tables include predictors of recreation activity and spending that

better inform programming decision making for your facility.

Pay particular attention to the Market Potential Index, or MPI. The MPI represents the relative likelihood

of adults living near your facility to engage in a particular activity in comparison to the U.S. average. This

measure is indexed to 100, so that an MPI greater than 100 indicates a greater than average likelihood

(relative to the whole U.S.) to participate in the activity while an MPI less than 100 suggests a less than

average likelihood to engage in the activity.

Figure 5: Weekly Exercise Habits of People Residing Within a 20-Minute Drive

of the Facility

Expected

Number of

Adults Percent MPI

Spends 7+ hours exercising per week 202,737 25.0% 117

Spends 4-6 hours exercising per week 193,906 23.9% 117

Spends 1-3 hours exercising per week 180,275 22.2% 96

Figure 5 shows the weekly exercise habits for people within a 20-minute drive of your facility. The

percentages are the proportion of adults living within a 20-minute drive of the facility that exercise one

to three, four to six or seven-plus hours a week. An MPI value greater than 100 indicates a greater

percentage of the adult population living within a 20-minute drive of the facility exercises one to two,

three to five or six-plus hours a week versus the United States as a whole.

Figure 6: Participation Rates of Select Recreation Activities of People Residing


Expected

Number of

Adults Percent MPI

Participated in aerobics in last 12 months 83,397 10.3% 121

Participated in basketball in last 12 months 69,967 8.6% 104

Participated in yoga in last 12 months 87,827 10.8% 154

Participated in weight lifting in last 12 months 102,957 12.7% 128

Participated in tennis in last 12 months 47,996 5.9% 149

Participated in soccer in last 12 months 38,915 4.8% 126

Figure 6 presents data on the level of adult participation in select recreation activities among residents living within a 20-minute drive of the facility. Using this data, you can estimate the interests of residents in your facility’s service area, helping to inform programming planning decisions.



- 6 -

Figure 7: Social Media Usage of People Residing Within a 20-Minute Drive of

the Facility

Expected

Number of

Adults Percent MPI

Facebook 489,598 60.4% 109

YouTube 411,238 50.7% 113

Twitter 125,016 15.4% 136

Figure 7 shows the level of social media usage of adult residents that reside within a 20-minute drive of

your facility. Understanding the social media habits of the residents living near the facility informs your

agency on the potential efficacy of social media channels in supporting marketing strategies for the

facility’s programming and services.

Figure 8: Spending Habits on Recreation Activities of People Residing Within a

20-Minute Drive of the Facility

Spending

Potential

Index

Average

Annual

Amount Spent Total

Total Spent on Entertainment/Recreation

Fees and Admissions

170 $981.67 $378,421,136

- Tickets to Theatre/Operas/Concerts 174 $91.86 $35,410,035

- Tickets to Movies/Museums/Parks 168 $111.49 $42,979,449

- Admission to Sporting Events 167 $89.10 $34,346,299

- Fees for Participant Sports 160 $143.11 $55,167,695

- Fees for Recreational Lessons 175 $214.96 $82,865,062

- Membership Fees for

Social/Recreation/Civic Clubs

172 $329.61 $127,059,407

Figure 8 summarizes the spending habits of nearby residents on recreation activities by presenting the

Spending Potential Index (SPI) and average annual spending on select recreation and leisure activities.

Similar to the MPI, the SPI is indexed such that a reading of 100 represents average spending among all

U.S. households. Hence, a reading above 100 means residents living within a 20-minute drive of the

facility spends more on average on the particular activity relative to the United States as a whole.

While all of the leisure activities presented in the table may not be relevant to your facility, these data

provide your agency with guidance on the leisure interests of your patrons, as well as their

ability/willingness to pay for those experiences. For example, a population that has a higher than

average SPI for “Fees for Recreational Lessons” may indicate a significant opportunity — and/or a

greater willingness to pay — for high-quality, fee-based recreation programs at your facility.



- 7 -

Final Thoughts

While the information within this report is not intended to be indicative of the entire population served

by South County Regional Recreation Center, it gives your agency insights on the potential market for

the facility with a particular focus on those living within a 20-minute drive. One note of caution: The

analysis provided within this report is meant to be for informational purposes only and does not

represent a recommendation by NRPA for the facility’s operations.

The Premier Membership Advantage

This report is only one example of the many benefits and resources available to you as a Premier

member of NRPA. Your all-inclusive membership gives your agency maximum value and convenience to

NRPA’s exceptional benefits and resources including:

Up to 30 percent discount on NRPA products and services.

A bulk purchasing discount on conference registration, certification, online learning and more.

10 free Premier-exclusive webinars.

Access to approximately $2.4 million in grant opportunities annually.

Member discounts on insurance, background screenings, software and more.

For a full list of your membership benefits, please visit www.nrpa.org/Member-Benefits.

Sponsored by Playworld

Playworld creates innovative commercial playground equipment that

brings the joy of play to people of every age. They don’t just make

playground equipment. They are in the kid–empowering, confidence–

building, friendship–making, health–promoting, community-strengthening business. Playworld does this

because, quite simply, they believe that The World Needs Play®.

© COPYRIGHT 2016 National Recreation and Park Association. Portions of this document include intellectual property of Esri and its licensors and are used herein under license. © COPYRIGHT 2016 Esri and its licensors.



http://www.nrpa.org/Member-Benefits

Elizabeth Square, Phase 1 KGD Architecture Silver Spring, Maryland Issue for Construction June 20, 2019

APPENDIX E 1 of 1

APPENDIX E

LEED BOUNDARY DIAGRAMS

HB

Vzn

PROP.

5"-4

W

(BY PE

PCO)

PROP. 6'x18'x12' PEPCO TRANSFORM

ER (3)

PROP. 6'x18'x12' BUS VAULT (1)

PROP.

5"-8

W

(BY PE

PCO)

5

6

7

3

1

2

4

PROP.

5"-1

2WFG

(310')

(BY PE

PCO)

EX. 6W PEPCO

EX. 6'x10'PEPCOMH#566679

EX. 8W

PEPCO

PROP. 6'x18'x12' PEPCO

TRAN

SFORMER (4)-

120/208V

PROP.

4"-4

W PVC

(BY VE

RIZON

)

PROP.

4'x8'

MH

(BY VE

RIZON

)

Ex. 9'

x3'x67

MH #1

797

(BY VE

RIZON

)

Ex. 1-

TR.D.

(BY VE

RIZON

)

PROP.

6'x12

' MH

(BY PE

PCO)

EX. 2W

PEPC

O CON

DUIT

(APPRO

X. LOC

ATION)

EX.CO

MCAST

CON

DUIT

(APPRO

X. LOC

ATION)

P lea se N ote:E lem ent s o utside of the pro per ty lin e ar e n ot par t of th is app lica tio n a nd are sho wn forr efe ren ce o nly . Pleas e r efer to sit e p lan

#8-1989701B.

1

SHC

330

P lea se N ote:E lem ent s o utside of the pro per ty lin e ar e n ot par t of th is app lica tio n a nd are sho wn forr efe ren ce o nly . Pleas e r efer to sit e p lan

#8-1989701B.

1

WM

EV

EVEVF

F

EV

EVEV

DN

FENWIC

K LANE

APPLE AVENU

E

SECOND AVENUE

NEW GARAGEENTRANCE

NEWLOADING

NEWDROP OFF

RAILROAD RIGHT-OF-WAY

PROPERTY LINE

PROPERTY LINE

NEW BIKE PATH

EXISTINGELIZABETH HOUSE

EXISTINGALEXANDERHOUSE

EXISTINGGARAGE ENTRANCE

EXISTINGLOADING

EXISTINGGARAGEENTRANCE

EXISTING POOL &COURTYARD

328.10'

327.80'

327.5'

349.00'

344.50'

527' - 8"

BUILDINGENTRANCE

EXISTINGCOURTYARD TO

REMAIN

INTERIMLANDSCAPING/TURF

RAMP UNDERCANOPY. REFER TOLANDSCAPE

STAIR. REFERTO LANDSCAPE

OUTDOOR ROOFTERRACE

EXTENT OF GARAGESLAB BELOW

TRANSFORMER VAULTSREFER TO CIVIL AND MEP

344.50'

EXISTING EXHAUSTGRATE TO BE REMOVEDAT GRADE

GREEN ROOFREFER TO CIVIL

GREEN ROOFREFER TOCIVIL

RAIN GARDENREFER TO CIVIL

COOLINGTOWERS

REFER TO MEP

EXISTINGBUILDING

EXISTINGBUILDING

EXISTINGBUILDING

BUILDINGENTRANCE

PROPERTY LINE

PROPERTY LINE

527' - 8" HP

527' - 8" HP

405' - 8 3/4"

390' - 8 1/2"

MONTGOMERY COUNTYMONUMENT SIGN BY OTHERS

LIGHT POLE MTD SIGNBY OTHERS

LIMIT OF DISTURBANCE

REST AREAREFER TO LANDSCAPE

GREEN ROOF(SEE CIVIL)

RENOVATE EXISTINGSIDEWALK TO COMPLYWITH ADAREQUIREMENTS. REFERTO CIVIL.

GREEN ROOF.REFER TO CIVIL

RENOVATE EXISTINGSIDEWALK TO COMPLYWITH ADA REQUIREMENTS.REFER TO CIVIL.

542' - 10"

528' - 10 1/2"

528' - 10 1/2"

ELEVATOR OVERRUN& TRASH CHUTES

STAIR ANDELEVATOROVERRUN



EQUIP YARD

EQUIP YARD

CANOPY

EXT BLDG

EXT BLDG

EXT BLDG

EQUIP YARD



FDC

FDC





FDC

FDC

TRANSFORMER VAULTSREFER TO CIVIL AND MEP

FIRE TRUCKTURN AROUNDREFER TO CIVIL

493' - 9 1/8"

480' - 8"

367' - 8"

405' - 8"

372' - 5" HP

407' - 8"

538' - 9"

480' - 4 1/2"

481' - 0 1/2"

405' - 3 1/4"

482' - 2"

545' - 6" HP

407' - 2 1/2"

405' - 8"

488' - 10"

407' - 2 1/2"

349.00'

349.00'

STAIR ROOF

STAIR ROOF

CANOPY

CANOPY

CANOPY

CANOPY

RETAINING WALLBY OTHERS

CANOPY BELOW

CANOPY BELOW

SCALE

DRAWING NUMBER

DRAWING TITLE

DATE

PROJECT NUMBER

REVISIONS

KEY PLAN

© 1995-2018 KISHIMOTO.GORDON.DALAYA PC expressly reserves its common law copyright and other

property rights in these plans. These plans are not to be reporduced, change, or copied in whole or in

part in any form or manner whatsoever, nor are they to be assigned to any third party, without first

obtaining the express written permission and consent of KISHIMOTO.GORDON.DALAYA PC

SEAL & SIGNATURE

CONSULTANT

IFC PROGRESS PRINT

PHASE I

NO DATE DESCRIPTION

ISSUE

DATE DESCRIPTION

1101 15th Street, NWSuite 200Washington, DC 20005202 338 3800

www.kgdarchitecture.com

PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATION:

I CERTIFY THAT THESE DOCUMENTS WERE PREPARED OR APPROVED BY ME, AND

THAT I AM A DULY LICENSED ARCHITECT UNDER THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF

MARYLAND, LICENSE NUMBER 10320, EXPIRATION 04/18/2019.

06.01.17 DESIGN DEVELOPMENT

DPS STAMP

MONTGO

MERY CO

UNTY BATCH STAMP

09.15.17 PERMIT ISSUE

11.10.17 BID SET05.15.18 FINAL BID SET

09.07.18 IFC PROGRESS PRINT

8/17/2018 7:28:23 PM

1" = 20'-0"

C:\Revit_Working\2016\ESquare_A_SCRRAC_Central_v16_ashifflett.rvt

A101

ARCHITECTURAL SITE PLAN

08.17.2018

16111 + 17040

ELIZABETH SQUARE

1315 APPLE AVENUE

SILVER SPRING, MD 20910

HOC

SCALE: 1" = 20'-0"A101

1 ARCHITECTURAL SITE PLAN

1. REFER TO CIVIL AND LANSDCAPE DRAWINGS FOR PHASE 1 SITE EXTENTS AND SITEDETAILS. PROJECT HAS BEEN SUBMITTED UNDER SITE PLAN NO. 820170140 TOMONTGOMERY COUNTY PARK AND PLANNING.

2. EXISTING ELIZABETH HOUSE AND ALEXANDER HOUSE ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCEONLY AND ARE NOT PART OF THIS SCOPE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.

3. LIMIT OF DISTURBANCE SHOWN IN DASHED LINE.

4. RENOVATE EXISTING SIDEWALK AT 2ND AVENUE AND APPLE AVENUE TO COMPLYWITH ADA REQUIREMENTS, EXTENTS SHOWN IN LIMIT OF DISTURBANCE.

5. REFER TO SIGNAGE PACKAGE BY OTHERS FOR SITE AND EXTERIOR BUILDINGSIGNAGE.

GENERAL NOTES

SCRRAC

Elizabeth House

Shared

SILVA CELLS

SILVA CELLS

SCRRAC ROOF ANDSITE AREA

SCRRAC COOLINGTOWERS

SCRRAC ROOF ANDPLAZA AREA

ELIZABETH HOUSE ROOF AND SITE AREA

ELIZABETH HOUSE ROOF AND SITE AREA

ELIZABETH HOUSE PLAZA AREA

LEED BOUNDARY NOTES: 1.DIAGRAMS ARE INTENDED TO COMMUNICATE LEED BOUNDARY LINES FOR EHOUSE III AND SCRRAC SCOPES RESPECTIVELY. THEY ARE NOT TO BE USED FOR ANY PURPOSE THAN FOR LEED BOUNDARY SEPARATION. 2.PLAN OVERLAYS ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. REFER TO CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR CURRENT BACKGROUND INFORMATION. 3.LEED BOUNDARY SEPARATION DIAGRAM SHOWN WAS APPROVED BY THE USGBC ON MARCH 21, 2018. 4.ANY REVISIONS TO THE BOUNDARY LINES MUST BE APPROVED BY THE USGBC, ARCHITECT, AND THE ENGINEER OF RECORD. CHANGES MAY HAVE AN AFFECT ON ENERGY MODEL CALCULATIONS AND LEED POINTS ACHIEVED. 5.REFER TO LEED SCORECARDS FOR MORE INFORMATION. 6.LEED BOUNDARY DIAGRAMS LAST UPDATED ON 08.31.18.

UP

UP

UP

UP

UP

UP

NFWH

HB

NFWH

HB

FSAE LOBBY

G250

1

A410

1

A409

1

A407

1

A408

1

A406

1

A405

?A

?B

?B.5

?D

?E

?E.5

?F

?G

?G.9

?H

?J

?K

?L

?M

?N

?P

?Q

?R

?S

?T

?A.3

?S.3

?A.1

?A.5

?B.1

?D.1

?F.7

?2 ?4 ?10

?1 ?3?5 ?7 ?11 ?19.2 ?21.2 ?23.2 ?25.2 ?27.2 ?29.213?9? 15? 17? ?28.6

?26.6

?A.2

?B.2

?C.2

?D.2

?E.2

?F.2

?G.2

?H.6

?J.6

?K.6

?L.6

?M.6

?N.6

?P.6

?S.6

?T.6

?23.6?20.6 ?27.6

?13.1

?J.4

?K.4

?L.4

?M.4

?N.4

?P.4

?Q.4

?18.4?17.4

?19.1?15.1

?2.3

?31.2

?24.6?21.6

C?

SWITCHGEAR SCRRAC

G202

TEL/COM

G205

TEL/COM SCRRAC

G204

BICYCLE PARKING

G206

SWITCHGEAR

G201

SERV. ELEV LOBBY

G210

COMPETITION POOL

SURGE VAULT

G209

TENANT STORAGE

G213

TENANT STORAGE

G207

UNDERSIDE OF

COMPETITION POOL

G211

EMERGENCY

GENERATOR RM

G215A

?6

ELEV 4

E4

ELEV 3

E3

KNOCK OUT PANEL ATFUTURE CONNECTIONTO PHASE 2

EXTENT OF RECREATIONPOOL ABOVE

319' - 0" TSS

EXTENT OF LEISUREPOOL ABOVE

INTAKE SHAFT

316' - 0" TSS

NEW CONNECTIONTO ALEXANDERHOUSE GARAGE

RAMP UP

RAMP DN

STAIR A

A

ELEV 5

E5

1/ A198C

1/ A198A1/ A

198B

1/ A198A

1/ A198C

1/ A198B

C06

S08

S09

S10

C16

S17

S19

S18

C38

C32

C31

S22

S23

S25

S26

HC34

S30

S21

HCE28

E29

VAN27

S35

S20

S24

S37

S42

S43

S44

C40

C41

PS39

C36

EXISTING ALEXANDER HOUSE GARAGE

EXISTING PARKINGSPACES REMOVED

THIS AREA UNDERBIKE PATH

MECHANICAL AIR

PLENUM

G216

WATER STORAGE TANK

G209A

S01 S

06

CS02

CS03

C05

S04

CORRIDOR

G208

AREA WELLS ABOVE

AREA WELLS ABOVE

UNEXCAVATED

TRANSFORMER VAULTSSEE CIVIL DRAWINGS

CORRIDOR

G217

TRENCH DRAIN

SILVA CELLS REFERTO CIVIL DRAWINGS

SILVA CELLS REFER TOCIVIL DRAWINGS

SEE POOL DRAWINGSPL-0.00 - PL-5.08

WOMEN'S SHOWER

G217A

DOG WASH

G220

ELECTRICAL

G201A

GREASE INTERCEPTOR

ROOM

G203

MEN'S SHOWER

G217B

STAIR C

C

HOT WATER ROOM

G206A

STORAGE

G214A

MAINTENANCE

OFFICE

G214

S11

S12

S13

S14

S15

C33

ELECTRIC VEHICLECHARGING STATION.SEE ELEC. DRAWINGS

PEDESTRIAN PATH

A303

1

249' - 8 3/8" 16' - 7"

HEIGHT = 9'-0"

22' - 0"

EXISTING ELIZABETH HOUSEGARAGE

316' - 4"

316' - 0"

318' - 0" HP

316' - 0" LP

316' - 0"

317' - 6" LP

318' - 0" HP

316' - 4" 316' - 4"

318' - 0"

GARAGE

G200

STAIR B

B

EXHAUST AIR PLENUM

G200A

TEL DATA

G212

118' - 11 5/8"

20' - 2"

47' - 6 1/8"

99' - 8 3/8"

1' - 3"

82' - 0 5/8"

91' - 11 3/4" 42' - 5 3/8"24' - 2 1/8"

124.07° 75.9

9°

104.01°

75.9

9°

66.1

7°

TRANSFORMER VAULTSREFER TO CIVIL DRAWINGS

4' - 7"

100'-7"

207' - 3 1/8"

A3011

?B.3

?R.1

?30.2

PARALLELSPACE

STANDARDSPACE

18' - 0"

8' - 6"

21' - 0"

7' - 0"

COMPACTSPACE

16' - 6"

7' - 6"

ELEC CHARGINGSPACE

18' - 0"

9' - 0"

HCSPACE

18' - 0"

8' - 6" 5' - 0"

HC VANSPACE

18' - 0"

8' - 6" 8' - 0"

CAR SHARESPACE

18' - 0"

8' - 6"

PARKING SPACE DIAGRAMREF: MOCO ZONING ORDINANCE 2014,

SECTION 6.2.5.E

PARKING NOTES:1. FLOOR SLOPES AND CROSS-SLOPES AT ALL HANDICAPPED PARKING SPACES AND UNLOADING AREAS SHALL BE 1.5% IN ANYDIRECTION. A FULLY ACCESSIBLE ROUTE SHALL BE MAINTAINED FROM THE ACCESSIBLE SPACE TO THE ELEVATOR LOBBY.

2. ALL PARKING SPACES AND GARAGE STRIPING TO COMPLY WITH MONTGOMERY COUNTY TRAFFIC STANDARDS, GENERALCONTRACTOR TO SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS OF PAINTING LAYOUT FOR APROVAL PRIOR TO PAINTING. SEE SPECIFICATIONS AND

SIGNAGE PACKAGE BY OTHERS FOR DETAILS

3. MAINTAIN 8'-4" MINIMUM CLEARANCE ALONG HANDICAPPED VAN PATH AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL AND GOVERNING CODES.

4. SEE PLANS FOR RUBBER WHEELSTOP LOCATIONS. COORDINATE PLACEMENT BASED ON MANUF. RECOMMENDATION.

01

TYP PARKING SPACE STRIPING

RUBBERWHEELSTOP,TYP.

SPACE DIVIDER LINES

PARKING SPACENUMBER

ALIGN

EQ EQ

SCALE

DRAWING NUMBER

DRAWING TITLE

DATE

PROJECT NUMBER

REVISIONS

KEY PLAN





SEAL & SIGNATURE

CONSULTANT

IFC PROGRESS PRINT

PHASE I

NO DATE DESCRIPTION

ISSUE

DATE DESCRIPTION







B C

A


DPS STAMP

MONTGO

MERY CO

UNTY BATCH STAMP




8/17/2018 7:31:03 PM

As indicated


A198

B2 LEVEL FLOOR PLAN -OVERALL

08.17.2018

16111 + 17040

ELIZABETH SQUARE

1315 APPLE AVENUE


HOC

SCALE: 1/16" = 1'-0"A198

1 B2 LEVEL FLOOR PLAN - OVERALL

B2 LEVEL PARKING SCHEDULE

DESCRIPTION TYPE COUNT

ACCESSIBLE ELEC CHARGING SPACES HCE 1

ACCESSIBLE SPACES HC 1

ACCESSIBLE VAN SPACES VAN 1

CAR SHARE SPACES CS 2

COMPACT SPACES C 10

ELEC CHARGING SPACES E 1

PARALLEL STANDARD SPACES PS 1

STANDARD SPACES S 27

44

BIKE SPACES 80

1

1

1

1 09.07.18 IFC PROGRESS PRINT

ELIZABETH HOUSEGARAGE, UTILITY ANDTENANT AMENITY LEVEL

SCRRAC UTILITYROOMS

SCRRACGENERATORS

UP

UP

UPUP

PROP. 6'x1

8'x1

2' PEPCO TRANSFORMER (3)

PROP. 6'x1

8'x1

2' BUS VAULT

(1)

5 6 7

3

1

2

4

330

DN

UP

UP

UP

UPUP

3 TREAD

UP

NFWHNFWH

NF

WH

DN

DN

DN

WH

HB

WH

WH

WH

WH

WH

HB

HB

HB

F F

WH

HB

WH

WH

WH

HB

HB

WH

WH

EV

FENWICK LANE

RAILR

OAD RIGHT-O

F-WAY

336' - 0"

1

A410

1

A409

1

A407

1

A408

1

A406

1

A405

ELEV 3

E3

1

A401

1

A402

FSAE LOBBY

R050

EXISTINGALEXANDER HOUSE

PROPERTY LINE

PROPERTY LINE

PROPERTY LINE


NEW BIKE PATH

TRANSFORMER VAULTS(SEE CIVIL & MEP DRAWINGS)

RETAINING WALL BY OTHERS (SEE STRUCT/CIVIL DRAWINGS)

?A

?B

?B.5

?D

?E

?E.5

?F

?G

?G.9

?H

?J

?K

?L

?M

?N

?P

?Q

?R

?S

?T

?A.3

?S.3

?A.1

?A.5

?B.1

?D.1

?F.7

?2 ?4 ?10

?1

?3 ?5 ?7 ?11 ?19.2 ?21.2 ?23.2 ?25.2 ?27.2 ?29.213?9? 15? 17? ?28.6

?26.6

?A.2

?B.2

?C.2

?D.2

?E.2

?F.2

?G.2

?J.6

?L.6

?M.6

?N.6

?P.6

?S.6

?T.6

?23.6?20.6 ?27.6

?13.1

?J.4

?K.4

?L.4

?M.4

?N.4

?P.4

?Q.4

?18.4?17.4

?19.1?15.1

?2.3

?31.2

?24.6?21.6

C?

ELECTRICAL ROOM

G104

SERVICE ELEV LOBBY

G110

POOL FILTER ROOM

G105

POOL STORAGE

S019

POOL MECH.

S018

WATER PUMP ROOM

G109

STORAGE

S017

COMPETITION POOL

LEISURE POOL

RECREATION POOL

?6

STAIR A

A

ELEV 4

E4

ELEV 5

E5

STAIR D

D

ELEV 2

E2

GARAGE RAMP

G101

TRASH ROOM

G108

LIFEGUARD

S009

WET CLASSROOM

S005

NATATORIUM

PRE-FUNCTION SPACE

S001

STORAGE

S005A

RESTROOM

S010

331' - 9"

AREA WELLBELOW

EXAUSTAREA WELL

1/ A199C

1/ A199A

1/ A199

B

1/ A199

A

1/ A199C

1/ A199B

INTAKEAREA WELL

328' - 10"

331' - 10"

337' - 0"

ELEV 1

E1

CHLORINE &

CHEMICAL STORAGE

G106

ACID STORAGE

G107LOADING DOCK

G102




EXAUSTAREA WELL

EXAUSTAREA WELL

CORRIDOR

S001A

LIFEGUARD LOCKER

RM

S012

ELEC.

S008

OFFICE

S009A

STORAGE

S007

MECH. RM

S003

STORAGE

S015

ELECTRICAL

G102A

CUSTODIAL

S002

TELE DATA

S016

CLOSET

S004AWOMEN'S LOCKER RM

S014

CORRIDOR

G110A

STAIR F

F

A302

1

SPA

SPA

STAIR C

C

FIRE PUMP ROOM

G109A

MEN'S LOCKER RM

S004

FAMILY CHANGING

AREA

S013

332' - 0"

332' - 0"TELEDATA

G103

FIRST AID

S011

FAMILY RESTROOM

S013A

FAMILY RESTROOM

S013B

FAMILY RESTROOM

S013C

FAMILY RESTROOM

S013D

FAMILY RESTROOM

S013E

STORAGE

S013F

STAIR B

B

A303

1

16

5.9

8°

70' - 0 3/4"

48' - 11"

20' - 2"

47' - 6"

101' - 1 3/8"

332' - 8" TSS


59' - 11 1/4"

124.07° 75.9

9°

104.01°

75.9

9°

90.0

0°

205' - 1

1 1/8"

66.1

7°

91' - 11 3/4" 42' - 5 3/8"

EXISTING EXHAUSTAREA WELL

329' - 6" TSS

332' - 0" TSS

328' - 4"

327'-11 5/8"

POOL DECK

S029

4' - 4 5/8"

START OF CURVE

109' - 6

7/8"

A3011

?B.3

?R.1

?30.2

SCALE

DRAWING NUMBER

DRAWING TITLE

DATE

PROJECT NUMBER

REVISIONS

KEY PLAN

© 1995-2018 KISHIM

OTO

.GORDON.DALA

YA PC expressly reserves its common law copyright and other


part in any form

or manner whatsoever, nor are they to be assigned to any third party, without first

obtaining the express written perm

ission and consent of KISHIMOTO.GORDON.DALA

YA PC

SEAL & SIGNATURE

CONSULTANT

IFC PROGRESS PRINT

PHASE I

NO DATE DESCRIPTION

ISSUE

DATE DESCRIPTION







B C

A


DPS STAMP

MONTGO

MERY CO

UNTY BATCH STAMP




8/17/2018 7:31:39 PM

1/16" = 1'-0"


A199

B1 LEVEL FLOOR PLAN -OVERALL

08.17.2018

16111 + 17040

ELIZABETH SQUARE

1315 APPLE AVENUE


HOC

SCALE: 1/16" = 1'-0"A199

1 B1 LEVEL FLOOR PLAN - OVERALL

1


1

1

1

ELIZABETH HOUSE(PRIMARY TENANT)LOADING AREA

SCRRAC POOLLEVEL

SCRRAC EGRESSAND FSAE ACCESS

3,425.59 sf

270.

418

sf

503.

1133

sf

ELIZABETH HOUSE(PRIMARY TENANT)TRASH AND RECYCLING

DN

DN

DN

DN

UP

PROP. 6'x1

8'x1

2' PEPCO TRANSFORMER (3)

PROP. 6'x1

8'x1

2' BUS VAULT

(1)

PROP. 6'x20'x12' PEPCOTRANSFORMER (2)

5 6 7

3

1

2

4

FCR

330

WM

NF

WH

NFWH

UP

HB

WH

WH

NF

WH

NFW

H

DN

DN

DN

RAILROAD RIGHT-O

F-WAY

1

A410

1

A409

1

A407

1

A408

1

A406

1

A405

GARAGE ENTRANCEBELOW

LOADING DOCKENTRANCE BELOW

1

A402

TRANSFORMER VAULTSBELOW(SEE CIVIL & MEPDRAWINGS)

PROPERTY LINE

NEW BIKE PATH,REFER TO CIVIL

RETAINING WALLBY OTHERS

?A

?B

?B.5

?D

?E

?E.5

?F

?G

?G.9

?H

?J

?K

?L

?M

?N

?P

?Q

?R

?S

?T

?A.3

?S.3

?A.1

?A.5

?B.1

?D.1

?F.7

?2

?4

?10

?1 ?3 ?5 ?7 ?11 ?19.2 ?21.2 ?23.2 ?25.2 ?27.2 ?29.213?9? 15? 17?

?A.2

?B.2

?C.2

?D.2

?E.2

?F.2

?G.2

?13.1

?J.4

?K.4

?L.4

?M.4

?N.4

?P.4

?Q.4

?18.4

?17.4

?19.1?15.1

?2.3

?31.2

?20.8

C?

?6

FIRE CONTROL RM

R101A

MECHANICAL ROOM

S110

KITCHEN

S107

SOCIAL HALL

S106

STORAGE

S105

OFFICE 1

S103C

OFFICE 2

S103D

TELEDATA

S103L

OFFICE 5

S103G

RESIDENTIAL LOBBY

R100

FRONT DESK

S100A

KITCHEN STORAGE

S107A

SERVICE ELEV LOBBY

S108

CAFE

S114

SOCIAL HALL

PREFUNCTION

S100B

VENDING

S102A

OPEN TO

BELOW

349' - 0" TSS

WOMENS RESTROOM

S112

MENS RESTROOM

S113

ELEV LOBBY

S102

EXISTING ALEXANDER HOUSE

EXISTING ELIZABETH HOUSE

STAIR A

A

COURTYARD

STAIR C

C

EXTENTS OFMECHANICAL LEVELABOVE

VESTIBULE

R101

ELEV 3

E3

ELEV 4

E4

ELEV 2

E2

1/ A201C

1/ A201A1/ A201B

1/ A201A

1/ A201C

1/ A201B

EXHAUST AREAWAY

MOCO MONUMENT SIGN,REFER TO SIGNAGEPACKAGE BY OTHERS

OFFICE 8

S103K

OFFICE 3

S103E

OFFICE 4

S103F

WELLNESS RM

S104

SPECTATOR SEATING

S115

111 SEATS

SPECTATOR SEATING

S116

201 SEATS

ELEV 1

E1

EXISTINGALEXANDER HOUSEEXHAUST GRATE TOBE REMOVED

STAIRS, SEE LANDSCAPEDRAWINGS FOR DETAILS

RAMP

UP

TELEDATA

S109

347' - 4" TSS

OFFICE 7

S103J

OFFICE 6

S103H

STORAGE

S103A

CUSTODIAL

S111

STAIR F

F

ADMINISTRATION

S103

ELEC. CLOSET

S103B

STORAGE

S103I

A302

1

A304

1

SEE KITCHEN DRAWINGSQF101 - QF106

SEE LANDSCAPE ANDCIVIL DRAWINGS FOR

SITE ELEMENTS

A201D

1

123 SF

CORRIDOR

S121

OFFICE

R105

OFFICE

R104

OFFICE

R103

OPEN OFFICE

R102

STORAGE

R108

PACKAGE

R100A

RESTROOM

R100C

RESTROOM

R100D

AMENITY SPACE

R100B

ELEC

R106

ELECTRICAL

S107B

MAIL

R110

CORRIDOR

R109

ELEV LOBBY

R150

A303

1

EXTENTS OF CANOPY ABOVE

SEE KITCHEN DRAWINGSQF101 - QF106

55.9

3°

205' - 0

1/8"

STAIR E

E

STAIR D

D

INTAKE

STAIR B

B

ELEV 5

E5

FDC

FDC

RAMP, SEE LANDSCAPEDRAWINGS FOR DETAILS

PROPERTY LINE

42" x 24" LOCKABLEACCESS HATCH.TYPICAL AT EACHLADDER

ACCESS HATCH

EXHAUST AREA WELL

INTAKE AREA WELL

EXHAUST AREA WELL

EGRESS SIDEWALK, REFER TOCIVIL AND LANDSCAPE

BIKE STORAGE RACKS,SEE LANDSCAPEDRAWINGS

TRANSFORMER VAULTBELOW,SEE CIVIL &MEP DRAWINGS

TRANSFORMERVAULT BELOW, SEECIVIL & MEPDRAWINGS

BIKE PATH REST AREA,REFER TO LANDSCAPE

348' - 6" TSS

349' - 0" TSS

347' - 0" TSS

344' - 0" TSS

347' - 0" TSS

340' - 6" TSS

EXTENTS OF GARAGE BELOW

EXTENT OF EXISTINGGARAGE BELOW

?J.8

?K.8

START OF CURVE

REFER TO A201C FOR DIMENSIONS

REFER TO A201A FOR DIMENSIONS

?26?24.8

?I.8

EXTENTS OFFLOOR ABOVE

349' - 0" TSS

?I.4

A3011

?B.3

?R.1

?30.2

ACCESS HATCH

SCALE

DRAWING NUMBER

DRAWING TITLE

DATE

PROJECT NUMBER

REVISIONS

KEY PLAN

© 1995-2018 KISHIMOTO

.GORDON.DALAYA PC expressly reserves its common law copyright and other




SEAL & SIGNATURE

CONSULTANT

IFC PROGRESS PRINT

PHASE I

NO DATE DESCRIPTION

ISSUE

DATE DESCRIPTION







B C

A


DPS STAMP

MONTGO

MERY CO

UNTY BATCH STAMP




8/17/2018 7:32:22 PM

1/16" = 1'-0"


A201

PLAZA LEVEL FLOOR PLAN- OVERALL

08.17.2018

16111 + 17040

ELIZABETH SQUARE

1315 APPLE AVENUE


HOC

SCALE: 1/16" = 1'-0"A201

1 PLAZA LEVEL FLOOR PLAN - OVERALL

2

2

1 11.20.17 GMP BID ADDENDUM #1


2

SCRRAC MAINENTRY LEVEL

ELIZABETH HOUSEMAIN ENTRANCE,LOBBY ANDAMENITIES

UP

UP

UP

UP

UP

UP

HB

1

A410

1

A409

1

A407

1

A408

1

A406

1

A405

PROPERTY LINE

?A

?B

?B.5

?D

?E

?E.5

?F

?G

?G.9

?H

?J

?K

?L

?M

?N

?P

?Q

?R

?S

?T

?A.3

?S.3

?A.1

?A.5

?B.1

?D.1

?F.7

?2

?4

?10

?1 ?3?5 ?7 ?11 ?19.2 ?21.2 ?23.2 ?25.2 ?27.2 ?29.213?9? 15? 17?

?A.2

?B.2

?D.2

?E.2

?F.2

?G.2

?13.1

?J.4

?K.4

?L.4

?M.4

?N.4

?P.4

?Q.4

?18.4

?17.4

?19.1?15.1

?2.3

?31.2

?20.8

?6

FITNESS

S205

STORAGE

S204

TELE DATA RM

S207

372' - 6" TSS

372' - 6" TSS

GYMNASIUM

S217

OPEN TO BELOW

PROPERTY LINE

ELEV 3

E3

STAIR A

A

ELEV 4

E4

ELEV 5

E5

STAIR D

D

ELEV 2

E2

STAIR C

C

MECHANICAL

S209

ELECTRICAL

S210

SERVICE ELEV LOBBY

S208

WOMEN'S LOCKERS

S212A

MEN'S RESTROOM

S213

CUSTODIAL

S215

FSAE LOBBY

R250

CORRIDOR

S200


1/ A202C

1/ A202A1/ A

202B

1/ A202A

1/ A202C

1/ A202B

ELEV LOBBY

S201

FAMILY PLAY AREA

S216

372' - 6" TSS

ELEV 1

E1

FAMILY RESTROOM

S214

GYMNASIUM PRE-FUNCTION SPACE

STORAGE

S202

FAMILY RESTROOM

S211

HOLY CROSS

ELECTRICAL

S206

STAIR F

F

A302

1

A304

1

CANOPY BELOW

EXERCISE STUDIO

S203

372' - 6" TSS

372' - 3 5/8" TSS

389 SF

MEN'S LOCKERS

S213A

447 SF

WOMEN'S RESTROOM

S212

A303

1

205' - 0 5/8"

SEE HOLY CROSS DRAWINGS

95.00°

116' - 3

1/2"

?J.8

?K.8


START OF CURVE

?I.8

GYMNASIUM

STORAGE

S218

STAIR E

E

61' - 8 3/8"

?I.4

A3011

?B.3

?R.1

?30.2

SCALE

DRAWING NUMBER

DRAWING TITLE

DATE

PROJECT NUMBER

REVISIONS

KEY PLAN





SEAL & SIGNATURE

CONSULTANT

IFC PROGRESS PRINT

PHASE I

NO DATE DESCRIPTION

ISSUE

DATE DESCRIPTION







B C

A


DPS STAMP

MONTGO

MERY CO

UNTY BATCH STAMP




8/17/2018 7:33:15 PM

1/16" = 1'-0"


A202

2ND LEVEL FLOOR PLAN -OVERALL

08.17.2018

16111 + 17040

ELIZABETH SQUARE

1315 APPLE AVENUE


HOC

SCALE: 1/16" = 1'-0"A202

1 SECOND LEVEL FLOOR PLAN - OVERALL

1


HOLY CROSSSENIOR CLINIC(ELIZABETH HOUSETENANT)

SCRRAC FITNESSLEVEL


UP

UP

UP

UP

HB

HB

HB

1

A410

1

A409

1

A407

1

A408

1

A406

1

A405

?A

?B

?B.5

?D

?E

?E.5

?F

?G

?G.9

?H

?J

?K

?L

?M

?N

?P

?Q

?R

?S

?T

?A.3

?S.3

?A.1

?A.5

?B.1

?D.1

?F.7

?2

?4

?10

?1

?3

?5

?7 ?11 ?19.2 ?21.2 ?23.2 ?25.2 ?27.2 ?29.213?9? 15? 17?

?A.2

?B.2

?D.2

?E.2

?F.2

?G.2

?13.1

?J.4

?K.4

?L.4

?M.4

?N.4

?P.4

?Q.4

?18.4

?17.4

?19.1?15.1

?2.3

?31.2

?20.8

?6

ART ROOM

S309

STORAGE

S311

ACTIVITY ROOM #2

S312

ELEC RM

S323

GYM MECHANICAL

S319

GAME ROOM

S308

TELEDATA

S317

WOMENS RESTROOM

S321

MENS RESTROOM

S322

OPEN TO BELOW

OPEN TOBELOW

OPEN TOBELOW

388' - 6" TSS

GREEN ROOF

GREEN ROOF

ELEV 3

E3

GYMNASIUM

S217

FSAE LOBBY

R350

STAIR A

A

ELEV 4

E4

ELEV 5

E5

STAIR D

D

ELEV 2

E2

STAIR C

C

ELEV LOBBY

S301

SERVICE ELEV LOBBY

S318

388' - 6" TSS



1/ A203C

1/ A203A1/ A

203B

1/ A203

A

1/ A203C

1/ A203B

ELEV 1

E1

GLASS PARAPET WITH BACKUP WALL

ACCESS TO ROOF

CONFERENCE ROOM

S302

STORAGE

S305

ELEV. CONTROL

ROOM

S327

CONFERENCE ROOM

S303

TELE DATA

S326

ACTIVITY ROOM #3

S304

STORAGE

S316

COMMUNITY LOUNGE

S313

CORRIDOR

S300

STORAGE

S324

CUSTODIAL

S320

ELECTRICAL

S314

A302

1

A304

1

ROOF PAVERS,MISC 03

STAIR B

B

CORRIDOR

S300

A303

1

205' - 0

5/8"

116' - 3

1/2"

118' - 2

1/4"

?J.8

?K.8

START OF CURVE

A3011

?B.3

?R.1

?30.2

SCALE

DRAWING NUMBER

DRAWING TITLE

DATE

PROJECT NUMBER

REVISIONS

KEY PLAN





SEAL & SIGNATURE

CONSULTANT

IFC PROGRESS PRINT

PHASE I

NO DATE DESCRIPTION

ISSUE

DATE DESCRIPTION







B C

A


DPS STAMP

MONTGO

MERY CO

UNTY BATCH STAMP




8/17/2018 7:34:01 PM

1/16" = 1'-0"


A203

3RD LEVEL FLOOR PLAN -OVERALL

08.17.2018

16111 + 17040

ELIZ

AB

ETH

SQ

UA

RE

1315 APPLE AVENUE


HOC

SCALE: 1/16" = 1'-0"A203

1 3RD LEVEL FLOOR PLAN - OVERALL

1



SCRRACCOMMUNITYACTIVITY LEVEL

NFWH

NF

WH

PROPERTY LINE

BALCONY


BALCONY

CORRIDOR

R400A

GREENROOF

(SEE CIVIL)

OCCURS AT LEVELS 4AND 5 ONLY

PROPERTY LINE

PROPERTY LINE

UNIT C4

U407

1 BED

MKT

UNIT C4

U408

1 BED

MKT

UNIT C5-UFAS

U409

1 BED

MKT

ELEV LOBBY

R460

UNIT C3

U411

1 BED

WFHU

UNIT C3

U412

1 BED

WFHU

UNIT C3

U413

1 BED

AFF

UNIT C3

U414

1 BED

MPDU

UNIT C3

U415

1 BED

MPDU

UNIT C2-UD

U401

1 BED

AFF

UNIT C2-UD

U402

1 BED

AFF

UNIT C1-UFAS/VHI

U405

1 BED

WFHU

UNIT C6

U404

1 BED

MPDU

UNIT B1

U406

JR 1 BED

MKT

UNIT D1

U416

1 BED +DENMKT

UNIT D1

U417

1 BED +DENMKT

UNIT B2

U418

JR 1 BED

AFF

UNIT B2

U419

JR 1 BED

MPDU

UNIT B2

U420

JR 1 BED

MPDU

UNIT B2

U421

JR 1 BED

WFHU

UNIT B4

U422

JR 1 BED

MKT

UNIT B4

U423

JR 1 BED

MKT

UNIT C6

U403

1 BED

MPDU

CORRIDOR

R400

UNIT B4

U424

JR 1 BED

MKT

TELE DATA RM

R454

ELEC ROOM

R453

FSAE LOBBY

R450

CORRIDOR

R400

ELEC ROOM

R451

STORAGE

R456

TELE/DATA RM

R452

STAIR A

A

ELEV 5

E5

STAIR C

C

UNIT E1-UFAS/VHI

U410

2 BED

MKT

TRASH ROOM

R455

ELEV 3

E3

ELEV 4

E4

CANOPY BELOW

ROOF BELOW

ROOF BELOW


407' - 2 1/2"

405' - 8 3/4"


CLOSET

R457

1

A407

1

A408

1

A406

1

A409

1

A410

A304

1

A3011

3031

A302

1

STAIR B

B

A

B

B.5

D

E

E.5

F

G

G.9

H

J

K

L

M

N

P

Q

S

T

A.3

S.3

A.1

A.5

B.1

D.1

F.7

2

4

4

10

1 3

3

5 7 11 19.2 21.2 23.2 25.2 27.2 29.2

A.2

B.2

C.2

D.2

E.2

13.1

13.1

J.4

K.4

L.4

N.4

19.115.19 13 15 17

C

1

A410

52' - 9

1/2"

157' - 1

1/4"

53' - 10 1/8"

106' - 1

"

405' - 3 1/4"

405' - 8"

407' - 8"

390' - 8 1/2"

390' - 6"

405' - 8"

R = 10' - 0

"

124' - 6

7/8"

19' - 1

3/4"

105' - 0

1/2"

61' - 0 1

/2"

31' - 1

1/2"

SCUPPERS AND DOWNSPOTS EVERY 32'.REFER TO DETAIL 4/A517 FOR INFO.

6

2.3

R.1

B.3

30.2

SCALE

DRAWING NUMBER

DRAWING TITLE

DATE

PROJECT NUMBER

REVISIONS

KEY PLAN

© 1995-2018 KISHIM

OTO

.GORDON.DALA

YA PC expressly reserves its common la

w copyright and other

property rights in

these plans. These plans are not to be reporduced, change, or copied in w

hole or in

part in any form


obtaining the exp

ress w

ritten perm

ission and consent of KISHIM

OTO.G

ORDON.DALA

YA PC

SEAL & SIGNATURE

CONSULTANT

IFC PROGRESS PRINT

PHASE I

NO DATE DESCRIPTION

ISSUE

DATE DESCRIPTION







B C

A


DPS STAMP

MONTGO

MERY CO

UNTY BATCH STAMP




8/17/2018 6:26:16 PM

1/16" = 1'-0"

C:\Revit_Working\2016\ESquare_A_EH3_Central_v16_rpantschyschak.rvt

A204

4TH LEVEL FLOOR PLAN -OVERALL

05.15.2018

16111 + 17040

ELIZABETH SQUARE

1315 APPLE AVENUE


HOC

SCALE: 1/16" = 1'-0"

FOURTH LEVEL FLOOR PLAN - OVERALL1

1


ELIZABETH HOUSERESIDENTIAL LEVEL

52.8633 sf

UNIT C4

U607

1 BED

MKT

UNIT C4

U608

1 BED

MKT

UNIT C5-UFAS

U609

1 BED

MKT

ELEV LOBBY

R660

UNIT C3

U611

1 BED

AFF

UNIT C3

U612

1 BED

WFHU

UNIT C3

U613

1 BED

AFFUNIT C3

U614

1 BED

MPDU

UNIT C3

U615

1 BED

MPDU

UNIT C2-UD

U601

1 BED

AFF

UNIT C2-UD

U602

1 BED

AFF

UNIT C1-UFAS/VHI

U605

1 BED

AFF

UNIT C6

U604

1 BED

MKT

UNIT B1

U606

JR 1 BED

MKT

UNIT D1

U616

1 BED +DENMKT

UNIT D1

U617

1 BED +DENMKT

UNIT B2

U618

JR 1 BED

AFF

UNIT B2

U619

JR 1 BED

MPDU

UNIT B2

U620

JR 1 BED

MPDU

UNIT B2

U621

JR 1 BED

WFHU

UNIT B4

U622

JR 1 BED

MKT

UNIT B4

U623

JR 1 BED

MKT

UNIT B4

U624

JR 1 BED

MKT

UNIT C6

U603

1 BED

MKT

CORRIDOR

R600

FSAE LOBBY

R650

ELEC ROOM

R651

TELE DATA RM

R654

ELEC ROOM

R653

UNIT E1

U610

2 BED

MKT

PROPERTY LINE

BALCONY

BALCONY


BALCONY

ELEV 5

E5

TRASH ROOM

R655

STORAGE

R656

ELEV 4

E4

ELEV 3

E3

CLOSET

R657

A304

1

A301

1

3031

A302

1

STAIR B

B

STAIR A

A

A

B

B.5

D

E

E.5

F

G

G.9

H

J

K

L

M

N

P

Q

S T

A.3

S.3

A.1

A.5

B.1

D.1

F.7

2

4

4

10

1 3

3

5 7 1113.1

13.1

J.4

K.4

L.4

N.4

19.115.19 13 15 17

C

31' - 1

1/2"

TELE/DATA RM

R652

CORRIDOR

R600

53' - 10 1/8"

STAIR C

C

1

A407

1

A408

1

A406

1

A409

1

A410


1

A410

52' - 9

1/2"

74' - 2 1/8" 5' - 0" 21' - 4 3/4"

106' - 1

"

ROOF BELOW

405' - 8 3/4"

124' - 2

1/8"

61' - 0 1

/2"

15' - 7 1

/8"

12' - 1 1/2"

156' - 1

0 3/4"

124' - 6

7/8"

UNIT E1-UFASAT LEVEL 5

6

2.3

R.1

B.3

SCALE

DRAWING NUMBER

DRAWING TITLE

DATE

PROJECT NUMBER

REVISIONS

KEY PLAN

© 1995-2018 KISHIM

OTO

.GORDON.DALA



property rights in


hole or in

part in any form


obtaining the exp

ress w

ritten perm


OTO.G

ORDON.DALA

YA PC

SEAL & SIGNATURE

CONSULTANT

IFC PROGRESS PRINT

PHASE I

NO DATE DESCRIPTION

ISSUE

DATE DESCRIPTION







B C

A


DPS STAMP

MONTGO

MERY CO

UNTY BATCH STAMP




8/17/2018 6:27:58 PM

1/16" = 1'-0"


A205

5TH - 11TH FLOOR PLAN -OVERALL

05.15.2018

16111 + 17040

ELIZABETH SQUARE

1315 APPLE AVENUE


HOC

SCALE: 1/16" = 1'-0"A205

1 5TH - 11TH FLOOR PLAN - OVERALL


NFWH

NF

WH

NF

WH

480' - 8"

PROPERTY LINE


RAIN GARDEN,SEE CIVIL

BALCONY

UNIT C1

U1207

I BED

MPDU

UNIT C7

U1208

I BED

MKT

ELEV LOBBY

R1260

UNIT C3

U1209

I BED

AFF

UNIT C3

U1210

I BED

WFHU

UNIT C3

U1211

I BED

AFF

UNIT C3

U1212

I BED

WFHU

UNIT C3

U1213

I BED

MPDU

UNIT B3

U1215

JR 1 BED

MKT

UNIT C2-UD

U1201

I BED

MKT

UNIT C2-UFAS

U1202

I BED

MKT

UNIT C6

U1203

I BED

MKT

UNIT C6

U1204

I BED

MPDU

UNIT C1-UFAS/VHI

U1205

1 BED

AFF

UNIT B1

U1206

JR 1 BED

MKT

TRASH ROOM

R1255

484' - 2" TOW

FSAE LOBBY

R1250

TELE DATA RM

R1254

ELEC ROOM

R1253


480' - 8"

PROPERTY LINE

PROPERTY LINE

STAIR A

A

ELEV 3

E3

ELEV 4

E4

CANOPY ABOVE

ELEV 5

E5

481' - 0 1/2"

482' - 2"

CLOSET

R1257

1

A407

1

A408

1

A406

1

A409

1

A410

A304

1

A301

1

3031

A302

1

481' - 6" TOW

A

B

B.5

D

E

E.5

F

G

G.9

H

J

K

L

M

N

P

Q

ST

A.3

S.3

A.1

A.5

B.1

D.1

F.7

2

4

4

10

1 3

3

5 7 1113.1

13.1

J.4

K.4

L.4

N.4

19.115.19 13 15 17

C

ROOF AMENITY DECK

R1201


STAIR B

B

1

A410

UNIT B3

U1214

JR 1 BED

MPDU

52' - 6" 28' - 4 3/4" 5' - 5 3/4" 20' - 10 7/8"

157' - 1

1/4"

27' - 8 1/8"

33' - 10 3/8"

33' - 7 5/8"

60' - 4

1/4"

68' - 2 7

/8"

60' - 11

1/4"

105' - 1

1 1/4"

43' - 3

5/8"

134' - 2

7/8"

25' - 11 1/8"

STAIR C

C

6

2.3

R.1

B.3

SCALE

DRAWING NUMBER

DRAWING TITLE

DATE

PROJECT NUMBER

REVISIONS

KEY PLAN

© 1995-2018 KISHIM

OTO

.GORDON.DALA



property rights in


hole or in

part in any form


obtaining the exp

ress w

ritten perm


OTO.G

ORDON.DALA

YA PC

SEAL & SIGNATURE

CONSULTANT

IFC PROGRESS PRINT

PHASE I

NO DATE DESCRIPTION

ISSUE

DATE DESCRIPTION







B C

A


DPS STAMP

MONTGO

MERY CO

UNTY BATCH STAMP




8/17/2018 6:29:03 PM

1/16" = 1'-0"


A212

12TH LEVEL FLOOR PLAN -OVERALL

05.15.2018

16111 + 17040

ELIZABETH SQUARE

1315 APPLE AVENUE


HOC

SCALE: 1/16" = 1'-0"A212

1 12TH LEVEL FLOOR PLAN - OVERALL

1



PROPERTY LINE

BALCONY

STAIR ROOFBELOW

ROOF BELOW

ROOF BELOW

UNIT C1

U1307

I BED

MPDU

UNIT C7

U1308

I BED

MKT

ELEV LOBBY

R1360

UNIT C3

U1309

I BED

AFF

UNIT C3

U1310

I BED

WFHU

UNIT C3

U1311

I BED

AFF

UNIT C3

U1312

I BED

WFHU

UNIT C3

U1313

I BED

MPDU

UNIT B3

U1314

JR 1 BED

AFF

UNIT B3

U1315

JR 1 BED

MKT

UNIT C2-UD

U1301

I BED

MKT

UNIT C2-UFAS

U1302

I BED

MKT

UNIT C6

U1303

I BED

MKT

UNIT C6

U1304

I BED

MKT

UNIT C1-UFAS/VHI

U1305

1 BED

MKT

TRASH ROOM

R1355

ELEC ROOM

R1353

TELE DATA RM

R1354

EXISTING ALEXANDERHOUSE

UNIT B1

U1306

JR 1 BED

MKT

PROPERTY LINE

PROPERTY LINE

FSAE LOBBY

R1350

STAIR A

A

ELEV 4

E4

ELEV 3

E3

ELEV 5

E5

CANOPYBELOW

CLOSET

R1357

STAIR B

B

1

A407

1

A408

1

A406

1

A409

1

A410

A304

1

A301

1

3031

A302

1

A

B

B.5

D

E

E.5

F

G

G.9

H

J

K

L

M

N

P

Q

S T

A.3

S.3

A.1

A.5

B.1

D.1

F.7

2

4

4

10

1 3

3

5 7 1113.1

13.1

J.4

K.4

L.4

N.4

19.115.19 13 15 17

C


1

A410

15

7' - 1

1/4

"

5' - 2

1/2

"

25

' - 11

1/2

"

32' - 10 1/2"

32' - 5 1/4"

13

' - 10

1/4

"6

' - 3"

14

9' - 2

7/8

"

21' - 4 3/4"

135

' - 5 5

/8"

60' - 7 1

/2"

28' - 2

7/8"

34' - 1

0 5/8"

481' - 0 1/2"

480' - 10 1/2"

28' - 4 1/8" 5' - 0"

54' - 8 7/8"

6

2.3

R.1

B.3

SCALE

DRAWING NUMBER

DRAWING TITLE

DATE

PROJECT NUMBER

REVISIONS

KEY PLAN

© 1

99

5-2

01

8 K

ISH

IMO

TO.G

OR

DO

N.D

ALA

YA

PC

ex

pre

ssly

re

serv

es

its

co

mm

on

law

co

py

rig

ht

an

d o

the

rp

rop

ert

y r

igh

ts in

th

ese

pla

ns.

Th

ese

pla

ns

are

no

t to

be

re

po

rdu

ce

d,

ch

an

ge

, o

r c

op

ied

in

wh

ole

or

inp

art

in a

ny

fo

rm o

r m

an

ne

r w

ha

tso

ev

er,

no

r a

re t

he

y t

o b

e a

ssig

ne

d t

o a

ny

th

ird

pa

rty

, w

ith

ou

t fi

rst

ob

tain

ing

th

e e

xpre

ss w

ritt

en

pe

rmis

sio

n a

nd

co

nse

nt

of

KIS

HIM

OT

O.G

OR

DO

N.D

ALA

YA

PC

SEAL & SIGNATURE

CONSULTANT

IFC

PR

OG

RE

SS

PR

INT

PH

AS

E I

NO DATE DESCRIPTION

ISSUE

DATE DESCRIPTION







B C

A


DPS STAMP

MONTGO

MERY CO

UNTY BATCH STAMP




8/17/2018 6:29:42 PM

1/16" = 1'-0"

C:\

Re

vit

_W

ork

ing

\2

01

6\

ES

qu

are

_A

_E

H3

_C

en

tra

l_v

16

_rp

an

tsc

hy

sch

ak

.rv

t

A213

13TH-16TH FLOOR PLAN -OVERALL

05.15.2018

16111 + 17040

ELIZABETH SQ

UARE

13

15

AP

PLE

AV

EN

UE

SIL

VE

R S

PR

ING

, M

D 2

09

10

HO

C

SCALE: 1/16" = 1'-0"A213

1 13TH-16TH FLOOR PLAN - OVERALL


NF

WH

NFWH

HB

528' - 10 1/2"

528' - 10 1/2"

PROPERTY LINE

ELEV ACCESS

R1760

ROOF BELOW

ROOFBELOW

MECHANICAL

PENTHOUSE

R1701

EXISTING ALEXANDERHOUSE


PROPERTY LINE

PROPERTY LINE

528' - 10 1/2"

EQUIPMENTYARDELEV CONTROL RM

R1702

EQUIPMENT YARD(SEE MEP)

532' - 0" TOW

EXISTING ELIZABETHHOUSE

1

A407

1

A408

1

A406

1

A409

1

A410

STAIR A

A

ELEV 5

E5

ELEVATOROVERRUN

STAIR B

B

A304

1

A301

1

3031

A302

1

A

B

B.5

D

E

E.5

F

G

G.9

H

J

K

L

M

N

P

Q

S

T

A.3

S.3

A.1

A.5

B.1

D.1

F.7

2

4

4

10

13

3

57 1113.1

13.1

J.4

K.4

L.4

19.115.19 13 15 17

C

93' - 1

"

ELEV 3

E3

ELEV 4

E4

1

A410

481' - 0 1/2"

480' - 10 1/2"

61' - 7 1/8"

65' - 3 5

/8"

210' - 6

1/2"

1' - 6 7/8"

1' - 1

7/8"

40' - 1

"

1' - 6

3/4"

189' - 9

1/2"


STAIR ROOFBELOW

ELEVATOR CONTROL

ROOM

R1703

532' - 0"

528' - 6"

528' - 2 1/2"

528' - 6"

528' - 6"

6

2.3

R.1

B.3

SCALE

DRAWING NUMBER

DRAWING TITLE

DATE

PROJECT NUMBER

REVISIONS

KEY PLAN

© 1995-2018 KISHIM

OTO

.GORDON.DALA



property rights in


hole or in

part in any form


obtaining the exp

ress w

ritten perm


OTO.G

ORDON.DALA

YA PC

SEAL & SIGNATURE

CONSULTANT

IFC PROGRESS PRINT

PHASE I

NO DATE DESCRIPTION

ISSUE

DATE DESCRIPTION







B C

A


DPS STAMP

MONTGO

MERY CO

UNTY BATCH STAMP




8/17/2018 6:30:20 PM

1/16" = 1'-0"


A217

LOWER ROOF LEVEL PLAN- OVERALL

05.15.2018

16111 + 17040

ELIZABETH SQUARE

1315 APPLE AVENUE


HOC

SCALE: 1/16" = 1'-0"A217

1 ROOF LEVEL PLAN - OVERALL

1

1 1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1


ELIZABETH HOUSE(PRIMARY TENANT)MECHANICAL ROOMAND SERVICE CORE

elizabeth square, phase 1 silver spring, maryland

Documents

Transcript of elizabeth square, phase 1 silver spring, maryland